mm 




raw 

HP 



Moral 

■Hlr 



ii»m 



■I 



nnfflnni 

Hi 
alls Wiu HN 

Hill llffl 



H 



■mi 

IlMSHl Hill 



hh 



UIUXH»ffl 



II H 

HHI HnHHBi 
QQ laH BBflWlB WWW 

Hi B1Ib8 

91 H 

Rug MaaWBnw ifl IH 









nniHH 



11111 



rami 



















L* «*. 



**""V" >.«!« 



' \> V '«- 



V «* « 









.<V S . ' // CV V _ .A 



OC 



'. <* & * c ^c „c, 






-0> < 



■ « A O. 



' <* A X 






OCT 



■ .£ O, 



o o N 
,4 ** 



V 



«■' 



%-. 






aa 



•v N - 






! O . N 



- . ^ 



V 5 ^ 






>,. ^ 



e>- ^ v * <r^ 









,0o 






^ V* 



, ^ .0" 



'V* 



o v s s V U c 



■V- 



00 



^ 






V * 




vx *i ° ^ *N 



*° r 



.0 O, 






>V 



- = A H ■% 







,0o. 



cy 












* C <a 






^ t *0 o X 



■^ tf 



\ -at. 




" / _ / 






^ ^ * 



V 









.-tf 






, -* 



" 



ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES 



CONNECTED WITH THE 



ART OF WAR, 



INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CARE OF MINOR ORGANIZA- 
TIONS IN TIME OF PEACE OR WAR. 



DESIGNED FOR THE USE OF MILITARY COLLEGES, NATIONS 
GUARDSMEN AND VOLUNTEERS. 



BY 

WILLIAM R. HAMILTON M. S. 

First Lieutenant 5th Artillery. 



WASHINGTON : 
J. H. SOULE & CO. 

1887. 



U\ 



Entered according to Act of Congress in the Year 1887, by 

WILLIAM R. HAMILTON, 

In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D. C. 



TO 

GENERAL RICHARD COULTER DRUM, 

Adjutant General of the United States Army, 

I DEDICATE THIS WORK, 

As a Slight Tribute of the Admiration and Esteem in which he is held by the young Officers 
of the Army, and the National Guard of the Several States; 

■WHO, SINCE HE HAS BEEN AT THE HEAD OF THE MOST RESPONSIBLE BUREAU 

OF THE 

WAR DEPARTMENT, 
HAS PROVED HIMSELF THEIR EARNEST FRIEND, 

BY HIS PATRIOTIC ENDEAVOB 

To Infuse a Better and More General Military Education 
AMONG THE YOUTH OF THE NATION. 

W. R. Hamilton, 

1st Lieutenant 5th Artillery. 



PREFACE. 



THE object of this work is to present in compact shape, and 
plain and untechnical language, the matter that military- 
students are obliged, otherwise, to study and search through 
many volumes for. The National Guard of the United States 
is anxious to know all it can reasonably learn of military 
matters, beyond the elementary drills and tactics, but the 
great array of books and authorities on different subjects is so 
appalling, that it cannot afford the time or money to learn 
from them. 

This work is only a compilation ; the author claims for it 
nothing original except the manner of presenting the various 
subjects so that the untechnical reader may understand and 
learn the elementary principles of the greatest of all sciences. 
In presenting the work, he gladly avails himself of the op- 
portunity to acknowledge the assistance he has had, and 
return thanks accordingly. 

To Major Generals Howard, Schofield, Pope, Generals Mc- 
Cook and Morrow, U. S. Army, who took the trouble to ex- 
amine the work and recommend it, to Major M. P. Miller, 5th 
Artillery, and late Senior Instructor of Tactics of the U. S. 
Military Academy, for valuable assistance in the chapter on 
the company and battalion; to Lieut. S. E. Allen, late In- 
spector of Rifle Practice, Division of the Atlantic, for assis- 
tance in the chapter on Rifle and Carbine Practice ; to Lieut. 
H. C. Carbaugh, for valuable assistance in the chapter on 
Military Law and Courts-Martial; to Capts. Chester, 3d 
Artillery, and Calef, 2d Artillery, and Lieut. L. Y. V. Ken- 
non, 6th Infantry, for the use of their valuable works on Mil- 
itary Roads and Bridges, Machine Guns, and Guards and 
Guard Duty, respectively ; and to many others. 

(v) 



VI PREFACE. 

The work was first undertaken in conjunction with Cap- 
tain W. H. Powell, 4th Infantry ; but he withdrawing, every 
chapter has been revised and corrected by competent 
authority, until it is now ready to stand that only thorough 
test — Public Opinion. 

Governor s Island, N. Y., Jan. 10, 1887. 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER I. page 
Composition of an Army — Organization of Different Subdivisions 
— Line and Staff — U. S. Military Academy — State Military Col- 
leges 9 

CHAPTER II. 
The Bureaus of the War Department 31 

CHAPTER III. 
The Company, Troop, and Battery — Duties of the Captain — First 
Lieutenant — Second Lieutenant — First Sergeant — Sergeants — 
Corporals — Company Clerk — Privates and Recruits — Model 
Forms of all Papers Connected with the Company — The Battal- 
ion and Regiment — Flags, Colors, Standards, and Guidons — 
Arms of the United States 41 

CHAPTER IV. 
The Roster or Details for Service — Rules Governing — Forms of 
Rosters 161 

CHAPTER V. 

Guard Duty — Guard Mounting — Duties of Sentinels — Officers of 
the Guard and Day — General Instructions — Grand Guard 
Mounting — Pickets and Outposts — Police and Provost Guards . 167 

CHAPTER VI. 
Ordnance and Gunnery — Small Arms — Breech Loading and Re- 
peating Arms — Field, Siege, and Sea-Coast Cannon — Artillery 
Carriages — Service of Revolving Cannon and Machine Guns — 
Projectiles and Fuses, Gunpowder, Gun Cotton and Dynamite 
— How to Handle and Use — Care and Preservation of Arms 

and Ammunition 243 

(vii) 



v iii CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER VII. page 

Target Practice— Rifle and Carbine Firing— Skirmish Firing . . 317 
CHAPTER VIII. 

Military Signaling ■ 3 2 9 

CHAPTER IX. 
Courts-Martial— Military Law— Military Government— Liability 
of Military Officers to Civil Law— Conflict of Military and Civil 

Law — Articles of War 339 

CHAPTER X. 
Camp and Garrison Calls— Official Correspondence— Orders— Re- 
ports— Recruiting Service— Discharge Papers— Leaves of Ab- 
sence and Furloughs— Boards of Survey— Councils of Adminis- 
tration— Inspections— Certificates of Merit 3 8 3 

CHAPTER XL 
Reconnoissances in Time of Peace and War-Itineraries .... 413 

CHAPTER XII. 
Marches and Camps in Time of Peace and War 421 

CHAPTER XIII. 

Military Roads and Bridges— Fords— Fences 447 

CHAPTER XIV. 
Military Engineering— General Definitions— Hasty Fortifications 
—Temporary Field Fortification— Revetments— Obstacles— At- 
tack and Defense of Field Fortifications— Demolition .... 469 
CHAPTER XV. 
Art of War— General Definitions— Battles and Combats— Attack 

and Defense of Positions 49 * 

CHAPTER XVI. 
International Law as Applied to the Army— International Courte- 
sies—Courtesy in the Army— Customs of the Service 5°* 



CHAPTER I. 



COMPOSITION OF AN ARMY. 

UNITED STATES MILITARY ACADEMY 

MILITARY COLLEGES. 



COMPOSITION OF AN ARMY. 

AN Army is,a large body of men, organized, armed and 
disciplined under military methods and rules, for the 
protection of a Government against its enemies, enforcing 
its laws at home, and its demands abroad — in short, for 
maintaining its national sovereignty and life. 

Military Science is the science of organizing, arming, and 
maintaining armies. 

The Art of War consists in handling and directing an 
army so as to successfully accomplish whatever its com- 
manders may undertake. 

An army is not merely a large body of men armed and 
equipped with military weapons. It must be so constituted 
that all in it act for the attainment of a common object, 
and at the same time be subservient to a single will — that 
of its commander. A mob may be armed and equipped 
with military weapons, but its force is lost in its lack of 
organization and discipline. 

In all armies there are two general classes of men, viz : 
First, those who exercise a certain authority over others, by 
virtue of a commission issued to them by the Government. 
They are termed Officers. Second, those who exercise no 
authority except such as is given them by an immediate 
commissioned officer, but who execute the orders of the 
officers. They are called in general Privates or Soldiers. 
If they have given them, by proper officers, the right to 
exercise a limited authority, they are called non-commissioned 
officers. Their authority is held by virtue of a Warrant. In 
general all composing an army are Soldiers, but the term 
Officers is never applied to any but those who hold a 
commission, and the term Private is never applied to the 
non-commissioned officer, while the term Soldier is usually 
applied only to privates. 

The officer holds his position at the discretion of the 
Government for life, arid in the U. S. Army cannot, in 
time of peace, be deprived of his commission except by 

en) 



12 ART OF WAR. 

act of Congress; or by sentence of a General Court Martial, 
approved by the President of the United States. 

The private and the non-commissioned officer are only 
such for a limited number of years. 

There are two grand divisions of officers and soldiers 
alike, in all armies : First, those who do the active work, 
such as marching, fighting and campaigning, and Second, 
those who clothe, feed, look after the health, the arms, the 
transportation — in short, the entire well-being of the army. 
The first of these is termed the Line, and the second the 
Staff. 

The composition of armies and their numbers is estab- 
lished by governments, and regulated by the necessities in 
time of peace or war. This composition should be of such 
a nature, however, that the army may be increased from 
its peace organization to a strength suitable for war. This 
is termed mobilization. 

The line of the' army is divided into three general classes, 
viz : Artillery, Cavalry and Infantry. They are termed 
"arms of service." 

The Infantry is the arm of service that marches and 
fights on foot. It forms the greatest part of all armies. 

The Cavalry is the arm of service that fights and marches 
on horseback, and forms a very important factor in the 
composition of all armies. It is used for scouting, making 
reconnoissances, searching for and harassing the enemy, 
and m the event of general engagements, is employed in 
protecting the flanks and rear of the army engaged, as well 
as in pursuing a retreating foe. 

The Artillery is the arm of service that fights and ma- 
nceuvers with cannon, — in the forts with stationary guns ; 
and in the field with guns mounted on light carriages, at- 
tached to what are called limbers, to enable them to be 
drawn by horses. 

The Engineers march on foot, and is that arm of service 
that makes and prepares the road over which an army 
marches, builds bridges, tears down houses, walls, etc., 
marks out the lines for temporary earthworks ; in short 
clears the way for the army to march, as well as prepares 



COMPOSITION OF AN ARMY. 1 3 

for its defence ; this branch of the service has been de- 
cided to belong to the staff departments. 

For the purpose of directing all the movements of an 
army and obtaining a perfect command over it, an army is 
sub-divided into a number of minor classes or sub-divisions. 
These sub-divisions vary in strength according as they are 
maintained on a peace or a war footing. 

The smallest constant fundamental unit in all armies is 
called the Company. 

The company consists of a given number of privates and 
non-commissioned officers, one commissioned officer who 
commands it and is termed the Captain, and two, three or 
four commissioned officers termed Lieutenants, who assist 
the captain in the discharge of his duties. The non-com- 
missioned officers consist of the First Sergeant, Duty Ser- 
geants and Corporals, and their duties consist in seeing that 
the orders of the commissioned officers are executed in the 
company, regarding the welfare and instruction of the pri- 
vates in all that pertains to military matters. A company 
is sub-divided into two equal parts, each of which should 
be under the special charge of a lieutenant. These sub- 
divisions are termed Platoons. 

The term company is properly applied only to the unit 
of organization of Engineers and Infantry. In Artillery 
this unit is termed a Battery, and in Cavalry a Troop. Com- 
pany is also used as a general term for the unit of all arms 
of the service. 

In time of peace companies are maintained only up to a 
strength sufficient to keep up the organization and instruct 
soldiers properly. In time of war the company is enlarged 
to any given consistent strength. The maximum size of a 
company must not be greater than one man on foot can 
thoroughly command. 

Two or more companies under one command form a 
Battalion, which is commanded by a Major; and for tacti- 
cal instruction it is the tactical unit. On a peace footing 
the number of companies in a battalion may be increased 
to eight, for the purpose of instruction ; but in time of war 
it should never be more than four, as that number is con- 



14 ART OF WAR. 

sidered the maximum number over which one person in 
command can make his voice heard by all. 

When two or more battalions are organized under one 
commander they form a Regiment, and its commander is 
termed a Colonel. The regiment is the largest permanent 
organization in all armies, and is formed for the purposes of 
administration. 

The Colonel is assisted in the discharge of his duties by 
a. Lieutenant Colonel and one or more Majors, as well as 
two Lieutenants termed Adjutant and Quartermaster. All 
these officers combined are known as the Field and Staff of 
a Regiment. 

The different regiments in an army are numbered as ist 
Infantry, 2d Infantry, 5th Cavalry, etc., and the companies 
of the same regiment are known by letter, as company "A" 
ist Infantry, Troop "C" 3d Cavalry, Battery " H " 3d 
Artillery, and so on. 

When two or more regiments are organized under one 
command, they form a Brigade, and their commander is a 
Brigadier General. Two or more brigades constitute a 
Division, the commander of which is a Major General. 
Two or more divisions joined together under one command 
form an Army Corps, the proper commander of which is a 
Lieutenant General. 

The entire army is under the command of a General or 
General-in-Chief. 

In all bodies of troops larger than regiments there may 
be all arms of the service combined ; but regiments and 
smaller military bodies are always of the same arm of the 
service throughout. The proportion in which the various 
arms of the service are combined in any army varies ac- 
cording to the nature of the country and character of the 
enemy; but the general rule is as follows: The mass of the 
army is infantry; the cavalry amounts to about one-fifth of 
the infantry, and the artillery should have three cannon (and 
the men to serve them) for every one thousand men of the 
army. There should be one or two companies of engin- 
eers to each division. 

In time of peace, troops are not kept together in larger 



COMPOSITION OF AN ARMY. 1 5 

bodies than regiments, unless occasion requires them to be 
called together for certain purposes, but are posted or 
quartered in various parts of the country. The country is 
divided into sub-divisions called Military Districts. Two 
or more of these form a Military Department, and two or 
more departments constitute a Military Division. Each of 
these various sub-divisions is commanded by a General 
corresponding in rank to the extent and importance of the 
country embraced in its limits. 

We have previously spoken of two general classes into 
which armies are divided — that is the Line and Staff. In 
all bodies of soldiers there are those who must look out for 
and supply the wants of those who do the fighting. They 
are called the Staff, and their duties are to feed and clothe 
the Army, provide transportation for it and its armament, 
ammunition, and stores of all kinds ; pay the soldiers, 
house them, look after their health, make inspections of 
the various parts of the Army for the information of the 
General commanding, carry the General's orders, and keep 
all the records of the Army. Their duties will be further 
explained in another chapter. They are the assistants of 
the General, as without their aid he would have more to do 
than he could attend to. The following table shows the 
organization of the United States Army, exclusive of the 
Militia, which will be spoken of in another chapter : 



i6 



ART OF WAR. 



Organization of the Army 





CORPS. 


- 
c 




1 

<u 
c 

5 

c 
- 
c 

Z 
- 

1 


- 

4) 

a 

1 

3 


■A 
\ 

ii 
6 


u 

< 

1 




< 

< 

4 


U 

- 

u 
O 

< 

i 
4 


re 
O 

< 
< 

8 


- 
u 

s 

O 

u 






— 

-f. 






l 

6 

7 
8 

9 

IO 

ii 

12 

13 
14 


Military Secretary to the Lieutenant General 

Aides-de-Camp to General Officers 


Inspector General's Department 

Bureau of Military Justice 

Quartermaster's Department 

Subsistence Department 

Medical Department 

Pay Department 

Corps of Engineers 

Ordnance Department 








































— 










15 


Ten Regiments of Cavalry 


16 


Five Regiments of Artillery 


17 


Twenty-five Regiments of Infantry 


18 


Military Academy 


19 
20 


Non-commissioned staff unattached to regiments . . . 
Enlisted men unattached to regiments 






1 


1 


3 


6 


1 
= 


J^ 


j 


1 


= 


23 

























(a) The acts of June 23, 1874, March 3, 1875, and June 26, 1876, reorganizing the 
staff corps, provide " that no officer now in service snail be reduced in rank or mus- 
tered out by reason of any provisions of law therein made reducing the number of 
officers in any department or corps o.f the Army." There are now in service, in ex- 



COMPOSITION OF AN ARMY 



17 



•/ 


M* 


United States. 
































I 

2 

3 
4 

5 

6 

7 
8 

9 

10 

12 
»4 
15 

16 


B 
O 

"o 

CO 

u 

c 

4) 



In 




ft 

s 

2 
2 


3 

V 
</> 

1- ^r 

- c 

o| 

« 

ft = 

C ** 

2 


5 
'J? 





p. 

a 

< 
2 


5 

u 


> 

"3 

-0 

— , 


IT" 



'c? 

O 
> 

"3 

M 
13 

3 

a 4 


3 
D 

O 

d 

B 

5 
1 


u 

V 



si 

J) ~ 

£0 

O 

s 
rt 

'5 
«! 

4 


u 

c 

!- 3 

SI 
S2 

l- c 
u 3 

*£ 

3 
ft 

ft 

' 8 


2 

V. 

1 

V 

& 
*4 


g 

ft 

rt 
O 

5 

rt 

B 

c- 

< 

30 


3 

i) D 
« F, 

<n 

'1 

s 


V 

I 




3 

OQ 

-Q 

3 

°lf 

,; 3 

S3 

e 



2 




3 
4) 

■§tT 
wg 

i| 

6.1 

3 


3 
4) 

,Q 
3^s 

s 
s 





' 8 


V 

u 

3 
U 

.Q . 

of 

6 
£ 

U 

12 

_ 

• • 

•• 
:: 


5 
3 

O 

3 
O 
1) 

tl. 

3 
1 


Q 
2 

~ 

3 
1) 

'J 


3 

< 


2 
2 

O 

U 

> 

PM 

"H 
_o 

'— 

s 

u 

I 


B 
2 
2 



<L> 

:/. 

cn 
4 


V 

B 
c 
2 
U 

r. 
3 
1) 

3 

8 

bd 
1 

8 


3 
J 

S 

0—. 

£ § 

ft(J 
"« 3 

2 


17 

iS 

20 

21 






22 
2 3 







cess of the number allowed by these acts, ttr« Inspectors General, Colonels ; four 
Judge Advocates, Majors; seven Storekeepers, Captains, in the Quartermaster's 
Department ; four Medical Storekeepers, Captains, in the Medical Department, 
and ten Ordnance Storekeepers, Captains. 
2 



i8 



ART OF WAR. 





Organization 


0/" ^^ Army of 




CORPS. 


: 

i) 

}!. 

r. 


— 
-• 
= 

is. 
■?. 

c 

- 

< 


3 

y 



u 

bJ3 
3 
W 

c 

< 


3 
O 

> 

(2 


z 

■■J 

E 
< 


3 

v. 




i 


O 






2 

3 
4 
3 
6 

7 

8 

9 


Military Secretary to the Lieutenant General . 

Aides-de-Camp to General Officers 

Adjutant General's Department 

Inspector General's Department 

Bureau of Military Justice 

Quartermaster's Department 

Subsistence Department 


50 


84 


V 


1 


2 


2 


50 


1 


1 




TT 










12 


Ordnance Department 
















14 


Post Chaplains 


- 


- 


— 


- 


- 


— 


~ 


- 


- 


15 


Ten Regiments of Cavalry 


16 


Five Regiments of Artillery 


17 


Twenty-five Regiments of Infantry 




l 










18 


Military Academy 


19 
20 


Non-commissioned staff unattached to regiments . 
Enlisted men unattached to regiments 






53 


= 4 


"41 


1 


2 


2 


3^ 


1 


1 


23 


Retired Officers 



( b ) Assistant Surgeons have the rank, pay, and emoluments of First Lieutenant 
of Cavalry for the firstyfzx? years' service, and the rank, pay, and emoluments of the 
grade of Captain aftery?z>£ years' service. [Sec. 4, act June 23, 1874.] 

( c ) The six Aides-de-Camp (Colonels) to the General ; the two (Lieutenant Colonels) 
to trie Lieutenant General ; the tweuty-eight (Captains or Lieutenants) to the Major 
Generals and Brigadier Generals, making in all thirty-six Aides-de-Camp, and also 
the Military Secretary (Lieutenant Colonel) to the Lieutenant General, being taken 
from the corps or regiments, in the strength of which they are included, are, to avoid 
counting them twice, excluded, as Aides and Military Secretary , from the columns 
"total commissioned" and "aggregate." 

( d ) By section 9 of the act of March 3, 1853, a Lieutenant of Engineers and Ord- 
nance, having served fourteen years continuously as Lieutenant, is entitled to pro- 
motion to the rank of Captain; but such promotion is not to increase the whole 
number of officers in either of said corps. 

( e ) The Adjutant and Quartermaster allowed to the battalion of engineers not being 



COMPOSITION OF AN ARMY. 



J 9 



the United States — Continued. 





u 

£ 
O 

"rt 

a 

tn 

in 

IS 
u 

1 


u 



O 

6 
3 

10 
5 

25 


V 

s 
j2 
'o 

c 

rt 

a 

3 
3 


2 



'c? 

24 

10 

30 

15 
25 


CO 

C 

'is 

s. 

rt 
O 


d 
S 

O 

C36 


rt 
W 

rt C 
-0 i! 

<5 3 
3 

i 
'5b 


W 

ki 

u 

S £ 

u 
= 
'5b 


a 

3 

— ' 

< 

P5 


■j 
1 

5 

c 
.2 

c« 

m 


c 
c 

4) 
3 


C 

a 

3 

5 
u 

IT. 


— 
c 


u 

d 
_o 

— 

< 


a 

"3. 

Xi 

U 

h 3Q 
h 2 

>>2 


P. 

D 


C/S 

>^ 

1 
a'&i 


a 

« 

a 
u 

V 

11 


« 
a 
c 

u 




cu 

Ji! 
>-. 


c/5 


"3 

V 

a'&'i 


1) 

X 

10 
5 

25 


3 

rt 
£ 

10 

5 

25 


.3 


I 

2 

3 

4 
5 

6 
7 
8 

9 

IO 

12 

*3 

14 


12 
4 

10 

5 

25 


d 3Q 

d 20 

120 

60 


10 


26 

16 


IO 

V 

120 

65 
250 


a&'i 


, 


15 


10 

5 

25 


I20 
I20 
250 


— 


— 


10 


16 


5 


5 


*7 


250 


25 


25 


18 


49 




— 














— 


— - 




"^4 


— 


— ~ 










r 9 
20 

21 


0^6 




a8fi 


• 


22 












»8ri 




2 3 















supernumerary officers, but being included in the strength of the corps to which they 
belong, are, to avoid counting them twice, excluded, as battalion staff officers, from 
the columns " total commissioned" and "aggregate" of their department. 

( f j The act of June 20, 1878, provides that " two [signal] sergeants may, each year, 
be appointed to be Second Lieutenants." 

(g) Under the 4th section of the act of April 29, 1812, as modified by section 19 of 
the act of July 15, 1870, one additional Second Lieutenant (who shall be a graduate 
of the Military Academy) is allozved to each company. The number authorized 
is consequently/2?Kr hundred and thirty-five. 

( h ) The Chaplains of the colored regiments (four), authorized by the act of July 
28, 1866, and the Post Chaplains (thirty), authorized by the act of March 2, 1849, 
rank as Captains of Infantry. [Sec. 7, act March 2, 1867.] 

(*) The Ordnance Storekeeper and Paymaster of the National Armory at Springfield 
has the rank, pay, and emoluments of Major of Cavalry, and all other Storekeepers 
have the rank, pay, and emoluments of Captains of Cavalry. [Sec. 7, act March 2, 1867. J 



20 



ART OF WAR. 







0; 


gani 


zation of the 


Army of 




CORPS. 






u 

1 

H 


c 

bo 
(h 

u 

•5 




c 

rt 

(D 
fcfl 
V 
CO 
>> 

i 





Cfi 

'E. 
1 




u 

c 

73 

1 


bJO 

= 

a 


-. 

pq 


id 

c 
as 


3 




















2 

3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 

10 


Militar}- Secretary to the Lieutenant General . 

Aides-de-Camp to General Officers 

Adjutant General's Department 

Inspector General's Department 

Bureau of Military Justice 

Quartermaster's Department 

Subsistence Department 












186 


I 


1 




Pay Department 












12 

13 

14 


Ordnance Department 














Post Chaplains 




















15 






10 


10 








_1 


- 


120 
60 
250 


icii^gm^ui v.avai y 


10 

50 


16 


Five Regiments of Artillery 


17 


Twenty-five Regiments of Infantry ...... 


18 


Military Academy 














i9 
20 


Non-commissioned staff unattached to regiments 
Enlisted men unattached to regiments .... 








114 


ti 4 8 






22 
23 


Grand aggregate 


60 


10 


To 


ii4_ 


kl 4 8 


186 


1 


1 


430 























s ) By the act of March 3, 1873, the Secretary of War is authorized to select from 
the Sergeants of the line of the Army, who shall have faithfully served therein,^*? 
years, three years of which in the grade of non-commissioned officer, as many Com- 
missary Sergeants as the service may require, not to exeeed one for each military 
post or place of deposit of subsistence supplies. 

(i) The act of June 23, 1879, making appropriations for the support of the Army 
for the year ending June 30, 1880, provides that no money appropriated by that act 
shall be paid for recruiting the Army beyond the number of 25,000 enlisted men, in- 
cluding Indian scouts and Hospital Stewards, and excepting the Signal Service. The 
signal detachment is therefore excluded from the aggregate of " total enlisted." 



COMPOSITION OF AN ARMY. 



21 



the Lnitea States — Continued. 





c 

bfl 
u 






i 

<u 

s 

3 

H 


a 
"35 


1 

s 

d 




< 


S2 


C 

a 

ft 


in 
-2 

> 


T3 

> 



> 


T3 
D 

_o 

s 

e 




H 


-a" 

Is 


H 


£3 








p 


■a 
a 
U 


4> 

4f 


I 

2 

3 

4 
5 
6 

7 

8 

9 

IC) 

II 

12 

13 
14 


20 
40 

I50 


' 16 

80 
30 




8 










80 
150 


74 
130 


320 


11 

17 

5 

5 

57 

26 

192 

55 

109 

54 

5 

3° 


'186 

200 

400 
^00 






11 

17 

5 
5 

57 

26 

378 

55 

3^9 

454 
505 
30 


15 


60O 
250 
IOOO 


480 
240 

IOOO 


240 


120 

500 


240 


120 


I20 


I20 
60 


— L 


— 


f£,000 


432 


7,970 




8,402 


16 


1,750 


280 


2,625 


9 




2,905 


17 


500 




250 






9,000 


877 


12,625 




13,502 


18 


— 


























312 


321 


*9 

20 
21 




















432 
3CO 




262 
432 
300 


_9 




262 
432 
3&0 


22 


2060 


1846 


240 


628 


240 


620 


I20 




230 


204 


17,802 


2155 


^5. 000 


312 


27,976 


2 3 
























400 






400 



One Veterinary Surgeon, with the pay of seventy-five dollars per month, is allowed 
to each of the cavalry regiments, and to each of the Seventh, Eighth, Ninth, and 
Tenth Regiments an additional Veterinary Surgeon, at one hundred dollars per month, 
is allowed. These Veterinary Surgeons are not included in the organization table. 

Indian scouts to the number of one thousand may be employed in the Territories 
and Indian country, who shall receive the pay and allowance of cavalry soldiers. 
[Sec. 6, act July 28, 1866.] 

Company Quartermas'ter Sergeants in any branch of the service are no longer al- 
lowed, they not being enumerated in the act of March 15, 1872, and therefore not en- 
titled to its benefits. [G. O. 51, series of 1872.] 



ART OF WAR. 















Or 


ganization of Re 


e* 






- 

3 

i 
i 

i 


u 

c 
o 

3 

CJ 
c 

c 

3 

i 

i 

i 
i 


5 

i 

3 
3 

i 


cd 

C 

13 

OS 

ed 
3 

'— ' 
<1 

I 
I 

I 


4) 

g c 

li 

3 3 

f 

£ 
'5b 

i 
i 

i 


a 

< 
c 
o 

1 

1-1 


V 

1 

G 

u 
Ed 

3 

1 
pq 


c 

H. 

cd 

U 

12 

12 

I 
I 

IO 

I 

5 

i 
i 


c 
a 

E 

12 

I 

24 
2 
2 

IO 
I 

5 

i 
i 


a 
a 

V 

3 
O 

Oi 

12 

I 

13 

2 

I 

IO 

I 

5 

1 
1 


g 

0. 
u 
*I 

*I 


3 

'r? 

1 
1 
1 

1 


£ 
u 

3 
C J 

I 
I 

I 


I 

2 


Ten Regiments of Cavalry — each .... 
Company of Cavalry 


3 

4 

5 


Five Regiments of Artillery — each . . . 

Light Battery of Artillery 

Battery of Artillery , 


6 

7 


Twenty-five Regiments of Infantry — each 
Company of Infantry 


8 
9 

IO 


Engineer Battalion 

Two Companies — each 

Two Companies — each 



* See Note ( h ) on general organization table. 



Regimental commanders will not in future date the rank or appointment of regi- 
mental staff officers back of the date on which such appointment was actually made ; 
and hereafter such appointees (regimental quartermasters having been first duly ap- 
proved by the Secretary of War) will be paid in their new positions from the date of 



COMPOSITION OF AN ARMY. 



23 



merits and Companies. 





c 

.5 

1 



1 


1 
ft 

2 

2 


x 

V 

— 

IT. 

I 


U 

ft 
S 

H 
_*j 
U 

1 


-' 
1 


i 

X 

u 
01 

2 

rf 
3 

C J 
c 


"3 

m 


S 


bfi 
1) 

X' 

£ 

12 

I 

12 

I 
I 

IO 

I 


s 

r. 



u 
X 

00 

5 

50 
6 

4 

40 
4 

20 
5 
5 



ft 



48 

4 

48 
4 
4 

40 
4 

16 
4 
4 


ft 

S 
a 

s- 

H 

24 
2 


.2 

3 


1 

s 

C 

S2 

*C 

>- 
rt 
fa 


4) 

O 


XI 

12 

I 


c 


M 
_£_ 

12 

12 

1 
I 


<u 
> 


is 

N 

4) 

> 


> 


T3 
1> 

C 
O 

£ 
E 




H 


T3 

"5 


H 


I 

2 


24 
2 


24 
2 
2 


600 
50 

35o 

64 
26 


*44 

3 


797 
66 


3 

4 
5 


24 
2 
2 

20 
2 




— 


56 
5 
4 


525 
80 
40 

505 
50 

200 
50 

49 


6 
7 


20 
2 




IO 

I 


74 
18 


360 

36 


* 3 6 
3 


8 

9 

CO 


8 

2 
2 








80 
20 
20 




16 
3 

3 



841 

_6£ 

581 
85 

44 

54i 

53 

216 

53 
52 



f See Note ( e ) on general organization table. 



appointment. Officers appointed to positions in the regimental staff will, if serving 
with the regiment, be required to report without delay ; if absent on detached serv- 
ice, application will be made to the authority governing their action. [G. O. No. 73, 
Adjutant General's Office, July 16, 1879.] 



24 



ART OF WAR. 



Table of pay allowed by law to officers of the Army, annexed 

House of Representatives 



GRADE. 



General 

Lieutenant General . . . 

Major General 

Brigadier General. . . . 

Colonel 

Lieutenant Colonel . . . 

Major 

Captain, mtd 

Captain, not mtd. . . . 
Regimental adj't . . . . 

Regimental qm 

ist Lieutenant, mtd. . . 
ist Lieutenant, not mtd. 
2d Lieutenant, mtd . . . 
2d Lieutenant, not mtd . 
Chaplain 



PAY OF OFFICERS IN ACTIVE SERVICE/ 



Yearly 
Pay. 


MONTHLY PAY. 


Prior to 5 
years' 

service. 


5 y'r's' 
service. 


10 y'r's' 
service. 


15 y'r's' 

service. 


20 y'r's' 

service. 


$13,500 00 
11,000 00 
7,500 00 
5,500 00 
3,500 00 

3,000 DC 

2,500 OO 
2,000 OO 
1,800 OO 
1,800 00 
1,800 00 
1,600 00 
1,500 00 
1,500 00 
1,400 00 
1,500 00 


$1,125 00 
916 67 
625 00 
458 33 
291 67 
250 00 
208 33 
166 67 
150 00 
150 00 
150 00 
133 33 
125 00 
125 00 
116 67 
125 00 


\operct 


20 per ct 


30 per ct 


40 per ct 


























$320 83 
275 00 
229 17 
183 33 
165 00 
165 00 
165 00 
146 67 
137 5° 
137 5o 
128 33 
137 5^ 


$350 00 
300 00 
250 00 
200 00 
180 00 
180 00 
180 00 
160 00 
150 00 
150 00 
140 00 
150 00 


t$375 00 
325 00 
270 83 
216 67 
195 00 
195 00 
195 00 
173 33 
162 50 
162 50 
151 67 
162 50 


$375 00 

1333 33 
291 67 

233 33 
*IO 00 

210 00 
210 00 
186 67 
175 00 
175 00 
163 33 
175 00 



*For law establishing the present rates of pay see sections 1261, 1262, 1263, and 
1274, Revised Statutes. 

fThe maximum pay of a Colonel is by law $4,500 per annum : hence full forty per 
cent, cannot accrue. [Section 1267, Revised Statutes.] 

J The maximum pay of a Lieutenant Colonel is bylaw $4,000 per annum; hence 
full 40 per cent, cannot accrue. [Section 1267, Revised Statutes.] 
Note i. An Aide-de-Camp to a Major General is allowed $200 per year in addition 
to the pay of his rank, not to be included in computing the service in- 
crease. — {Act July 15, 1870, Sec. 24.] Section 1261, Revised Statutes. 

2. An Aide-de-Camp to a Brigadier General is allowed $150 per year in addition 

to the pay of his rank, not to be included in computing the service in- 
crease. — [Act July 15, 1870, Sec. 24.] Section 1261, Revised Statutes. 

3. An' Acting Assistant Commissary of Subsistence is allowed $100 per year in 

addition to the pay of his rank, not to be included in computing the service 
increase. — [Act July 15, 1870, Sec. 24.] Section 1261, Revised Statutes. 



COMPOSITION OF AN ARMY. 



25 



to the Army Register conformably to the resolution of the 
of August 30, 1842. „ , 





PAY OF RETIRED OFFICERS* 


GRADE 


Yearly 
Pay. 


MONTHLY PAY. 


Prior to 
5 years' 
service. 


5 years' 
service. 


10 y'r's' 

service. 


15 y'r's' 
service. 


26 y'r's* 
service. 




























• 


Major General 

Brigadier General .... 


$5,625 00 
4,125 00 
2,625 00 
2,250 00 
1,875 00 
1,500 00' 
1,350 00 


£468 75 
343 75 
218 75 
187 50 
156 25 
125 00 
112 50 


















$240 62 
206 25 
171 87 
137 5o 
123 75 


$262 50 
225 00 
187 50 
150 00 
135 00 


$281 25 
243 75 
203 12 
162 50 
146 25 


$281 25 
250 00 
218 75 
175 00 
i57 50 


Lieutenant Colonel .... 
Major 


Captain, mtd 

Captain, not mtd 
















1st Lieutenant, mtd. . . . 
1st Lieutenant, not mtd. . 
2d Lieutenant, mtd. . . . 
2d Lieutenant, not mtd . . 
Chaplain 


1,200 00 
1,125 00 
1,125 °° 
1,050 00 
1,350 00 


100 00 
93 75 
93 75 
87 50 

112 50 


no 00 
103 12 
103 12 
96 25 
123 75 


120 00 
112 50 
112 50 
105 00 
135 00 


130 00 
121 87 
121 87 
"3 75 
146 25 


140 00 
131 25 
131 25 
122 50 
i57 5o 





Note 4. Assistant Surgeons are entitled to pay of Captain after five years' service.— 
[Act June 23, 1874, Sec. 4.] 

5. Retired officers receive 75 per cent, of pay (salary and increase) of their 

rank, but no increase accrues for time subsequent to date of retirement. — 
[Act July 15, 1870, Sec' 24.] Section 1274, Revised Statutes. 

6. A retired Chaplain receives three-fourths of the pay (salary and increase) of 

his rank (Captain, not mounted). 

7. The officer in charge of the public buildings and grounds (Washington) has, 

while so serving, the rank, pay, and emoluments of a Colonel. — [Act 
March 3, 1873, Sec. 1.] 

8. The Aides-de-Camp to the General, selected by him from the Army, have, 

while so serving, the rank and pay of Colonel. [Section 1096, Revised 
Statutes.] The Aides-de-Camp and Military Secretary to the Lieutenant 
General, selected by him from the Army, have, while so serving, the rank 
and pay of Lieutenant Colonel. [Section 1097, Revised Statutes.] 
2 



2 6 ART OF WAR. 

U. S. MILITARY ACADEMY. 

Every civilized power of sufficient importance to neces- 
sitate the keeping of a Standing Army, has deemed it wise 
to establish within its domain one or more National Mili- 
tary Schools, for the education of those who are to officer 
their armies. ' 

The Military Academy of the United States, — estab- 
lished by act of Congress in 1802, — is located at West 
-Point, New York, and is conceded to be one of the best 
in the world. The body of students at this institution is 
known as the United States Corps of Cadets, and is made 
up of one from each Congressional district, one from each 
Territory, one from the District of Columbia, and ten 
from the United States at large. They are appointed upon 
the recommendation of the Representative in Congress from 
the district in which they reside, and are required (except 
the ten cadets appointed at large), to be actual residents 
of the district from which they are appointed. 

Appointments to the Academy are ordinarily made a 
year in advance, and appointees are admitted only between 
the ages of 17 and 22 years. 

The recommendations of Representatives in Congress 
are frequently based upon the result of competitive exam- 
inations held in their respective districts, to which exami- 
nations all youths of proper age are admitted upon appli- 
cation. 

Appointees are required to report in person at West 
Point, and to successfully pass a physical examination by a 
board of army surgeons, as well as an examination into 
their mental qualifications, conducted under regulations 
prescribed by the Secretary of War. They must be well 
versed in reading, writing and arithmetic, and have a fair 
knowledge of English grammar, descriptive geography, and 
of the history of the United States. 

If the examinations are successfully passed, the candidate 
is required to take an oath of allegiance to the United 
States, to sign articles engaging to serve the United States 
eight years unless sooner discharged, and becomes subject 



U. S. MILITARY ACADEMY. 27 

to do duty in such places and on such service as the Presi- 
dent of the United States may direct, and he is subject in 
all respects to military discipline and to trial by Court 
Martial. 

The cadets constitute a part of the Army, and are known 
as "warrant officers," taking precedence over all non- 
commissioned officers of the Army. Their warrants of 
appointment as cadets are signed by the Secretary of War. 

The pay of a cadet is $540.00 per annum, from which 
he is required to purchase all books and uniform clothing, 
pay for washing, lights, board, etc., receiving only tuition, 
quarters and medical attendance without charge. 

The chief officer of the institution is the Superintendent, 
and the next in power is the Commandant of Cadets. These 
and the professors are officers of the Army, appointed by 
the President of the United States — the professors holding 
their offices during lifetime, or until retired, while the other 
two are officers detailed from different corps of the Army 
for a term of years. They are assisted in the discharge of 
their duties by officers detailed for the purpose by the 
Secretary of War. The Superintendent is, ex officio, ^ 
member of the Academic Board, and presides over it at 
the semi-annual examinations of the cadets. 

The course of study extends through four years, and 
comprises mathematics (pure and applied), English, 
French, Spanish, drawing, philosophy (mechanics, acous- 
tics and optics), astronomy, chemistry and electricity, min- 
eralogy and geology, engineering (civil and military), 
ordnance and gunnery, science and art of war, military 
law, and the tactics of all arms of the service. 

Graduates are commissioned as second lieutenants in the 
corps of engineers, artillery, infantry or cavalry, in ac- 
cordance with the recommendations of the Academic 
Board as to which arm of the service they are especially 
fitted for. Usually the first four or five of the class enter 
the engineer corps, the next eight or ten the artillery, and 
the others either infantry or cavalry, according to their 
individual preference. 



2 8 ART OF WAR. 

STATE MILITARY COLLEGES. 

In each of the several States of the Union there are one 
or more institutions of learning where a military course of 
study is pursued. The Congress of the United States 
having deemed that the assistance of officers of the Army 
as instructors would be of great value to the country at 
large, enacted a law authorizing the Secretary of War to 
detail a certain number for this duty. The following are 
the regulations governing such details : 

Details "shall be apportioned throughout the United 
States as nearly as may be practicable according to popu- 
lation j" such States as do not contain sufficient popula- 
tion to entitle them to one officer will be grouped with 
one or more contiguous States or Territories, so that the 
combined population of the group will allow the detail 
of one or more officers, to the extent of forty officers 
in all. 

As a rule, captains of companies, regimental staff offi- 
cers, or officers who have served less than three years with 
their regiments or corps, or who have recently completed 
a tour of detached duty, will not be eligible. No details 
will be made that will leave a battery, troop, or company, 
without two officers for duty with it. The period of detail, 
will not be longer than three years. 

Details of retired officers, under the act of May 4, 1880, 
will be in addition to the forty allowed by section 1225, as 
amended by the act of July 5, 1884, and may be made to 
institutions of learning of the requisite grade in any State, 
without reference to population or to the number of officers 
already serving therein. 

No officer will be detailed at any institution except upon 
an application from its proper representatives. 

Applications for details of officers should be addressed 
to the Secretary of War, and should be accompanied by a 
certificate as to the number of male students the college or 
university has the capacity to educate, and also by the last 
printed catalogue. 

Officers of the Army desiring a detail at colleges or uni- 
versities may make application therefor to the Adjutant 



STATE MILITARY COLLEGES. 29 

General, through the usual military channels, and their 
names will, if the officers are available, be furnished to 
such institutions as may desire such details. 

[For amount of Ordnance, Ordnance stores, Ammunition, as well as 
for form of bond, see Army Register, 1886.] 



CHAPTER II. 



THE WAR DEPARTMENT AND ITS BUREAUS. 



THE WAR DEPARTMENT. 



IN all countries this department has the care and control 
of the armies of the Nation, and its chief is a counsellor 
to the head or ruler of the nation in all matters pertaining 
to its defence by the land forces, having under his super- 
intendence all fortifications and their armament, all arse- 
nals and factories wherein material of war is manufactured 
or stored for the Army. In the United States the head of 
the War Department is denominated the "Secretary of 
War," and he is a member of the President's Cabinet. 

All the different bureaus through which the affairs of the 
Army are administered have their headquarters at Wash- 
ington, D. C, and are under the supervision of the Sec- 
retary of War. These are known as the Adjutant Gen- 
eral's, Inspector General's, Judge Advocate General's, 
Quartermaster's, Subsistence, Medical, Pay, Engineers, 
Ordnance and Signal — the latter being called the "Sig- 
nal Corps" and the Engineers called the "Corps of 
Engineers. ' ' 

Adjutant General's Department. 

From this department emanate all orders governing 
the Army under the provisions of the Acts of Con- 
gress, that may be issued by the Secretary of War, the 
General commanding the Army, or any officer with a com- 
mand equal to a Brigade. All correspondence passing be- 
tween bureaus, or from line to bureau, or vice versa, must 
pass through this department. All plans of campaign, de- 
tails of march, iustructions to commanders, and the various 
details for service, also pertain to the Adjutant General's 
Department. In fact, this department must be fully in- 
formed of the details of every other department in the ser- 
vice. Indeed, it occupies relatively to the other depart- 
ments the most prominent place. In the Army of the 
United States there is one Adjutant General and sixteen 
Assistant Adjutants General. In time of peace these As- 

3 (33) 



34 * AR T OF WAR. 

sistants are detailed on duty at the headquarters of the 
various military divisions and departments. In time 
of war every organization from a brigade to a separate 
Army has its Assistant Adjutant General, or an officer 
detailed from the command to take charge of the Adjutant 
General's Department, and who is styled an Acting As- 
sistant Adjutant General (A. A. A. G.). The station of 
the Adjutant General of the Army is, under the law, at 
Washington City. 

Inspector General's Department. 

The duties pertaining to this bureau are to keep the War 
Department and all general officers informed of the condi- 
tion of the Army, and their separate commands in all 
branches, and to protect the Government by due inspec- 
tions, in the disbursement of moneys appropriated by Con- 
gress for the support of the Army ; as well as to keep the 
General of the Army and the Secretary of War posted as. 
to the condition of the troops, regarding their subsistence, 
clothing, military appearance, arms, equipments, and their 
general morale ; also the condition of the military posts, the 
care of Government property, indeed, everything which 
bears upon the general efficiency of the Army. 

The Corps consists of one senior Inspector General, one 
Inspector General and five Assistant Inspector Generals. 
The Senior is located permanently at Washington, and the 
others are distributed wherever their services are most 
needed at Headquarters of Divisions and Departments. 

In addition to the regularly commissioned staff officers 
of this corps, a number of officers of the line are detailed 
at Department and District Headquarters for the perform- 
ance of duty in this Department. When belonging to other 
corps and detailed for duty in this department, they are 
termed Acting Assistant Inspector Generals (A. A. I. G.). 

Judge Advocate General's Department. 

This is the Military Law Department of the Army. As 
far as practicable the officers of this department are, except 
the two Seniors, distributed among the several military 



THE WAR DEPARTMENT. 



35 



departments, where they exercise a supervision over charges 
and specifications to be referred to General Courts Martial, 
as well as the legal correctness of the proceedings in cases 
tried by any Court Martial, Court of Inquiry, or Military 
Commission, within their jurisdiction. There are eight 
officers in this department, including the Senior, who is 
designated as the Judge Advocate General. 

Quartermaster's Department. 

This Department supplies everything required in the 
Army, except subsistence stores, ordnance stores, medi- 
cal supplies, and a few necessary articles which are intended 
to be sold by the Subsistence Department for the comfort 
of the troops. It is the department requiring the greatest 
amount of financial responsibility of any department in 
the service. In addition to furnishing everything required 
for the comfort of troops, it must provide transportation, 
not only for troops and its own property, but for the 
stores and property of all other departments of the Army. 
It also provides forage for all animals connected with the 
public service, builds all military posts (not permanent 
fortifications), and is the custodian of all public buildings 
and lands in use by the Army. 

In time of war the duties of its officers are the most 
onerous of any one of the bureaus, and on its effectiveness 
depends very largely the success of an Army. Its officers 
consist of one Quartermaster General and fifty-six other 
commissioned officers. In addition to these, each regi- 
ment has a Lieutenant on quartermaster's duty, and he is 
designated as a Regimental Quartermaster. Every military 
post garrisoned by troops also must have an officer to per- 
form quartermaster's duty, and if there should be no reg- 
ular staff officer of the Quartermaster's Department or 
Regimental Quartermaster available, then a company offi- 
cer must be detailed for the duty, and is designated an 
Acting Assistant Quartermaster (A. A. Q. M.) 

Subsistence Department. 

This Department supplies the Army with the means of 



36 ART OF WAR. 

subsistence. It also furnishes the funds for the construc- 
tion of ovens for baking bread, but does not build the 
bake-house — that much pertains to the Quartermaster's De- 
partment. It also supplies pipes, tobacco, cigars, pins, 
needles, combs, brushes, blacking, towels, toilet-soaps, 
spool-thread, sewing-silks, and a number of other minor 
articles of this class which are deemed necessary for a sol- 
dier's comfort, and which can be purchased by officers or 
soldiers at the original cost to the Government. The 
officers of the Subsistence Department consist of a Com- 
missary General and twenty-five assistants. The former is 
located at Washington City, while the others are distrib- 
uted throughout the country at such points as may be 
deemed the best for the interests of the service. 

At each Division and Department Headquarters an officer 
of this corps is located, as well as at certain supply depots. 
At all garrisoned military posts in time of peace a Lieu- 
tenant is detailed on duty in this department, for which he 
receives one hundred dollars per annum extra pay, and is 
termed the Acting Commissary of Subsistence (A. C. S.). 

Medical Department. 

This Department has charge of the health of the Army, 
and its officers are termed Surgeons and Assistant Surgeons. 
It is the most exclusive and independent of all the staff 
departments of the service. It plans its own hospitals, 
transports its own sick and wounded in time of war, sup- 
plies its medicines, stretchers, mat-trasses, blankets, cover- 
lids, instruments, etc. In time of peace, a Surgeon is 
stationed at every Division and Department Headquarters, 
who is termed the Medical Director, and at large military 
posts one Surgeon and one Assistant are located ; and they 
are required to administer to the troops and to the families 
of officers and soldiers. At smaller posts only one Assist- 
ant Surgeon is stationed. 

In time of war an Assistant is attached to every regular 
regiment, while the volunteer troops have with their organ- 
izations one Surgeon and one Assistant. 



THE WAR DEPARTMENT. 37 

The higher officers of the Medical Department in the field 
are attached to Divisions, Corps and Armies as Medical 
Directors. The officers of this Department consist of a 
Surgeon General and one hundred and ninety-one others of 
various grades (see organization of the Army, p. 1 7-20). In 
addition to these a number of citizen doctors are employed 
as contract surgeons, and they are denominated Acting As- 
sistant Surgeons. Whenever an officer is admitted to the 
corps he has the rank and pay of a First Lieutenant of Cav- 
alry, and after five years' service he becomes a Captain ; 
then his promotion is by seniority in his corps. They are 
required to pass a second examination before being pro- 
moted to a majority. 

Pay Department. 

The officers of this corps are stationed either in the large 
cities, in the neighborhood of troops, or on the direct lines 
of travel through the country, in order that they may be 
available for the payment of the Army and for those dis- 
charged from the Army and on the way to their homes. 
Once every two months (a few days after muster) the Pay- 
masters, under orders from the Departments in which they 
are located, proceed to the various military posts and pay 
the troops, which payment must be witnessed by one of- 
ficer at least, and that one should be the Commander of 
the company or detachment to whom the payment is made. 
A Paymaster is also stationed at the Headquarters of every 
Military Division or Department in the country, who is 
known as the Chief Paymaster of the Department, and pays 
all officers who present their accounts monthly or remits 
check by mail in payment of any account sent him. He 
also pays discharged soldiers, and settles accounts for mile- 
age, etc. The officers of this Department consist of one 
Paymaster General who is stationed at Washington, and 
thirty-four other officers. 

The Corps of Engineers. 

This corps is peculiarly organized, it being in effect the 
highest branch of the Army as well as of the Staff, and has 



3$ ART 07 WAR. 

a battalion of four companies, organized different from any 
corps in the service, (see organization of the Army p. 22). 
In time of peace the Headquarters of this battalion are es- 
tablished at Willet's Point, Long Island, where an Engineer 
School is in constant progress for both officers and enlisted 
men, who have practical and theoretical instruction in the 
erection of fortifications, use of explosives, both with and 
without electricity, the making and placing of pontoon 
bridges, all of which would come within their special duties 
in time of war. This Department renders to the country at 
large a valuable and important service by having its officers 
detailed to take charge of the river and harbor improve- 
ments, constructing breakwaters, opening channels for the 
navigation of rivers, superintending the erection of im- 
portant public buildings, etc. There are one hundred and 
nine officers in this corps, including a Chief of Engineers, 
whose headquarters are at Washington, D. C. 

In time of war the Corps of Engineers becomes a sepa- 
rate arm of service, and is organized into companies and 
battalions similar to Infantry, and go under different names 
of Sappers and Miners, Pontoniers, Constructors, etc. 

Ordnance Department. 

This Department has charge of the manufacture and 
supply of arms, equipments, ammunition, and everything 
pertaining to the fighting material of an Army. It also 
provides horse equipments and field outfits for the soldiers, 
such as blanket bags, haversacks, canteens, tin-cups, meat 
ration cans, knives, forks and spoons. The duties of the 
officers of this corps are so very specific that but little more 
can be said than that they are stationed at the various arse- 
nals and Ordnance Depots throughout the country, either 
superintending the manufacture of Ordnance and Ordnance 
Stores, or taking charge of the depots for storage and issue. 
There is one Chief of Ordnance, stationed at Washington, 
and fifty-eight others in the Department. 

Post Chaplains. 

There are thirty officers of this class allowed by law. 



THE WAR DEPARTMENT. 



39 



They must be regularly ordained ministers of the Gospel, 
and in addition to their religious duties at the military posts 
where stationed they must also superintend the Post Schools 
— which are provided for the children of officers and sol- 
diers — as well as the school for enlisted men. There not 
being a sufficient number to supply every post with one, 
they are generally located where it is supposed the best fields 
for their labors exist. 



CHAPTER III 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY- 
THE COMPANY. 
THE TROOP. 
THE BATTERY. 
THE BATTALION. 
THE REGIMENT. 



THE COMPANY, TROOP AND BATTERY. 



COMPANIES, troops or batteries being the smallest perma- 
nent units of organization and command in all Armies, 
they will, if their organization be good, their discipline 
correct, their drill efficient, and their administration hon- 
est, cause the regiments to be likewise. 

As the records of companies are of vital importance to 
the correct keeping of the records of the Army at large, 
and as a knowledge of the proper manner in which they 
should be kept is essential to the welfare of every officer 
and enlisted man, a model form of all papers, reports, re- 
turns, muster rolls, etc., is given in connection with these 
units of organization. 

The Captain. 

A Captain stands, with regard to his company, in the 
same light as a father to a large family of children. It is 
his duty to provide for their comfort, sustenance and pleas- 
ure, enforce strict rules of obedience, punish the refractory, 
and reward the deserving. He should, in connection with 
his Lieutenants, visit the mess-house of the company, in- 
spect all its arrangements, vary the food, see that it is well 
cooked, and an ample quantity provided. He should watch 
over the morals of his men and endeavor to instill into 
their minds, by occasional simple remarks, the necessity for 
a proper observance of moral laws, and by his example 
teach them the obligations they owe one to the other, and 
to the world at large. He should be kind and courteous, 
not only to his officers, but should combine kindness with 
his most peremptory commands to his men. Above all, he 
should exercise this principle towards the recruits who come 
under his care, and should demand that his non-commis- 
sioned officers pursue the same course. Desertion is fre- 

C437 



44 A ^T OF WAR. 

quently caused by the harsh treatment of non-commissioned 
officers, and many a man with a high spirit would rather 
suffer the ills that arise from this cause, than complain to his 
officers. This is borne for a long time, until the burden 
becomes too heavy, and desertion follows. By close at- 
tention, by frequent questioning as to the details of duty, 
by a strict examination into little difficulties that will spring 
up among the men, and by a careful watch over the rosters 
for duty, he will not only produce a well organized and 
disciplined command, but will create a feeling of respect 
and esprit akin to love. 

The Lieutenants. 

Lieutenants are provided for the assistance of the Cap- 
tain in the discharge of his duties toward the company, and 
the Senior to take the Captain's place in the event of sick- 
ness or becoming detached from the immediate command 
of the company. 

Lieutenants should have access to the records and returns 
of the company, and should be required to familiarize them- 
selves with all the various reports, returns, and other papers 
connected with it, and make them out in their own hand- 
writing until they show themselves proficient in these duties. 

The First Sergeant. 

The First Sergeant has charge of everything which per- 
tains to the company under the supervision of its com- 
manding officer. He is the immediate head of the family, 
and as such must have an eye to everything connected with 
it. His efficiency is shown in the health, discipline and 
general morale of the men under him. He watches over 
the rations and observes whether they are properly cooked 
and used, makes the details for service, and corrects all dis- 
orders. To quell frays or disturbances he has power to 
confine those engaged ; but must first report it to his com- 
pany Commander, and receive his orders. He divides the 
company into four squads, and places a non-commissioned 
officer over each one, and sees that they carry out the in- 
structions given them. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



45 



Every morning, immediately after breakfast, he turns out 
the whole company, or as many men as may be necessary, 
and has the grounds about the company, camp or barracks 
thoroughly policed (or cleaned). 

Men desiring to see the Surgeon are then sent, under a 
non-commissioned officer, to either the company Com- 
mander or a previously designated Lieutenant, who interro- 
gates them as to their illness ; the First Sergeant then places 
their names upon the company sick book, a specimen page 
of which here follows : 

Sick Report of Company "B," Sixth Regiment of U. S. Artillery , for 
May 20, 1883. 



ENTRIES TO BE MADE BY THE 
FIRST SERGEANT. 


SURGEON'S REMARKS. 






u 

in 
Z 


■a * 



a 






w 




Name of 








u 


Disease. 


SS5 


£C 


When 


Rank 




^ 


M 


(If feigned, 


55 fc 




RETURNED 


Patient. 




1) u 


5 S 


so state.) 


to Duty. 










-a jH 




s 


0^ 








w 

H 

< 


OC/2 


O.S 












Q 


fc 


% 




£ 




Henry May . 


Pvt. 


May 1/85 


iq 


19 


Catarrh . . 


Hospital. 






Wm. Smith . 


Corp. 


" 15/85 


s 


IO 


Piles . . . 


Duty . . 




May2o,'85 


Eben Johnson. 
Sam'l White . 


Pvt. 


" 20, '85 
" 20, '85 
" 20, '85 






Tonsillitis . 
Pneumonia. 
Sore throat. 




Qrs. 








Rufus Rangle. 


Duty . . 




May2o/85 


* I certify that I have carefully examined 




J. S. Fletcher, 


the above report. 




Asst. Surg. U.S.A. 


Benj. F. Alden, 




Attending Surgeon. 




Cafita 


n Comjwn 


v " 













* The examination may be made and the list signed by any Commissioned Officer 
of the Company. 

At sounding of "Sick-Call," fixed at such hour as the 
commander of the post or camp may determine, the First 
Sergeant proceeds to the hospital with such patients as he 
may have authority to take, and submits his book to the 



46 ART OF WAR. 

Surgeon, who examines each man in turn and prescribes for 
him, taking such as may require closer attention into the 
hospital for treatment, returning the others to their com- 
pany, marking them for ''duty" or "sick in quarters." 
Each case should be, if practicable at the time, diagnosed, 
and the cause of sickness entered on the book. This must, 
however, be done as soon as the diagnosis is made, in order 
that the records of the individual may be complete and to 
enable, the First Sergeant to make out his Muster Roll prop- 
erly. 

The. First Sergeant, after all his men have been examined 
and his report signed by the Surgeon, returns to his orderly 
room or tent, and makes out his " Morning Report," in a 
book furnished for that purpose from the Adjutant General's 
office, a specimen page of which is here inserted : 



48 



ART OF WA 
Remarks for the Month o 



No change. 

( ist. Lt. Green from duty to sick. Sergt. Jones from du 
-< Pvts. Hall and Green from duty to confinement. Pvtb 
(Recruits Smithers, Nixon and Gould, assigned to com] 

Pvt. Maxey from sick to duty. 

f 2d Lt. Warren and Pvts. Jordan and Black from dut 
\ to duty. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 
Morning Reports of Captain Henry M. Stanton's Company D., of the Twenty-fourth Regiment of Infantry, Army of the United States, Colonel Thompson Henderson, for the tnonth of May, 1885. 





PRESENT. 


ABSENT. 


PRESENT 

& ABSF.NT. 


ALTERATIONS SINCE LAST REPORT. 








SIGNATURE 

OF THE 

FIRST SERGEANT. 






For Duty. 


sp £ al 


"LET 


°™ Y 


S.CK. 


,N 7ShT t . con - 


I 


3 


H 

63 
63 
61 


1 1 


M 


\\ 


j 


it 


£ 
O 

*E 

E 

1 


i 


g 




- 


- 


O 

I 

(3 

3 
3 

3 


60 

63 


I 
66 


<■: 
66 





Gain. 


Loss. 











if 


Enlisted men. 


COM^O^ICEE, 
















U 




I 


7 


1 


i 
< 


a. 
40 
36 


3 

3 


u 


\ 


\ 


£ 


s 


i 


i 


1 


I 


§ 

3 
3 
3 
3 




i 
z 

= 
= 



i 


~ 


1 
< 


2 




1 


\ 


" 


• 
- 


1 

j 
: 

i 
B 


= 

- 


i 


I 


I 


1 


j 


| 


1 


C 

E 
55 


1 


£ 


| 


I 




i 

e 


i 
= 



w 




"•?■ 
§ 




1 


E 

I 
O 

7 
= 

E 
6 


1 


1 
1 
= 

E 
U 




1 
O 

1 

'? 

E 
E 


\ 


1 


1 


< 

E 

E 


1 

H 




c 

L 

E 
3 


1 


1 


H 


£ 


8 

q 

E 




1 

3 


1 

- 


1 




j 


Died. 


] '^charged. 




i 
- 


Died. 


< 


1 
p 


< 


8 


8 
E 

I 


SIGNATURE 


1 


A 


I 
z 


I 


5 


d 


■5 



| 




•v' 

I 

z 


COMP'Y COMMANDER. 






: 




5 


4 
3 


2 












'■ 








Cileries Mayer 

l/liark-s Maver 

l/liarles Mayer 

Charles Mayer 


Wm. H. Morris, Capt. 
Win. H. Morris. 
Wm. H. Morris. 
Wm. H. Morris. 



ART OF WAR. 
Remarks for the Month of May, /SSj 



I rst. Lt. Green from duty to sick. Sergt. Jones from duty tc 
< Pvts. Hall and Green from duty to confinement. Pvts. Maxey, White and Br 
(Recruits Smithes, Nixon and Gould, assigned to company. 

Pvt. Maxey from sick to duty. 

Black from duty to detached service. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 49 

This report must show the exact status of every man in 
the company ; changes which have occurred since the pre- 
ceding day's report must be noted in the figures on the 
face of the report, and on the back a remark in detail with 
the name of each man for whom the change is made, 
whether it be officer or soldier. It is then signed by the 
First Sergeant, taken to the company Commander for veri- 
fication by his signature, and then left at the Adjutant's of- 
fice — all of which must be done by 8 o'clock a. m. 

All passes for enlisted men must be sent in with the 
morning report (see form of pass ). 





Fort Strang, Neb., Jan. 20, 1885. 


3 s 


Private Wm. F. Prescott, Co. D., 4th Art., has permission to be 


absent from the garrison from 4 o'clock P. M. 20th inst., until 9 




o'clock A. M. 21st inst. 


* 


Approved B. F. Starr, 




By order of Colonel Larcin ; Capt. Stk Art., Com'g. 


Chas. F. Stowe, 1st Lt. &> Adj't 4th Art. 


-< - 


Post Adjutant. 



The next duty on the day's programme will be guard- 
mounting. The time for this is published in orders to the 
command, and it is usually at 9 o'clock in the morning; or 
while on the march, after arriving in camp. At the sound 
of " the assembly" for this ceremony, the detail for guard 
falls in, and is inspected by the First Sergeant. If any man 
is found unsuitable, the supernumerary is taken, the man 
relieved, and another detailed to take his place, and the 
Sergeant will proceed with his detail as described under 
"Guard-mounting," page 169. 

Following after guard-mounting, there will be at most of 
the posts, during the summer season, company or squad 
drill ; if the former, the company must be formed at the 
hour mentioned, by the First Sergeant, and eported to the 
company Commander ; if squad drill, then the squad will be 
formed and drilled by the non-commissioned officer de- 
tailed to take charge. From this time to dinner call the 
First Sergeant must be about the company quarters, to ob- 
serve the order and cleanliness of the same and see that the 
3 D 



50 ART OF WAR. 

preparations for dinner are being carried out ; and when the 
dinner call is sounded, to see that the men come to the table 
in an orderly manner and get their proper allowance of 
food. 

At 12 o'clock noon " orderly call " sounds, when the 
First Sergeant repairs to the headquarters of the post or 
camp, where his " morning report" is returned to him, to- 
gether with a list of the non-commissioned officers and 
number of men required for guard. He must also, at this 
time, take copies of all orders issued during the past twenty- 
four hours, and immediately notify the company officers of 
their purport. 

During the afternoon the First Sergeant makes a list of 
the names of the non-commissioned officers and privates 
required for guard on the following day, and posts the 
same in the company barracks or camp, and calls the 
names of the detail at "retreat" roll-call. 

Should there be drill in the afternoon, the company or 
squad will be formed as directed for morning drill. ' 

The details for daily duty in the company will be made 
as follows : ist, for Guard ; 2d, Supernumerary of the guard ; 
3d, Room orderly; 4th, Cook's police. Should a fatigue 
detail be required from headquarters it will be made next 
after the supernumerary detail. 

At the hour designated for dress-parade (or in place of 
it, retreat roll-call) the First Sergeant will form his company 
in such dress and equipment as may be required ; and if 
there should be dress-parade, and no officer with the 
company, he marches it to the parade-ground, forms it 
with the battalion, and takes his place on the right of the 
company. 

There are no specified duties for the First Sergeant be- 
tween retreat and tattoo. At the latter call he forms his 
company, calls the roll, and reports the result to the officer 
whose duty it is to receive it. In the absence of a com- 
pany officer, or any other detailed for duty with the com- 
pany, the First Sergeant reports the result to the Adjutant 
or other officer designated to take his place. 

At " taps " — generally designated to be sounded fifteen 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 5 1 

minutes or half an hour after tattoo, the First Sergeant's 
daily duty is completed. 

Every Saturday the First Sergeant utilizes all the men of 
the company not on other duties in scrubbing the barrack 
rooms, mess-hall and kitchen, preparatory to Sunday morn- 
ing inspection. This is also done the day before the last 
day of each month, preparatory to monthly inspection. 

The First Sergeant forms the company on all occasions 
when it parades as a company for any duty, unless specially 
excused. He countersigns all passes for enlisted men, 
causes to be made timely requisitions for rations, clothing, 
fuel, lights, stationery. If possible the First Sergeant 
should be free from the care of making out papers. In the 
field he should always carry a good sized pocket-memoran- 
dum book, in which to keep the rosters for duty (in event 
of being detached from the field-desk), and such other data 
as will enable him to complete the itinerary of the march 
and the record of events for his returns and Muster Rolls. 
In this he should also keep the numbers of each rifle, car- 
bine or revolver that is in the hands of the men, so that in the 
event of loss or accidental exchange at night or other time, 
the arm may be traced. 

The First Sergeant is the highest non-commissioned of- 
ficer in these organizations, and next to the. captain is the 
one upon whom much of the discipline and well-being of 
the company depends. He is appointed from among the 
Sergeants of the company by the Captain, and holds his 
place at his, the captain's will. 

Company Clerk. 

Next to those of the First Sergeant, the duties of the 
Clerk are the most important in the company. The rec- 
ords, together with the returns, requisitions, reports of tar- 
get practice, etc., are so voluminous as to keep him almost 
constantly employed. His first attention should be given 
to the Descriptive Book, in which is kept a full description 
of every man, including his date of enlistment, together 
with his record while in service, good or bad. 



52 



ART OF WAR. 



Model Page of Descriptive Book. 

James H. Williamson, Company " G," Thirtieth Regiment of Infantry, joined 
July 21st, 1880, at Fort Concho, Texas. 

Born at Columbus, Ohio ; Age, 26 ; Occupation, painter. Enlisted July 6th, 1880, 
at New York City, N. Y., by 1st Lieut. H. E. Tryall, 7th Arty., for five years. 
Eyes, hazel ; hair, light ; complexion, ruddy ; height, 5 feet, 6% inches. 

Personal Marks. — Foul anchor on right arm ; Goddess of Liberty on left. 

Former Service. — (Whatever shown by previous discharges from the U. S. Army.) 

Additional Pay. — Entitled to $2 per month for 5 years' continuous service [or 
whatever entitled to by discharge shown] 

Record. 

Appointed Corporal July 1, 1882, per R. O., No. 50, C. S 
geant August 1st, 1884, per R. O., No. 62, C. S. 

Character given on discharge. — Excellent as 
whatever it may be]. 

Married or single. 



promoted to be Ser- 
soldier ; also a good carpenter [or 



Record of Deposits. 



Date of Deposit. 


Amount. 


Paymaster. 


March 13, 1881 


70 


00 


Major Tarrant. 





Record of Final Statements given to Sergeant James H. Williamson. 
He was last paid by Paymaster Van Dusen, U. S. A., to include the 30th day of 
June, 1885, and has pay due from that date to date of discharge. 



Due Soldier. 


dolls 


CTS. 


Due United States. 


DOLLS 


CTS. 


For — years continuous service 






For clothing overdrawn . 






For Retained pay 

For Clothing not drawn in kind . 
For Deposits as per above record. 


72 
70 


OO 

75 
00 


























Station— Fort Del Norte, I. T. 
Date— July 20th, 1885. 






William Bouti 
Caff. 30th Inf., Comd'g 


JLLE, 

Co. "G 





The next in importance is the Clothing Book, in which is 
entered every article of clothing drawn by any man of the 
company. At the end of June and December the accounts 
are balanced ; those who are indebted to the U. S. will be 
charged on the muster-rolls of those months, with the full 
amount of balance due the Government. Any balance 
due the soldier will be carried to his credit on the succeed- 
ing six months, and from that time to the date of discharge, 
if he never overdraws his allowance. (See form opposite.) 



53 



The Unitei" 




Company "G," 




him during hit. 




knowledged. 




V 


c 








V 














*~2 


>, 


n 




>i 






i^t 


c 




cc 










c 






M. 


n 


Y 










W « 














July. 


so'isso 


27 < s 


1 


Oct. . 


9 x88o 


30 • . 


1 6 


Jan . 


101S81 


10 . . 




April. 


12 
• 


18I2 


5 1 • 




Jan . 


10 


.885 


■J: 





THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



Model Form of Clothing Book. 




























The United States in account with James H. Williamson, of 
Company "G," Thirtieth Regiment of Infantry, for Clothing issued 
him during his enlistment, the money value of each issue beinsr ac- 


Date of En- 


Grades or Ranks, 
Dates of Charges. 


Record of Clothing Drawn. 


knowledged. 


Jiily ii, 1880. 


Corporal July I, 1882 
Sergeant [Aug. 1,1884 


X 


| 


1 
O 

s 


E 

I 

• 


2 


■2 
2 


= 


1 
- 


• 
: 


6 


8 


5 r 







g 


H 


{ 


1 

Q 


n 


P 




Remarks. 


S,a»™« 


Witness. 


S ° 


M 


D Y. 


*7 

3° 

5 





\ 


'J 
3-' 
6 


29 

3- 
'7 
H-" 
16 

■5 


O 

57 
70 

;.; 

70 
70 


M. 

Dec.' 
fit. 

fiss 




31 

3" 
3' 
30 
31 
30 
31 


Y. 

1880 
1881 

1882 
.883 

18S3 
1 88+ 
188, 
.885 
1885 


z i 


i i 




J. H. Williamson 
J. H.Williamson 
J. H.Williamson 


H.Fry.istL'.^tnlnf. 
T.Eels,2d-t. 3 olhInr. 
H.Fry,Tsll.t. 3 thlnf. 

H.Fry,.stLt.30thinf. 
J.EelMdLt.joth Inf. 




Ian ! 


39 

5° 

S3 
103 
119 

■4. 
14D 


28 

38 

3S 

3? 
7S 
98 


J, 


Charged on M & P.R 


6 








Jan \ 


i'o 


1685 


•1- 


Date of discharge . . 


J H.Williamson 
J. H.'wiliia'm'so'n 





THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 55 

If possible, the company clerk should not have control 
of the clothing book. As the captain is responsible to the 
Government for the clothing issued, he alone should keep 
the book, or if he gives the keeping to the clerk, he should 
frequently inspect it, to see that all accounts are right. 

The Order Book comes next. All orders affecting the 
company or any officer or man thereof should be entered 
in this, no matter from what source received. In extensive 
printed orders, only the heading and that part which affects 
the company should be entered. General orders from the 
War Department and from the Geographical Department 
in which the company is serving, should be kept as a run- 
ning file — a copy of every one issued, no matter of what 
purport, being furnished the company for this purpose. 

A Letters Received Book, together with an Index book, is 
another of the permanent record books of the company, in 
which should be entered all letters or endorsements per- 
taining to it, the index to which should be kept double — 
that is, the name of the party or parties to whom it refers, as 
well as the subject of the communication, should be 
entered under the proper letters of the alphabet. 
• The Letters Sent Book, also with an Index, is kept in the 
same manner as the letters received. 

The Target Record is a book in which must be entered the 
number of points made by every shot that is fired at the 
target by either officers or men. 

The Company Fund Book is one in which must be entered 
the proceedings of the Company Council of Administration, 
together with the receipts from the sale of surplus rations, 
and the expenditures made for all articles purchased for 
the Company. 

In addition to the above books, which are required to 
be kept by orders from the War Department, every Com- 
pany clerk will find it to his advantage to keep a book in 
which to enter all matters, such as fines of Courts-Martial, 
stoppages for losses of Ordnance stores or Camp or Garri- 
son Equipage, etc., and all data which will enable the 
clerk to make up the muster-rolls correctly, and in which 
can also be entered the number of each rifle, carbine, or 
pistol in the hands of the men of the Company. 



56 ART OF WAR. 

The Morning Report, Descriptive Book, and the Cloth- 
ing Account Book, are furnished from the Adjutant 
General's Office ; the Order book, Letters Received, and 
Letters Sent books, with separate indexes, are furnished by 
the Quartermaster's Department; and the Target Record 
by the Ordnance Department ; those from the Adjutant 
General and Ordnance Department on a simple application 
by letter, while those from the Quartermaster's Depart- 
ment have to be obtained on special requisition for Cloth- 
ing, Camp and Garrison Equipage, through the Post or 
Regimental Quartermaster. All other books described 
must be obtained as blank books from the Quartermaster's 
Department on requisition, and ruled to suit the purposes 
for which they are prescribed. 

In addition to the books required to be kept, numerous 
returns and reports have to be made, as follows : 

The First Day of Each Month. 

Monthly Return of Company. 

The annexed specimen form exhibits it in all its particu- 
lars: 



57 



>uth 


of January, 


1885. 


























' 


return. 


Memoranda. 




Loss. 






Horses. 


Pieces of 
artillery. 


i 

1 

c 



M 

s 

3 


Enlisted men. 




































• Discharged. 






Died. 

























u 






























"o 


























- 


- 


£. 


g "3 

at 








•d 


C . 

o_ 


da 


c 





•d 


6 




c 

T3 


'3 
- 
u 

r. 


2 





c 







c 


— 

E 

O 

a 


- 


z 
Pn 


U 

pq 


3 
>> 

pq 






a 
a 

s- 

'- 


u 
C 





'1 


- 
Q 


be 

4) 

fib 

< 


-a 



U 
1) 

Pi 


a) 


> 

c 


.s 

0) 

O 




■d 


c 

3 
O 


— 
~z 
6 
Z 


i 






















I 






68 












• 



:CORD OF EVENTS. 

1 of it, has been engaged ; scouts, marches, changes of stations, &c. — 
scipline, efficiency, or service of the company, will be minutely and care- 
arched, &c, &c. 

■lissing, or -wounded in action, with ^fofe and place, will be accurately noted-. 
j/ate, lost in service, together with the date, place, and circumstances con- 
le officer responsible for or owning the property, will be reported. 

Co. G.j 6th Cavalry, marched from Fort Selfish to Fort Arbitrary, for the 
miles. Nothing of military interest occurred during the march. Plenty of 
snient camping places all along the route. 

Henry Jones, 
Capt. bth Cav., Commanding the Company. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



O.mmi 
olTic 
























Return 


j/ Ca/Va 




^» 


■y 


Jones, 


Compel 


y 


c 


, ,/**< 


6th 


Regiment of Cav., 


Army of 


the 


United Stales 


,>■ 


flic month 


»/> 


NMiy, 


1885. 


























Present. 


Absent. 


Present and Absent. 


Alterations since last monthly return. 


Memoranda. 




Enlisted men. 


Commissioned 
officers. 


Enlisted men. 


Commissioned 


Enlisted men. 


< 


1 

1 

l 
< 


Gain. 


Loss. 


I 


iS 


Horses. 


artillery. 


I 




- r 


[ 

i 
'- - 


t 


2 
Z 




i 
| 




: 


s 


s 


> 


1 


H 


O 


? 


1 


i 




1 


L 


3 


1 


j 
i 

< 


a 

E 

1 
H 

3 


1 

| 


E 


1 


u 


! 


s 


s 
1 


J 


i 


1 

is 


, 


H 


Commission'd 
officers. 


Enlisted men. 


«1 


Commissioned 


Enlisted men. 


1 


1 
1 
68 


| 

1 


1 


a 


1 


1 


fe 




i 


1 




- 
E 

■L 

E 

'i 


w 


I 


Z 


1 
1 


1 
E 




1 


(5 


1 




Died. 


Discharged. 




^ 


Died. 


s 


Q 


£ 


i. 




2 


H 


i 


a 


1 




: -~ 


1 




E 


3 




■ 3 


5 2 


' 


3 


4 


6 3 












4 


. 


V 


65 


68 


66 











ABSENT ENLISTED MEN, ACCOUNTED FOR BY NAME. 

I men absent at any time dnnne: the month will be reporied under this hew. I, but only those who IT 
f the month should be shown in figures. The nature, commencement, termination, and place of abs. 



No 


Name. 


Rank. 


Date. 


Where. 


Duty or cause. 


From— 


To- 


\ 


Timothy H.iskin 

Patrick SI. union 

Michael Hunt 


Private .... 
Private .... 
Private .... 


Jan! U\**S '■ 


Jan. i 7 , 1885 


Dayton, 0. . . 
Chicago, 111. . . 
Chicago, 111. . . 


15 days furlough 











fully noted, with da!.: , /lac. 
Note 2. — The name and rank of the offi 
Note 3.— The number of horses either ] 



:H ukl> OF EVENTS. 



: offid 



ce ot the company, will be tmt, 

n, with date and place, will he a 
;r with the date, place, and cin 
iwning the property, will be reported. 



Under S. O. No 27, Hdqrs. Dept. of the A 

purpose of changing station. Distance march 
wood and water, and hue grazing lor animals ; 
Station.— fori Arbitrary, Kansas. 



, Co. G. ,6th Cavalry, marched from Fort Selfish to Fort Arbitrary, forth 
niles. Nothing of military interest occurred during the march. Plenty c 
nient camping places all along the route. 

Henry Jones, 
Capt. 6th Cav., Commanding the Company. 



ART OF WAR. 



Return of Captain , Company ( ), of the Regiment of 

O.M MISSIONED OFFICERS, PRESENT AND ABSENT, ACCOUNTED FOR BY NAME. 
Iiu date (with No., date, &c , of order) at which an officer is assigned or transferred In, Joins 






:h an officer is assigned or trans/ci 
nmand of it. <>r Imm .my speeial .In 
?. and date of order, the reasons fc 



of those' resigned, died, &c. , or transferred from 



sen. e. an.! /,,-/,.,/ assigned fol 
Note c.-After tin list olansiNr ,.|l,c..-r- will follow the i„ 
m e. rH? ny ' w i. th No -' date > &C-. °f order, da1P, ilact 

JNOTE 0.— Ulin lis ..| ,,,„,., ,„._, ,„,,.,,[,„„ s , rviii- „ |U| ,„. :m ,„ |„.,| ,,, ,|ic t [..mv for dntv, will I": borne in red ink at the 

foot of the list .-I offi. trs i|„,s. ..l.s.ntasthe case maybe), but will not he included in the tigiin 



i of Notes i 



uli also be observed i 



jas. D. Ve 
i P. Hoi 



Capt. and Bvt. Major. . iCommandinsr Company 

'lent With Company and A. A. Q.M. and A. Q. of Post per Orders 

No. 17, Fon Arbitrary, (an. 20,1885. 
eut With Company 



rmy of the United States, for the month of 



7.— The date, b=c., ofall tri, 
No. and date of ordei 
discharges, deaths, t 



iSS . — Conliiiuctl. 



(To be accounted for t 



RETURN OF 
Company (G), 6th Regiment of Cavalry. 
For the month of January, /gSj. 



Fort Arbitrary, Ka 



Re-enlisted in 
Assigned to I 
" , C. S. 



per Orders No. 3, Hdqrs.,6th 



c or the month of — — , iS 

TURN AMONG THE 
N. 

o or from the company (with 
apprehensions, surrenders, 
is, &*c, will be accurately 
harge, death, desertion, &c. 

in the same order as on the 



-Continued. 

RETURN OF 
Company (G), 6th Regiment of Cavalry. 
For the month of January, i88j. 



Place. 



. Fort Arbitrary, Kan 



Jan. 17, 



REMARKS. 



Re-enlisted in Co. 

Assigned to Co. per Orders No. 3, Hdqrs., 6th 

Cav., C. S. 
Assigned to Co. per Orders No. 1, Hdqrs., Cav. 

Rec. Serv., C. S. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 59 

This return includes everything that takes place in the 
Company up to 12 o'clock midnight, of the last day of 
the month ; and if serving at a Post or Fort, the retained 
or duplicate copy is sent to the Post Headquarters, in 
order that the post return may be made correctly, while 
the original is forwarded to the Regimental Adjutant. If 
the regiment is in the field, then the original is merely sent 
as usual to the Regimental Headquarters. 

Food is furnished to troops in the shape of what are 
termed "rations," these being obtained from the Subsis- 
tence Department of the Army, on "ration returns," sent 
in for the approval of the regimental, post, or detachment 
commander, on the ioth, 20th, and last days of each month, 
and sometimes oftener, in the field. All men who are 
taking meals, or are fed from the company mess, must be 
included. Those in hospital or absent on detached 
service must not be included in the number for which the 
rations are drawn. 

With the Company Commander's permission, a married 
man or men may be allowed to draw upon a separate 
return, (usually made out at the first of the month, to in- 
clude the entire month,) in order that they may be better 
able to take care of their families. 

A ration is the established daily allowance of food for 
one person. For the United States Army, it is composed 
as follows : 

12 oz. of pork or bacon, or ij£ lbs. of fresh beef, or 1 
lb. 6 oz. of salt beef; 

1 lb. 2 oz. of soft bread or flour, or 16 oz. of hard bread, 
or 1^ lbs. corn meal; 

15 lbs. of beans or peas to every 100 rations, or 10 lbs. 
of rice or hominy ; 

10 lbs. of green coffee, or 8 lbs. of roasted (or roasted 
and ground) coffee, or 2 lbs. of tea to 100 rations; 

15 lbs. of Sugar, ") 
4 qts. of Vinegar, | 
4 lbs. of Soap, J- to 100 rations. 
4 lbs. of Salt, 
4 oz. of Pepper, 



6o 



ART OF WAR. 



Per 



ioo 



Rations. 



In lieu of flour 

In lieu of the usual 
meat portion 



In lieu of the dry veg- 
etable portion 



And to troops in the field when necessary, 4 lbs. of 
yeast powder to the 100 rations of flour, and 1 lb. 8 oz. 
of adamantine or star candles. And when troops are 
traveling by cars, stages, transports, or otherwise than on 
the march, or when for short periods they may be so 
separated from cooking facilities as to render it impracti- 
cable to cook their rations : 

112^ lbs. of soft 
bread or 100 lbs. ot 
hard bread. 
' ; 5 lbs. canned fresh 
beef, or 75 lbs. can- 
ned corned beef. 
33.1 lb. cans baked 
beans, or 20.2 lb. 
cans baked beans, 
or 15.5 lb. cans 
(^ baked beans. 
And liquid coffee may also be furnished under the above 
circumstances of traveling, in lieu of the coffee and sugar 
portion of the ration, provided the cost does not exceed 
twenty-one cents per man per day. 

The following form must always be prepared in order to 
draw rations from the Subsistence Department: 



R; 



62 ART OF 



RATION-R] 



Co , Resft o 



FOR THE PERI 



day of 



day of . . 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



RATION-RETURN of M Company, jth Regiment of Cavalry, stationed at Fort Mahone for 10 days, commencing 
the 1st day of January, /SSj, and ending the loth day of January, iSSj. 





z 
z 


(2 

£ 




NUMBER OF RATIONS OF— 


REMARKS. 


8 
z 
■s 

] 
z 


° 


i 


I 


1 

30° 


\ 


1 




3 


J 


480 


a 


E 


1 


I 

i 
1 


i 


1 


i 




H 


l 


> 

48. 





480 


480 


480 


^ 




Strength of Co. . . 54 
In H, -.piial ... 2 
In Confinement. 3 
Married men ..16 

48 



Cot. 31 



C S. will issue on the above rel 
Ben. Y. Worrom, 
i Reg t of Inf., Comd'gPost. 

-Rations should ordinarily be dr; 

The sick in hospital, and authoi 



'hen troops .tic detached from a post > 
li<; furnished by the Commissary of s 
led by 'him, and the rations ( 



, will 



n(i:niv /'■'■.'. 
ed for by t 



: Medii 



Officer in charge, 






be deducted from ih 
govern the hospital 
iny, hospital, or mess 



from whom r 

issue referred to in the 

Abstract of Issues. Simi 

Every Ration-Return upon \ 



re discharged from hospital 
seinr.it.lv from their organized o 
f the Ration-Return, 
nmand, the Commanding Officer of each company or smaller detachment will 
iost or command with a certificate setting forth the date to which rations were 
tificate will be presented to the Commissary, 



orl.itic.itL-, and transmit the 
ir certificates will, under lilo 
'hich issues have been made 









on- Return the name of the officer who i 
the Commissary-General of Subsistence 
be given to employes entitled to rations, 
entered on the proper Abstract. 



ART OF WAR. 



RATION-RETURN 



FOR THE PERIOD PROM 






day of 188 



»VAR. 



lTURN 



OD FROM 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



63 



Should any soldier desire to purchase any stores kept by 
the Subsistence Department, other than his rations, he may 
be allowed to do so by sending in a request as follows : 

Fort Omaha, Neb., March 16, 18S2. 
The A. C. S.* will sell to Prvt. Hanscomb, Co. " K." 254 V. R. C, for cash, the 
following subsistence stores, viz.: Two (2) cans Peaches, one (1) Ham, one (1) box 
Crackers, or whatever the stores may be. 
Approved : By order of Colonel Nicart. Clark James, 

Pierce Butler, Captain 254 V. R. C. 

1st Lieut. &> Adjt. 4th Inf. 6r> Past. 

The following report must be furnished the Post or 
Regimental Adjutant every Sunday morning : 

List of Extra and Daily Duty Men of Company £., 4th Infantry, 
for the zveek ending January 26, 1885. 



3 Name. 



Rank. 



How Employed. 



Date of 
Detail. 



Authority. 



EXTRA DUTY. 



Jos. A. Tubbs 
Wm. Smith . . 
James Dunn . 



Serg't . 
Private 



Charge of Working partv 
Teamster of Q.M.D. . .' 
School teacher 

DAILY DUTY. 



Sept. 1, i88 4 ;Or. No. 84,18 
Oct. 10,1884 Or. N0.95.1E 
Aug. 5, 1884 Or No. 70,18 



I 


Thos. J. Krebbs. 
Sam'l S. Nibbs . 


Corp'l. 


In ch. Co. Kitchen . . . 


Jan. 1, 


1885. 


Co. Com 'r. 


2 


Private 


Co. Cook 


" x ) 


i8Ss. 


" 


1 


Frank North . . 


" 


" 


" x > 


1885. 


" 


4 


Simeon Pratt . . 


" 


Co. Clerk 


Apr. 2, 


1883. 


" 


5 


Thos. J. Royall. 




Post Baker 


Oct. 1, 


1884. 


Post Com'r. 



Fort Mahoa, Nebraska, 
July 2b, i88j. 



B. F. Starr, 
Capt. 4th Inf., Commanding Co. 



: A. C. S., Assistant Commissary of Subsistence. 






66 ART OF WAR. 

Voucher No <" • » Abstract K, ..... . Quartef , 188 . 

Captain Barnwell Holmes, 

igth Infantry. 

Special Requisition. 



To be in duplicate : one copy to be retained by the officer who issues the property, 
one to be sent to the Quartermaster General with Abstract K, at the end of the 
quarter. 

The cost of articles issued or transferred on special requisition and orders of com* 
mandine officers, will be entered on the requisition and on the list or invoice furnished 
the receiving officer. 

If the Quartermaster has the property on hand, he will take the receipt of the offi- 
cer to whom he issues or transfers it on this form, and will file it with Quarterly Ab- 
stract K. 

If the Quartermaster has not the property on hand, he will submit the Special 
Requisition to the commanding officer for orders 

If he is ordered to purchase it, the requisition, with the order, will be filed with 
the purchase vouchers. 






THE LINE ( 



REQUISITION for Fuel, Forage, Straw, Illuminating Supplies, and Marion 

Nebraska, on the ist day of_ 





NUMBER OF— 


F1 E 




Period. 


13 
a 



z 
U 


e 



"J? 

"0 
c 
te 

13 
p 



■-J 


c 
'3 
0. 


c 
r. 

2 


u 

*J 

Ha 

rt 

z 


4) 

> 



IB 

O 

U 
30 


u 

yi 

a) 

u 
"O 

c 

3 
rt 


1 
O 

m 

> 




X 


3 
- 


tr. 

u 

3 
3 


E 


Woo 






WHEF 


By WHOM OR FOR 

WHAT PURPOSE 

REQUIRED. 


1 




i 


>> 

3 




CO 






£ 


=' 


■a 

'J 


— 




Command'gOffi- 
cer, Co. "0," 
2d Battn, 41st 
Independents. 


1885 
May 1 


1885 
May 31. 


31 








Boston, IV 
Baltimore 
New Yorl 
Buffalo, > 

Cleveland 

"New Yorl 
NewOrlea 

.Camden, 
Fort Mam 


Required j 

On hand to be deducted 




To BE SUPPL 


IED . . 





























I certify that the above requisition is correct and just ; that the artic 
Approved : 

H. A. Dayton, Lt. Col. 8th Inf., Commanding 



.Fort Mac( 
New York 



Received at Fort Omaha, Nebraska, on the first day of May, 1? 
specified in the above requisition. 
(signed in duplicate.) 



JerseyCif 

, of istLieu Sa i emM 
Chicago, 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



















1 


V 


r<- 


j>4 


a, 




/ 


he 




a 1 


oy 


e/ 


; 


fete 


y< 


ii 


Sj 


• ( 


See page 


64 


•) 




































NUMBER OF— 


FUEL. 


FORAGE. 


< 

1 




ARTICLES FOR 
LAMPS. 


Lanterns. 






Period. 


| 


i 


u 


1 


4 


= 
c 


3° 




X 


l 


t 


| 


Wood. 


Coal. 


: 


| 


1 


' 


^ 


1 


| 
O 


1 


3 
> 


6 


t 


i 

i 

J 


1 




i 


- 


IS 




i 


REQUIRED, 


1 
£ 

s 


I 


3 1 


1 

X 


1 


1 


->5 


1 

59 6 = 


S 




■3 







CJ 






: j 






* 


I 


1 


£ 


! 




7 



8 


V. 

6 
6 


'6 




•i. 


•i 


y- 


* 


£ 


* 


V. 






< 


1 


Ct.nniii.niil'^l )fti- 
cer, (Jo. ; 'U," 
2 d Battn, 41st 
Independents. 


IS85 

May 1 


1885 
May 31. 








. 


Requikbd 1 


■ 1 480 


• 


- 


« 


TO BE SUPPLIED 




















Jutj-J 




. . . . 1 480 




8 


6 


6 












6 



Received at Fort Omaha, Nebrasl 
specified in the above requisition. 

(SIGNED IN DUPLICATE.) 



the above requisition is correct and just : that the articles required have imt heeu previi.u- 
Dayton, Lt. Col. 8th Inf. , Commanding 

first day of May, 1885, of 1st Lieut. Byron MacGhee, 2d Bat! 



\vn for any part of the time above charged. 
D. V. Knowles, 
Captain 2d Battn., 4Jst hid., Contd'g Co. " O.' 

t Ind., A. A. Quartermaster, U.S. A., alltheartic 



ART OF WAR. 



(See page 64.) 

Voucher No , Abstract G, 

quarter, 18 . 

REQUISITION 

FUEL, FORAGE, STRAW, ILLUMINATING SUPPLIES, 
AND MATCHES, 



REQUIRED BY 

Capt. D. Y. Knowles, 2d Battn., 41st Ind. t 

Comd'g Company "(9," 

Issued May ist > 1885. 



..*. „«py retained by issuing officer 
,/uarierniasi.er General with Abstract G. 
This form of requisition is used for a po 
le officer of whatsoever rank. 

» .is a consolidated requisition t 

;u of the receipt, certify that he has issued all the ar 
The approval of the commanding officer is require^, v .„ 
■e regulated by him, such as fuel to hospital, guard-house, chapet, 
' ( " — detachment is 



To be in duplicate; 
Quartermaster Genera 

tis form of requisition is used for a post, regiment, company, d 
nent, and single officer of whatsoever rank. 
When used as a consolidated requisition the Post Quartermaster \ 
all the articles specified, 
'5 required only for 



The actual strength of the troop, company, or detacl 
sidered in determining the quantity of the supplies iss 
natiug purposes. 



)F THE ARMY. 



68 



Matches for Company O, 2d Battn., j.T± 
May, 1885. (See page 64.) 



J 


EL 










FORAGE. 


<; 
ft 

H 


MINERAL OIL. 






Coal. 


c 

- 
■z 

2 
ft 

7 


a 

U 

■a 

c 

3 
Z 
ft 


>> 

Id 


>> 


u 

'J 
— 
— 


ft 


fcio 

c 

-5 

V 

ft 

1- 

fa 


J2 

d 
z 

6 
6 

1 






5 


g 

J: 
c 

< 

— 
= 

= 
c 

ft 


3 
O 

B 

1 

U! 

•c 

B 
3 
O 
ft 

5962 
5962 

5962 


E 


- 


— 
U 


fa 
_ 


B 


■a 

c 



ft 


•0 
5 



ft 


•a 

B 

O 

ft 


•a 

B 
3 
O 
ft 

480 
480 

480 




7 

T 


C 

8 
8 

8 




6 
'6 

6 1 



ired have not been previously drawn for any part o 

Captain 2d Bait 

t. Byron MacGhee, 2d Battn., 41st Ind., A. A. Quai 



The aut 
The kirn 



Captain 2d Battn 



7o 



Muster-roll of Captain George C. Marion 



No, 



NAMES. 

PRESENT AND ABSENT. 

(Commissioned and non- 
commissioned officers 
according to rank. Pri- 
vates in alphabetical 
order.) 



George C. Marion. . 
Walter F. Simms . . 
Frank B. Summers 

Benjamin F. Stone 
John L. Hyde . . 
James Cleary . . . , 
Anson M Clarke . , 
Nathan W. Drum. , 

Frank Josephs . 
George Donahue 
Wm. Boston . . 
Henry Clyde . . 



John F. Bundle . 
Fred. L. Custom 

Thomas Larkin . 



Adams, Wm. B. 
Belton, Henrv M 



RANK. 



Captain . 
st Lieut. 
2d Lieut. 



ist Sergeant. 
Sergeant . . 
Sergeant . . 
Sergeant . . 
Sergeant . . 

Corporal . . 
Corporal . . 
Corporal . . 
Corporal . . 

Trumpeter. 
Trumpeter. 

Artificer . . 

Private . . 
Private . . 



8 Ap'l 
4 June 
[oSept. 



Boston, IV 
Baltimore 
New Yorl 



S Aug '82 Buffalo, I< 

8 Dec. '83 Cleveland 

7 July '81 New Yori 
5 Sept. '82 NewOrlea 

9 Oct. '83|Camden, 
4 Jan. '84 FortManf 



5 Mar. '84 
10 Jan. '84 

25 Ap'l '82 

9 Mch '84 
1 2 Oct. '83 



Fort Mac( 
New York 

JerseyCit; 

Salem, M 
Chicago, 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY 



ned officers, and others that 1 



preparation of this roll, are enjoined 1 



that it be made complete. It is not only the guide for immediate payment oi tne troops interested, but when filed 

Adjutant General's Office, it will become the record to which refetence will thereafter be made in the 

investigation and settlement of all claims or questions affecting officers and men 

whose names are borne on the roll, and their heirs, for 

the period covered by it.^ft 



INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREPARATION OF MUSTER-ROLLS. (See page 64.) 
fficers and enlisted men ar. 
joined or not. Care shot 



■ be taken up on the rolls limn tin- d tte -»f receipt ,.f notice of their assignment by competent authority, whether they have yet 




The use o( dots and of the word " ditto " is prohibited. 

Under the head of Remarks must be carefully stated opposite the name of the person c 

a. The date when any assignment takes effect, with the No., date, &c, of order therefor ; 

b, The date that any officer or enlisted man joins, whether originally "i fn.tn any absence; 
C. The date an officer assume or is relieved from any cominand or special duty; 

d. The description of any special, extra, or daily duty on which officers o L - enlisted men may be employed; 

e. All changes of rank by promotion, appointment, or reduction, with dates of same, and Nos., dates, &c, of orders ; 
/. All authorized stoppages, fines, sentences, with Nos., dates, &c, of orders; 

g. All cases of absence, the nature and commencement of, and periods authorized for same, with Nos., dates, &c, of orders, and this must be repeated on every 
roll while such absences continue ; and when the absence be on det.u he. I -ervice, sh.k, or in confinement, the place of absence must be set forth ; 

1 the performance of some duty, and the nature and location of wounds or 

t. All cases of confinement ; and when by civil authority the nature of the 
k. Everything else necessary to account fully for every individual, so as to i 
n noting stoppages to be made for losses of or damage to public property, the 
in gross amount for each. 

5. Additional pay, due under sec. 2, act of Aug. 4, 1854, will De tnus noted, viz ; $2 per month for five years' continuous service ; #3 per month for ten years' continu- 
for fifteen years' . i.mimi.His service, &c; that due under sees. 1216 and 128s. Revised statutes, thus : ■• Pur certificate of merit, 

ier is entitled to reenlisted pay under sec. 3, act of May 15, 1872, the fact will be stated as follows ; " Entitled to re-enlisted pay." 

6. The names of those belonging to the company, battery, or troop, will be immediately followed by those of the officers and enlisted men who have ceased to belong 

to it since last muster. These will be classed in the following order, vi/ : Discharged, transkned . died, deserted ; and the utmost part icularil v will be observed 
in the remark- c-ikeniing them ; dates and uLo es will in every ease he .given; and Nos., dates, &c, of orders, or description of authority,' he il way cue- 
lully specified. \\ hen soldiers are retained in service beyond the period for which they were enlisted, as shown by the date of their enlistments, the causes 
of such retention must be stated. The names of soldiers discharged and re-enlisted, or who have deserter] and have joined from iksertMii since last muster, 
must be placed both in the body of the roll and under the appropriate headings as having been discharged, having deserted, &c. in cases of desertion, the 
facts, whether of apprehension or surrender, with dates and places, will be stated. 

7. The remark " discharge and final statements given " will be made opposite to the name of every discharged soldier to whom such papers have actually been given. 

'™- -. character given on the discharge will be noted on the roll. 

8. Upon the transfer, desertion, death, or discharge of a soldier, the balance for clothing due the United States, or due the soldier, will be entered upon the roll. 

9. The ruled columns for continuous-service pay and clothing must not be used for other purposes. 

, Actions in which the company, battery, troop, or any portion of it has been engaged, scouts, marches, changes of station, everything of interest relating to the dis- 
cipline, efficiency, or service of the command, will be minutely and carefully noted, with dates, places, distances marched, ixe.: and also names of men who 



[ Books of tactics, instructions, &c, and blank forms which have been superseded by others, will not be accounted for < 



this ,-,,11 



: days after each regular muster, the mustering officer will transmit to the Adjutant General U. S. Army a copy of the muster-roll of 1 
ry, or troop. Blanks will be supplied from the Adjutant General's Office, and will L " 



ART OF WAR. 
. . . , (AT,) of the Tenth Regiment of Cavalry, Army of the United State, < C ok 



George C. Man< 
Waller F. Simrv 
Frank B. Summ 



2 John L. Hyde . 

3 Jain' 5 ^'"cNrVt 
5 Nathan \V. Dru 

i Frank Josephs . 

2 George Donahue . 
M.VVm. Boston . 

I Henry Clyde 



. L. Custo 
Thomas Larkir 



7.1-lv' 

5§ept. 



tfoedrlcaiis.L.i 
I'oilMaivly.i'ol 



JerscyCity, N.J 

Salem. Miss . . 



C.ipt. Soincrs 
Lt. White . . 
Lt. Smith . . 
Lt. Fitch . . . 
Capt. Dove . 



John Strong 



30 June'8. 

.;. > Apri To 

IB 

30 June' 
30 June' 



ART OF WAR. 

. , {K,) of the Tenth Regiment of Cavalry, Army of the United States [Colon 



N LISTED. 




LAST 


PAID. 


DUE 
SOLDIER 
FOR CON- 
TINUOUS 


DUE U. S. 










z 

X 
H 
O 
J 
U 

c 
h 




:E. 


BY WHOM. 


PERIOD. 

Years. 


BY 
PAYMASTER. 


TO WHAT 
TIME. 


a 

a 

V 

> 


-5 
c 















Dolls. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Ci 


























Capt. Somers. 
Lt. White . . 


5 yrs. . 
5 yrs. . 
5 yrs. . 
5 yrs. . 
5 yrs. . 

5 yrs. . 
5 yrs. . 
5 y rs - • 
5 yrs. . 

5 yrs. . 
5 yrs. . 

5 yrs. . 

5 yrs. . 
5 YTS. • 


John Strong. 
A.S. Retow. 
John Strong. 
John Strong. 
John Strong. 

John Strong. 
John Strong. 
John Strong. 
John Strong. 

John Strong. 
Paydue from 


30 June'84 

30 April' 84 
30 June'84 
30 June'84 
30 June'84 

30 June'84 
30 June'84 
30 June'84 
30 June'84" 

30 June'84 

enlistment 


15 
5 


4 
2 










,Md. 
City. 










,". Y. . Lt. Fitch . . . 


10 


3 










, O. . Capt. Dove . 
: Citv. Lt. White . . 




































tf.J. . \\.t. Wheeler . 


i5 


3 










ly.Col. 

>n,CaL 
: City. 

/,N.J. 


Lt. Wherry . 

Capt. Benson. 
Capt. Adams. 

Lieut. Borden. 

Lieut. Bonney. 
Lieut. Small . 










5 


2 










John Strong. 30 June'84 
John Strong. 30 June'84 












Hi. . . 













Oil! 



YC 

de: 

Ma, 

25 r 



e m; 

,tate 

Ca 

the 

■eca, 

lired 



4th 

ing . 

roll, 
.ion 



;mli 
<th C 



:er t( 
g to 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 
Piter L. Wormlty), from the thirty-first day of August, 1884, when last mustered, to the thirty-first day of October, 18S4. (See page 64.) 



PAY-ROLL.— Continued. 



NAMES. 

PKHSENT. 


REMARKS. 


s 


f 


-- 




=. 


— 


B^CK 


RECEIVED PAYMENT OP- 


WITNESS. 




Mos. 


Days. 


Dolls. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 




Georcc C. Marion 

Wilier Y Simms 


































With Company. On leave of absent fur jo day-, from July i to 20, 1884, per Or. 72, Ft. Craig, '84 
































Frank B. Summers 


1 in furlough for 30 days, from Aug. 20, '84 
































James Clcary 


On extra duty in charge of working party, per Or. No. 40, Fort Craig, N. M., April 10, 1884 














































































































































































































































































Thomas Larkin 




































































Henry M. Bclton 






...'... 



























ART OF WAR. 





o 


1 


i 


l 
I 


j 


4 


4 

"7 


« 


1 


6 1 


< 


2 

4= 
3 

3 
58 


s 

- 

3 


H 

53 
5 
3 

3 
7* 


l 
< 

5 

3 
74 


:- 

7; 


RECORD OF EVENTS WHICH MAY BE NECESSARY OR USE- 
FUL FOR Fl'ITRF UEl'F.KF.M K VI 1'HE WAR DEPART- 
MENT, OR FOR PRESENT INFORMATION. 


RECAPITULATION. 


Pursuant to instructions contained in Orders No. 12. Fort Macon, Col., 

C. S., the Company marched In Fort Craig, N. M, distance 225 miles, and 
there took station. Plenty of grass and water en route. 














w 1 On extra or daily duty 




£ [in arrest or confinement 

. f On detached service 

g With leave 

a I Without leave 

S Sick 

< |_ln arrest or confinement 


quired by the printed instructions ; that it exhibits the true state of Cap- 
tain George C. Marion's Co. (K), of the Tenth Regiment of Cavalry, for 
the period herein mentioned ; that the remarks set opposite the name of 


STRENGTH— Present & Absent . 


■ 


■ 


i 





Enlisted in company . . . 

-J By re-enlistment 

I By transfer or appointment 
' |_ From desertion . . . . . . 

Resigned 



£? For disability . 



Transferred. 

i (Killed in acti 

< Of wounds . 

i (From disease 

Deserted . . 



Muster and Pay Rolls 
Monthly Returns. . . 
Returnsof Men Joined 
Re anting Party Rem 

Enlistments 

Furloughs 

Descriptive Lists . 



Ann\ Relations .... 
Artillery Tactic* (Light) . 
llery Tactics (Heavy) 



Bayonet 
Cavalry Tactic: 
Infantry Tactics 
Outpost Duty . 



int General's Dept 
Target Practice .... 
Regulations for Recruitin 



xhibits in every particular the true state of the Company as required 
lations and the Rules and Articles of War. 

Station: Fort Craig, N. M. George C. Mark. 

Date : October 31, 1884. Captain 4th 



chilly 



is found to be as expressed 
Discipline: 
Instruction : 



Col. iot/1 Cav. : 
■ind Mustering OJfic* 



made the speci; 
ate remarks toi 



• )R USE- 
= D ART- 



X7T con, Col., 
^iles, and 



of Cap- 
valry, for 

• name of 

pi tulation 

M b >' Re S" 

!g 

r. \ 

: Ci 7 ^' 
™>(he Co. 

iy",( 

, and that 
)n,( 
; Ciof which 

r,Ts 



fll. 



m add the 
the facts 
s may be 



73 



74 



ART OF 1 



Voucher No. 



Paid 



Muster 



Officer. 



Inventoi tery) or com . 

,-,. , imander. 

P inal 9t^. ter y ) or com- 

Du P 1,ca tander. 

Duplicat or com . 

p vouch Wnder. 
Return cL ery> or com . 

nmander. 

Returns ^ ry> or c&al . 

~ „.,. -nmander. 
Lertifica^ tery) or conl .. 

nmander. 

Return o; ttery> or com . 

„ . .nmander. 

Return ol ttery> or con ,. 

„. . mmander. 

1 ranscrij or com . 

Ai r educm mmaAder. 
Abstract - ttery) or com- 
mmander. 

Morning L^ or com . 

t\t ai mmander. 
Monthly t e or com . 

P an y c >mander. 
Return ol or com . 

book - Tnnjnder L __ j 

The san 

* T1 Tie, and will be 
t Tljjg — two f r the 



MUSTER-. 

Of Company 
Of the Tenth Regiment 
From the thirty -first da> 
To the thirty -first day c 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



RECORD OF EVENTS— Continued. 



LIST OF ROLLS, RETURNS AND REPORTS REQUIRED FROM TROOP, BATTERY, OR COMPANY COMMANDERS. 



To Adjutant General. 

Muster-roll of troop, battery, or company f 

Inventory of effects of deceased soldiers 

Final statements of deceased soldiers 

Duplicate certificates of soldiers discharged for disability. . 
To the Quartermaster General. 
Duplicate returns of clothing, camp and garrison equipage- 
vouchers. 
Return of quartermaster's property 

To the Chief of Ordnance. 

Returns of ordnance and ordnance stores 

Certificate of inventory on return of ordnance and ordnance s 

To Regimental Adjutant. 

Return of men joined troop, battery, or company! 

Return of the troop, battery, or company 

Tr.-in>cri;it ,.f ,,nl..i- nuking temporary appoi' 
reducingnori-rnmniissiniieil officers, at posts 1 
Abstract of troop, battery, or company fund . , 



Morning report of troop, battery, or company 

Monthly return of troop, battery, or company (to be returned to troop, battery, or c 

pany cr-mmander for file). 
Return of troop, battery, or company fund with troop, battery, or company coi 



Every two months . 

Immediately . . . . 
Immediately . . . . 

End of every quartei 
End of every quartei 



End of even 



End of every quarter . 
End of every month. . 

Immediately 

End of every quarter , 

Each morning . . . . 
End of every month 
End of every 4 month: 



Within three days 

thereafter. 
Immediately , . 



Mustering officer. 
Troop, battery, or 



Within twenty days 
Within twenty days 



Within twenty days 

thereafter. 
Within twenty days 

thereafter. 



Before eight o'clock 
First of subsequent 



Troop, battery, or 1 
pany commander. 

Troop, battery, or 1 
pany commander. 



Troop, battery, or 1 
pany commander. 

Troop, battery, or 1 
pany commander. 

Troop, battery, or < 



f Three muste 

paym.iMtr 
tThisren 



by officers commanding bands or small detachments of troops. 

ent, post, troop, &c, will see that these rolls, returns, &c, are forwarded 

m to the muster-roll for the Adjutant General, which will be sent direct by 

vith the troop, battery, or company. 

ental commander to keep the regimental descriptive book. 



for his command at the proper 1 



ART OF WAR. 



MUSTER-ROLL 

Of Company " K" 
Of the Tenth Regiment of Cavalry, 
From the thirty-first day of August, 1SS4, 
To the thirty-first day of October, 1S84. 



,VAR. 



)R USI 
£>ART- 



Nt 



on, Co 



ailes. ai 



of Ca 
s-alry, f 
• name 'ROLL 
oitulati 

c 

• A - "7T" 

™*he Co. of Cavalry, 

»yV 

and th r of August, 1884, 
)n,« 
:Cof whi 

, 1 jf October, 1884. 



av., 
Officer 

-j- add t 
the fa 
s may 





ing the 30th da 




ENLISTED 


| No. 

> 


Where. 


I 


i James D 


any, N. Y. 


Capt. 



1. To 



S 1 2. Th 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 
RETURN of Mm joined Comfia vyX^h Regiment of Infantry ■, during the quaru, ending the 3 oth day of September, 



DESCRIPTION. 



/SSo. (See page 64.) 



WHERE BORN. 



Capt. Cornestaldt 



Date Sept. 30th, 1884. 

' 1. To be classed in the following order, vi; 

By transfer; 5th. From missing in ; 

j, This Return will be made out in duplic 

Cornm. Hiding Officer of the Regim 

Huuk should be made up.— (See paragraph 163, Army Regula 



by each Troop, Conipun 



amend ed by G. O. 



3d. Re-enlislsd ; 4th. 



Caleb Johnson, 
Capt. Co. X, 4 tk Regt, Commanding, 



ART OF WAR. 



MEN JOINED 
Company X., 4th Regiment of Infantry, 



Quarter ending September 30, 18S0. 



')RU 



Nt 



on, C 



l niles, 



inner 

~~" off 

valry 

• nam< 

pituls 

, M b > * 
C 

and 

: Cof w 

iss 
[11. 



~av. 



•rad. 
the 
s mi 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



77 



Requisition for Stationery for Com'd'g Officer Co. "A," gth Inf., 

stationed at Fort A/organ, Col. , for the quarter commencing 

on the ist day of January, 1881, and ending on 

the 31st day of March, 188 1. (See page 64.) 























































5J 

a 


T - 


u 

a 


u 

a 


a 
a 

bfl 






M 


_* 






M 














a 
















Oh 


u 

5- 




a 
a 


U 


t/i 


c 

PQ 


3 




,5* 


O 


P 


as 










3? 

V 


u 
















c 


V 


u 


a 
_o 

'— 



> 
W 







■r. 


> 

w 

1 


a 
_o 

> 

W 




i) 




u 

s 

JO 


-a 
u 



•r. 


i 





CO 




u 

a 


_£ 


c 
u 

a 

— 


a 


1 
O 


— 



V 














3 






3 




s 


Jfj 


5 


^ 








- 


- 


u 


a 




a 




1) 


~ 












O 


D> 


^ J 


O- 


■s. 





kJ 


H 


r* 






ffl 








CO 


O 


J 


'J 


ai 


a 


a 














5 


1 




,0 


50 










I 


1 




3 


20 




1 


1 


1 




1 













I certify that the above requisition 
for any part of the time specified. 



correct, and that 



have not drawn stationery 
James Knight, 
Capt. gth Inf., Com'd'g Co. "A." 
Received at Fort Morgan, Col., on the ist day of January, 1881, of 2d Lieut. E. 
A. Lester, 9th Infy., A. A. Quartermaster, U. S. Army, — quires of foolscap paper, 
five quires of letter paper, — quires of foliopost paper, — quires of envelope paper, 
ten sheets of blotting paper, fifty official envelopes, — letter envelopes, one bottle 
black ink, one bottle red ink, three oz. sealing wax, twenty steel pens, one lead pen- 
cil, one piece office tape, one bottle mucilage, one penholder. 

James Knight, 
[signed in duplicate.] Capt. qth Inf., Com'd'g. Co. "A." 



[Endorsement.] 

Voucher No . . . Abstract H. 

First Quarter, 188 . 

REQUISITION FOR STATIONERY 

FOR 

Capt. James Knight, gth Inf., 
Commanding Co. A, 
at Fort Morgan, Col. 



To be in duplicate : one copy retained by the officer one sent to the Quartermas- 
ter General with Quarterly Abstract H. 



78 



ART OF WAR. 



Company Fund. 

While m barracks, in time of peace, through an econom- 
ical administration of the affairs of the kitchen, a saving 
accrues to the company, t»f part of the rations drawn ; this 
occurs in the salt and cured meats, and principally on 
sugar and coffee. These things are permitted to accumulate 
to the credit of the company, in the Subsistence Depart- 
ment, and after the rations are drawn for the last ten days 
in the month, they are either drawn out and sold to traders 
or others ; or they can be kept in the storehouse, and the 
Government buys them, paying cash for the same. 

These "savings," as they are termed, are better assured 
when the commander of a company supplies plenty of veg- 
etable diet for his men, such as potatoes, cabbage, beets, 
turnips, etc., and cultivation of a company garden (which 
is general throughout the American Army, wherever ground 
enough can be secured,) increases the fund very much, and 
in some cases on the Pacific coast has made it astonishingly 
large. 

This fund is kept in the hands of the Captain and all 
moneys are disbursed by him, for the exclusive benefit of 
the "mess ' ' of the company. He keeps a strict account of 
all money received, and from what source, as well as an ac- 
count of all expenditures. This is kept under a debit and 
credit head, and at the end of every three months, a form 
like the one on pages 79, 80, will be forwarded to Regi- 
mental Headquarters for subsequent transmittal to the Ad- 
jutant General of the Army. 

Descriptive List. 
Should a soldier be transferred from one organization to 
another at any time, or be ordered away from his command 
to some duty elsewhere, it is then necessary, in order that 
he may have his accounts kept correctly, to send to his new 
commander what is termed a "Descriptive List," together 
with an account of pay and clothing. The form is given 
on pages 81, 82. 



79 



AR 



\iptain Parkejzriod 

Dr. r - 



3ATE. 


FROI 


in 
H 
U 








: 1880. 
pril 30 . 


Balanc 
To Cash 




ay 31 . 


;; 


15 


;ne 30 . 


" 1 


10 




'- 


18 
89 




'•> 


J^ 


i 


Number 
A 
M 

J' 
T 






Authori. 





?he above accou 
.'he above paymT- 
Administration, H- 



See page 78.) 
UNT CURRENT 

^ompany Fund 

OF 
' "Hf 14th Infantry, 
ling 
tue 30th, 1880. 



"St Endorsement. 



ctfully forwarded to 



Commanding 



, 188 . 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



•The directions < 



t be closely followed. 



Parker Float, 14th Infantry, 



■rent with the Company Fund, of Company "If" i 4 th Infantry, during the period 
ending Jan. 30, j88o. (See page 78.) 



DATE. 


FROM WHAT SOURCE RECEIVED. 


i 
3 

a 


H 





i 


DATE. 


HOW EXPENDED. 


\ 

a 


B 


a 


» 


1880. 


IlALANCE ON HAND LAST ACCOUNT, March 3 

) ,, 1 ,,h irom sale nf 27 llis Pork @ IOC. . 

" " 50 lbs. Rice @oc. . . 

" 38 lbs. Pork @ ioL> c . 

" " " 3 M.tU. \'int^ar I" 7c. 

" " " 50 lbs. Pork @ lie. . 




4 

3 

5 


70 

99 

So 
40 


27 

4 
6 

45 


90 


June 30 . 
June 30 . 


By Cash expended for: 





18 
48 


45 








May 3. . 










June 30 . 


3 bushels Onions @ 70c 














Number of rations upon which above saving 1 

May, 385 
June, 352 
Total, 1097 

Authorized bread ration at post, 18 oz 




4 bottles Ex. Lemon @ 12c 

Balance remaining on hand 


89 



The above account is correct and just. 

The above payments have been made pursuant to appropriations of the Council 
of Administration, and are approved. 



Fort Omaha, Nebraska. 



Parkek Float, 
Captain 14th Infantry, 
Commanding Co. "J/. 



ART OF WAR. 



(See page 78.) 
ACCOUNT CURRENT 



Company Fund 



DIRECTIONS. 



FOR REGIMENTAL, POST, AND COMPANY FUND ACCOUNTS. 

1. Regimental, Post, and Company Fund Accounts will be rendered promptly 
when due, and great c.ire must lie c\cr< ise il in their preparation. 

2. Receipts and expenditures diirine; the peri. id embraced by the account will alone 



OF 



1 carried to the se. mid . 



Company "//," 14th Infantry, FOR REGIMENTAL AND POST FUND ACCOUNTS. 

All articles purchased or otherwise obtained must be accounted for upon the Re- 

For the period ending turn of Pro P ert y- 

FOR REGIMENTAL FUND ACCOUNTS ONLY. 
Tuup onth iRRn Amounts received from posts will be entered separately, and the name of the post 

juuc jut t, joou. an( j tn( . , 1Lri ,„| (,,, w |ij,_|| LlU _|i .unuiint was .qjpnipri.Lts.-ti will be given. 

r z====r FOR POST FUND ACCOUNTS ONLY. 

First Endorsement. x< The rece ipts will be entered in the following order : ist, » Balance on hand last 

account," or" Balance received from , Post Treasurer." ad, " Received from 

sales of bread, flour, &c." 3d, " Post Trader's assessments," (naming rate.) 4th, 

" Received from other sources," (the sources and amounts t * > be specified.) 
.00 2. The expenditures will be entered undo their appr-ipnate headings and in the 

' ' following order: ist, "Expenses of bakery, pay of bakers, &c," (enumerating 

items.) 2d, " Appropriations for regimental fund." 3d, " Other appropriations u| 

Respectfully forwarded to the Council." 

;. Appropriations f..r ihe regimental fond will invariably appear in the account em- 

bracing the period for which they are made — those for each regiment being speeiiled. 

4. The post trader's assessments must appear in the account embracing the period 
for which they are made. 

FOR COMPANY FUND ACCOUNTS ONLY. 

X. As aconsolidated Abstract is prepared at regimental headquarters, thi^ fc.nn will 

serve for the Company as well as the Post and Regimental Fund Account. When 

Commanding used for the Company Fund Account, the " Return of Property" will be left blank. 

2. The number ..f rations drawn, fn.in which the savings reported were made, will 
Kec a lidqrs , 188 . be stated in red ink upon the face of the account. 



T OF WAR. 

DIRECTIONS, 

FOR REGIMENTAL, POST, AND COMPANY FUND ACCOUNTS. 

i Regimental, Post, and Company Fund Accounts will be rendered promptly 
when due, and great care must be exercised in their preparation 

2. Receipts and expenditures during the period embraced by the account will alone 

^"ThTgross amounts under each head will alone be carried to the second column 
of dollars and cents. 

4. Letters of transmittal will not accompany the accounts. 

FOR REGIMENTAL AND POST FUND ACCOUNTS. 
• All articles purchased or otherwise obtained must be accounted for upon the Re- 

turn of Property. 

FOR REGIMENTAL FUND ACCOUNTS ONLY. 
Amounts received from posts will be entered separately, and the name of the post 
and the period for which each amount was appropriated will be given. 

= FOR POST FUND ACCOUNTS ONLY. 

1 The receipts will be entered in the following order : 1st, « Balance on hand last 

account," or "Balance received from , Post Treasurer.' 2d, " Received from 

sales of bread, flour, &c." 3d, " Post Trader's assessments (naming rate.) 4*, 
" Received from other sources," (the sources and amounts to be specified.) _ 

2 The expenditures will be entered under their appropriate headings and in the 
following order : rst, "Expenses of bakery, pay of bakers, &c," (enumerating 
items ) 2d,;; Appropriations for regimental fund." 3d, " Other appropriations of 

th 3 Appropriations for the regimental fund will invariably appear in the account em- 
bracing the period for which they are made-those for each regiment being specified 
' 4 The post trader's assessments must appear in the account embracing the period 

for which they are made. 

FOR COMPANY FUND ACCOUNTS ONLY. 

1 As a consolidated Abstract is prepared at regimental headquarters, this form will 
serVe for the Company as well as the Post and Regimental Fund Account When 
used for the Company Fund Account, the " Return of Property will be left blank 

2 The number of rations drawn , from which the savings reported were made, will 
be stated in red ink upon the face of the account. 



h Reg't of Infantry. (See page 78.) • 




ENLISTED. 


Cc 


id 

Where. 

"own and State.) 


By Whom. ' | 

i l 


James>any, N. Y. . . . 


Capt. Cornestaldt. . I5 yrs. 



82 



ShcpY that the above is a correct transcript fror 



2. Th 
3- Th 



Maj. GenI A. N. Strongberg . 



4. Ad 



In the field. 

6. Stc 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 
DESCRIPTIVE List and Account of Pay and Clothing of James Deland, a Private in Company X, 4th Reg't of Infantry. ( See page 78. ) 





RANK. 


DESCRIPTION. 


WHERE BORN. 


OCCUPA- 
TION-. 


ENLISTED. 


LAST PAID. 


NAME. 


W 


H EI c„x. 


c zt , 


- 


Hair. 


Town or County. 


State or Kingdom. 


When. 


Where. 
(Town and State.) 


By Whom. ~t 


By Paymaster. 






£ 


J 


To what Time. 


James Deland. . . IPvt. . . . 


*'r':. 


5 


8 


Fair . . . 


Black. . . . 


Brown. 


Melrose 


New Jersey 


Machinist . 


1 Mar .'80. 


Albany, N. Y. . . . 


Capt. Cornestaldt. . I5 yrs. 


Col. Brown. . . 


31 August, ■&>. . 



Deserted at Fort Cairnes, W. T., Sept. i S) 



Due U. S. for tobacco, ; 



ie soldier have been cn^a^ed in battle or skirmish it must 
nentioned, together with date .\w<\ place. A full and par- 
far mention will be made of any wounds he may have re- 
ed in action, also of any other injury or disease, and 
ther contracted in the line of duty, or not ; also location of 

iracter of the soldier" should be stated in detail when the 
riptive list is furnished, and his physical condition noted, 
mt of Retained Pay due at date ; a complete settlement of 
.nan's Clothing Account made todate, and the amount due 
- from him ; and the amount due the United States for To- 



pay. 



under Sec. 2, Act of Aug. 4, 1854, will 
per month for five year-,' continuous se 



be thu 



£4 per month for 
fifteen years' continuous service, &c. That due under Sees. 
1218 and 1285, Revised Statute*, afipwed June 22, 1874, 
thus: "For Cert, of merit, $2 p>: mo." If a soldier is enti- 
tled to re-enl,-ted P .,y under Sec A, Act of May 15, 1872, it 
Will be stated as follows : '■ Entitled 'to re-enlisted pay." 
Hie rtni.-nnt ol any extxa duty p.iv for which the soldier may be 
mustered, and Which may be still due him, must be noted. 
■ Sl"ppa-es for loss or damage done to arms or other public property 



. Cou 



Martial, a transcript of the . 

the amount a/roaa'v stopped n 

ence to the General Order in e; 
In every case of desertion, the date, and 

prehension, must be given, together wi 
of the order q{ sentence or pardon, and a 

When a soldier i-. di-.ch.ir.gcd, or dies while 
lathed service, his 1 descriptive List, if h 
taken up by the officer fin niching Final S 



be fully stated, with a 
1 that of surrender • 



l ■ 









rge 



in his favor, so as to comprise a complt 
and retained by the officer for his future information. (In ens: 
of death, the Final Statements and Inventories . f [fleet-, will h 
forwarded to the Adjuiant < icncral, Wasliington, D. C.) A tru 
copy of the original Descriptive List will at once be sent to th 
company commander, notifying him of the soldier's discly 
or death, with the indorsements made thereon as to date, pla 
cause, and character given on discharge, with charges, cred 
&c.,and the disposition of his effects, ii dead, to enable him 
enter all the data necessary to a full understanding of the < 
dier's account on the Muster Roll upon which the soldier's ( 
charge or death is reported 
A separate Descriptive List should, as a rule, be gr 



ckrtiky that the above i 



transcript from the records of this office. 






By order Maj. Geril A. fV. 'Strongberg. 



II Q. A. In the field. 
IS March, 188 1. 



F. L. Abef.l, 
1st Lieut. 30th InfPy\ 
Acfg Adft General. 



ART OF WAR. 

(See page 78.) 

DESCRIPTIVE LIST 

AND 

ACCOUNT OF PAY AND CLOTHING 

OF 

James Deland, 

a Private in Company X, 

4th Regiment of Infantry. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. ' 83 

Return of C. C. and G. E. 

On the last days of March, June, September and Decem- 
ber, the Quarterly Return of Clothing, Camp and Garrison 
Equipage must be made to the Quartermaster General of the 
Army. Under this head is embraced all kinds of clothing, 
rubber and woolen blankets, all kinds of tents, axes, hatchets, 
spades, picks, mattresses and mattress covers, pillow cases, 
mess-pans, camp-kettles, camp-stoves and pipe, order book, 
letters sent book, with index, and letters received book, 
with index. All clothing and other stores received during 
the quarter must be taken up and added to that which was 
remaining on hand at the end of the previous quarter ; all 
clothing that has been issued during the quarter must be 
entered on a "Clothing Receipt Roll" opposite the name 
of the soldier to whom it is issued, with the name and 
price thereof, and this must be acknowledged by the 
soldier's signature thereto. This clothing receipt roll then 
forms a voucher to the return of C. C. and G. Equipage, 
and is the authority for dropping the articles so issued from 
the Returns. All articles of clothing issued to soldiers 
must be entered in the " Clothing Book " of the Company 
under the name of the party to whom issued, and his name 
signed as an acknowledgment of having received them. 

Axe and hatchet, helves and tent pins, are called ex- 
pendable property, and may be expended on the certifi- 
cate of the Company Commander that they have been 
broken or worn out in the service. 

All other property of Camp and Garrison Equipage that 
becomes unfit for use must be preserved and submitted to 
an inspector, whose action alone can relieve the officer of 
responsibility. This "inspection report" also accom- 
panies the return as a voucher. 

Articles entrusted to a soldier's keeping for his use or 
comfort, or for the necessary discharge of his duties, 
which may be lost or damaged by him, are entered on the 
" Statement of Charges " opposite the name of the indi- 
vidual losing or damaging the same, together with the 
price thereof, which amount must also be entered on the 
succeeding Muster and Pay-Roll in the column of remarks 



S.) A.RT OF WAR. 

as "due U. S. $ — for Camp and Garrison Equipage lost 
or destroyed." The " Statement of Charges " becomes a 
voucher to the return of C. C. and G. E., and the entry 
on the Muster and Pay-Roll is the authority for dropping 
the articles lost, from the return. 

Should a soldier feel that he has been unjustly charged, 
he can apply for, and will have ordered by his Post or 
Regimental Commander, a Board of Survey, who will 
take evidence in the case, and decide whether the charge 
be just or not. 

On pages 85-105, is a completed return of Clothing, 
Camp and Garrison Equipage, together with all vouchers 
pertaining to the same. 



MY. 85 



icts and vouchers complete, in duplicate ; one copy to be 
naster General within twenty days after the expiration of 
rtains, the other to be retained by the officer for his own 



3nly when the number of invoices or vouchers is greater 
>rovided for them in the Return. 

•eceipts, and abstracts, when used, are the same as those 
rns of Quartermaster's Stores, substituting the words 
rrison Equipage," for " Quartermaster's Stores." 



(See page 84.) 
QUARTERLY RETURN 



THE LINE OK THE ARMY. 



forwarded to the (J'l.n'tcnii.e.tcr (..cneral v nhin hv.jiuv clays after the expiration of 
the quarter to which it pertains, the other to be retained by the officer for his own 
protection. 



CLOTHING, CAMP AND GARRISON EQUIPAGE 

RENDERED BY 

Captain Win. H. Cornell, 34th Infy, 

Commanding Company "G," 

FOR THE QUARTER ENDING ON THE 

j 1 st day of March, 18S4. 

Examined, Q. M. G. O , /& 

Sent to Auditor, /S 

Station— fort Dismal, N. Y. 
Received, Q. /!/. 18 



The forms of invoices, receipts, and abstracts, when used, are the san 
prescribed for the Returns of Quartermaster's btores, substituting 
" Clothing, Camp and Garrison Equipage," for " Qu 



ART CM' WAR. 
Quarterly Return of Clotting, Camp and Garrison Equipage received and issued at Fori Dismal, N. K, 





| 


FROM WHOM RECEIVED. 


CLOTHING. 




1 

E 

X 


ORNAMENTS. 


| 


s 


t£ 


1 

E 


1 

2 

1 


i 






M RTA,L,C D RE SS A NU K0R ACE .C A PO R KAME m ,. 




WHEN 
RECEIVED. 

hi Quarter, 

1884. 


X 


1 
U 


jj 

E 

s 


1 


1 


1 
z 


| 


i 


1 


sf 

- 


1 







B 

5 


u 


1 


1 




1 

i_ 


1 

1 


pa 


3 


1 


31 Dec, 18S3 
'9 Feb'.' 1S84 


3 

5 
6 


On hand per last return 

,-i Lieut HtJi.liii .ItlUI , 4 th Inf., A.A.Q.M. 

i„t Lieut. H.F R..l.in-.n. K u M , 41I1 Inf., A.A.y.M. 
,M 1 lent. H \ .Knl.hisoli. k.ll M .4th Inf. A A.O.M. 

,. i II. 1 li..l„i,- U ('1.M..41I, hit .A.A.Q.M. 

.st Lieut H.E.Rol ,R.S M... pi, Inf. A A Q.M 

1st Lieut. H.E.Robinson, R.QM.,4111 Inf. A A. Q.M. 


• 












:: 








8 








: 
:: 

; ; 








■ • 






T7 Is 


Total to be accounted for 


' 






.. , 


■ 










• •!• ■ 










'4 


s|. • . 














.0 




WHEN 
ISSUED. 


No.of 
Vou. 


TO WHOM ISSUED. 




































i 
























11 Man 11,1884 

j„ Mar, Ii,iSS 4 
■i March. 1884 
51 March, 1884 


3 


Clothing Receipt Roll 

Inventory and Inspection Report 

Statement of Charges 

Expended as per Abstract 


:': 








:: 


;' 


= 




















, 14 . 


5 ! . ■ 

; ; ; ; 
















3 




'■■■■ 




Total iss 




■ 








« 


■ 


■ 






• 














■4 


5 1 ■ ■ 


■ 














3 












0n hand, to be a ted for . 




















































■'■ 




« 


*r 



'.d Garrison Equipage received and issued at Fort Dismal, N. K, 



CLOTHING. 






























(A 

'3 

- 
£ 

6 

■ . 


a 

c 

_bJJ 

'5 
a 

rt 

« 

-a 

c 

O 

n 


p. 

u 
V 

M 
« 

o 

fa 

' 8 

2 

■•■ 

2 

14 
14 
14 


ft 

3 
fa 

: : 

:: 

5 
5 


METALLIC DRESS AND FORAGE-CAP ORNAMENTS, 


o 
— 
S 
o 

- 


fa 


c 

s 


i 




u 

4) 

P 

fa 

• • 


u 

: : 


1 

.a 

C/2 


2 

V 

O 

O 


c 



a 
c 

13 
u 
</> 

o 
O 


43 
X) 

1 
U 

16 

16 
3 

3 
13 


§3 

So 

s 
« 


d 

1- 

5 
fa 
25 

'25 
4 


2 

xi 

z 
£ 

16 

16 
10 

10 

6 








~~ 


— 


~ 




5 • • 




— 


4 
21 













in the Qi 



87 





'5 
> 


6 




rt 


> 
O 
jo 

is 


STRIPES, 

s of. 


M 
Q 

c 

c 

IS 
en 


V 

G 


O 

!-. 

'rt 

ft 

i 

% 

Q 




'ri 

ft 

c 
ju 

"0 


bfl 






'e« 
ft 

]S 

O 
O 

%p 




C/2 


ft 

-a 

b 

c 




C 




00 




'3 

ft 

> 



c 

D 

pq 



tn 

'rt 

ft 

a 


a 

1 


'5 

ft 

JO 

c 

3 
OS 

bjo 

fa 




1 


1 

ft 


g 


'Z 

B 

ft 


c 
M 


2 
3 
4 

5 
6 


; ; 


: 


3 


24 

2 

1 


25 
2 


29 
2 


60 

3 
2 


39 
4 




119 

6 

4 


3 


13 


*6 






: 


3 


27 


27 


31 


65 


43 




129 


3 


13 


6 


No. of 
Vou. 




























1 
2 
3 
4 


; ; 


: 


3 


27 
27 


27 


31 
31 


65 
65 


43 
43 




129 
129 


3 
3 


13 

! '. 
13 


6 






3 


27 


6 























THE LINE OF THE AKMV. 
the Quarter ending on the thirty-first day of March, 1884, by Captain Win. H. Cornell, 34th Infantry, commanding Co."G.' 



5 

77i 

v.,„. 


CLOTHING. 


1 





a 
g 

S 

6 




oITEl 


chevrons — pairs of. 


I 



o LOU5ES . 


| 


°£ta L <5?' 


trousers, pairs of. 


pairs o(. 




.1 


=5 


2 

29 

31 


.E 
I 

1 
3 


I 

1 

| 


2 
I 

1 

3 


•3 

1 
1 

1 

119 
6 

129 


B 

1 

1 
3 


2 
I 

1 

'3 




1 
6 


& 


1 

1 
1 

E 

c3 


1 


"7/ 


! 






1 
77 


1 

'i 

E 
f 

1 


1 

: ; 


1 


1 


1 


2 


1 


1 


E 

s 
1 

77 


s 


1 


*B 


1 

< 

b 

u 


I 


E 

5 


£ 

1 


E 


its 

1 
6 
E 
8 

y, 


"a 

| 


1 
| 


3 


a 
1 


>; 














~~ 


s 


■9 


- 6 


:: -. 


— ;— 








T ^- 




: : : : : 
. . I. . 


— 


-7- 


"T" 


-J 












































! 






1 


1 




























3 




. 4 . 












2 




:.: 






1 








: : 


:;;• 


! ! 


: : ! .". 


: :!: : 






• ■ • 

— — 


:•;• 

__jj_ 


77 




3 


27 


~~ 


•• 


:; 




: : 


.29 


3 


'3 


6 


77 


4 












• |. ■ 








1 


. . r . 






-f 


3 


3 ! "3 

TTiTT 


6 










' • 




. .1. . 






- 




1 


:_■ 


..I..I. . 












^ 


^^ 


_._.!_„_ 









ART OF WAR. 
Quarterly Return— Continued. 



CLOTHING. CLOTHING, OLD PATTERN. 



CAMP AND GARRISON EQUIPAGE. 



CAMP AND GARRISON EQUIPAGE. 




< 


f 
1 


4) 

_> 

V 


i 


S3 

a 




SHOVELS. 


rt 
.* 

£ 


> 

J3 

St 

s 


is 

o 

s 


DRUMS. 


< 


5 
.S 
hD 

e 
o 


o 
en 


1) 

S 
o 
U 


in 


G 

•a 

rt 
o 


1 


o 

5 
a 


Si 

(J 

u 


8 - 


2 




2 






i 






















: : 








8 


— - 






2 






* 












... 








. . 










































! '. 








I 
























— 




.... 






I 


. • 






. .|. . 














8 






2 




I 






i 













































8 9 




■ 




ENTS. 


"c 

c 
7- 


.s 

p 

a. 
"5. 

i> 

1 

12 
12 


"c3 
'a, 

O 

w 
"77 


'5. 
a 


6 

•I 
ft 

3 
JU 

a. 

"5. 

o 

M 


6 

12 

"o 

ft 

'S, 

o 


£? 

c 
'5. 

"5 

'S. 

U) 

O 

w 

— 


6 

| 

.s 

'5. 

"H 

'5. 
o 

W 


13 

2 
2 


"c3 
4 


d 
1 

u 

a. 

aT 

*o 
fa- 
Is 

4 


d 

12 

_ii 
ft 

2 
2 


d 

'ft 

la 






20 


— 


— 


4 


4 


20 


% 


12 






~ 






4 


4 


2 




— 




2 




— ' 




20 








- 





















THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 

Quarterly Return— Continued. 



• 3 


CAMP AND GARRISON EQUIPAGE. 




| 


2 


E 


i 

■k 


I 


i 



















TENTS. 


j 


1 


o 




1 

1 


6 


1 

1 

s 


1 

u 


■a 


1 
.1 


1 
.1 


1 

o 


6 


3 


o 

1 

I 


« 


U 


i 


t 


A 


A 


i 


1 


t 




3 

: : 




I 


1 


■i, 
1 

1 

1 
8 


1 

£ 
s 

a 


1 
| 


1 
a" 

a 

| 
s 


£ 




| 


1 

8 
■3 


2 


,. 






















• ., ■ 








* 


■ 






« 


i 




3 










. .|. . 




> 


I 




i 










■ 














i 


4 


,, 


— 


i 


: : 




;; 


.' 


\\ 














:; 








I 
















































:.!.. 


































• • 


























. .1. . 




• • = ! 




...... 


. 


. . . . 






.. .. .. 


I 




. .i. . 




























..1.. 












.:. . 


• ■.!•..• 


. .i. ... j. .1. .i i i . i. .i = 


. .... ..1. . 
















■ 




i 




. J. .1. . 






. .1 2 


_♦. 




liL. 



Quarterly Return- 



CAMP AND GARRISON EQUIPAGE. 






-f 



' ■ ■ 









































STENCILS. 


i 


p 





V 

• • 


— 


pq 

• • 
~7 


u 

c 
J= 

• • 

• • 


77 


■ ■ 

■ • 


ii 


77 


1 


5 

o 

-> 

J 


s 


'5 

M 

<u 

E 


"S. 


a 

6 
ft 

■ ■ 


'p. 




4) 

ft' 

< 


73 

Gj 

7i 

< 

■ • 


s 

3 


E 

u 


6 



<u 

X 



; ; 










- 


— " 


; ; 



93 





No. of Invoice. 


F 


<0Mi 

O 


Q 


>. 

Er 
Jc ■ 

S 

3 

C/3 


J 


i 

2 

3 
4 
5 
6 




No.of 
! Vou. 

2 

3 
4 


! 1 




i: : 


- 



92 

i certify that the foregoing R ' *■' 
and Garrison Equipage which ha, 
ment, during the Quarter ending 



(signed in duplicate. 



Statio?i — Fort Dismal, N. Y. 
Date— March 31st, 1884. 



Notes. — An officer may, at t,he , ) vnom 
.-.quartermaster, company comrr^ s Ab- 
fe different capacities in which f 

When clothing is needed for issfor this 
-xaster on requisition approved person 
charged with the clothing until suered in 

In all cases, the vouchers shoul 
rfioer receipting should be filled ■ 
the receiving officer and filed witl 

Erasures and alterations of entr 

When public property becomes 
or a deficiency is found in it, the 1 
officer, who shall, if necessary, ai 

In all cases of deficiency or dan 
accountable for the property is re 
circumstances of the case, that tht 
any fault on his part, and, in case o 
the damage did not result from n e 

An inspection report filed as au 
his returns, will not relieve an off 
that it has been examined by a b 
to be dropped from return, and de-A^ Q- 

Receipts for clothing transferred 
of survey. 

Gratuitous issues of clothing ar 
hospital attendants who have nun 
as have been destroyed by order 
ordered by the Secretary of War. 
by act of Congress, as in case of 

When it becomes necessary for 

credit of the proper appropriation whom 
Ireasury as required by G. O. JN^-g au 
office of the Quartermaster Gehei 

or this 



person 
;red in 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 
Quarterly Return — Continue 



r v 

3 

5 
| 6 

Nu.i.f 
3 




FOR SALES TO OFFICERS. 
















1 






1- 


1 


& 


n 


o 




| 


6 


* 






















■ ■ 
















77 






















- 


n 


- 






— 








— 




— 


— 


















— 


— 


— 






- 





















92 






ART 


OF WAR, 








and i rarrison 


that the foregoing Return exhibits a 
Equipage n hii n has come into mj 

lli<- Ouarter end in- nn the Thirty-tl 


Ss 


■ s ,.f .\ 


Cafta 


L.miil nl il„. 
.884. 


ill theClothing 
Quartermaste 

ffx. H, Corn 



. u 1 ,.in 11.1 1 ■!,.- I,, j t |. alnii^, . .mi [i .1111I -.triaso 1 1 1 . | m |.-. ■■ . 
t he should embrace all 111 unc return, specify ing thereon 

he . u in 1 i.i 1 1 y 1 *.jii m.ivi. 1- r v\ ill pro, ure it from the quart, t- 
.unlink officer, ami the lrans.fi.Tnnt: officer will remain 

ed. Invoices should be furnished to 



it, the officer' accountable for I 



able for the propel 



-anl nl" survey. <_ ertilieate is required as evidence that articles ordered 

stroyed, were destroyed as ordered. 

j as " damaged," should be accompanied by proceedings of a board 

: only to he made to soldier-, who have had contagious disc, is, s. .u h l (,. 
eel and attended such soldiers, to replace such articles of their clodung 
af the proper niedk;d offu . er-. to prevent contagion, and when specially 
-(G. O. No. 23, A. G. I)., 1868.) Relief in money can only be obtained 



credit of the proper appropria 
Treasury as required by <i. O. 
office of the Quartermaster (i- 



ART OF WAR. 



eturn exhibits a true and correct statement of all the Clothing and Camp 
is come into my possession, on account of the Quartermaster's Depart- 
on the Thirty-first day of March, 1884. 

Wm. H. Cornell, 
Captain 34th Infantry, Coma ' g Co "_G.'' 



■. same time, be accountable for clothing, camp and garrison equipage, 

lander, &c, but he should embrace all in one return, specifying thereon 

ie is acting. 

ue to the men, the company commander will procure it from the quarter- 
by the commanding officer, and the transferring officer will remain 

ch approved requisition is filed as authority for the transfer. 

d be made out in full, and the exact number of articles transferred to the 

out in the receipt before it is signed. Invoices should be furnished to 

1 his return. 

ies on a voucher should be explained on the margin. 

damaged, except by fair wear and tear, or otherwise unsuitable for use, 

officer accountable for the same shall report the case to the commanding 

opoint a board of survey. 

iage of any article of clothing or camp or garrison equipage, the officer 

;quired by law to "show by one or more depositions, setting forth the 

i deficiency was by unavoidable accident or loss in actual service, without 
i f damage, that due care and attention were exerted on his part, and that 
ijglect." 

thority for disposing of damaged clothing, and dropping the same from 
I icer from liability on account of its condition, if there is no evidence 

oard of survey. Certificate is required as evidence that articles ordered 
I :stroyed, were destroyed as ordered. 
-Ud as "damaged," should be accompanied by proceedings of a board 

e only to be made to soldiers who have had contagious diseases, and to 

I ;ed and attended such soldiers, to replace such articles of their clothing 

of the proper medical officers to prevent contagion, and when specially 

" "—1 G. O. No. 23, A. G. O., 1868.) Relief in money can only be obtained 

1 other private claims. 

' officers to pay for deficiencies, the money should be deposited to the 
= i, and certificate of deposit should be forwarded to the Secretary of the 
10, A. G. O., 1874. Money should in no case be sent by mail to the 
al. 



COMPOSITION OF AN ARMY. 93 



Voucher No. I, I Quarter, 1884. 

INVOICE of Clothing transferred by 1st Lieut. H. E. Robinson, R. Q. 
M., 4th Inf., A. A. Quartertnaster, U. S. A., at Fort Omaha, 
Nebraska, to Capt. Wm. H. Powell, 4th Inf., Com- 
manding Co. ".67' at Fort Omaha, 
A r ebraska. 



To be made in duplicate : both to be forwarded or delivered to the officer to whom 
the articles are transferred. He will retain one and forward the other, with his Ab- 
stract E, to the Quartermaster General. 

Note. — When no invoice is received the receiving officer will substitute for this 
form of voucher a list of the stores received, certified by himself. When the person 
responsible for the property entered without invoice is known, it will be entered in 
his name. 

7 Jan. 



Voucher No. 2, 1 Quarter, 1884. 

Invoice of Clothing transferred by 1st Lient. H. E. Robinson, R. Q. 
M., 4th Inf., A. A. Quartermaster, U. S. A., at Fort Dismal, 
Nebraska, to Capt. Wm. H. Powell, 4th Inf., Com- 
manding Co. "G" at Fort Omaha, 
Nebraska. 



To be made in duplicate : both to be forwarded or delivered to the officer to whom 
the articles are transferred. He will retain one and forward the other, with his Ab- 
stract E, to the Quartermaster General. 

Note. — When no invoice is received the receiving officer will substitute for this 
form of voucher a list of the stores received, certified by himself. When the person 
responsible for the property entered without invoice is known, it will be entered in 

his name. 



94 



ART OF WAR. 



INVOICE of Clothing transferred by ist Lieut. H. E. Robinson, R. Q.M. 
4th Inft.,A. A. Quartermaster, U. S. Army, at Fort Omaha, Neb., 
to Captain Wm. H. Powell, 4th Inft., U. S. Army, at Fort Dismal, 
Neb, on the yth day of January, 1884. 



Number or Quantity. 


Articles. 


Cost When 
New. 


a -6 

■2 c u 

Pi 


^k 




In Words. 


P 


6 




B 


8 

5 
4 
1 
1 
1 

17 
3 

1 

24 
25 

I 9 
60 

39 
119 

3 
13 


Eight 

Five 

Four 

One Pair 

One " 

One " 

Seventeen 

Three Pair 

Nineteen .... " 

One " 

Twenty-four .... 

Twenty-five 

Twenty-nine . . Pair 

Sixty .' " 

Thirty-nine ... " 
One hundred and nine- 
teen Pair 

three " 

Thirteen .... " 

Six " 

Eleven " 

Ten " 

Twenty-one 

Two 

Six 

Thirty-one . . . Pair 

Five " 

Requisition dated 


Forage caps 

Fur caps 










New. 

K 

1 \\ 




Chevrons, Sergt 

do Service, Peace. . 
do do War . . 

Blouses, lined 

Trousers, foot, made heavy, 
do " unmade " 
do Stripes, Sergt . . 

Shirts, D. B., flannel . . . . 

Undershirts, knit 

Drawers 

Stockings, woolen 

do cotton 

Berlin gloves 

Mittens, woolen 

Fur Gauntlets 


m 
00 
00 

_«J 




< 

b 

6 












10 
21 
2 

6 
3i 

5 


Arctic Overshoes 

Blankets, woolen 

do rubber 

Shirts, gray flannel 


| ' " 












7R 


January 1, 1884. 


; 



I certify that I have this day transferred to Captain Wm. H. Powell, 4th Infantry, 
U. S. Army, at Fort Omaha, Neb., the articles specified in the foregoing list. 
(srGNED in duplicate.) H. E. Robinson, 

ist Lt. R. Q. M., 4th Inft., A. A. Quarter master, U. S. A. 

INVOICE of Clothing transferred by ist Lt. H. E. Robinson, R. Q. M. 
4th Inft., A. A. Quartermaster, U. S. Army, at Fort Omaha, iVeb., 
to Capt. Win. H. Powell, 4th Inft., U. S. Army, at Fort Omaha, 
Neb., on the 18 th day of January, 1884. 



Number or Quantity. 



C bb 




In Words. 




f«! 








1 


One 




Pair 


4 


Four . 




" 


3 


Three 




" 



Requisition dated 



Articles. 



Chevrons, ist Sergeant . 
do Corporal. . . 
Trouser stripes, Corporal 
Jany. 18, 1884. 



Cost When 
New. 


2 cli i 


P 


6 




III 

O Q 




3>n 


of 


'■'■ 


New. 





1 certify that I have this day transferred to Captain Wm. H. Powell, 4th Infantry. 
U. S. Army, at Fort Omaha, Neb., the articles specified in the foregoing list. 
(signed in duplicate.) H. E. Robinson, 

ist Lt. R.Q.M. 4th I'ift., A. A. Quartermaster, U.S.A. 



THE WAR DEPARTMENT. 95 



Voucher No. 3, 1 Quarter, 1884. 

Invoice of Clothing transferred by 1st Lieut. H. E. Robinson, R. Q. 
M., 4th Inf. A. A. Q. M., U.S.A., at Fort Omaha, Ne- 
braska, to Capt. Wm. H. Powell, 4th Inf., 
Commanding Company "G" at Fort 
Omaha, N'ebraska. 



Voucher No. 4, 1 Quarter, 1884. 

Invoice of Clothing, C. and G. E. transferred by 1st Lieut. H. E. 

Robinson, R. Q. M. 4th Inf. A. A. Quartermaster, U. S. A., 

at Fort Omaha, Nebraska, to Capt. Wm. H. Powell, 

4th Inf., Commanding Co. " 6"," at Fort 

Omaha, jYebrasha. 



To be made in duplicate : both to be forwarded or delivered to the officer to whom 
the articles are transferred. He will retain one and forward the other, with his Ab- 
stract E, to the Quartermaster General. 

Note. — When no invoice is received the receiving officer will substitute for this 
form of voucher a list of the stores received, certified by himself. When the person 
responsible for the property entered without invoice is known, it will be entered in 
his name. 



9 6 



ART OF WAR. 



INVOICE of Clothing transferred by ist Lt. H. E. Robinson, R. Q. M. 
4th Inft. A. A., Quartermaster U. S. Army, at Fort Omaha, Neb., 
to Capt. Win. H. Powell, 4th Inft., U. S. Army, at Fort Omaha, 
Neb., on the gth day of February, 



Number or Quantity. 




Cost When 
New. 



Forage caps 

Uniform coat, Private . . 

Blouses, lined 

Trousers, foot, made heavy 

" " unmade, " 

Undershirts, knit. 

Pair! Drawers 

Stockings, woolen 
Berlin gloves. . . 
Shoes 



Two 'Blankets, wooh 

Requisition dated Feb. 8, 1884. 



i 






New. 



I certify that I have this day transferred to Captain Wm. H. Powell, 4th Infantry, 
U. S. Army, at Fort Omaha, Neb., the articles specified in the foregoing list. 

(SIGNED IN DUPLICATE.) H. E. ROBINSON, 

ist Lt. R. Q.M. 4±h Inft.,A.A. Quartermaster, U.S.A. 



Invoice of C, C. and G. E. transferred by ist Lt. H. E. Robinson, 
R. Q. M. 4th Inft., A. A. Quartermaster U. S. Army, at Fort 
Omaha, Neb., to Captain Wm. H. Powell. 4th lift., U. S. Army, 
at Fort Omaha, Neb., on the 25th day of February 



Number or Quantity. 




| Cost When- 
New. 



c 



Seven Pair Canvas trousers 

ISix do sack coats .... 

Seven ....''.. \ do plaited blouses . . 

One (Co. Morning Report Book. 

Forty-eight ..... 'Bedsacks, single 

Requisitions dated Febry. 22 and 19, 1884. 



70 
87 
20 

<-s. 



I certify that I have this day transferred to Captain Wm. H. Powell, 4th Infantry 
U. S. Army, at Fort Omaha, Neb., the articles specified in the foregoing list. 
(signed in duplicate.) H. E. Robinson, 

ist Lt. R.Q.M. 4th Inft., A.A. Quartermaster U.S.A. 



THE WAR DEPARTMENT. 97 



Voucher No. 5, 1 Quarter, 1884. 
INVOICE of Clothing transferred by 1st Lieut. H. E. Robinson, R. Q. 
M., 4th Inf., A. A. Quartermaster, U. S. A., at Fort Omaha, 
Nebraska, to Capt. W?n. H. Powell, 4th Inf., Com- 
manding Co. "G" at Fort Omaha, Nebraska. 



To be made in duplicate : both to be forwarded or delivered to the officer to whom 
the articles are transferred. He will retain one and forward the other, with his Ab- 
stract E, to the Quartermaster General. 

Note. — When no invoice is received the receiving officer will substitute for this 
form of voucher a list of the stores received, certified by himself. When the person 
responsible for the property entered without invoice is known, it will be entered in 
his name. 

12 Mar. 



Voucher No. 6, 1 Quarter, 1884. 

Invoice of Clothing transferred by 1st Lieut. H. E. Robinson, R. Q. 

M.,4.th Inf., A. A. Quartermaster, U. S. A., at Fort Omaha, 

Nebraska, to Captain Win. H. Powell, 4th Inf., 

Commanding Co. "C," at Fort Omaha, 

jVebraska. 



To be made in duplicate : both to be forwarded or delivered to the officer to whom 
the articles are transferred. He will retain one and forward the other, with his Ab- 
stract E, to the Quartermaster General. 

Note. — When no invoice is received the receiving officer will substitute for this 
form of voucher a list of the stores received, certified by himself. When the per- 
son responsible for the property entered without invoice is known, it will be entered 
in his name. 

21 Mar. 



9 8 ART OF WAR. 

Invoice of Clothing transfe?-red by ist Lieut. H. E. Robinson, Regt'l 
Quarter??! aster 4th Inft., A. A. Q. M. U. S. A?-??iy, at Fo?'t 0??iaha, 
Neb., to Capt. W?n. H. Pmvell, 4th Inft., Quarte?-??iaster,U. S. Army, 
at Fort Omaha, Neb., on the 12th day of March, 1884. 



Number or Quantity. 



In Words. 



Two Forage Caps 

One Blouse, lined 

One Pair Trousers, foot, unmade. 

Two iD. B. Flannel shirts . 

Two Pair Stockings, woolen . . 

One " Shoes 

.Two 'Blankets, woolen. . . 

Requisition dated March 11, 1884. 



Cost When 

New. 



Ill 



Heavy 



I certify that I have this day transferred to Captain Wm. H. Powell, 4th Infantry, 
Quartermaster, U. S. Army, at Fort Omaha, Neb., the articles specified in the fore- 
going list. H. E. Robinson, 

ist Lieut. Regt'l. Quartermaster 4th Inft., A. A. Q. M. 

(signed in duplicate.) 

Invoice of Clothing transfer?-ed by ist Lt. H. E. Robinson, R. Q.M.,4th 
Lnf, A. A. Qtiarter??iaster U.S. Ar?ny, at Fort Omaha, Neb., to Capt. 
Wm. H. Powell, 4th Lnf., U.S. Ar?ny, at Fort Omaha, Neb., on the 
2isl day of March, 1884. 



Number or Quantity. 



>5 " 


In Words. 




One. 
One . 
One . 
One . 
One . 
One. 
Two 
One . 
One . 
One . 
One . 
One . 
Four 
Four 
One . 
One . 












1 






1 






1 




. Pair 


2 






1 






1 




. Pair 


j 




4 
4 

1 
1 




. Pair 



Articles. 



Helmet untrimmed .... 

Base 

Spike 

Eagle 

Side Buttons 

Numbers, W. M 

Forage caps 

Uniform coat, Private . . 

Blouses, lined 

Trousers foot made heavy 

" " unmade " 

Shirt, D. B. Flannel . . . 



Cost When 

New. 



Stockings, cotton 
Berlin Gloves . . 

Shoes 

Suspenders . . . . 
Requisitions dated 'March 19, 1884. 



— — > 



I certify that I have this day transferred to Captain Wm. H. Powell, 4th Infantry, 
U. S. Army, at Fort Omaha, Neb, the articles specified in the foregoing list. 

H. E. Robinson, 
ist Lt. R. Q. M. 4th Inft., A. A. Quartermaster, U. S. A. 
(signed in duplicate.) 



:u ♦ 



99 



- 

DAT] 

TH5IGNATURES. 

issJ 



ist Qu 



Christopher T. Reilly. 
oseph Turner 



oel C. Deats. 



.annuel T>. Peters 
f ames Brown. . 
acob W. Bogard 
oseph Frank. . 
"rank Balthasar 
Ldward P. Barron 
George R. Bennett 
Charles A. Berry. 
Edward Blake . . 
Jeorge Brandt . . 
'Villiam A. Brown 



"rank Corneliussen 
.Nicholas E. Cosgrove. 
Charles D. Cox. 
Anthony Dunlcavy . . 
Robert Easley . . . . 
Fred L. Ellis 



WITNESS. 

The signature of the wit- 
nessing officer is regarded as 
his certificate that he wit- 
nessed in each case the fact 
of issue, and the acknowledg- 
ment and signature of the sol- 
dier, and that the several 
issues were entered separ- 
ately, and all vacant spaces 
filled before signature. [See 
Paragraph 1159, A. R.] 



C. W. Mason. 
C. W. Mason, 

ist Lieut., 4th Infantry. 

C. VV. Mason, 

ist Lieut. 4th Infantry. 
C. W. Mason. 
C. W. Mason. 
C. W. Mason. 
C W. Mason. 
C. W. Mason. 
jC. W. Mason. 
IC W. Masm 
C W. Mason. 
|C. VV. Mason 
C. W. Mason. 
C. W. Mason. 

ist Lieut. 4th Infantry. 
C. W. Mason. 
C. W. Mason. 
C. W. Mason. 
C. W. Mason. 
C. W. Mason. 
C. W. Mason, 

ist Lieut. 4th Infantry. 



Wm. H. Cornell, 
Qaptain 4th Infantry, CoM'd'g Ci). 



: I 









..til I 



Ti 



I 






100 ART OF WAR. 

Voucher No. I, 1st Quarter, i£ 



RECEIPT ROLL 



CLOTHING ISSUED TO ENLISTED MEN 



Company "(7," 4U1 U. S. Infy, 



Capt. IVm. H. Powell, 4th Infy, 
Commanding Company. 



: one to be retained by ihe officer, tin: oilier to be for- 
r General with the Quarterly Return, Form No. 45. 

The number of articles, with the price of each, and the total value of all the 
articles issued to a soldier, will be entered in the proper places on the Clothing Re- 
ceipt Roll before it is signed. Where no issues have been made, blank spaces will 
I>l filial thus =. 

When a soldier can write Ins name l-jgihlv, he is required 10 do so on the Receipt 
Roll: otherwise, his mark, witnessed, is to be substituted. 

Except in the cases contemplated by pa ragraph 2078, A. R., 1881, each signature, 
whether written by the soldier or acknowledged by mark, must be separately wit- 

1. By a commissioned officer other than the issuing officer, if there be one present 
and on duty at the post. 

In the absence of a commissioned officer, the signature may be witnessed by a 
:ommissioned officer. 

3. In the absence of both commissioned and non-commissioned officers, the issues 
must be authenticated by affidavit, setting forth the cause of the irregularity, and in 
verification of the issues as charged. 

Neither the officer making the issues, and responsible for the supplies, nor a pri- 
vate soldier, is a competent witness to the Receipt Roll. 

A Receipt Roll not wit.ne-s,:d is inadmissible as a voucher. 

petency to witness the Receipt Roll. 

When one writes the name of another to a receipt he should have legal authority 
lor si, uoing. This must he 111 writing, and musi accompany the receipt lhll> signed 
(See Digest of Decisions of the Second Comptroller, paragraph 809, edition of 

Clothing charged to enlisted men and not receipted for at the time of issue should 
be accounted for by affidavit, setting forth the reasons why thej sign itures were not 
obtained 



'//. 



page 84.) 



101 



e, e: 

BAB1_ 
F DA 



Bee: 

: ; .^j-in usef- 

Bu| n use 
A x in use 

'J-rii n use 

jn use 



Sps 



m use 



REMARKS. 

Note. — Whenever practicable, the In- 
spector will note in this column when, 
where, and from whom stores were pur- 
chased, the name of the purchasing offi- 
cer or agent, and the marks upon original 
packages. 



To be used for dish cloths in kitchen. 



'.RTIFY 

P er to be c 1 is as stated above ; that the articles recom- 
con .s have 50 certify that the articles found to be utterly 



I. D. De Russy, 
Major 4th Infantry, A. A. Inspector. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



Inspection Report of Chilling, Camp and G. Equipage, for which dipt. Wm. H. Powell, 4th Inf., is responsible, and which have been inspected and reported on by Major I. D. De Russy, A. A. Inspector General. (See page 84.) 



IK-VEM-TOBT. 





QUANTITY. 


RECEIVED RY THE OFFICER NOW 
RESPONSIBLE. 




HOW RENDERED UN- 


ARTICLES. 


When. 


From Whom. 


SEE" 


SERVICEABLE. 


Bed Sacks 

\l n. ,1, 1 ..ill,,- Palms . . 
Bugles with Ex. M. pc . . . 


Twenty-six (26). 
Six (6) Pairs . 
One (1) . . . . 

on™/, 2 ) : . : : 

pany for trial. No 


N„i Kimwii. 
(), 1,,1,,.,/S, 

April"' ■$]'. 


Lieut. Scott, 4th Inf. 
tablished for the same. 


Serviceable'. '. 


New ....'. 
Not Known . 


Worn out an,n,ioi<cn 'in' service '. 



IUSPBCTIOIsr K.IEIPOK.'r. 



NATURE, EXTENT, AND 


DISPOSITION RECOMMENDED. 


Whfnt^pmLabl, ,,„- I„ 


PROBABLE CAUSE 


To be 


11. in 1,1 ..in 1. 


"'aTpo'st* 


To be sold 

.1 1'..-, 


1 ■: 1, ksh. |». ,-.., 


r "„z,^"- 


»l.,i... ,,..1 ... ....... >.,,. |.,„. 




To be 

destroyed 


To be 
broken up. 


*—-• IS.3SS.- " ■ 


To be 


package? 1 "' ""'"" ""'""' """'"'' 






26 






























































Worn out in use '.'.'.'.'.'.'.'. 
















r 





nvemory, in every \ 



! knowledge and 



liiciiilcil tti lie destruyed have no mtu 



/of March, i88 4 ,caref 
:n destroyed in my pre: 



Voucher No. 2. (See page 84.) 
INVENTORY 

AND 

INSPECTION REPORT 
Clothing, Camp and Gar. Equipage 

FOR WHICH 

('.///. William H. Powell, 4th Inf., Command) 
"G," is responsible, 

INSPECTED AT 

Fort Omaha, Nebrask,l, 

ON THE 

■zotk day of March, 1SS4. 

FOR DIR1 L I HiNS-Sl-.l.: (JTHI.1; M1)K. 



The within articles will be disposed of 
By order of 



WAR DEPARTMENT, 

Washington City, jfanuary 2, 187b. 

Requisitions for these blanks to be made direct upon the Inspector General at 

E. D. TOWNSEND, 
Adjutant General, U. S. Army. 

channels ; otherwise, it will be presented to him upon his arrival. Receiving his 
nd returned, with such orders, to the officer responsible for the property, who will 
■stracts will, when practicable, be signed by the Inspector, or by an officer wholly 
, but separate inventories are to be made for the property of each Staff Depart- 
Department, and for " Commissary Property," as distinct from " Subsistence 
ly, with brief description of color, sex, age, and distinguishing marks. Of the in- 
next stated accounts, and one will be retained by himself. In order to relieve an 
ole for use, or when deficiencies are found in it, it must, before being submitted to 

esent condemnation; those to be "dropped from returns," if utterly worthless, 
n as public property; and when the presence of the Inspector is impracticable, the 
1 cer responsible, to the destruction of the same; and such articles as cannot be so 
nd serviceable parts retained ; those "to be sold at the post " are such as are of 
mot be repaired at the post and are worth the cost of turning them in ; and those to 
responsible, or transferred to depot, or to some other officer, whose receipt will be 
ion or treatment if temporarily unserviceable. The special attention of Inspectors is 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY 



°3 





o 

<J 

S 

CJ 
En 

O 

P 

< 


• 


u 
J 

~ 

u. 

_1 
n 

"b 

-= 

c. 

< 




















1 

: 

i 

i 


ROLLS ON 

WHICH. 
CHARGED. 


■*■ 

oo 
oo 

JO 
G 
















1 

1 

1 




< 
> 


J 1 CK 
















|e 


p 1 






















Q 

H 

5 

< 

M 

u 
co 

W 
O 

H 
Pi 
< 












• 1 






















• 1 




























































































































































































































































































— 
































































— 


•s>pBg pag 
























> 

i 

C 
> 


] 
















C 

E- 
1 





x'i 

s , 



— ' 2 ^ 



104 ART OF WAR. 

(See page 84.) 

Voucher No. 3, First Quarter, 1884. 

STATEMENT OF CHARGES 

MADE BY 

Copt. Wm. H. Powell, 4th Inf., 
Commanding Company "G." 



To be in duplicate : one to be retained by the officer, the other to be forwarded to 
the Quartermaster General with the quarterly return, Form No. 45. 



Note. — Metallic ornaments and articles of camp and garrison equipage in ordinary 
use by soldiers, may be charged to them on muster and pay-rolls when lost or de- 
stroyed by their fault. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



I05 



(See page 84.) 

Abstract of Articles C. and G. E. expended under the direction of 

Captain Win. H. Poxvell, 4th Inf., in the quarter ending 

jist March, 1884. 



BY WHOM MADE. 



Capt. Wm. H. Powell, 4 th Inf., 
Commanding Co. G. 
















D. 




X 




tt. 




B 








O 




s 


a 




O. 






O. 

Fi 


w 







U 


H 


1 


1 



I certify that the above abstract is correct. 



Wm. H. Powell, 
Capt. 4th Inf., Com'cTg Co. " G. 



[Endorsement on above.] 
Voucher No. 4, First Quarter, 1884. 



ABSTRACT. 

Articles C. and G. Equipage 

Expended under Direction of 

Captain Wm. H. Powell, 4th Infantry, 

Commanding Co?npany " G," 
in the Quarter ending March 31, 1884. 



io 6 ART OF WAR. 



Return of Quartermaster's Stores. 

A Return of Quartermaster's Stores received and issued 
during the quarter must also be made. There are but few 
articles of company property which are to be accounted for 
on this return, which is the same as that used by Post and 
Depot Quartermasters in making a return of the property 
under their charge. The articles in use by a Company 
which must be accounted for on this paper are buckets, 
lanterns, locks, desks, white- wash and paint brushes, stove 
polish, Dutch ovens, for use in the field, and such other 
articles of like nature as the Company, by order from the 
War Department, may be permitted to keep on hand. 

In order to be able to drop from this return any articles 
worn out in the service, it must be submitted to the action 
of an inspector, as described on page — , and the inspection 
report accompanies the Return as a voucher. 

Stove polish is expendable on a certificate of the Com- 
pany Commander as described for return of Clothing, Camp 
and Garrison Equipage. 

Fuel or Stationery issued to a Company is not taken up 
on this or any other Return. These articles are simply 
" required for" on the requisitions described under the 
heading of " Company Clerk" and are used as the service 
demands, without accountability. 

The following is the form now in use : 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



IO7 



(See page 106.} 



in duplicate : one to be retained by the officer, one to be 
:er General's Office. 



>/ Quartermaster 's Stores receivtd, issued, and re- 
f at Fort Blank, Utah, in the quarter ending on 
- June, 1883, by David yones, Capt. 30th Inf. 



ecure uniformity in returns of Quartermaster's stores, they 
classed under the following heads : 

n. Wheelwrights' tools. 

12. Masons' and bricklayers' tools. 

13. Saddlers' tools. 

14. Miscellaneous tools, 
furniture. 15. Machinery, 
ation. 16. Miscellaneous stores for expenditure, 

alphabetically arranged, as build- 
ing materials, bricks, horse medi- 
cines, horseshoes, lumber, rope, 
steel, &c. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



General's Office, 



irtcrlv Return of Quartermaster 's Stores reeeivtd, issued, and 
mining on hand at Fort Blank, Utah, in the quarter ending on 
the 30th day of June, /88j, by David Jones, Capt. joth Inf. 



Ml... kMlliU.s' 

Carpenters' t 



r.. \VWel* rights' tools. 

[2. Masons' and bricklayers' tools. 

r ;. Saddlers' tools. 



16. Miscellaneous stores for expendit 
alphabetically arranged, as bi 

ing materials, bricks, hor-.e w 



io.S 

QUARl 



ART OK WAR. 

"""/"' Stores received and issue,/ at Fort Blank, Utah, in tht quarter aidini •" the 30th day of June,i8Ss, by dpi. David Jones,soth U. S. Inf. 





Claw. 


.. Fuel. 










1 




Hard Wood. Soft Wood. 


Kindling 


Coal. 






| 


X 
Lbs 


Lbs 


1 
Lbs. 


6 

i 
f 

1 

Qrs. 


1 

Qrl 


i 

Qrl 


i 
a 
s. 

Qrl 


I 
Sh'ts. 


9 


No. 




1 


Bolts. 




1 


4 


L 

No 


1 
No 








J 






| 


| 


| 

No. 




5 

OiS. 




iEEe ■■ 


' ' fro in.'- ,' ' ' ' - - • ■ 


: : : :|: : hj 














_1 


: : 

~~7 






_1 

- 


: 


777777 






















• ' 




77- 






' ■ • ■ ■ • ■ • 


~ 




~ 










= = 






— — 


_ 

:: 


- 


- 


__j.__ 


_ 


■■''I .ml, 11, on 1 1, . 1 






- 

:: 


— 


777 




iCindiiion. ... 1 Ineood order 

1 " ll 1"' 'V!,. 1,,,, ,, ],.,„. ,(,|,. _ 

'•■1 ,1!; !.., ■.,,„., . 1 : j 


: 


; 


■ 















on 


the 


30th day of ytine, i88j, t 


jy c«//. z^v y< 


?»£$■, 


50^ 


£/..£ 


Inf. 




3. Straw. 


4. Stationery. 


X 


O 

fa 


bi 
a 



1 
fa 

Lbs. 


>-' 

ft 

a 

ft 
c 

"0 

fa 

Qrs. 


V 

ft 

a 

►J 
Qrs. 


ft 
ft 


p. 


fa 

Qrl 


a 
ft 

a 
_o 

> 

W 
Qr7. 


u 

ft 

ft 

bp 



s 

Sh'ts. 


V 

ft 

> 

c 

fa 





c 

3 


1 


c 
2 




s 


(5 




.bs Lbs 


No. 


No. 


No. 




Botts. 


Botts. 


Ozs. 






















' ' 




























. . ! . . 














! ! ! ! '. 






...!.. 

::i|ii 


: : 1 : : 
.... 


_L-1 












.... 










• • ■ • 





































.... 










':•!;: 











109 



o 

<% 

u 
u 

< 
















































.... 


O. H.. 
D . . . 
E . .. 
F . .. 


— 


— '- 


— L 


— 


— 




• • 

• • 




--- 


• • • ■ ■ • 

■ ■ i ■ ' ■ ■ 


G .- 
H . ., 
Hh .. 
I . .. 

K. .. 






• • 






















i . ..j. .1 • 
3 • •■ 1 • '■ ■ 






:•:):: 















I ciaster's Department, during the quarter ending on the 

of — David Jones, 

( Caj>t.5Qth U. S. Inf. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 
Quarterly Return — Continued. (See page 106.) 







& 


! 


i 


No 


No. 


O 
No 


No 


No 


■ • 


— 


Nu 


N 


£ 


l 




| 


: 


i 


| 


a 


e 

S. 












































__ 






II.. 


— 


— 


~P 


^7 


— 








































" 


0. H. . 
D. . . 
E . . . 
F . . . 












































: : 


: : 






_._ _ 






S 


•-• 


_!...-_ 




TT1TT 




..|. 






. .:. . 


































G . . 
H. . . 
Hh . . 

K. . '. '. 




ii 


:: 




J_L 


L 


_ 


ii 






j_ 


___ 


: 




: : 


L 


, 


■ : 






■ ■ 


• • 




■ ••I-.I--I-. 






















..).. 


. .i. . 








..... .| .|. . 










5 




6 




» 


4 


















.. 






.. 






■ 


. .1. . 












3 ; ; ; 


:. 


:; 


i: 




: ; 


i 


: . 










. 4 


2 


3 

3 


.* 


' 


i 


5 

: : 




; ; 


.. 
















;l ' A 












: :i: : 







t of the Quartermaster's Depart 



ART OF WAR. 
(See page 106.) 



Captain David Jane 
SOth U. S. Inf. 



QUARTERLY RETURN OF QUARTERMASTERS* STORES 

Received and issued in the quarter 

ending on the joth day of June, 1885. 



Innt 


rnf 


one office 








ster the 


transfer! 


niii utiicer 






er the re,. 




for Quarterns 




































titer the ii.vc 








hand at 



















THE LINE OF THE ARMY. Ill 

Return of Ordnance and Ordnance Stores. 

A Return of Ordnance and Ordnance Stores received, 
issued, expended, and remaining on hand at the end of 
each quarter, must also be made. The articles embraced 
under this head pertaining to the Company are the arms, 
all kinds of ammunition, spare parts of the arm in use for 
ordinary repair. Blanket bags and straps, haversacks, can- 
teens, meat cases, knives, forks and spoons, tin cups, waist- 
belts and plates, cartridge boxes, pistol holders, tools for 
re-loading empty cartridge shells, iron targets, stencil plates, 
books pertaining to rifle practice, arm chests, screw-drivers, 
shell-extractors and cleaning materials; and in addition, 
for Artillery and Cavalry, harness, saddles, gun-carriages, 
limbers, caissons and all their appointments, portable forges, 
horseshoes, saddler's tools, leather, currycombs and brushes, 
nose-bags, spurs, bridles, horse-blankets, etc. 

Ammunition, spare parts of arms and cleaning materials 
are alone expendable, the former in such quantities as from 
time to time may be allowed by the War Department for 
practice in time of peace, or whatever may be used in time 
of war, and the latter as circumstances require. 

In the mounted batteries and the cavalry, in addition to 
the above, horse shoes and nails, and articles consumed in 
the repair of saddles, bridles, harness, etc., are also expend- 
able upon the certificate of the officer in command of the 
company, battery or troop. 

All other articles must be charged to any soldier losing 
or disposing of the same, or submitted to the action of an 
inspector, as previously described, if damaged by ordinary 
use. If unavoidably lost, without being able to fix the re- 
sponsibility, then a Board of Survey must be asked for to 
inquire into the circumstances and fix the responsibility. 

The form in use is given on pp. 113- 120, and is made 
out to illustrate the method for a Company of Infantry ; 
other headings will be found in their proper place for arti- 
cles pertaining to other arms of the service. 

It will of course be understood, that all the blank forms 
in this chapter are those used in the United States Army. 
In the Militia of the various States, the forms for account- 



I I 2 ART OF WAR. 

ability of property vary from these, but whenever Militia 
is called into the service of the United States, it will have 
to use United States forms. Some forms, like those used 
for accounting for United States property, are the same in 
all States. Muster rolls, morning reports, guard reports, 
etc., are also the same, being all strictly those used in the 
United States Army. 






"3 



ART OF 



b"2 



eadings on this blank must not be era 

rdnance Stores received, issu 



2-£ 



■a £ 

C-T3 
o fi 
u cd 






BREECH-LOADING F 



ke< «■*> 



an 



.-^-3 



sorj o-g 
qu| r >>"S 

be£ j; 3 

pii ^ 

org v - 
ch= g £ 

111 

P O in 

P e /f g S 
or^ -a • S 

ofp a-* a 

OX! ■- 
■J i- «J 

cl22 §^ 

zfe " 2 -S 

A2 « = = 



CJ 

c 
o 

,Q 

T3 . 
O in 

£* 
S'ed 

tfi 

_C 

a 

CO 


cd 

XI 

XI 

G . 
•7 in 

00 -* 

n 

2 

~v 
ifi 

bO 
C 
'C 
ft 


'C 

cd 
M 
cd 
6 


u 
w 

cj 

■a 




<u 
<fi 

'C 
i> 
g . 

cd t 

cuo 
cd 
S 

.fi 




s 


Id 


4) 

<c 

<u 
.S 

'n 
cd 

to 
cd 

a 

« 

CJ 


t/i 
c 

3 
bfl 

O 
ifi 

c 

p. 

C/2 










2 
















2 


























— 














2 







CTIONS FOR MAKING AND T 

fully the notes on the first page, be^ 
Department one complete set of \ 

: complete set of vouchers — exact duj 

)ast quarters, correct Returns for eacr 

ins who are accountable for Ordnance 

who cannot furnish a reasonable exci 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY 
QUARTERLY RETURN 

OF 

ORDNANCE AND ORDNANCE STORES 

RECEIVED, ISSUED, AND REMAINING ON HAND 

IN 

Co. " G," 4th Regiment Infantry, 

COMMANDED BY 

Captain Win. H. Powell, 4th Infantry, 
DURING 

the Third Quarter, ending 30th Sept., 18S3. 



■ officer of the Ordnance Dep: 

ordnance sergeant, each keeper of m 
istant and deputy of such, an ' 




afficers, agents, and per- (/)-.. ^ >,5'Z- '' i;- i^^'j : i! )L " " = 

■ stores or supplies, shall £vj > ^ ^-'i^M'y / = V U "S ^ oil ^ 



quarterly, or oftener if mi directed, and in >m;li manner and on such forms as ma 
Iil- directed or prescribed by the Chief of Ordnance, make true and correct retu 
to the Chief of Ordnance ut' .dl ordnance, anus, ordnance stores, and all other s 
plies and property of every kind, received by <>r intrusted to ihem and each of th 
i.r winch may in anv manner cunie into their and each of their possession 
ch.u-c" * '- '- S.-.tiou 1,67, Kw\.;i SUt:t!,:<.o/Un- IniteU States. 



I ;.. ..mliiiu- and .-eitlciiicnt of urdn.. nee (.rupcrty .tuMiinls, which >a is formerly 
|i'..'il'.iriiiud liy the.- Sfijund Auditor + . I th..- Treasury, h.is, by decision ut' llie Sei nt.iry 
ol War. been devolved upon the Chief of ()pliwiii.e ; and officers responsible for 

property are required Lu satisfy the (, Incf u( ( irdn.inec >>f tin. suffi- icncy £h £"1 U £ "O £,-° £ 



""l^ll-sP' 5 ' 1 




<< of, c 



|i'.-|~ >l]l Ml l Ul^-' I .IS VOIICll 






I lm I'r- .jici-l \ Returns when examined, found correct, and finally settled and 
any of the accounting officers of the Treasury. 

Received at Ordnance Office , iSS . 

Examined, found correct, end audited by the Chief of Ordnance. The 
Return filed in Ordnance Office, and the responsible official no- 






ART OF WAR. 



The printed headings on this blank must not be erased, added to, interlined, or in any way changed. 

Quarterly Return of Ordnance and Ordnance 'Stores received, issued, and remaining on hand, in Co. " G," Fourth Regiment Infantry, fo, 







1 


CLASS VI. 




i THIRD QUARTER, 1883. 


BREECH-LOADING RIFLES, CARBINES, REVOLVERS, &c. SWORDS. 


DATE. 


| 

1 


J-2 


1* 


}m 


i 

8 

& 

i 


8 

S 
1 

a 


i 


£ 

a 

I 












1 
1 

e" 

si 

6 
5 


B 
| 

e»rl 

1 
| 


l 


1 










s 

1 

1 
\ 

i 


S 










June 
June 
July 


3° 

:; 

"1 


On hand from last Return. . . 

Taken up, as per 

Received from Capt. Frank 

Heath, Ord. Dept. U. S. A. 
Received from Capt. Frank 

Heath, Ord. Dept. U.S. A. 
Received from ,st Lieut. 11. I> 

Price, Adjt. 4th Inft 

Received from 

Received from 
























| | Total to be accounted for. 


49 














* 












S 


























1 


July 

July 
Sept. 


30 


Issued to Capt. Frank Heath, 
Ord. Dept. U. S. A 

2 Condemned to be dropped by 

order of A. A. I. G.Dept.Platte 

3 Expended, as per Abstract . . 
Lust or destroyed, as per . . . 
Charged on Muster and Pay 

Rolls, as per Statement . . . 








































Total ■ 


SUED AND EXPENDED 




































,.|.. 


















PC 




Text Return "." .^ C ? V .'" E .'' . 


■19 














= 












s 








. .1. . 



















Before proceeding to fill \ 

.'.<>,, ,,;.u 



DIRECTIONS FOR MAKING AND TRANSMITTING THIS RETURN. 
; form, read carefully the notes on the first page, below the indorsement, as also the " Ordnan 
the Ordnance Depaktmsnt one complete set of vouchers as above numbered, within twe 






ounS'X" 



s, correct Returns for each should be made 01 
accountable for Ordnance Stores, whose Re 
t furnish a reasonablt excuse for the delay, ai 



' Oii'^in.-il." 

1 iv.u-h (lie ( 



WAR. 



sed, added to, interlined, or in any way changed. 

ed, and remaining on hand, in Co. " G," Fourth Regiment Infantry, for 



CLASS VI. 


:IFLES, CARBINES, REVOLVERS, &c. SWORDS. 


— 











■j 

jQ 

o 

4) 

> 

U 

5 

5 
5 


J> 

. 4) 

<C 
O 

JS 

<J 

I 

I 
I 


> 
'a 

a 

3 


4) 

a 
o 
>» 

d 

O 

H 

— ^ 












e 

o 

13 

4) 

o 

in 

s 

£ 
o 
o 

o 


c 

.2 

!2 

3 


— 


— 


— 


— - 



RANSMITTING THIS RETURN. 

v the indorsement, as also the " Ordnance Property Regulations, 1877." 

ouchers as above numbered, within twenty days after the expiration of the quarter for 

ilicates of those sent with the " Original." 

1 should be made out before commencing that for the current quarter. 

! Stores, whose Returns fail to reach the Ordnance Office within sixty days from the 

jse for the delay, are now reported to the Secretary of War for a stoppage of their pay 



H5 



ART OF WA1 



bO 

rt 
,fi 

41 

■a 

rt 
3 


1 . . 



CLASS VII— Continued. 



APPENDAGES- 



- 


— 


t 



rt 

X 
V 

13 
,J3 

U) 
(/) 

JU 

rt 
41 

w 

So 

50 
50 


■a 
is 

u 
a 
CO 

40 
40 

40 


> 

bo 
_c 

a, 

CO 

2 
2 

2 


u 

-c 
c 

3 
P. 
1- 

£ 

3 
H 

8 
8 

8 






J, 

2 

bo 
e 
0. 



_> 

■a 
is 

4) 

.2 

rt 

c 
IB 

E 


O 

2 
2 

2 


u 

4) 

c 

rt 
_4> 
"0 

4) 

<c 
E 

4) 

m 
fa 

4) 
S 

O 

4 
4 

4 


4) 

tfl 

rt 


2 

*4> 

E 
2 

-1 

[ 

• ') 

• 1 

' 'l 
. .1 

2f 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



CLASS VII. 


EQUIPMENTS. ^"'"'o^fta*™* '^ , 


a, 


4 


i 

39 


J 
1 


i 
1 


u 


2 


1 

X 


f 




s. 

2 




i 
s 

8 

s 


t 


d 




I 


2 
3 

| 


i 

1 
1 
1 


Hi 


1 = 


•3 


X 

| 
s 

1 

B 










! 
1 


i 
1 


i 
> 


1 


1 














73 
73 


Is" 




55 


55 




. 


, 


.'. 


43 
44 


48 


46 














33 


! ! 


:: 






■■ 






: 














5« 


36 


48 


48 


43 


49 


47 










5 




50 


















. . . . 




















































9 


































































■ ■ • 9 1- ■ 




























39 




7; 


48 




56 


56 


48 


48 1 43 


45 


44 


49 


47 










4 1 1 1 41 1 • . 1 • ■ -I ■ ■ 














. .1. . 









CLASS Vll-Continued. 


CLASS VIII. 




EQUIPMENTS-Pat-tkrk 1874. APPENDAGES- SHOT-GUN OUTFIT. 


CARTRIDGES, &c. 


r. 


| 
i 


i\ 

it 

-x 

39 

4 S 


i 

i 

1 
53 


2 
1 
f 





•• 


2 
■5. 

43 












1 
I 


1 


a 


H 


1 

i 


5 

| 
1 


6 


3 


M 


| 


1 


s 


8 


1 


1 
I 


1 


1 
1 

I 


1 

■si 
1" 






i" 

r 
1 


| 
1 


is 
■2I 


! 


s 








8 




















85 












: : 






796 






40 


90 


S7 


59 




48 












50 


40 


2 


8 




2 


4 




= 




'< 


> 


' 


85 


100 




' 


= 






3.0 




70' 


M,. 














■■ 










































:: 


T 












.0 


,0 


• 










.... 










































= 7»» 












71 1 


77 ! 


59 1 






.1. . 




..!.. 


50! 40 


> 


8 




* 


4 


2 


2 


• 


* 


» 


* 


s 5 


,00 




' 


2 






300 




796 


,,.-* 





I 


CLASS VIII. 


SHOT-GUN OUTFIT. 


CARTRIDGES, &c. 


I 


"o 
o 

bfl 

B 

1 

2 

2 
2 


1? 
rt 

O 

O 

43 
Ifl 

e 

Bl 

>H 

u 
13 
■S 

o 

Ph 

I 

I 
I 


d 
d 

c 

3 
fa 

2 
2 

2 


d 
d 

Q 

2 
2 

2 




d 
"1 

3 
M 

2 
2 

2 


00 

d 

e 

3 

o 

& 

bo 

o 

Pi 

O 

43 

Cfl 

85 

~87 

85 


e 
3 
bfl 

O 

43 

10 

(O 

J2 

J3 
<U 

bo 

rH 
u 

100 
100 

IOO 


c 

3 
bfl 

O 

43 

bo 
1) i3 

6 S 
•g u 

9* 

bO 

■g 
S3 


rt 

C 
_o 



8 

•0 


c 
■ft 

2 
2 

2 


cS 

bfl 

43 . 
U u 

ol 

(/) in 

C 
rt 

<U 


On 

2 
2 

2 




- 


■* 

43 

"rt 

r/~00 

00 

bfl " 
■a • 

|° 

3^ 

43 
3000 

3000 

2700 

2700 
300 


u 
V 
43 

"rt 


V 

rt 1" 
u 

43 

a 

43 


43 • 

4J43 

c s 

43 g 
03 - 

" S3 

bfl 
•5:0 

u 

796 
796 

796 


>- 
u 

43 

a 

bfl 

12 

rt £ 

"rt 

43 

in 

i> 
j> 
"0 

> 

1122 

1122 
1122 


O 

bfl 

U IT) 

rt 1- 
• 

A v 

C43 

43 

u 

u 
_> 
"0 

> 

(2 



ii7 



ART OF \ 



CLASS X 



SPARE PARTS FOR SPRINGF] 



71 



% 

o 
o 

ft 

"u 
B 

o 


% 

ft 
o 

ft 

tr. 
V 

c 
o 
;>> 


o 
o 

p3 


ft 

c, 

o 

1) 


i) 
ft 

^. 

o 

43 

<U 
U 

m 

4 
4 


i-i 

o 

in 

M 

V 

<u 


'u 

m 

4 


v> 

i> 
'u 

4 
4 


C/5 
<U 

"ft 

PQ 




• • 








4 














— 




4 


4 










4 


. . '1 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



CLASS VIIL-Continued. 




CARTRIDGES, &c— Continued. 


RELOADING TOOLS AND TARGET MATERIAL. 


1 
I 

i 

x 


1! 

•i 

i 


1 
£ 


a 

2 
1 


o 

1 


2 


1 
1 








2 


| 

1 
< 


f 
1 


i 




jd 


s 


i 
5 


£ 
1 


< 


1 

(2 


8 


1 
I 


« 


& 


1 
1 

is 


| 
I 


s 


I 


J 


3 


1 


1 


E 


6 


1 
1 

6 


1 


'. 


. 








- 








■ • 








































•• 
















■ CO 


<>>o 




6co 


3*5° 


5000 


4 












1 


























. 




. 
















■ 




.;■ »: 








- 


























































77 


: : 
— 














3000 










































T 


"7 










~ 


■CO 


i5 




,vv 


3 2 5° 


2 oc 


4 
























■ 




■ 




. .1. .1. . 





ART OF WAR. 



CLASS X TO VI. 


SPARE PARTS FOR SPRINGFIELD RIFLE AND CARBINE. 


J 

| 

5 


i 

i 

1 


1 


1 


1 


i 
i 


1 




J 
1 


1 


1 
1 
1 


1 
a 


i 


| 


1 




1 

pa 


l 


1 


E 


1 
1 


b 
I 
1 


1 
I 


1 

s 


1 
S 


1 


2 


i 


i 


i 


■| 


s 


1 


I 


| 


I 
J 

o 




















































- 


8 






































4 




4 


4 


















4 


12 | 8 


s 




























































































































- 


















♦ 




* 


4 










. .1. . 






4 


12 | 8 


s 













l.VAR. 



I_ 


TO 


VI 


































.ELD RIFLE AND CARBINE. 




T 


% 

u 
o 

U] 

V 

"3. 

3 

m 


> 
o 
u 

rt 
"p. 

pq 

• • 


So 
.5 
o. 

u 

> 

o 
V 



u 

be 

.5 

p. 

> 
O 


So 

c 

ft 
e 
u 

u 

> 
o 

u 

77 


a 
'ft 

£ 
in 

i» 

> 

o 
U 


s 

U 


1 
ft 

43 
O 

E 

u 

4 

4 

4 


o 
W 

12 

.. 

12 
12 


bo 

_c 

ft 

L. 

o 
o 
o 

w 1 

8 

:: 

8 
8 


a 
S. 

ti 

.S 
ft 

o 
o 

8 

8 

It 


-6 

3 

u 
O 

1) 

w 1 


c 
'ft 

bfl 


1 

u 

U) 

C 
'ft 

to 

E 


M 

3 
O 

fa 


u 

_> 

.£P 

'33 

3 


o 

T3 

2 

6 


J2 

"3 
> 

o 

43 
-g 

rt 

3 

o 



II 9 













% 

V 

o 

% 

1 
•s 

o 
-a 

03 

3 
O 






1 1 '. . . '. . '. '. | '. 1 '. '. '. '. '. '. \ Triggers. 


I 
o 

M 

H 




_! 1 













«, 


/*#. 










ART 


OF 








u 

c 

S3 


o 
o 

u 
,Q 

is 

o 

Ph 


i 

u 

o 

Ph 


u 

O 

4 


B 
U 

e 
H 

: : 


.3 
1 

W) 

.5 
'2 

<2 

X 

c 

PP 

i 

■ ■ 

i 
i 


P< 
6 

rt 

2 

• • 

2 


u 
Ph 

• • 


c 

.2 

"3 

M 

Pi 

o 
& 

c 

rt 

C 

-a 
u 

O 




I 
I 




_! 




. .1 




— 




4 



ibits a correct statement of the public prop 
; quarter was forty-three (43) enlisted men. 
nber 30th, 1883. 
maha, Nebraska. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 































CLASS X 


TO VI.— Continued. 








SPARE PARTS FOR SPRINGFIELD RIFLE AND CARBINE. 


1 

i 

6 


1 

J 


1 

•5 


1 

•5 


a 

s 


i 

X 


i 


I 

i 


1 


s 


I 

g 


£ 




| 
I 

« 


1 


1 


i 


I 
1 


j 

f 


1 




s 


3 

| 




1 


I 


.I 


| 


i 
1 
s 


1 
| 


H 


1 


H 


H 


| 


' 


~ 






































































" 










,6 
























4 












































































































































. . . . 


































■6 























■> 


■ 


. .1 





AKT OF WAR. 



tlie third quarter, tutting September 30th, /SSj. 




















































CLASS X TO VI- Continued. 




PART SECOND. 




■ ,: 1 ,1 1 MM !TI ...1 7M.I 
RIH.I \MM IRB] N 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


|: 


: - 




■ 


I 




:j 


■ ■ 




J 


1 




J 


f 


| 


1 


% 
1 


J 

L 
1 
s 


1 


s 


| 


| 


- 1 
i " 


s 

£ 


| 


| 


s 


1 

1 


1 


1 

6 

'■ ■ 




- 


■• 






:: 
























\'\ 






: 






-1- 




1 


.. ..!.. .. 




















7T ~ TJTTi - 7JT - ! - TlTT 












=!i 
























.. |..l. . 


. .1. . 


. . 1 . . 1 . . 1 . . 1 . . 1 4 1 .0 




, . . 













1.. 1. Hunt ,.t the pu'ilic property in my ch.irye tiuriu^ i 



i -i ■!. iin.m ..t 1 he ci!'.|:. pi..| 
ftirly-thrcc (43) enlisied men 



■ . . . ■-■.;■: 1. '■ , .ill 



WAR. 



PART SECOND. 



MISCELLANEOUS. 



"3 

1 
O 


e 

B 
a 

-5 

C3 


OS 
-a 

| 


'o 
M 

.5 
_o 

-2 id 

<n 

o 

u 

o 


0) 

■f 2 u 
u E 

I 5 

IS 

— 


c 
5 

5 

£ 
be 
a 

'u 

= 
o 
a 
IT. 

1 

— 


o 
o 
c 

O 

bio 

.£ 

IB 

■ ■ 

— — 


u 

F 
o 

2 
£ 


1 

o 

m 
s 

1 

4 

:: 

z 

4 


5 

.5 
*c 
E 

rt 

20 

: : 
20 

IO 
IO 


1) 

"S. 
E 

o 

o 

'3 

G 

* 

en 

. 
"T 


c 

" 

bO 

e" 

Ih 
U 

a. 

U! 

5 

i 

• 

. . 
i 

~7 


— 


— 


: " 


— 


— 




_ 

• • 






- — 






~T 7 











T erty in my charge during the third quarter, ending September 30th, 18S3 ; and that the 

,v Wm. H. Powell, 

•c Captain 4th Infantry, Commanding Company. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



121 



Invoice of Ordnance and Ordnance Stores turned over by Capt. 
F. Heath, Ord. to Depot Assistant Quarterjnaster at Cheyenne De- 
pot, for transportation to C. O., Co."G," 4th Infantry, at Fort 
Omaha, Neb., in obedience to order of Depart7nent Commander, 
dated June 25, 1883. (See page m.) 



No. OF 
Boxes. 



Marks. 



CONTENTS. 



Weight. 



2-4 
5-6 

1 



6 Boxes, 



Jli 

bp-|0 
Id 



48 Bayonet Scabbards, Hoffman attachments 

17 Gun slings lengthened , 

48 Waist belts , 

5 Waist belt plates , 

8 Screw-drivers , 

3000 Rifle ball Cartridges, Mod. 1881 

3350 Rifle bullets, lubricated flat-point , 

5000 Cartridge primers, F. A , 

12 Extractors 

12 Tumbler screws 

12 Tumblers swiveled , 

1 gallon Sperm oil , 



117 lbs. 



375 lbs. 
243 lbs. 



708 lbs. 



I certify that the above is a correct Invoice of Ordnance and Ordnance Stores 
turned over by me this 29th day of June, 1883, to Depot Quartermaster at Cheyenne 
Depot, for transportation to as above. 

Frank Heath, 
Captain of Ordnance, 
Chief Ordnance Officer, Dept. Platte, 
(in triplicate.) Commanding. 

One direct to the officer by mail. Two to the Quartermaster, who keeps one, and 
forwards the other to the receiving officer. 



122 ART OF WAR. 



Voucher No. I.* (Seepage in.) 
INVOICE OF STORES 

TURNED OVER TO QUARTERMASTER FOR TRANSPORTATION 

By Capt. Frank Heath, Ord. Dept., U. S. A., Chief Ordnance 
Officer D. P. 

On the 2gth day of June, 1883. 

Received . . day of July, 1883. 

* Where there are not a sufficient number of vouchers to render an abstract nec- 
essary, draw a pen through the word " ABSTRACT." In all cases, number the 
vouchers in the order of the date of reception, as above noted in the indorsement. 

OFFICERS INVOICING ORDNANCE STORES SHOULD OBSERVE : 

That all issues or transfers of Ordnance property must be made in pursuance of 
proper authority. 
This authority may be as follows : 

1. An order for supplies given by the Chief of Ordnance, Washington, D. C. 

2. A requisition duly approved as required by paragraphs 112, 113, 114, and 115, 

Ordnance Property Regulations, 1877. 

3. A direct order given by a superior officer to transfer certain stores. 

4. An order which, from its nature, involves a transfer of property. 

In all cases an officer making use of this blank must insert after the words " in 
obedience to," at the head of the Invoice, the order or authority under which the 
issue is made. 

If an order for supplies, give its number and the year; if a requisition, say " The 
[Give Officer' s name.] 
requisition of , of , 188 ." 

If an order, state whose order, when, and where given. 

No issue will be considered valid unless the authority is given as hen directed. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



I23 



Invoice of Ordnance and Ordnance Stores turned over by Capt. 
F. Heath, Ordnance to Depot, Assistant Quartermaster at Cheyenne 
Depot, Wyo.,for transportation to C. O., Co. "G," 4th Infantry, at 
Fort Omaha, Neb., in obedience to order of Department Commander, 
dated June 25, 1883. (See page ill.) 



No. OF 
Boxes. 


Marks. 


CONTENTS. 


Weight. 




Hi 

c £ 

<5° 












1 Box . 




185 Lbs. 







I certify that the above is a correct Invoice of Ordnance and Ordnance Stores 
turned over by me this 29th day of June, 1883, to Depot, Quartermaster at Cheyenne 
Depot, Wyo., for transportation to as above. 

Frank Heath, 
Capt. of Ordnance, 
Chief Ordnance Officer, D. P., 
(in triplicate.) Commanding. 

One direct to the officer by mail. Two to the Quartermaster, who keeps one, and 
forwards the other to the receiving officer. 



124 ART 0F WAR « 



Voucher No. 2 .* (See page ill.) 
INVOICE OF STORES 

TURNED OVER TO QUARTERMASTER FOR TRANSPORTATION 

By Capt, Frank Heath, Ord. Dept., U. S. A., Chief Ordnance Officer, 
D. Platte, 
On the 2gth day of June, 1883, 
Received . . , day of July, 1883. 



* Where there are not a sufficient number of vouchers to render an abstract nec- 
essary, draw a pen through the word "ABSTRACT." In all cases, number the 
vouchers in the order of the date of reception, as above noted in the indorsement. 



OFFICERS INVOICING ORDNANCE STORES SHOULD OBSERVE : 

That all issues or transfers of Ordnance property must be made in pursuance of 
proper authority. 

This authority may be as follows; 

1. An order for supplies given by the Chief of Ordnance, Washington, D. C. 

2. A requisition duly approved as required by paragraphs 112, 113, 114, and 

115, Ordnance Property Regulations, 1877. 

3. A direct order given by a superior officer to transfer certain stores. 

4. An order which, from its nature, involves a transfer of property. 

In all cases an officer making use of this blank must insert after the words " in 
obedience to," at the head of the Invoice, the order or authority under which the 
issue is made. 

If an order for supplies, give its number and the year ; if a requisition, say " the 
{Give Officer's name.'] 
requisition of , of , 188 ." 

If an order, state whose order, when, and where given. 

No issue -will be considered valid unless the authority is given as here directed. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



125 



Invoice of Ordnance and Ordnance Stores turned over by 1st 
Lieut. Butler D. Price, Adjutant 4th Infantry, to Commanding 
Officer, Company "G," 4th Infantry, at Fort Omaha, Nebraska, on 
the 1st day of August, 1883, in obedience to Orders ij8, Columbus 
Barracks, Ohio, July 28, 1883. (See page 11 J.) 
(See notes on outside.) 



CONTENTS. 



Clothing Bags and Straps .... 

Haversacks and Straps 

Canteens and Straps 

Meat Cans 

Tin Cups 

Knives, Forks and Spoons, sets of. 



Weight. 



Value, 



per piece 
or lb. 



2 o^ 
\ E " 

121 

sill 

5 2Q« 



111 



I certify that the above is a correct Invoice of Ordnance and Ordnance Stores 
turned over by me this 1st day of August, 1883, to Commanding Officer, Company 
1 G," 4th Infantry. 

Butler D. Price, 

(in duplicate.) 1st Lieut, and Adjutant 4th Infantry. 



{For issue or transfers of Ordnance Stores.) 
Received at Cheyenne Ord. Depot, this 13th day of Aug., 1883, of 
Capt. Wm. H. Powell, 4th Inf., Com\lg Co. "G" the following Ord- 
nance and Ordnance Stores, as per invoice dated the 28th day of 
July, 1883. ( See page III.) 



Ten (10) Bayonet Scabbards, steel 
Nineteen (19) Waist Belts, privates 
Nine (9) Gun Slings ... . . . . 



-Unserviceable. 



(in duplicate.) 



Frank Heath, 
Captain of Ordnance, 
Chief Ordnance Officer, Dep. Platte, 

Commanding. 



126 ART OF WAR. 

Voucher No. 3.* (See page ill.) 
INVOICE OF STORES 

TURNED OVER 

By ist Lieut. Butler D. Price, 4th Inf., Adjutant 4th Infantry, 

On the ist day of August, 1883. 

Received ist day of August, 1883. 

* Where there are not a sufficient number of vouchers to render an abstract nec- 
essary, draw a pen through the word "ABSTRACT." In all cases number the 
vouchers in the order of the date of reception, as above noted in the indorsement. 

OFFICERS INVOICING ORDNANCE STORES SHOULD OBSERVE : 

That all issues or transfers of Ordnance property must be made in pursuance of 
proper authority. 
This authority may be as follows : 

1. An order for supplies given by the Chiet of Ordnance, Washington, D. C. 

2. A requisition duly approved as required by paragraph 113, Ordnance Prop- 

erty Regulations. 

3. A direct order given by a superior officer to transfer certain stores. 

4. An order which, from its nature, involves a transfer of property. 

In all cases an officer making use of this blank must insert, after the words " in 
obedience to," at the head of the Invoice, the order or authority under which the 
issue is made. 

If an order for supplies, give its number and the year ; if a requisition, say " the 
{Give officer's name.\ 
requisition of of , 188 ." 

If an order, state whose order, when and where given. 

No issue will be considered valid unless the authority is given as here directed. 



Voucher No. 1. (See page in.) 
RECEIPT FOR ISSUES TO 

Capt. Frank Heath, Ord. Dept., U. S. A., Chief Ordnance Officer, 
D. P., Cheyenne Ord. Depot, W. T., 

On the 28th day of July, 1883, 

AS PER INVOICE DATED 

the 28th day of July, 1883. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



I27 



in 
< 

2 

W 
H 
<J 
3 






































































































•suounq s ( u3uis^jbj^[ 














c 























m 
m 

< 

O 


























































































































u 
13 

j 

< 

^ 2 

I 5 

>-; z 



'paiBDuqnq 'sjsjpig ayi-g 







CO 










1 § 

1 ro 


"SJ3UIU { J 3§pU5J-G3 


1 












1 ro 


■ • • jaqijBD 

'S^SpiXUEQ JOlSig • • • • 














1 : 


■ • • jsqij^o 
'saSpujj^ auiqiir) " • ■ 


















-mo 's 3 §pu 5 jB3 n eg 3U!H ! ST 












1 


• • • jsqq^o 
's3Sp1.x1.n23 [jBg psmSuojg 




































Q 
W 
■ 

w 
a. 
X 

H 

O 


b 

V 
Z 

5 


9 

t 

C 


c 




in 

E 

5 
<*. 

c 

-- 

9 

£. 
C 


1 

E 

': 

3 
u 

-a 

c 

1 


c 

c 
L» 

"n 

G 

C 


c 

p 

E 

c 




p 

w 



z 

(I) 

PL, 

X 

J 
< 

H 

O 
H 




w 




ro ro 






5 s 

Q 


a, a 
72 c/2 



& 




10 teV? S 


u Ok!; j 


1^3 


%x* 


^ ..« 


^S-S 





2 o 

1) <0 

x! -a 



4) > « 
<U aj C 

1-ss 

rt «) y 
■ggd 

c"5)3 
O « M . 

G a. J; J- 

■n ^ 6 « -S 

■^ O tfl > 

Z O 0"° c 

o, ,-£ t, rt S 

K « ^2-c^ 

U Z 

1—11 — ' to 



128 ART OF WAR. 



No. 3- 
ABSTRACT OF EXPENDITURES. 

Co. "G" 4th Reg't Infantry, 
Third Quarter, 1883. 



129 



fc III.) 



REMARKS. 

kenever practicable, the In- 
'note in this column when, 
irom whom stores were pur- 
lame of the purchasing offi- 
and the marks upon original 



Colt's 1 

Eayone 
Waist ) 
Gun Sh 



id 

personal l ^ at tne articles recom- 
conJemp 0165 found to be utterly 

S 
win C. Mason, 

^A. I. G., Deft Platte. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 
Inventory AND Inspection Report of Ordnance and Ordnance Stores, for which Capt. Wm. H. Powell, 4th Inf., is responsible, and which have been inspected and reported on by Lieut. Col. E. C. Mason, A. A. Inspector General, Department of the Platte. (See page 



inxn^rEisrTODR-Y'. 





QUANTITY. 


RECEIVED BY THE OFFICER NOW- 
RESPONSIBLE. 


It 






OW RENDERED UN- 


ARTICLES. 


W„t,. 


F„„,W_. 




SERVICEABLE. 


Cult', l'i.i.,1 Holsters .... 

I'.vun.i ^...ibli.irds, steel . . 


Ten do) ; ; ; ; 

Nineteen (,„). . 


1879 .... 
■879 .... 
1878. . . . 
.878. . . . 


!--:- : S':SS: 




'* 






s s \ s 



i the action of an Inspector, and wh 



C^t. 4 th Inf., Com 



iivrsPECTioi<r :R,iE:Fo:K,a:. 



NATURK, KXTl'N'T, AND 

I'RDIUr.LK CAUbE 

OF DAM AG h. 



ventory are worthless f...r 



DIM'' iM I K.iN Rl t n.MMK.Mi] 1>. 



' All'.:^ 



REMARKS. 
NoTE.-Whencver pnictic 
spector will note in this c- 
wliere, and from whom stoi 

ccr or a^ent , and trie mark* 
packages. 



I to be destroyed have i 



is tenth Jay of July, 1SS3. Lawfully ■_. 
) money value at or near the Post ; an 
able, been destroyed in my presence. 



I also certify that the articles found to 1 



LUut. Col. 4th Infantry, A. 



ART OF WAR. 



This Form will be used for the inspocti- -n uf property f<>i condemnation in all iln- different departments of the Army. Requisitions for ilie-.r blanks to be made direct upon the Inspector General a 
Washington. 

DIRECTIONS.— To be made out in triplicate, and, whenever practicable, forwarded to the Inspector through the proper channels ; otherwise, it will be presented to him upon his arrival. Receiving his 
action, it will be forwarded for the orders of the Commander empowered to authorize the disposition of condemned property, and returned, with such orders, to the officer responsible for the properly, who will 
send certified abstracts with any properly ordered to be turned into depot or to be transferred to some other officer, which abstracts will, when practicable.be signed by the Inspector, or by an officer wholly 
disinterested in the disposition or responsibility of the property. This Form is designed for all descriptions of public property, but separate inventories are to be made for the property of each Staff Depart- 
ment ; also for " Clothing. Camp and Garrison Equipage," as distinct from all other property of the Quartermaster's Department, and for " Commissary Property," as distinct from " Subsistence 
Stokes," whenever property of the Subsistence Department is to be inspected. Horses and Mules will be inventoried singly, with brief description of color, sex, age, and distinguishing marks. Of the in- 
ventories, one will be sent to the Chief of the Staff Department to which the property pertains, one will accompany the officer's next stated accounts, and one will be retained by himself. In order to relievean 
officer from liability on account of public property that has become damaged except by fair wear and tear, or otherwise unsuitable for use, or when deficiencies are found in it, it must, before being submitted to 
an Inspector for condemnation, be examined by a Board of Survey. 

Articles to be " continued in service " are such as the Inspector regards as still serviceable, and not proper subjects of present condemnation ; those to be " dropped from returns," if utterly worthless, 
to be so far destroyed, in the presence of ftie Inspector, whenever practicable^as to prevent any possibility of future pre-eui ..iti.m as public property ; and when the presence of the Inspector is impracticable, the 
officer under whose personal supervision such articles are directed to be destroyed shall certify, on the monthly return of the officer responsible, to the destruction of the same ; and such articles as cannot be so 
destroyed will, when practicable, be marked with the letters " I. C," [Inspected, Condemned,] but otherwise to be broken up and serviceable parts retained : those "to bb sold at the post" are such as are of 

be " taken up " are such parts of the broken-up articles as are still serviceable, and are to be kept for public use by the officer r 
taken. Public animals will not be condemned for temporary disease or low flesh, but may be turned into the depot for recuperatic 
called to the requirement of General Orders No. 8, Headquarters of the Army, A. G. O., March 3, 1869. 



WAR DEPARTMENT, 

Washington City, "January 2, 187b. 

rmy. Requisitions for these blanks to be made direct upon the Inspector General at 

E. D. TOWNSEND, 
Adjutant General, U. S. Army. 

oper channels ; otherwise, it will be presented to him upon his arrival. Receiving his 
rty, and returned, with such orders, to the officer responsible for the property, who will 
:h abstracts will, when practicable, be signed by the Inspector, or by an officer wholly 
perty, but separate inventories are to be made for the property of each Staff Depart- 
er's Department, and for "Commissary Property," as distinct from "Subsistence. 
singly, with brief description of color, sex, age, and distinguishing marks. Of the in- 
icer's next stated accounts, and one will be retained by himself. In order to relieve an 
suitable for use, or when deficiencies are found in it, it must, before being submitted to 

of present condemnation; those to be " dropped from returns," if utterly worthless, 
ntation as public property ; and when the presence of the Inspector is impracticable, the 
le officer responsible, to the destruction of the same ; and such articles as cannot be so 

up and serviceable parts retained; those "to be sold at the post" are such as are of 
is cannot be repaired at the post and are worth the cost of turning them in ; and those to 
fficer responsible, or transferred to depot, or to some other officer, whose receipt will be 
peration or treatment if temporarily unserviceable. The special attention of Inspectors is 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. I31 

The Duty Sergeants. 

The Sergeant has at all times certain specific duties to 
perform, and a certain limited sphere of authority. His 
place is never in the ranks, (except the color bearer.) His 
duties are principally those of instructor to the men. 

The well-being and efficiency of any military organization 
is termed "Morale," and in the company it depends to such 
an extent on the non-commissioned officers, that the greatest 
care and judgement should be exercised in their selection. 

All non-commissioned officers hold their positions on 
good behavior, from the time they are appointed as such un- 
til the term of enlistment expires. They are appointed by 
the Colonel of the Regiment or chief of the corps they belong 
to, on the recommendation of their company commander. 

Their appointments are called warrants, and they can 
lose them only by sentence of a court-martial or order of 
the regimental or corps commanders. 

The Sergeant should be distinguished by exceptional 
military qualities, such as a thoroughly intelligent knowledge 
of all drills, regulations and orders of his arm of service. 

All non-commissioned officers take rank or precedence ac- 
cording to the date of their warrants. Thus the Sergeant after 
the First Sergeant who has occupied the position the greatest 
length of time, outranks the other Sergeants, and the Cor- 
poral longest serving as such outranks the other Corporals. 

The Sergeant must be honest, industrious and sober, al- 
ways obeying orders of superiors with alacrity and cheerful- 
ness, and exacting the promptest and most cheerful obedi- 
ence from those to whom he gives orders. 

The Sergeant is placed in charge of a squad of men, also 
that part of the camp or barrack in which his squad is 
quartered. It is his office to see that all members of his 
squad know and perform all military duties required of 
them in a proper manner. He has the authority to punish 
infractions of discipline, to the extent of confining delin- 
quents in the guard-house or tent, but in all cases wherein 
he uses his power he should report it to his company com- 
mander at the earliest practicable moment. He should, 
however, be cautious of this power, and never use it except 






IJ2 ART OF WAR. 

when absolutely necessary to prevent disturbances.* He j 
must never hesitate to reprove those under him when need- 
ful, but his reproof should be kindly given. 

He should be supported by all superior officers in his ; 
authority, except when it is improperly and unjustly ex- 
ercised. •} 

When he commits any military offence he must take his 
punishment like a man. If he does not, he shows himself 
unfit for his position. 

He should at all times be ready to assist in enforcing 
and carrying out proper discipline in other squads besides 
his own, if called on to do so ; but he should have control 
of his own squad, receiving instructions from his First Ser-! 
geant or an Officer of the company. 

Every non-commissioned officer should, if practicable, 
have a separate room in barracks, or a tent in camp, to 
himself. The non-commissioned officers should mess to- 
gether at tables separate from the privates, as everything 
that conduces to familiarity with inferiors tends to lower the 
dignity of their positions. The Sergeants should con- 
stantly study tactics and military subjects. To have their 
own orders obeyed promptly, they should ever be willing 
to render a prompt obedience to orders given them, and' 
thus show in themselves examples of good soldiers ; likewise 1 
they should never lose their temper or presence of mind, 
never swear, talk loud, or be rough in speech and manner. 

It is the duty of the Sergeant in charge of a squad-room' 
to see that the room is kept always in proper order, that 
the room-orderly does his work, that the men in the squad 
are neat and clean in person and surroundings; wmen' 
placed in charge of the kitchen, he should see that all the! 
kitchen and mess-room furniture is kept clean and neat,! 
that the food is of the right quality and quantity, and 
properly cooked. If he finds that the food is poor or in-f 
sufficient, he should at once report it to the Captain. 



* A recent order requires Sergeants and Corporals to first obtain the 
authority of a commissioned officer, before confining or arresting any v 
person, except in the most urgent cases. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 1 33 

Duties of the Corporal. 

The Corporal is the lowest rank of non-commissioned 
officer. The name Corporal indicates that it belongs to 
the body or rank, and he is in reality but a private dis- 
tinguished especially for military bearing and steadiness. 
At all drills and parades bus place is on the extremities of 
the Companies or Platoons, and he has no authority other 
than the private, except such given him when he is out of 
ranks, and in charge of a guard relief, or squad of men at 
work or drill. 

In the absence of a Sergeant, the Corporal highest in 
rank takes his place and performs his duties. This is also 
a general rule applicable to all ranks, that in the absence 
of any officer the one next below him takes his place and 
performs his duties. 

The Private. 

The duty of every soldier is obedience to all orders from 
proper authority, respect to superior officers, and a careful 
observance of, and willingness to conform to all rules and 
regulations established for his guidance. When he has his 
uniform, arms and equipments given him, he should be 
taught how to properly use them, to keep them always 
neat and clean ; how to properly put them on and wear 
them. He must be given to understand that they are 
furnished him for certain purposes, and that he therefore 
has no right to be in anyway neglectful or careless of them. 

If his company is in Garrison or Barracks — i. e., the 
building in which soldiers live, — he is assigned to a sleep- 
ing bunk, in that part of the barracks that his squad lives 
in. Near his bunk is a locker to keep his clothing in, and 
he is given a place in the gun-rack for his rifle or carbine, 
and a peg for his accoutrements. He must keep the space 
around his bunk clean and neat, and the bedding on the 
bunk must be arranged in the day-time, in a neat and 
orderly manner. It must also be kept clean. The cloth- 
ing in the locker must also be kept clean, for it is fre- 
quently inspected. 

When he is given his arms he learrs the use of them, 



134 ART OF WAR, 

and the proper drill with them. When this is done he is 
in fact a soldier. He goes on guard, attends drills, parades, 
and inspections, takes his tour of fatigue duty, and per- 
forms all the duties of a soldier. 

In camp there are many duties that are not pleasant to 
perform, such as guard duty at night, when the soldier is 
tired and sleepy from hard work or marching during the 
day; or maybe it is cold, or very hot, or rainy ; and he often 
feels tempted to sit down or omit some part of the duty as 
signed him, because he thinks no one will know. Then 
there is fatigue and police duty, where he is obliged to as- 
sist in building a road, or digging a ditch, or cleaning up 
all the filth that accumulates near the barracks, kitchens 
quarters, ete , or the bringing of fuel, water and food into 
quarters, in building and preserving government property. 
He will be detailed as kitchen police every few weeks, and 
have to clean up knives, forks, plates, floors, tables, pots 
pans, etc., and assist in preparing and cooking the food. 
He must take his turn as room-orderly, and as such will 
have to sweep out the barracks, keep up the fires in cold 
weather, and preserve order and neatness in the room. 

By doing all required of him in a cheerful and obedient 
manner, the soldier will always deserve and attract the 
commendation of his superior officers. The life of a re- 
cruit is generally the hardest part of a soldier's career, be- 
cause the work being new and strange, it seems to him in 
many ways degrading and useless ; but it is not so, and 
the soldier must bear in mind that all soldiers and officers 
have the same restrictions imposed upon them by the high- 
est authority — the country. When a soldier thinks he has 
been ill-used by any private or non-commissioned officer 
he must report the matter to the First Sergeant, who will 
report it to the Captain. The Captain is bound to investi- 
gate and impartially judge the matter, and the soldier 
should abide his decision unless clearly wrong and illegal; 
but the soldier must never take the punishment in his own 
hands, and never use personal violence except in case of 
self-defence. And he must never go directly to the Cap 
tain with any complaint unless he has permission to do so. 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 1 35 

or the First Sergeant refuses to report the matter for him. 
Whenever he is dissatisfied with his food, his clothing or 
duties, if he has good ground for making complaint, he 
should notify the First Sergeant that he wants permission 
to see the Captain, stating at the same time his reason. 

If the soldier is ever in ignorance of any matter relating 
to his duties, he should apply to a non-commissioned officer 
of his company, preferably the one in charge of the squad 
he is in, and if he is not satisfied with the explanation given 
him, then he should go to the First Sergeant. 

If ordtrs are given the soldier which he knows are 
clearly wrong, he must not hesitate to obey them, unless he 
1 as time to report the matter to superior authority. 

But to make a good soldier, it is not enough to know 
simply how to do the duties required of him. A good 
soldier is ever on the alert for information of all kinds. 
He renders prompt, cheerful and intelligent obedience to 
orders ; he volunteers on all hazardous work, and antici- 
pates the desires of superiors ; he is careful of his clothing 
and arms, neat and cleanly in his appearance and person ; 
he always remembers in his bearing and conversation that 
he is a soldier ; he must know his drill, all orders or regu- 
lations which affect him ; watches out for the safety and 
preservation of all property entrusted to him ; he must be 
ever ready to enlighten and assist others, and at all times, 
by study and reading, and by careful observance, should 
improve himself in every possible way consistent w r ith the 
profession of arms ; he should never be heard to use pro- 
fane, obscene or vulgar language, never debase himself with 
drink, but hold his honor as a soldier above all price. 

There is one duty that recruits and militia men are apt 
to be averse to, because too often they misunderstand it. 
It is the matter of saluting. All soldiers and officers are 
required to salute each other when they meet or pass, the 
inferior giving the first salute. It is not in any way an act 
of degradation or exhibition of inferiority, but simply a mil- 
itary courtesy that is as binding on one as another. It is a 
bond uniting all in a common fraternity, and by regula- 
tions and custom, it is as incumbent on the General of the 



136 ART OF WAR. 

Army to return the salute of the private, as it is of the lat- 
ter to give it ; and whether in the camp or the street of a 
great city, it is a privilege to recognize the General, that 
the soldier has which belongs to but few civilians, and 
marks the fact that above them there is an authority that 
both recognize and obey — the country: 

Soldiers must never discuss in a derogatory manner or 
criticise the acts or orders of superiors. 

THE BATTALION. 

Originally, battalions were dense masses of men, number- 
ing several thousand, and composed of many regiments ; 
but they were subsequently reduced in size, — regiments 
were made of uniform strength, and the battalion became 
a fixed fraction. 

All the great powers of Europe have adopted the battal- 
ion system, and we believe that it will not be long before 
the three-battalion formation will become a law for the en- 
tire line of the Army of the United States. 

The battalion of four companies is of such a convenient 
size for moving as a body, that it has been adopted mainly 
for that purpose, and for its tactical adaptability to all cir- 
cumstances. It should always be commanded by a Major. 

A battalion may be composed of two or more companies, 
and even when the whole regiment is together, the term 
battalion is used whenever it is addressed by its command- 
ing officer for purposes of instruction, or in the observance 
of ceremonies or performance of manoeuvres on the battle- 
field. 

THE REGIMENT. 

A Regiment of Infantry is composed of ten companies, 
and Regiments of Artillery and Cavalry are composed of 
twelve companies. The former have only one Colonel, one 
Lieutenant Colonel, one Major, one Quartermaster and one 
Adjutant. The two latter arms of the service have in ad- 
dition to Colonel and Lieutenant Colonel, three Majors 
each, and the Artillerv has twentv-four First Lieutenants to 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 1 37 

a Regiment. Two extra Lieutenants, who may be either 
first or second Lieutenants, are also allowed to each Artil- 
lery Regiment as Adjutant and Quartermaster. 

Two of the companies in each regiment of Artillery are 
mounted in time of peace, and are called Light Batteries; 
the remainder of the regiment performs the duty of infantry, 
and in addition manoeuvre the heavy artillery in the sea- 
coast fortifications. 

The regiment is purely an administrative organization. 
If it consists of soldiers enough to justify the number of 
officers required in it, then it becomes too unwieldy for one 
man to control by his own voice. Composed of battalions, 
each battalion would be moved by the voice of its com- 
mander, under directions from the Colonel, verbally or by 
messenger. 

The Colonel is to the regiment what the Captain is to the 
company, and should look to the care and comfort of his 
officers and men — treat them kindly and advise with his 
Captains as to the best methods of producing cheerfulness 
and content among all. Under the present system of small 
military posts, a Colonel seldom, if ever, sees his entire 
regiment, not even all his officers ; and no means are pro- 
vided for his visiting and frequently inspecting the com- 
panies away from his own headquarters. 

The Lieutenant Colonel has no special duties, except when 
manoeuvring with the regiment under arms. He of course 
assists the Colonel on all occasions where it falls within his 
power, and commands the regiment in the Colonel's 
absence. 

The Major has only such duties to perform as may be as- 
signed him either with the Regiment or absent from it, and 
assumes command in the absence of the other two higher 
officers. 

The Adjutant is the Colonel's mouth-piece ; through him 
is the channel of communication with the Captains. He 
consolidates all reports and returns from the companies, 
issues all orders, keeps all records pertaining to the regiment, 
has charge of the regimental band, and should combine 
with his soldierly qualities those of a man of letters and so- 



I38 ART OF WAR. 

cial standing. On him depends, to a great extent, the har- 
mony of a regiment. He should be honest, just and pleas- 
ant to all. 

The Quartermaster has charge of all public property per- 
taining to the regiment which belongs to the Government. 
He receives his orders either from the Colonel direct or 
through the Adjutant. He has no power to issue an order, 
except when acting as Adjutant, or to his own employees. 
When not in the field, where he has only his regiment to 
supply, he has added to his regimental duties those of a 
Post Quartermaster, and has charge of and distributes all 
property pertaining to the Government. In addition to 
his Quartermaster's duties, he is generally the Acting Com- 
missary of Subsistence, and his duty in this capacity is to 
supply food to the command with which he is serving. A 
pleasant management of these departments secures much 
good feeling — otherwise an exceedingly unpleasant state of., 
affairs is the result. 

Both the Adjutant and Quartermaster of a regiment, al- 
though only First Lieutenants, receive a Captain's pay. 

The administrative part of a regiment consists in the is- 
suing of orders for the government of the companies ; the 
appointment of non-commissioned officers on the re- 
commendations of their company commanders (to whom 
warrants shall be issued on forms furnished from the Adju- 
tant General's office), the consolidation of the reports and 
returns of all the companies, forwarding the same to desig- 
nated departments of the service, and a general supervision 
of the means adopted by the Captain for the comfort and 
welfare of their men. All blanks for the purpose are furn- 
ished on proper application to the War Department.* 

*NOTE. — The Sergeant Major is the assistant of the Adjutant, and is 
to him much the same that the Company Clerk is to the First Sergeant. 
He has charge of all books, and records, and papers, under direction of 
the Adjutant. The following are the forms used by the battalion, post 
or regiment. They explain themselves. 



Note 



STATI 



139 



r the m 



.— ( 

iu 


A 


u 

p< 






Bia 





ind date of order) at which an officer is assigned 
nd date of order , the reasons tor and commenc. 
■ regiment, (with No., date, &c, of order,) resig 
mizations, serving with or attached to the regime 
will be reported by name in red ink at the bottc 



d Men. 



2 



NO. 



NAMES. 
; brevet rank, as well as that by 
iinary commission, to be given.) 



i S • 



STATI 



7! E 



e?,^. 






1 any po_^ 
regimeif' 
these p.' 
ank of o 
horses, e 1 
ling the 









































































































































































=z 


















1 " 



ining companies, up to and including " M."} 



'L'T'w'k^.^m, ' '"" 



cf Ik, In,!,.! Stoics. (Colonel ) forth, „,.„„/, ,:/ 



::::::':::: :l: :: : 

i ' I 
! i- • • ■ 

inn y 



= i 



Ml M.iK IVIH 



i;i CORD HI I \ i:mn. 



N 
























§1 




§1 


',"' ' 












































ALTERA 












Men. 


.:.!.. \ 


.*£&» 




«. 


" 


RETURN 

of the . . . Regiment of 

For llie month of iSS . 

1 Rec'rl ai A. G. Office 


\ 


RANK 


•MT-SSLWI r " 


„ 





, iANK 


jl 


PLAC, 


RE „A RK S 




"° 





»*»"■ 




DATE. 


PLACE. 


— • 


° 


-' 
















:::::: 




1:: 




























'■ 


ii 










- 








1;:' 










: 


■ 
::: 

















































































































































date, &c, of order), of all discharges , 
rge, deaths, desertions, &c. 

the Return.) 



RETURN 

Of the . . . Regiment of 

For the month of , i! 

Rec'd at A. G. Office 



DATE. 


PLACE. 


REMARKS. 
















































| . 



































:::::::::: 

















1 














































1 




























































































! 








































DEPAR 


Of . 






T ATI ON. 


Comn 








Date 












c 
.2 






<r. 


T3 














rt 


o 






^ 


U 






. 


. J 




3 DEPA 


H 


.... 


Z 




a 




§ 








u 




Pi 


.... 




El 


3 AR 


•j 



;part 



T42 

GENERAL 
ic 

IS 

nt5 

kii 



I'll 10 LI NIC OK Till; A kMY. 



(Seepage 138.) 
INSPECTION REPORT 



Of . . . . m • 
Commanded by . 



REPORT OF TROOPS. 



1 


j 


PRESENT. 






ABSENT. 






Pre 




For 
Duly. 


lli.llv" 
Duty. 


Sick. 


In Arrest 
or Con. 


1 
77 


On De- 
tached 


Sick. 


With 
Leave. 


Without 
ity. 


S 

H 

:: 


Absent. 


1,777 




E 


$ 


O 

'a 

E 
O 


s 


IS 



1 

'i 



2 


i 

s 




s 


i 

S 
O 

1 

a 

a 

'3 


W 




a 

I 


1 


O 

1 

1 


1 


2 

s 

E 

O 

'a 
u 


s 


S 
O 

a 
I 
u 


w 


£ 
O 

a 

a 


L 



QUARTERMASTER'S DEPARTMENT. 


SUBSISTENCE DE- 
PARTMENT. 


ORDNANCE DEPARTMENT. 




\l. .in .tl 

Dep.-.rt- 


Houses. 


D RAFT a™,* 




T»*«po^™». 


Forage. 


Wood 


■3 


i 

.a 


i 

Z' 


1* 
1 


1% 

a 


1 

I 

1 



Post. 


£E 


A. MS. 


A„„™ 


r.ON. 


8 




J 


= i 
T 


Horses. 


Mules. 




| 





u 


77 


1 


1 


! 
1 

1 


1 


a 
I 



1 






1 


1 


a' 


I 


1 


1 


en 


1 
1 

1 


I 


1 


i 

E 























QUARTERMASTER'S DEPARTMENT. 



SUBSISTENCE DEPARTMENT. 



MEDICAL DEPARTMENT. 



WHEN AND BY WHOM THE POST WAS LAST INSPECTED. 



BARRACKS AND QUARTERS, GUARD HOUSES, &c. 



POLICE OF POST, WATER SUPPLY, KITCHENS, &c 



DRILLS AND TARGET PRACTICE. 



ORDNANCE DEPARTMENT 



POST CEMETERIES, SCHOOLS, GARDENS, &c 



ART OF WAR. 
GENERAL REMARKS. INSPECTION REPORT 

Of 

made the day 

... of iSS , 



(See page 138.) 



Inspecting Officer. rt a % gou t 'thra, R 

illllUDKilioil i .llkil I 



INSPECTION REPORT 



Je the day 



188 



(See page 138.) 



r OTE. — This blank is prepared in accordance with the require- 
'; of G. O. No. 84, A. G. O. 1879, an d Inspecting Officers, in 
'lg out these Reports, will be careful to include therein all the 
lation called for by said order. 



144 



4^X 



j> c/> 




St. 

le pursuan 



D 



o! 

O 3 I 

o 

2 3 1 
ft 3 

a- a. 

r ° 

cr 
• n> 

p 
. o 


H 
o 

rt 

-a 
ft 

3 
Cu 

a- 


£■0 

3 JO 

w Hi 

i- 
ft cl . 
• ^ ■ 


r X 


w 

X 

G 
W 

u 


o 1 - 


























































































































1 










1 _ 1 










'—-\ 


















\ — 


— | 


-; — 


— 


- 






















































































































































































1 





















THE LINE OF THI 



! page 138.) *3 i The directions on the back of this Form must be closely followed. 

in account current with the . . 

Fund, during the period ending . 



Dr. 




















Cr. 


DATE. 


FROM WHAT SOURCE 
RECEIVED. 

• 


Dollars. 


Cts. 


Dollars. 


Cts. 


DATE. 


HOW EXPENDED. 


DOLLAKS. 


Cts. 


Dollars. 


Cts. 


■ 88. 


Balance on hand last account 
1 










■ 88. 



































The above account is correct and just 
The above payments have been made 
if Administration, and are approved. 



ART OF WAR. 



1 si 
1 1 1 

| |t 
g. S. S 


■ ? 


1 


|i ; 

fa: g 


H 

: sr 


sj§. 

3- 3 
3- 5" 


8Sg 














Salt, lbs. i 


III 












Hops, lbs 












Malt. 


,a "? 2, 






.— — 


— 






8 & 




2.0 






















































; 












tra 










3. 










































— 













< H 






e above 
rifled ano 


— 


7 


—. — 




:-- 





















t= 2- 














•a ^ 















3 °. 








2. ■ 








— 


-- 








:— 




___ 








■ 














r, 














% 















S 












a 














^ 


a 






-r-i 


"H 


TTT- 





>> i 














<% § 














** ■? 











































(See page 138.) 

REGIMENTAL FUND. 

ACCOUNT CURRENT 



First Endomment. 



Respectfully forwarded I 



Commanding .... 

Reed Hdqrs , 188 . 



DIRECTIONS. 



FOR REGIMENTAL, POST, AND COMPANY FUND ACCOUNTS. 

1. Regimental, Post, and Company Fund Accounts will be rendered promptly 
when due, and great care must be exercised in their preparation. 

2. Receipts and expenditures during the period cnilir ired by the account will alone 

3. The gross amounts under each head will alone be carried to the second column 

of dollars and cents. 



FOR REGIMENTAL AND POST FUND ACCOUNTS. 
All articles purchased or otherwise obtained must be accounted for upon the Re- 
irn of Property. 

FOR REGIMENTAL FUND ACCOUNTS ONLY. 
Amounts received from posts will be entered separately , and the name of the post 
nd the period for which each amount was appropriated will be given. 

FOR POST FUND ACCOUNTS ONLY. 

1. The receipts will be entered in the followingorder : 1st, " Balance on hand last 

Post Treasurer." 2d, " Rcceivedfrom 

r's assessments," (naming rate.) 4 th, 

ixeceiveu irom inner sources, (trie sources and amounts to be specified.) 

J. The expenditures will be entered under their appropriate headings and in the 

following order: xst, "Expenses of bakery, pay of bakers, ecc.," (enumerating 

items.) 2d, ''Appropriations for regimental fund." 3d, " Other appropriations of 

;. Appropriations Kir the regimental fund will in eat la lily appear In the account em- 
bracing the period fur whieh they are made— those fir each regiment being specified. 
4- The post trader's assessments must appear in the account embracing" the period 
for which they are made. 

FOR COMPANY FUND ACCOUNTS ONLY. 

1. As a consolidated Abstract Is prepared at regimental he adipiartcrs this fortn will 
serve for the Company as well as the Post and Regimental Fund Account When 
used for the Company Fund Account, the " Return of Property'' will be left blank. 

2. The number of rations drawn, from u in.h trie savings reported wet s made.wd. 
be stated in red ink upon the face of the aeeounfc, 



-ie tl 



TOT] 
iOf 

lg o 

lati 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 1 45 



REPORT 



OF THE 



TARGET FIRING 



OF THE 



Regiment of , 

For the yeat 188 



146 



ART OF WAR. 






• 1 

• s 



II 



W 

o 

< 



< 


























'iraaw 
jo a^rnou ivnaNao 




























-SOJ JO XM33 HHJ 










<S£ 


sxijj ao Haawa^ 


















O^fe 


aHMijj 
sxoHg ao hhsmij^ 


















XIX3IM JO 

a^nou ivnaiAiaMi 


















a3iHissva3 ivxox 








<* 




a 


u 








ONI 
-HIjJ ION XNHSHHJ 














CO 




h! 


en 


•N3j\[ ssv^-cihihx 








<! 




d 


1-1 ^" 




CJ 


cj£ 


nhj\[ ssvio-aNoong 






^2 




rt 


<h 






■Naj^; ssvid-xshij 




- 




Q 




-f 








•NHMSHHVJ\[ 






> 




■5 


Q 














£ 


•SHHXOOHSdHVHS 




c 




















§ Q 

I! 

> 


\-ei01 33BJ3AV 




— 




d 


•Suiay aaqmn^ 

•S3JODS JO 
|E}OJ 3§BJ3Ay 




-; 


H< 







fac/3 










u 






art 

ig 


Suuy jaqumj^; 











rf 










t/5 

1! 

>< 


'S3JODS JO 
fBlOJ 3§BJ3Ay 










O 


<P 


•§uug jsquinjvj 








fa 




.2 


<ia 










> 


JBlOl 3SBJ3AV 






r< 








o M 


•Suuyaaquin^ 








££ 






i-'ffi- 






#2 


a 

X 

>* 


•S3J0DS JO 

I'bjoj sSeayAy 








ajx, 










~.o 


■Suuuaaquin^ 




-f 




p4 

W4 












K< 


a 

O 23 

« < 

>• 


•S3J0DS JO 






^£ 






2^ 






•Sauy asqiun^j 


















> 
Z 
< 


T3 

n!T3 


c 

E 





CJ 


tort 





THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 1 47 



ABSTRACT 

OF 

COMPANY FUND ACCOUNTS 

OF THE 

, Regimetit of , 

FOR THE 
Quarter, 188 . 



Jg®= This Form has three inner sheets. Should additional ones be needed, the 
will be prepared at Regimental Headquarters, to correspond in size and ruling wit 
the within. 

(A. G. O., No. si.) 

(See page 138.) 



I48 ART OF WAR, 



DIRECTIONS. 

1. This abstract will be prepared, in duplicate, as soon after the expiration ot 
the Quarter as practicable ; one copy to be retained, the other forwarded to Depart- 
ment Headquarters. 

2. The name, quantity, and price of each article sold and bought will appear. 

3. If the members of the Band mess with one of the Companies, a statement to 
that effect (including the letter of the Company) will appear at the end of the ab- 
stract. 

4. The number of rations drawn, from which the savings shown were made, 
will be stated in red ink beneath the " Receipts" of each Company. 






THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 



149 



DATE. 




DR. 


1 

CR. 


188 . 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































\ 



















































































































































i5<> 



ART OF WAR. 



DATE. 




DR. 


CR. 




188 . 


Dolts. 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 






Balance on hand last 














































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































i 




















































































































































































































































, 





















































































































































































































































































































































THE LINE OF THE ARMY 
RECAPITULATION. 



T 5i 









RATIONS SAVED. 


s 

ig 

Cj. U 

•a * 

jf 

2 « 
<*. »> 
°-S 

It 


a 
.2 

2 
-a 

c« 
JJ 

•o 

1) 

o 

3 
< 


Company. 


z 
ft 


o 


m 
ft 
-3 


■Jr. 


— 

V 

n 



s. 


-6 
a 

pq 

CS 


i 



O 


1 j 

O i 

j- : 
rt < 

22 - 

•i ■- 

sa <: 

O S 

• 1 


5 8 

its 

H O 

, U 

> V 

i l) 

i 6 


:= 
o 

-a 

cS 
o 

<•= 

• 


H 


3 


bfl 
D 
B 

> 


o 

X 


- 


•j 

u 

ft 


A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

I 

K 

L 

M 

Band 


-a 


*4 




S 


Co. 


Balance 
from last 
account. 


Savings. 


Total. . 


Expended. 


Balance on 
hand. 


Total. 




Dolls. 


Cts. 


Balls 


Cts. 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


Dolls 


C/j. 


Dolls. 


Cts 


Dolls. 


Cts. 


A. . 
B . 
C. . 
D . 

E. . 

F. . 

G. . 
H . 
I. . 
K . 
L. . 
M . 
Band 


1 












:.: : 








\\\ 





I52 ART OF WAR. 

First Endorsement. Second Endarsement. 



Headquarters . . 
of 



. . Regiment 

,188 . 

Respectfully forwarded to Head- 
quarters Department of ... . 



I certify that the foregoing is a 
correct transcript from the records 
of these Headquarters. 



Commanding. 



Headquarters Department of 
,188 



J8®*This Abstract should be folded only once for mail, lengthwise, along the 
deep black line on this page. 

(See page 138.) 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 1 53 



(See page 138.) 
QUARTERLY REPORT 

OF 

ARTILLERY INSTRUCTION 

OF THE 

• • . • Regiment of United States Artillery 

for the quarter ending , 188 . 

BY 



Commanding Regiment. 

1 



154 ART of WAR - 

Report of Artillery Instruction of the 



BATTERY. 


I.— MEANS OF INSTRUCTION AT POST. 


A 






B 






C 






D 






E 






F 






G 






H 






I 






K 






L 






M 













THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 155 

Regiment of Artillery, for the Quarter, 188 . 



II.— PROGRESS AND KIND OF 
INSTRUCTION GIVEN. 



III.— NUMBERS AND DATES OF 

DRILLS, EXERCISES, AND 

RECITATIONS. 



156 ART OF WAR. 



Respectfully submitted, 



Colonel Artillery, 

Commanding Regiment. 



Headquarters Artillery, 

,188 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 157 

FLAGS, COLORS, STANDARDS, ETC., U. S. ARMY. 
Garrison, Post and Storm Flag. 

The Garrison Flag is the National flag. It is made of 
bunting, thirty-six feet fly, and twenty feet hoist, in thir- 
teen horizontal stripes of equal breadth, alternately red and 
white, beginning with the red. In the upper quarter, next 
the staff, is the union, composed of a number of white stars 
equal to the number of States, on a blue field one-third the 
length of the flag, extending to the lower edge of the fourth 
red stripe from the top. This flag will be furnished only 
to very important posts, or those having large garrisons, 
and will be hoisted only on gala days and great occasions. 
— Paragraph 2783, Codified Regulations, 188 1. 

The Post Flag, twenty feet fly and ten feet hoist, will be 
furnished to all posts garrisoned by troops, and will be 
hoisted only in pleasant weather. — Paragraph 2784, Codi- 
fied Regulations, 1881. 

The Storm Flag, eight feet fly and four feet two inches 
hoist, will be furnished to all occupied military posts and 
national cemeteries, and will be hoisted in stormy or windy 
weather. This flag will also be used as a recruiting flag. — 
Paragraph 2785, Codified Regulations, 188 1. 

Colors of the Engineer Battalion. 

The National color, as described for the garrison flags, 
with the words f 'U. S. Engineers" embroidered in silver 
on the center stripe. The battalion color will be of scarlet 
of the same dimensions as above, bearing in the center a 
castle, with the letters "U. S." above, and the word "En- 
gineers" below in silver; fringe, white. The size of each 
color, and the length of pike, the same as described for 
colors of Artillery and Infantry regiments. Cords and 
tassels, red and white silk intermixed. — Paragraph 2786, 
Codified Regulations, 1881. 

Colors of Artillery Regiments. 

Each regiment of Artillery shall have two silken colors. 
The first, or the National color, of stars and stripes as de- 



158 ART OF WAR. 

scribed for the garrison flag ; the number and name of the 
regiment to be embroidered with gold on the center stripe. 
The second or regimental color to be yellow, of the same 
dimensions as the first, bearing in the center two cannon 
crossing, with the letters "U. S." above and the number 
of the regiment below ; fringe, yellow. Each color to be 
six feet six inches fly, and six feet deep on the pike. The 
pike, including the spear and ferrule, to be nine feet ten 
inches in length \ cords and tassels, red and yellow silk in- 
termixed. — Paragraph 2787, Codified Regulations, 188 1. 

Colors of Infantry Regiments. 

Same as above described for Artillery, except that the 
number and name will be embroidered with silver on the 
first. The second color will be of blue with yellow fringe ; 
the arms of the United States embroidered in silk on the 
center, the name of the regiment in a scroll under the 
eagle; cords and tassels, blue and white intermixed. — Par- 
agraph 2/88, Codified Regulations, 188 1. 

Each foot regiment shall have four flags for "markers" 
and two for "general guides." 

The flag for "marker" to be made of banner silk, mea- 
suring twenty inches fly and eighteen inches on the pike. 
The design to be the same as the National color, except 
that the stars shall be placed in two circles, with one star 
in each corner of the field, the number of the regiment to 
be in solid block figure in the inner circle of the stars ; stars 
and figures to be in white silk needlework embroidery on a 
single thickness of silk. The pike to be of ash, with brass 
spear-head and ferrule ; total length, eight feet. To have 
a case or cover of water-proof material to protect the flag 
when furled. All to conform to sample in the office of the 
Quartermaster General. 

The flag for "general guide" to be made of banner silk, 
measuring eighteen inches fly and fifteen inches on the rod. 
The design to be the same as for the flag for "marker," to 
be trimmed with yellow silk cut fringe one and one-half . 
inches deep. The rod to be of brass tubing, nickel-plated, 
and of diameter to exactly fit inside the bore of the .45- 



THE LINE OF THE ARMY. 1 59 

inch calibre rifle ; twenty-eight and one-half inches long, 
with a collar fitted ten inches from the bottom to rest on 
the muzzle of the gun. To be finished with two nickel- 
plated knobs for fastening the flag, and at the top with a 
nickel-plated spear-head three and one-half inches long. 
The case or covering to be the same as for the flag for 
"marker." All to conform to sample in the office of the 
Quartermaster General. 

Guidons for Cavalry. 

The flag of the guidon is swallow-tailed, three feet five 
inches fly from the lance to the end of the swallow-tail, 
and two feet three inches on the lance : to be cut swallow- 
tailed fifteen inches to the fork. To be made of silk, and 
to consist of two horizontal stripes, each one half the 
width of the flag, the upper red and the lower white ; the 
red to have on both sides in the centre the number of the 
regiment in whith silk, and the white to have the letter of 
troop in red silk : the letter and number to be block- 
shaped, four and three-fourths inches high, and held in 
place by a border of needlework embroidery three-six- 
teenths of an inch wide, of same color. The lance to be 
one and one-fourth inches in diameter, and nine feet long, 
including spear and ferule. To have a water-proof case or 
cover, to protect the guidon when furled. — G. O. No. 10, 
War Dept., 1885. 

Standards and Guidons of Mounted Regiments. - 

Each regiment will have a silken standard, and each 
company a silken guidon, the standard to bear the arms 
of the United States, embroidered in silk, on a blue 
ground, with the number and name of the regiment in a 
scroll under the eagle. The flag of the standard to be two 
feet five inches wide, and two feet three inches on ttie 
lance, and to be edged with yellow silk fringe. — Para- 
graph 2 j go, Codified Regulations, 1881. 

Arms of the United States. 
Arms. — Paleways of thirteen pieces, argent and gules, a 
chief azure; the escutcheon on the breast of the Ameri- 



l6o ART OF WAR. 

can eagle displayed proper, holding in his dexter talon an 
olive branch, and in his sinister a bundle of thirteen ar- 
rows, all proper ; and in his beak a scroll inscribed with 
the motto: "E Pluribus Unum." 

Crest. — Over the head of the eagle, which appears above 
the escutcheon, a glory breaking through a cloud, proper, 
and surrounding thirteen stars, forming a constellation, ar- 
gent and on an azure field. — Paragraph 2793, Revised 
Codified Regulations, 1881. 



CHAPTER IV. 



THE ROSTER, OR DETAILS FOR SERVICE. 
MODEL FORMS FOR KEEPING. 



THE ROSTER, OR DETAILS FOR SERVICE. 



A Roster is a form of record kept for equalizing the 
duties of both officers and soldiers, and the correct keeping 
of it avoids unfairness to any one ; but officers and men, 
when detailed for any duty, must serve whether roster be 
kept or not; having performed the service, they may ap- 
peal to superior authority if they deem themselves aggrieved. 

The duties performed by detail are of three classes : 

The first class comprises : ist, grand guards and out- 
posts; 2d, interior guards ; 3d, orderlies; 4th, police guards. 

The second class comprises: ist, detachments to protect 
laborers on military works, as field works, communications, 
etc. ; 2d, working parties on such works ; 3d, detachments 
to protect fatigues. 

The third class comprises General Courts-Martial, and 
all fatigues without arms, in or out of camp or garrison. 
Under' this heading might also be embraced Garrison 
Court-Martial duty and Boards of Survey. 

In the cavalry, stable guards form a separate roster, and 
count before fatigue. 

The rosters are distinct for each class. Officers are 
named on them in the order of rank. The details are 
taken in succession in the order of the roster, beginning 
at the head. Lieutenants form one roster, and first and sec- 
ond lieutenants are entered on it alternately. The senior 
first lieutenant is the first on the roster, and the senior second 
lieutenant is second. The captains form one roster, and 
are exempt from fatigues, except to superintend issues. A 
captain commanding a battalion temporarily is exempt from 
detail, and duty falling to him passes to the next in rank. 
Lieutenant Colonels and Majors are on one roster. They 
may be detailed for duties of the ist and 2d classes, when 
the importance of the guards and detachments requires it. 
Their roster is kept at brigade and division headquarters. 

C163V 



1 64 ART OF WAR. 

Officers, non-commissioned officers and soldiers take 
duties of the first class in the order stated, viz : The first 
for the details takes the grand guards ; the next, the inter- 
ior guards; the last, the police guards, and the same rule in 
regard to the details and duties of the second class. In the 
details for the third class, the' senior office takes the largest 
party. The party first for detail takes the service out of camp. 

When the officer whose tour it is is not able to take it, 
or is not present at the hour of marching, the next after 
him takes it. When a guard has passed the chain of sen- 
tinels, or an interior guard has reached its post, the officer 
whose tour it was cannot then take it. He takes the tour of 
the one who has taken his. When an officer is prevented 
by sickness from taking his tour he becomes first for detail 
on being restored to duty, the general rule being that the 
officer the longest off duty is the first for detail. These rules 
apply equally to non-commissioned officers and soldiers. 

Duties of the first and second classes are credited on the 
roster when the guards or detachments have passed the 
chain of sentinels, or an interior guard has reached its 
post ; fatigue duties when the parties have passed the chain 
or begun the duties in camp. 

Every officer, non-commissioned officer, or soldier on 
duty of the first class, or who is of the next detail for such 
duty, takes, when relieved, the duty of the second or third 
class that has fallen to him during that time, unless he has 
marched for detachment of more than twenty-four hours. 

Soldiers march with blanket bags on all duties of the 
first class, and with arms and equipments complete on all 
working parties out of the camp, unless otherwise ordered. 
In the cavalrv, horses are packed for all mounted service. 

Dismounted men, and those whose horses are not in or- 
der, are preferred for the detail for dismounted service. 
Those who are mounted are never employed on those ser- 
vices, if the number of the other class is sufficient. 

Every non-commissioned officer and soldier in the cav- 
alry detailed for dismounted service must, before he 
marches, take to the first sergeant of the troop, or ser- 
geant of his squad, his horse equipments and his valise, 



THE ROSTER, OR DETAILS FOR SERVICE. 1 65 

ready packed. In case of alarm, the first sergeant sees 
that the horses of these men are equipped and led to the 
rendezvous. 

As far as the exigencies of the service will permit, all 
details from Light Artillery for armed service shall con- 
form to the natural elements of the arm, as sections, pla- 
toons, or batteries. 

A mounted battery, serving with other troops, will furn- 
ish its own park and stable guards, police, etc. Both offi- 
.c'ers and men will generally be exempt from other similar 
details, and the men will not be detailed for extra duty in 
the staff departments, nor for other duty interfering with 
battery duties, if it can be avoided. 

The Regimental or Post Roster for Officers is kept by 
the Regimental or Post Adjutant. 

The non-commissioned officers' roster for guard and 
other duties is kept by the Regimental or Post Sergeant 
Major ; but the details made should be noted on the Com- 
pany Roster. 

The Company Roster is kept by the first sergeant of the 
company, and should be frequently inspected by the com- 
pany commander, to see that no favoritism is shown in the 
details. 

The roster for field officer of the day is kept at brigade 
headquarters, while that for general of the trenches is kept 
at corps or division headquarters. 

No one in the company but the commander of it can 
authorize an exchange of tours of duty among the soldiers ; 
no one but the adjutant an exchange among, the non-com- 
missioned officers; no one but the post or regimental com- 
mander an exchange among the commissioned officers of 
his command ; no one but the brigade, division or corps 
commanders an exchange among the officers on the roster 
at their respective headquarters. 

Officers, non-commissioned officers or soldiers reporting 
to their commander for the first time should be placed at 
the bottom of their respective rosters for duty ; also those 
returning for detached service ; but returning leave of ab- 
sence, from being sick, or in arrest, etc., should be de- 



i66 



ART OF WAR. 



tailed the day their names first appear on the morning 
reports of their commands for duty; and the duty per- 
formed the succeeding day. 

The following are the forms for keeping the roster of 
guard duty. All other rosters assimilate to these : 

Regimental or Post Roster for Officer of the Day and Officers of 
the Guard. 



January, 1885. 1 


2 


3 


4 


3 


f 


7 


3 


9 


12 


IT 12 


Captains. 
















W. H. Smith. . . > 


< 1 


2 


3 


X 


1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


X 




T. S. Jewett . . 


1 X 


1 


2 


"- 


4 


3 


■ 


1 


2 


3 4 


M. H. Price. . . 


[ s 


5 


s 


4 


X 


I 


2 


3 


-t 


5 X 


D. H. Jones . . . 


1 2 


; l 


5 D 


5 D 


: 


X 


1 


2 


3 


4 




H. L. Robins . . 


C 2 


< 


I 


2 


~ 


- 


5 


X 


1 


2 


2 S. — Sick. 

S. D— Special 


S. T. Stewart . . 

LlEUTS. 


t 2 


3 


X 


1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


< 


1 


P. W. Monroe, 1st. ) 
A. J. Hendy, 2d. ) 
F. W. Carter, 1st. 
Benj. Burt, 2d . . 
Saml. White, 1st . 


< I 

< I 


2 
2 


3 
3 


4 
4 


X 


X 


2 


3 
2 


4 
3 


5 X duty. 

4 5 L. — Leave of ab- 


I L 
I X 

1 X 


L 
I 
A 


L 
2 
A 


- 
3 

A 


: 
4 
4 


< 

5 

5 


1 
X 
X 


2 
1 
1 


3 

2 
2 


4 
3 

3 


4 A.— Arrest. 

4 X— Day of duty. 


Rich'd Blake, 2d. 


I 2 


X 


I 


2 


3 


4 


5 


'. 


1 


2 


3 


Thos. Bums, 1st . 


I 2 


X 


I 


2 


3 


4 


5 


< 


i 




3 


Henry Lane, 2d. . 


I 2 


3 


X 


I 


2 


3 


4 


3 


< 






N. Hawthorne,ist. 


I 2 


3 


X 


I 


2 


3 


~ 


2 


< 






S. W. How-ells, 2d. 


I 2 ! 3 


4 


* 


1 


2 


i 


4 


3> 


X 




G. D. Cooper, 1st. 


I 23 


4 


X 


1 


2 


3 


4 


3 


* 




P. O. Willis, 2d. . 1 


1 1 2 1 3 


4 


5 


■ 


1 


2 


3 4 15 


X 


Company Roster for Guard Duty. 


January, 1885. 1 


2 3 
1 2 


4 . 


, 6 
< 1 


7 
2 


3 


5 


2: 
2 


11 12 
3 X 


13 J 4 

I 2 


*5 






Sergt. T.Jones. X 




" L. Smith. 1 


X 1 


2 


3 s 


s 


2 


■ 


1 


2 


-- 


X 1 




" H.Brown 1 


2 X 


1 


2 X 


1 


2 


3 


X 


1 


2 


3 A 




" W. Green 1 


2 3 


X 


I 2 


X 


1 


2 


3 


X 


i 


n 3 




Corp. S. White. X 
" P. Grady. 1 
" M. Cody. 1 
" J. Sloan . 1 

Pvt. Adams . . X 
" Bird ... X 


1 2 
X 1 

2X 

2 3 


3 
2 

1 


< I 
3 Db 

2 X 
1 2 


2 

D S 

I 

X 


X 

D S 
2 

I 


1 

D 5 
< 
2 


2 
s 
1 
X 


3 

• 
2 


X 

1 

3 
2 


1 2 

2 3 
X 1 

3X 


'. S— Sick. 

. F. — Furlough. 

. D. S.— Detached 


I 2 
I 2 


5 
3 ) 


< 1 

< 1 


2 
2 


3 

s 


X 

s 


F 
S 


F 
S 


3 
7 


X 1 
X 1 


. D. D. — Daily 


" Casey . . X 
" Dorsey. . 1 
" EUis ... 1 
" Ford ... 1 
" Gray. . . 1 


1 2 

X 1 
X 1 
X 1 

2 X 


3 

2 ) 
2 
2 

1 


< 1 

< 1 
3 X 
3 X 

2 EI 


2 
2 
I 
I 
EI 


DD 

3 
2 

2 

EI 


DE 
< 

3 

3 

EI 


DD 

I 

X 
X 

E E 


DE 

2 
I 
I 
EI 


7 
3 

2 

9 


X 1 
4X 
3X 
3 4 

X 1 


. E. D. — Extra 

duty. 
. C. — Confinement 
. X— Day of duty. 


" Harris . . 1 


2 X 


1 


2 X 


I 


2 


3 


X 


I 


c 


C 4 




" Inman . . 1 


2 X 


1 


2 3 


X 


I 


2 


3 


< 


1 


2 J 




" Johnson . 1 
" Knight . . 1 


2 3 


X 


I. 2 


X 


I 


2 


3 


X 


1 


a 3 




2 3 


X 


I 2 


3 


X 


1 


2 


3 


X 


1 2 




" Lewis . . 1 1 


2 3 


X 


I 2 


3 


1 x 


1 


2 


3 


XI I 2 




" Miller . . 1 1 


2 3 


- 


I 2 


3 


- 


X 1 2 31 4 X 


! ■ 



CHAPTER V 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 

GUARD MOUNTING— INFANTRY, CAVALRY, 
ARTILLERY. 

DUTIES OF OFFICERS CONNECTED WITH GUARDS. 

DUTIES OF SENTINELS. 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. 

GRAND GUARD MOUNTING. 

PICKETS AND OUTPOSTS. 

TRENCH, POLICE, AND PROVOST GUARDS. 



GUARD MOUNTING (INFANTRY). 



The hour for guard mounting is appointed by the com- 
manding officer. 

The adjutant will, when practicable, cause three camp- 
colors to be planted on the regimental or garrison parade ; 
one to indicate the post of the new officer of the day dur- 
ing guard mounting ; the other two to indicate the wheel- 
ing points of the guard, or its subdivisions when marching 
in review. Markers, instead of camp colors, are some- 
times posted to mark the wheeling points. 

At the assembly of guard details, the men named for 
duty fall in on their respective company parade grounds, 
facing to the right, the non-commissioned officers and 
supernumeraries falling in as file-closers ; the men form in 
double or single rank, according to the habitual formation 
of the command of which they form a part. 

Each first sergeant then faces his detail to the left, veri- 
fies it, fixes bayonets, brings it to rear open order, inspects 
the dress and general appearance, replaces by a supernu- 
merary any man whose condition makes him unfit to march 
on guard, and then brings his detail to close order. 

The band takes post on the regimental or garrison pa- 
rade, so that the left of its front rank shall be twelve yards 
to the right of the front rank of the guard when the latter 
is formed ; or it may take any other position, designated 
by the adjutant, and march, while playing, to its post as 
above. 

The adjutant takes post in view of the band, usually at 
some point on the edge of the parade. 

The sergeant major takes post on the left of the adjutant. 

The adjutant gives the signal for the adjutant 's call, at 
the conclusion of which the band plays a march in quick 
or double time, as may be directed, and the adjutant, 

(i6 9 ) . 



1)0 ART OF WAR. 

sergeant major and band, if the latter be not already at its 
post, march to the regimental or garrison parade, and take 
post ; the adjutant, so as to be twelve yards in front of and 
facing the centre of the guard, when the latter is formed ; 
the sergeant major facing to the left, and twelve yards to 
the left of the front rank of the band. 

From whatever point the adjutant and sergeant major 
start, they should arrive on the ground on which the guard 
is to be formed so as to be either on the line perpendicular 
to, and passing through the centre of the guard when 
formed or on the line of the guard. 

The adjutant, standing at attention, superintends the 
formation of the guard. 

The details are conducted to the parade by the first 
sergeants, so as to arrive upon the line from the rear. The 
detail which arrives first is so conducted that, upon halt- 
ing, the breast of the right front rank man shall be near 
to, and opposite the left arm of the sergeant major. 

The sergeant, having halted his detail, places himself in 
front of and facing the sergeant major, at a distance equal 
to, or greater than the front of his detail. He then com- 
mands : 

1. Rear open order. 2. March. 

At the second command the ranks are opened ; the front 
rank dresses up to the line of the sergeant major and first 
sergeant, the right front rank man placing his breast against 
the left arm of the sergeant major ; the rear rank, if there 
be one, steps back and halts three yards in rear of the front 
rank ; the non-commissioned officers step back and halt 
three yards in rear of the rear rank, or of the front rank, 
if there be no rear rank ; the supernumeraries step back 
three yards in rear of the non-commissioned officers ; all 
dress to the right. 

Seeing the ranks opened, the sergeant commands : 
3. Front, 
salutes the sergeant major, and reports : 

The detail is correct, or, {So many) sergeants, corporals, 
or privates are absent. 

He then passes by the right of the guard and places 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 171 

himself three yards in rear of the supernumeraries of his 
company. 

A first sergeant, in reporting, salutes an acting sergeant 
major, though the latter be junior to him. 

The other details, as they arrive, form in similar manner 
on the left of the first. Each first sergeant places himself 
opposite the left of his detail, faces the sergeant major, 
opens ranks, salutes, reports, and places himself in rear of 
his supernumeraries as already prescribed. The rear rank, 
the non-commissioned officers and supernumeraries of each 
detail, dress on the rear rank, the non-commissioned offi- 
cers, and supernumeraries of the detail next preceding. 
The rear rank closes to the right. 

The company details alternate in taking the right of the 
line. 

The sergeant major returns the salutes of the first ser- 
geants with the right hand. All the details having been 
reported, he draws his sword, and passing along the front 
of the guard and returning along the front of the rear 
rank, verifies the details by count, and resumes his post on 
the right. 

He then commands : 

1. Count. 2. Fours, 
and if necessary completes the left four as prescribed in 
tactics.* 

Privates ordered into the line of file-closers distribute 
themselves equally in rear of the guard. 

The sergeant major then divides the guard into two 
platoons of equal front ; after which he commands : 
1. Right. 2. Dress. 

* If the left four contain three men or less, they are ordered into the 
line of file-closers; if it contain four men they are placed in the front 
rank, and numbers one and four are covered by numbers two and three 
of the rear rank of the four next on the right ; if it contain five men the 
front rank is completed, number one covered, and number four covered 
by number three taken as before; if it contain six men, the front rank 
is completed, the other two men covering numbers one and four ; with 
seven men, number three, rear rank is left blank. In single rank, the 
incomplete four may be ordered into the line of file-closers. Privates so 
ordered into the line of file-closers are not file closers, nor will they with- 
out orders perform the duties of file-closers. 



172 ART OF WAR. 

He verifies the alignment of the ranks, file-closers, super- 
numeraries and first sergeants, then returns to the right of 
the front rank and commands : 

3. Front, 
passes to the front of the center of the guard, and without 
halting, turns to the right and advances to a point midway 
between the guard and the adjutant, where he halts, salutes, 
and reports : 

Sir, the details are correct, or, Sir, {so many) sergeants, 
corporals, or privates are absent. 

The adjutant acknowledges the salute, and gives the 
order, 

Take your post. 

The sergeant major then returns to the carry, faces about 
as prescribed for officers, approaches to within two yards 
of the center of the guard, turns to the right without halt- 
ing, advances three yards beyond the left flank of the 
guard, turns to the left and places himself, facing the front, 
on a line with the front rank of the guard and three yards 
to its left. 

The officers of the guard place themselves on the line 
of the front rank, midway between the band and the guard. 
They should approach this position from the rear and in 
time at once to proceed, as soon as the sergeant major has 
made his report to the adjutant, to their respective posts, 
the senior three yards in front of the centre of the first 
platoon, the junior three yards in front of the centre of the 
second platoon, both facing to the front. If there be but 
one officer, he places himself three yards in front of the 
centre of the guard. If there be two officers, and no di- 
vision of the guard into platoons, the officers take post, 
the senior opposite the centre of the right half, the junior 
opposite the centre of the left half of the guard and three 
yards from it. As soon as the junior officer has taken his 
post, both officers draw sword together. The adjutant also 
•draws sword at the same time. 

The adjutant then commands : 

1. Officers and non-commissioned officers, to the front and 
centre. 2. March. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 1 73 

At the command march, the officers of the guard advance 
to the front, closing in obliquely upon each other, and halt 
at three yards from the adjutant; if there be but one offi- 
cer, he advances straight to the front, and halts at three 
yards from the adjutant. 

The non-commissioned officers pass by the flanks of the 
guard and form in line, in order of rank from right to left, 
three yards in rear of the officers. Non-commissioned 
officers passing by the left flank, pass between the guard 
and the sergeant major. If there be but one officer, the 
word " officer" is substituted for "officers," the first word 
of the above command. If there be no officer, the words 
"officers and " are omitted ; the non-commissioned officers 
in this case take post three yards from the adjutant. 

The adjutant then assigns their places in the guard, in 
the order of rank as follows : 

Senior officer, commander of the guard, and chief of the 
first platoon ; junior officer, chief of second platoon ; senior 
sergeant,* right guide and guide of first platoon ; second 
sergeant,* left guide, and guide of second platoon ; the re- 
maining non-commissioned officers as file-closers of the first 
and second platoons. 

If there be but one officer of the guard, the senior ser- 
geant is assigned as chief of the second platoon, the second 
as right guide, and so on. 

If there be no officer of the guard, the senior sergeant is 
assigned to the command of the guard, and the remaining 
non-commissioned officers to posts in order of rank. 

In making these assignments the adjutant passes in front 
of the officers, from right to left, by their left and rear to 
the right of the non-commissioned officers, along their 
front from right to left ; then passing in their rear, to their 
right, by the right of the officers, he resumes his post and 
faces the guard. 

Having resumed his post the adjutant commands : 

1. Officers and non-commissioned officers, 2. To your posts, 
3. March. 

* Or non-commissioned officer. 



174 ART P F WAR - 

If there be but one officer, or if there be no officer of 
the guard, the adjutant commands : 

i. Non-commissioned officers, 2. To your posts, 3. 
March. 

At the command march, the senior officer stands fast ; 
the junior officer faces about, and by an oblique movement 
resumes his post three yards in front of the centre of the 
second platoon and faces to the front; the non-commis- 
sioned officers face about and take the posts assigned them ; 
the senior and second sergeants place themselves respect- 
ively on the right and left of the front rank of the guard ; 
the remaining non-commissioned officers, passing by the 
flanks of the platoons to which they are assigned, take 
their places in the line of file closers, in rear of their re- 
spective platoons. 

Non-commissioned officers assigned as chiefs of platoons, 
take posts in the line of file-closers, opposite the centres of 
the platoons to which they are assigned. If the guard be 
too small to be divided into platoons, the senior sergeant, 
if commanding the guard, places himself on the right of 
the front rank, and is covered by the right guide in the rear 
rank, or in the line of file-closers if there be no rear rank. 

The officer and non-commissioned officers having taken 
their respective posts, the adjutant directs the senior officer : 

Inspect your guard, Sir, 
at which the latter faces about and commands : 

1. Order, 2. Arms, 3. Inspection, 4. Arms. 

If there be no officers of the guard, the adjutant brings 
the guard to order and inspection arms, and himself in- 
spects it. 

The sergeant major, supernumeraries and first sergeants 
come to order arms with the guard. 

The senior officer returns sword, and then proceeds to 
the right of the front rank of the guard and begins his in- 
spection. 

If he desire the junior officer to inspect the rear rank, 
he will, after giving the command inspection arms, and be- 
fore returning sword, direct the junior officer: 
Inspect the rear rank, Sir. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 1 75 

At the command order arms, the junior officer will come 
to the order ; at the command inspection arms, he will re- 
sume the carry. If directed to inspect the rear rank, he 
will return sword, face to the right, and, passing by the 
right flank of the front rank, will begin his inspection on 
the right of the rear rank. 

If not directed to inspect the rear rank, he will remain 
at the carry until the senior has begun his inspection of 
the front rank, when he will face about and stand at place 
rest, facing the guard, until the inspection of the senior is 
ended, when he comes to attention, resumes the carry, faces 
about, and comes to an order. 

The adjutant returns sword, and during the inspection 
observes the general condition of the guard, and replaces 
by a supernumerary any man who does not present a cred- 
itable appearance. 

During the inspection the band plays. 

The inspection ended, the new officers of the day take 
post in front of and facing the centre of the guard, and 
sixty yards, or more, if the size of the parade admit, from 
it. 

The old officer of the day takes post three yards to the 
right and one yard to the rear of the new officer of the 
day. 

The adjutant places himself about thirty yards in front 
of and facing the centre of the guard, draws sword and 
commands: 

i. Parade, 2. Rest, 3. Sound Off. 

At the second command, the guard, sergeant, major, su- 
pernumeraries, and first sergeants, come to parade rest. 

Immediately after the command sound off the officers of 
the day together assume the position of parade rest, with 
arms folded. The adjutant comes to an order and parade 
rest. 

At the command sound off the band plays along the front 
of the officers of the guard, to the left and back to its place 
on the right, when it ceases. 

The band steps ofT as it commences playing. It marches 
straight to the front and wheels to the left, so that on the 



176 ART OF WAR. 

completion of the wheel its centre will be on a line parallel 
to the front of the guard and about fifteen yards from it. 
When the front of the band is twelve yards beyond the left 
of the guard, it will countermarch and return to its place, 
wheeling on the same ground as before. It will march 
three yards more than its depth, to the rear of its place in 
line, countermarch, and halt when its front is on a line 
with the front of the guard. The band will march, coun- 
termarch, wheel, halt, commence and cease playing, at the 
signal of the drum major. 

The adjutant comes to attention and carry when the 
music ceases, and then commands: 

1. Guard, 2. Attention, 3. Carry, 4. Arms, 5. Close 
order, 6. March. 

The guard, sergeant major, supernumeraries, and first 
sergeants come to attention at the command ; the guard 
and sergeant major only come to the carry ; at the com- 
mand march, the guard closes ranks, the officers face about, 
place themselves two yards in front of the centres of their 
respective platoons, and face the front ; if there is but one 
officer, he places himself two yards in front of the centre 
of the guard; if two officers and no division of the guard 
into platoons, the junior places himself, passing by the left 
flank of the guard, in the line of file-closers, and in rear of 
the centre of the left half of the guard. 

The adjutant then commands : 

1. Present, 2. Arms. 

The guard and the sergeant major present arms. The ad- 
jutant faces the new officer of the day, salutes, and reports: 
Sir, the guard is formed. 

The new officer of the day, acknowledging the salute 
with the right hand, directs the adjutant : 

March the guard in review, Sir. 

If the adjutant be senior to the officer of the day, he 
makes his report without saluting; the officer of the day 
then salutes, and gives the adjutant the same directions as 
before ; the adjutant then returns the salute. 

The adjutant then faces about and commands : 

1. Carry, 2. Arms, 3. Platoons right wheel, 4. March. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 1 77 

If not already there, the chiefs of platoons place them- 
selves, at the third command, two yards in front of and 
facing the centres of their respective platoons. At the 
command march, the platoons wheel to the right on a fixed 
pivot ; the right guide stands fast ; the left guide conducts 
the marching flank of the second platoon ; each chief su- 
perintends the wheel of his platoon, and hastens to the 
point where its left is to rest on the completion of the 
wheel, faces to the late rear, and when the marching flank 
approaches the perpendicular, commands : 
i. Platoon, 2. Halt. 

At the command halt, the guide of the first platoon 
passes along its front at a double time, with arms trailed. 

Each guide places his left arm against the breast of his 
chief, who then steps back two yards, and commands : 
i. Left, 2. Dress, 3. Front. 

Having dressed his platoon, he takes post two yards in 
front of its centre. 

The band wheels to the right, and places itself twelve 
yards in front of the first platoon. 

The adjutant places himself abreast of the first platoon, 
and six yards from its left flank. The sergeant major places 
himself abreast of the second platoon, and six yards from 
its left flank, covering the adjutant. 

The adjutant then commands : 

1. Pass in review, 2, Forward, 3. Guide right, 4. March. 

At the third command, the guides pass to the right flank, 
in front of their respective platoons, at a double time. 

The adjutant, sergeant major, officers of the guard, chiefs 
of platoons, and drum major, if there be one, salute when 
at six yards from the new officer of the day; when at six 
yards beyond him, they return to the carry. 

If senior to the new officer of the day, the adjutant does 
not salute. 

Non-commissioned officers in command of platoons, sa- 
lute with the sergeants' salute. 

In saluting, the head is turned toward the new officer of 
the day. 

At the approach of the band, both officers of the day 



178 ART OF WAR. 

together assume the attention. The new officer of the day, 
only, returns the salute of the drum major, if there be one, 
with the right hand, and uncovers while the guard is pass- 
ing, holding his hat with the right hand over the left shoul- 
der, the old officer of the day meanwhile standing at 
attention. 

The guard having passed the officers of the day, the ad- 
jutant and sergeant major halt at the same instant, return 
sword and retire. 

The guard having passed them, the officers of the day 
turn toward each other and salute. The old officer of the 
day then gives the old or standing orders to the new. 

The band, having passed the officers of the day, wheels 
to the left out of column, and places itself opposite the offi- 
cers of the day and facing them, ceasing to play when the 
rear of the column has passed. 

After ceasing to play, it will be so conducted from the 
parade ground by the drum major as not to obstruct the 
movements of the guard. 

The first sergeants and supernumeraries remain at atten- 
tion at an order while the guard is presented and wheeled 
into column. The senior first sergeant commands : 

1. Parade, 2. Rest, 
at the command march for passing in review ; and 

1. Supernume?'aries, 2. Attention. 
when the officers of the day come to attention. The first 
sergeants come to parade rest and attention, with the super- 
numeraries. 

The guard having passed the officers of the day, each 
first sergeant brings his supernumeraries to a carry and sup- 
port, or right shoulder, marches them to the company pa- 
rade ground, and dismisses them. 

Supernumeraries should be required to remain in the gar- 
rison or camp, in order to be on hand should they be re- 
quired to replace a man on guard, who may for any cause 
be relieved. 

The field music of the guard detaches itself from the 
band when the latter wheels out of the column, and remains 
in front of the guard, beginning to play when the band 
ceases. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 1 79 

The commander of the guard, when it has passed twelve 
yards beyond the new officer of the day, commands : 
1. Guide, 2. Left. 

At which the guides pass at a double time to the left 
flanks of their respective platoons. 

He then commands : 

1. Continue the march, 2. Left into line wheel, 3. March, 

4. Forward, 5. March, 6. Guide, 7. Right. 

At the third command the guides halt, and each platoon 
wheels to the left on a fixed pivot. The command forward 
is given in time to add inarch, the instant the platoons 
unite in line. The chief of the second platoon takes his 
place two yards in rear of the centre of his platoon, pass- 
ing around its marching flank at the command forward. 
At the same command, the guides take their places on the 
flanks of the guard, the right guide passing at a dpuble 
time in front of the first platoon. 

The commander of the guard then commands : 

t. Fours right, 2. March, 3. Fight shoulder, 4. Arms. 

At the command march, he places himself on the left of 
the leading guide, and conducts the guard to its post, pre- 
ceded by the field music. 

The guard, if too small to be divided into platoons, may 
be wheeled to the right by the command : 

1. Fight wheel, 2. March, 
and passed in review by the same commands and means as 
above. The commander of the guard is two yards in front 
of its centre; the adjutant is six yards from its left flank, 
the sergeant major covers him on a line with the file-closers. 

The commander of the guard, having passed twelve 
yards beyond the officer of the day, commands : 

1. Fight forward, 2. Fours right, 3. March. 

The guard is conducted to its post so as to pass six yards 
in front of the old guard, which it approaches from the left. 

The officer of the day may direct the adjutant : 
March the guard to its post, Sir. 

The adjutant faces about and commands: 

1. Carry, 2. Arms, 3. Guard to its post, 4. Fours right, 

5. March (or, double time, March). 



ISO ART OF WAR. 

At the fourth command the senior officer places himself, 
facing to the right, two yards in front of the right guide. 
The junior officer places himself in the line of file-closers 
in rear of the centre of the second platoon. 

At the command march, the guard wheels by fours to 
the right ; the field music of the guard places itself in its 
front ; the senior officer takes command, placing himself 
on the left of the leading guide. The adjutant and ser- 
geant major return swords and retire. 

The officers of the day salute each other as before. 

The first sergeants march off their supernumeraries, and 
the band is conducted from the parade ground by the drum 
major. 

As the new guard approaches the guard house, the old 
guard is formed in line, with its field music two yards to 
its right. When the field music of the new guard arrives 
opposite its left flank, the commander of 'lie .,1a guard, if 
an officer, faces his guard and commands . 

i. Presejit, 2. Arms, 
faces to the front and salutes when the front of the new 
guard is opposite the left of his own. The new guard 
having passed his field music, he resumes the carry, faces 
about and commands : 

1. Carry, 2. Arms. 

The new guard, with arms at a carry, marches in quick 
time past the old guard, officers saluting individually on 
arriving opposite the left of the old guard. 

The field music having marched three yards beyond the 
field music of the old guard, changes direction to the right, 
and, followed by the guard, changes direction to the left 
when on a line with the file-closers of the old guard. 
These changes of direction are made without command. 

The commander of the guard halts in his own person on 
the line of the front rank of the old guard, allows his guard 
to file past him, and when its rear approaches, commands : 
1. Fours left, 2. March, 3. Guard, 4. Halt. 

fle establishes the left guide on the line of the front 
rank of the old guard, and three yards from its field music, 
and commands : 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 131 

i. Left, 2. Dress, 3. Front, 
stepping back two yards during the dressing. He then 
takes his post two yards in front of the centre of his guard. 
The field music of the new guard posts itself with its left 
two yards to the right of the front rank, and on.a line with 
it. 

The new guard being dressed, the commander of each 
guard, if an officer, in front of and facing its centre, com- 
mands : 

1. Present, 2. Arms, 
resumes his front and salutes, each turning his head to- 
ward the other. Having saluted, they resume the carry, 
face about and command : 

1. Carry, 2. Arms, 3. Order, 4. Arms. 

Should the guards be commanded by sergeants, they 
present with their guards, standing on the flank of their 
guard nearest to the other guard. If one guard be com- 
manded by an officer, the other by a non-commissioned 
officer, the latter stands on the flank of his guard and pre- 
sents with it. 

The commander of the new guard then divides the guard 
into three reliefs, numbering them first, seco?id and third, 
from right to left, and directs a list of the guard to be 
made; experienced soldiers are placed over the arms of 
the guard, and at the remote and responsible posts. 

He then proceeds to take possession of the guard house, * 
and the articles and prisoners in charge of the guard. The 
sentinels and detachments of the old guard are at once re- 
lieved by members of the new guard. While this is done 
the two guards stand at place rest, and the old commander 
gives to the new all the information and instructions relat- 
ing to his post. 

The officers of the day visit and inspect the guard house, 
while the old guard is relieved, verify the number of pris- 
oners, and then proceed to the office or presence of the 
commanding officer, who receives the report of the old 

* Or guard tents. When the words guard house are used in the fol- 
lowing pages, they will be understood to mean also guard tents, if in 
camp. 



1 82 ART OF WAR. 

officer of the day, relieves him, and delivers his instruc- 
tions to the new officer of the day. 

In visiting the guard house, the officers of the day will 
each be saluted by his own guard. 

Marching Off. 

The sentinels and detachments of the old guard having 
come in, form on its left and are brought to an order; both 
guards are then brought to a carry. 

The commander of the old guard then commands : 
i. Forward, 2. Guide right, 3. March. 

When it has advanced six yards to the front, he com- 
mands : 

1. Fours right, 2. March. 

At the command march, he takes his place on the left of 
the leading guide ; the guard wheels by fours to the right, 
the field music begins to play, and the guard marches in 
quick time past the new guard, the officers individually 
saluting as they arrive opposite its left flank. 

The commander of the new guard, if an officer, stands 
two yards in front of its centre while the old guard is pass- 
ing; if a non-commissioned officer, he stands on the right 
of the front rank. When the field music of the old guard 
arrives opposite the left of his guard, if an officer, he faces 
his guard, commands : 

1. Present, 2. Arms, 
resumes his front and salutes when the front of the old 
guard is opposite the left of the new guard. 

The new guard is brought to a carry as soon as the old 
guard has passed, and when the latter has marched about 
fifty yards from the post of the guard, the commander of 
the new guard commands, if there be no arm racks : 

1. Order, 2. Arms, 3. Stack, 4. Arms, 5. Lay on loose 
pieces, 

and directs the sergeant of the guard : 
Dismiss the Guard. 

The sergeant of the guard will salute and command : 
1. Break ranks, 2. March. 

Or, if there be arm racks, the commander of the guard 
directs the sergeant : 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 1 83 

Dismiss the Guard. 

The sergeant will then salute and command : 

1. Arms, 2. Port, 3. Break ranks, 4. March. 

Arms are at once placed in the racks. 

The old guard having arrived at the regimental or gar- 
rison parade, is formed in line and halted by its com- 
mander, who then commands: 

1. Arms, 2. Port, 3. Open, 4. Chamber, 5. Carry, 6. 
Arms. 

He sees that no piece remains loaded. Each man closes 
the breech block of his piece, without command, after it 
is inspected. 

The commander of the old guard then commands : 

1. (Such) Company detail, 2. Two paces to the front, 3. 
March, 

and directs the senior non-commissioned officer or private 
of such detail : 

Dis?niss the detail, 
and so on until all the details are dismissed. 

Each detail is marched to its company parade ground 
and then dismissed by the chief of squad, who examines 
the arms and accoutrements of his men, and causes them 
to be put away in good order. 

Undress Guard Mounting. 

In bad weather, at night, or after long marches, undress 
guard mounting will replace the dress guard mounting. 

It is conducted on the same principles as dress guard 
mounting, except that the field music sounds off, standing 
on the right of the guard, and that the division into pla- 
toons and march in review are dispensed with. The mu- 
sic, at the discretion of the commanding officer, may be 
dispensed with. 

Cavalry Guard Mounting, Dismounted. 

Guard mounting for Cavalry dismounted is executed in 
the same manner and by the same commands, as for In- 
fantry, excepting only that the commands are modified to 
meet the requirements of the arm used. 



1 84 ART OF WAR. 

If the guard be fully armed, the adjutant or senior offi- 
cer of the guard may inspect all, or a part only of the arms. 

In the first case, he commands : 

i. Inspection, 2. Arms. 

In the second case, he commands : 

1. Inspection, 2. Carbine, (2. Sabre or pistol) accord- 
ing to the arm he wishes to inspect. 

Cavalry Guard Mounting, Mounted. 

Mounted guard mounting is conducted in single rank, 
on the same principles as guard mounting dismounted, 
with the following modifications, 

No supernumeraries are formed with the guard ; the first 
sergeant inspects the dress and general appearance of his 
detail before causing it to mount. The sabres of the first 
sergeants are drawn ; the sabres of the details are in the 
scabbard. 

The officers and non-commissioned officers take the dis- 
tance of six yards from the rank when at open order, and 
one yard when at close order ; the first sergeants, in report- 
ing, salute with the sabre, and then place themselves six 
yards in rear of the non-commissioned officers of the 
guard. The assignment of officers and non-commissioned 
officers is omitted, the non-commissioned officers remain- 
ing in the position above prescribed ; the guide of each 
platoon is the file on the flank toward which the guide is 
announced. 

If any man does not present a creditable appearance, 
the Captain is notified through the first sergeant, and he 
sends a man to the officer of the guard, at the guard-house,. 
to replace him. 

If there be no officer of the guard, the adjutant, when 
inspecting, notifies the two senior non-commissioned offi- 
cers to serve as chiefs of platoons; or, if the division of 
platoons be omitted, he notifies the senior non-commis- 
sioned officer to command the guard; the non-commis- 
sioned officer places himself on the right of the rank. 
The adjutant omits the commands parade rest and guard 
attention, and to present the guard, commands: 






MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 1 85 

i. Draw, 2. Sabre, 3. Present, 4. Sabre. 

The platoons wheel to the right, as explained in the 
School of the Company, mounted. 

The officers of the day do not fold their arms, and the 
first sergeants, having taken their posts, remain at atten- 
tion till the rear of the guard has passed the officers of the 
day, when they return their sabres and retire. 

At the guard-house, the officer of the new guard, after 
forming it in line, dresses it on the line of the old guard, 
without regard to the distance from the trumpeters of the 
old guard, and the commands present sabre and cany sabre 
are substituted for the commands for the carbine. 

The reliefs call off from right to left, and march to the 
various posts in column of fours; the men from right to 
left in each four fall out, and take post successively from 
the head of the column ; the sentinels relieved form fours 
successively at the rear of the column. 

The old guard being relieved, the new guard dismounts. 
One-third of the horses are kept saddled and bridled for 
immediate use ; the bridles of the remaining horses may 
be removed and the girths loosened, when safety permits. 

Stable Guards (Cavalry). 

Stable-guards are for the protection of the horses, equip- 
ments and forage, as well as for the enforcement of the 
special regulations in regard to stables and horses. 

A non-commissioned officer has charge of the stable- 
guard, which is large enough to relieve the men on post 
every two hours. They sleep in their tents, if in camp, 
and are called by the non-commissioned officers when 
wanted. The latter will take all precautions necessary to 
prevent the escape of loose horses. 

The sentinels of the stable-guard will be posted and re- 
lieved like those of other guards. They are forbidden to 
strike or otherwise punish horses, and, if consistent with 
safety, wear the sabre belt only when on post at the stable 
or picket line. 

The employment of stable guards for police and fatigue 
duty at the stables is strictly forbidden ; but this will not 



1 86 ART OF WAR. 

prohibit men not on post from being called upon to groom 
their own horses, or to assist in feeding grain before rev- 
eille. 

Stable and Park Guard. (Artillery.) 

The pieces, caissons, etc., with their ammunition and 
stores, as well as the horses, harness, and forage, are in 
charge of a stable and park guard consisting of two non- 
commissioned officers and as many privates as may be 
necessary. 

A Lieutenant of the battery is detailed daily as battery 
officer of the day, or orderly officer ; the stable and park 
guard is under his immediate orders, and those of the 
Captain. 

It is the duty of this guard to enfore the special regula- 
tions in regard to the stables, horses, and park. 

The sentinels of the stable and park guard will be posted 
and relieved like those of other guards. They are for- 
bidden to strike or otherwise punish horses ; and wear the 
sabre-belt only when on post at the stable or picket-line. 

The sentinels over the horses or in charge of prisoners, 
receive orders from the stable sergeant, so far as the exer- 
cise of his duties is concerned. 

The employment of guards for police and fatigue duty at 
the stables is strictly forbidden \ but this will not prohibit 
men not on post from being called upon to groom their 
own horses, or to assist in feeding grain before reveille. 

This method of guard-duty is the only one practicable 
in campaign, or on the march ; its observance in garrison 
keeps a battery in constant readiness for service, and in- 
creases its efficiency; when ordered to move, the battery 
has not to make a complete change of system in the man- 
ner of protecting public property, and in all the interior 
details of duty. 

Artillery Guard Mounting. (Battery.) 
At the assembly of guard details, the men warned for 
stable and park guard duty fall in on the battery parade- 
ground, in two ranks facing to the right ; the non-commis- 
sioned officers and supernumeraries fall in as file-closers ; 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 187 

the first sergeant then faces the detail to the left, verifies it, 
opens the ranks, causes sabres to be drawn, inspects the 
dress and general appearance of the men, replaces by a 
supernumerary any man whose condition makes him unfit 
to march on guard, and then closes the ranks. If the 
supernumerary be no longer required, he is dismissed. 

The trumpeters take post on the battery or garrison 
parade-ground. 

At adjutant' 's call, the new battery officer of the day, 
who mounts the guard, takes post so as to be six yards in 
front of and facing the centre of the guard when formed. 

The first sergeant marches his detail to the parade- 
ground, the trumpeters sounding a march in quick time, 
and halts the detail in line so that the right file of the 
front rank shall be two yards to the left of the left trum- 
peter; he then places himself two yards in front of the 
centre of his detail, salutes and reports to the officer: 

Sir, the detail is correct; or, Sir, (so many) non-commis- 
siofied officers or privates are absent. 

He then faces to the left, and takes post two yards to 
the left of the front rank. 

The officer then draws sabre and commands: 
1. Rear open order, 2. March. 

At the command march, the ranks are opened ; the front 
rank dresses to the right, the rear rank steps back three 
yards, halts and dresses to the right; the senior non-com- 
missioned officer places himself on, the right of the front 
rank; the other non-commissioned officers three yards in 
rear of the rear rank. The officer verifies the alignment 
of both ranks and commands : 

3. Front. 

He then places himself six yards in front of, and facing 
the centre of the guard, and commands : 
1. Inspection, 2. Arms, 
returns his sabre and inspects the guard. 

The inspection being finished, the officer places himself 
six yards in front of, and facing the centre of the guard, 
draws his sabre and commands : 

1. Parade, 2. Rest, 3. Sound off. 



1 88 ART OF WAR. 

The trumpeters sound off, remaining on the right of the 
guard. 

The officer then commands : 

i. Guard, 2. Attention, 3. Close order, 4. March, 
5. Guard to its post, 6. Right, 7. Face, 8. Forward, 9. 
March. 

At the ninth command, the guard moves 10 its post pre- 
ceded by the trumpeters, who sound a march in quick 
time ; the senior non commissioned officer marches near 
its left and rear, so as to observe its movements. 

As the new guard approaches the guard house, the old 
guard is formed in line, its commander on the right of the 
front rank : when the trumpeters of the new guard arrive 
nearly opposite its left, the commander of the guard com- 
mands : 

1. Present, 2. Sabre. 

The new guard having passed, he commands : 
1. Carry, 2. Sabre. 

The new guard marches in quick time past the old 
guard, the commander saluting. 

The trumpeters having reached three yards beyond the 
right of the old guard, change direction to the right, and, 
followed by the guard, change direction to the left when 
on a line with the file-closers of the old guard ; the 
changes of direction are without command. The com- 
mander of the new guard halts on the line of the front 
rank of the old guard, #nd allows his guard to march past 
him ; when its rear, after changing direction to the left, 
approaches, he halts the guard, faces it to the left, places 
himself three yards to the right of the old guard, and in 
line with its front rank, and then dresses the guard to the 
left. The trumpeters are two yards to the right of its 
front rank. 

The new guard being dressed, the commander of each 
guard commands : 

1. Present, 2. Sabre, 
salutes, and then commands: 

1. Carry, 2. Sabre. 

The commander of the new guard now T divides the guard 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 1 89 

into three reliefs, numbers them first, second, and third, 
from right to left, and directs a list of the guard to be 
made ; he then takes possession of the guard-house and 
the articles and prisoners in charge of the guard. 

While the sentinels are relieved, the two guards stand 
at place rest, and the commander of the old guard gives to 
the commander of the new all the information and instruc- 
tions relating to his post. 

The sentinels of the old guard having come in, form on 
its left, and both guards are brought to a carry ; the trum- 
peters place themselves two yards to the right of the old 
guard on a line with the front rank ; the commander of 
the old guard places himself two yards in front of its cen- 
tre ; the commander of the new guard places himself on 
the right of its front rank ; the commander of the old 
guard marches it, with the guide right, six yards to the 
front, when he commands : 

1. By the right flank, 2. March. 

At the command march, the guard faces to the right ; 
the trumpeters begin to sound, and the guard marches in 
quick time past the new guard, which stands at present 
sabre, the commanders of both guards saluting; the old 
guard is then marched to the battery parade-ground and 
dismissed. 

The new guard is brought to a carry as soon as the old 
guard has passed. 

The commander of the guard then makes himself ac- 
quainted with all the instructions of his post, visits the 
sentinels, questions them and the non-commissioned offi- 
cers relative to the instructions they have received from 
the old guard. 

The new officer of the day visits and inspects the guard 
house, verifies prisoners, etc. 

Artillery Undress Guard Mounting will replace 
dress guard mounting under the same circumstances as 
prescribed for Infantry. It is conducted on the same prin- 
ciples as dress guard mounting; the music may be dis- 
pensed with at the discretion of the commanding officer. 

The general orders for all members of the stable and 
park guard are the same as for Infantry. 



I90 ART OF WAR. 

All persons in service, whatever be their rank, are re- 
quired to observe proper respect towards sentinels. When- 
ever saluted properly by a sentinel, the salute must be 
returned. Only those entitled to a salute should return it. 

Between Retreat and -Reveille sentinels do not salute, 
but stand attention when an officer passes. The officer 
acknowledges the attention by a salute of the hand. Any 
person entitled to have the guard turned out for him, and 
not wishing it, touches his cap, or calls out loud enough to 
be heard by No. 1 : "Never mind the guard." 

All orders relating to the guard are sent by the com- 
manding officer to the Officer of the Day, who in turn 
transmits them to the guard, and sees that they are carried 
out properly. 

The officer of the day is an officer detailed to carry out 
all orders, and enforce all regulations, discipline and 
police of camp or garrison, while he is on duty. He is 
really an acting commanding officer. His tour lasts for 
24 hours. In camps or garrisons of less than a regiment, 
captains are detailed as officers of the day. In brigades, 
field officers are detailed for the brigade. After having 
inspected their guards, at the guard house or tent, verified 
the number of prisoners, property, etc., the officers of the 
day present themselves to the commanding officer — the old 
officer of the day on the right of the new one, and both 
salute with the right hand. The old officer of the day 
says: "Sir, I report as old officer of the day;" the new 
one: "Sir, I report as new officer of the day." After in- 
structions are given they withdraw. 

The officer of the day is responsible for the enforcement 
of the police regulations, and the cleanliness of the post 
or camp. Fatigue parties will be furnished him when the 
number of prisoners is insufficient for police purposes. 

The officer of the day visits the guards during the day 
at such times as he may deem necessary, and makes his 
rounds at night at least once after 12 o'clock. 
. The officer of the day must see that the officer of the 
guard is furnished with the parole and countersign before 
retreat. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. I9I 

Officer of the Guard. 

During the time of relieving the sentinels and of calling 
in the small posts, the old commander of the guard will 
give to the new all the information and instructions relat- 
ing to his post. 

After the sentinels and outposts of the old guard have 
been relieved, the commander of the new guard will visit 
them, and question the non-commissioned officers and 
sentinels relative to the instructions they may have received 
from the old guard. 

Officers are to remain constantly at their guards, except 
while visiting their sentinels, or necessarily engaged else- 
where on their proper duty. 

Commanders of guards leaving their posts to visit their 
sentinels, or on other duty, are to mention their intention 
to the next in rank of the guard. 

If ordered to prepare his guard for inspection by any 
person from whom he properly receives orders, the officer 
of the guard brings his guard to rear open order, inspection 
arms, or arms port, as directed. 

In making his own prescribed inspections of the guard, 
he will first bring it to rear open order. 

The commander of a guard receives and obeys the or- 
ders only of the officer of the day and the commanding 
officer. A junior officer of the guard will obey the orders 
of the senior. 

Orders received by the commander of a guard through 
any source other than the officer of the day will be at once 
reported to the latter. 

The commander of a guard is responsible for the disci- 
pline of his guard. He will see that all its members are 
thoroughly instructed in their orders and duties, and that 
they properly perform them. 

His tour of duty begins on his arrival at his post; it 
ends when all of his sentinels and detachments are relieved. 

He will make a report of his tour of service, including 
all outposts of his guard, and present it to the officer of 
the day at the end of his tour. This report is made in 
form prescribed, and is shown on pages 192-93. 



192 



ART OF WAR. 



Immediately after the old guard has marched off, the 
commander of the new guard will visit and question his 
non-commissioned officers and sentinels, relative to the 
instructions they may have received from the old guard. 

The officer of the guard will visit the sentinels of each 
relief, and will see that each sentinel is properly instructed 
in, and understands his duties. He will order rounds to 
be made when he thinks necessary. 

Officers of the guard are to remain constantly with their 
guards, except while visiting sentinels or necessarily en- 
gaged elsewhere on their proper duty. 

Report of a Guard mounted at . . . on the . . _ and relieved 
on the . . . 



Parole. 


. 


| 

U 

T 


= 

V 

M 

en 



— 



'5 

- 


t/i 
> 


O 

H 


r'- 
M 

< 


Articles in 
charge. 




Countersign. 














Received the foregoing ar- 
ticles. 

A. B., 


Officer 0/ the Guard. 


Detail . . . 





* The " total" includes all enlisted men of the guard ; the " aggregate," both en- 
listed men and commissioned officers. 



List of the Guard. 



Reliefs and when posted. 


P. 

<L> 
> 




First relief, from 

and to 


-to 


Second relief, from 
to and 
to 


Third relief, from 
to and 
to 


, 


No. 


Name. 


Co. 


R 


-g't. 


Name. 


Co. Reg't. 


Name. 


Co. 


Reg't. 


s 










I 




















1 




I . . . . 


































Sergeant : 



Corporal 



Orderly for Commanding Officer : 



Musician of the Guard : 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 



193 



Note. 


— Name first 


LUt of Prisoners. 

the prisoners under sentence by G. C. M. 3 
those who have longest to be confined. 


commencing wi 


th 




Names. 


Co. 


Reg't. 


Confined. 





Sentence. 


V 

u 


6 




No. 


! ^ 


g 



P3 


I' 

4) 
C 

i 

g 

u 


1 

"a 












" : 
















Co 








- Regime tit of 
mmanding the 


Guard. 





A commander of a guard leaving his post for any cause, 
will mention his intention, and the probable duration of 
his absence, to the next in rank of his guard. 

He will inspect his guard at reveille and retreat, and 
have the guar^ formed and the roll called at tattoo. 

He will communicate the countersign to the non-com- 
missioned officers of his guard, and see that it is duly- 
communicated to the sentinels on post, before the hour for 
challenging to begin. 

He will see that the proper calls are sounded at the 
hours appointed by the commanding officer. 

He will see that the sentinels are relieved every two 
hours, unless the weather or other cause make it necessary 
or proper that it be done at shorter or longer intervals. 

After receiving the report of the corporal he will inspect 
each relief before it goes on, and after it comes off post, 
and will assure himself that each sentinel is properly armed 
and equipped. This inspection is usually made with the 
relief at arms port, and with closed ranks. The relief that 
first goes on post need not be inspected by the officer of 
the guard. 

Officers are not to take off their clothing or accoutre- 
13 



194 ART OF WAR. 

ments while on guard, without permission from proper 
authority. 

When formed for any cause whatever, the guard should 
invariably be under arms. 

When a fire breaks out, or any alarm is raised in a gar- 
rison, the guard is immediately turned out. If the case 
be at all serious, the long roll is beaten or the fire alarm 
sounded, and the.commanding officer and the officer of the 
day are at once notified. 

The officer of the guard will detain at the guard house 
all suspicious characters, or parties attempting to pass a 
sentinel's post without authority, reporting such action to 
tfie officer of the day, at once if the case demand. 

If a sentinel call for " the guard" the officer of the guard 
will at once send a patrol to such sentinel's post. If the 
danger be great, in which case the sentinel's piece will be 
discharged, the patrol will be as strong as possible. When 
practicable, there should always be at least two privates of 
the guard at the guard house, in addition to the sentinels 
and non-commissioned officer on duty. 

When any person entitled to compliment passes a guard 
between reveille and retreat, the officer of the guard will 
see that it is promptly formed, if it be necessary to form 
it. (For list of persons entitled to compliment, see page 

212.) 

He will receive the report of the sergeant of the guard, 
returning the salute of the latter with the right hand. 

He will then draw his sword, dress his guard to the 
right, and place himself two yards in front of its centre. 
When the person in whose honor the guard is turned out 
approaches, the commander of the guard faces his guard, 
commands : 

i. Present '; 2. Arms, 
resumes his front and salutes, reporting, if it be the com- 
manding officer or officer of the day, for whom the guard 
is formed, 

Sir, the guard is present; or, Sir, the guard and prisoners 
are present ; or, Sir, the guard is present and the prisoners 
are secure " 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 1 95 

except that at guard mounting the officers of the guard 
simply salute, without making any report to the officers of 
the day. 

When his salute is acknowledged, he will resume the 
carry, face about, command: 

i. Carry, 2. Arms, 
and resume his proper front. 

If the person entitled to compliment pass in rear of the 
guard, it does not salute, but stands at a carry facing to 
the front. 

If such person pass in front or on either side of the 
guard, it being already formed, the commander of the 
guard presents arms and salutes, without reporting, as such 
person passes. 

After a person has been once saluted by a guard, he is 
not a second time saluted while he remains in the vicinity. 
Should he pass the guard under these circumstances, it 
being already formed, it is brought to attention. 

During the presence of both the old and new guards at 
the guard house, the officers of the day will each be sa- 
luted by his own guard. 

If other officers entitled to a salute approach, the senior 
officer of the two guards will command : 

1. Old and new guards , 2. Present, 3. Arms. 

Each officer of the guard will first bring his own guard 
to a carry. The junior will salute at the command present 
arms given by the senior. 

The national or regimental colors passing a guard will 
be saluted with the present, the drums of the guard playing 
a march, the trumpets sounding, "to the color." 

Guards do not turn out as a matter of compliment after 
sunset, nor will any compliments be paid by the guard, 
except as prescribed for grand rounds, between retreat and 
reveille. 

A guard may be turned out between retreat and reveille 
by direction of any person from whom its commander 
properly receives orders. To present the guard in this 
case, it is formed, dressed and presented as above de- 
scribed, excepting that the commander salutes and reports 
without bringing the guard to present arms. 



I96 ART OF WAR. 

A guard is invariably turned out at night when visited 
by the grand rounds. In this case, the officer of the guard 
will see that the guard is promptly formed. After dress- 
ing his guard, he will order a sergeant and two privates to 
advance to meet the grand rounds. He then takes his 
place two yards in front of the centre of his guard. At 
the call of the sergeant, "The countersign is right," the 
officer of the guard will call, 

Advance 7-ounds. 

Should he deem it necessary he may demand the parole 
of the officer of the rounds, advancing in the direction of 
the visiting officer to prevent any unauthorized person 
hearing the parole when given. 

The guard is likewise turned out at night on the ap- 
proach of any body of armed men, other than a returning 
relief of the guard itself. At the call of the corporal, the 
guard will be promptly formed : the officer of the guard 
takes his post in front of its centre and calls : 
Advance one with the countersign. 

If the countersign be correctly given, and if he have 
orders to pass such a party, he allows them to pass. If 
not, he at once notifies the officer of the day, and causes 
the party to await his orders. 

In the same manner the guard is turned out at night for 
any large body of men, armed or unarmed. They will be 
advanced or detained as in the above instance. 

On the march, the guard with the prisoners will march 
in rear of the regiment. 

It will take charge of prisoners, pick up stragglers, and 
perform such other duties as may be directed by the com- 
manding officer. 

When a camping party precedes the regiment, the new 
guard may be ordered to march with it. The guard, on 
reaching the camp, forms in line, in front of the centre of 
the ground marked for the regiment. The officer of the 
guard furnishes the sentinels required by the commander 
of the camping party. 

The Sergeant of the Guard. 
Immediately after guard mounting, the sergeant of the 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 197 

guard will prepare duplicate lists, setting forth the names, 
number of relief and posts of all the non-commissioned 
officers, musicians, and privates of the guard. 

One list will be handed as soon as possible to the com- 
mander of the guard ; the other will be retained by the 
sergeant. 

The sergeant of the guard has general supervision over 
the other non-commissioned officers and the privates of the 
guard. 

He must be thoroughly familiar with all the orders and 
duties of corporals of the guard and of sentinels. 

He will see that reliefs are turned out at the proper time, 
and that the corporals thoroughly understand, and are 
zealous and prompt in the discharge of their duties. 

He will designate a non-commissioned officer of the 
guard to take the place of the corporal whose relief is on 
post, should the latter be called away from the guard house. 

He will cause the guard house and premises to be thor- 
oughly policed, at such hours as may be designated for 
police call by the commanding officer ; by prisoners, if 
there be such ; by members of the guard, if there be no 
prisoners. 

He is directly responsible for the property borne on the 
guard report, and will see that it is properly cared for. 
He should make lists of property taken out by working 
parties, and see that all articles so taken out are duly re- 
turned. If any articles are not so returned he will imme- 
diately report the fact to the officer of the guard. 

He will send a member of the guard to wake company 
cooks, at such hour as may be directed, if this hour be be- 
fore reveille. Neither the musicians of the guard, nor the 
non-commissioned officer on duty at the guard house will 
be sent on this duty. 

If sentinels are numerous, the sergeants as well as the 
corporals may be required to relieve and post sentinels. 

Sergeants assigned to reliefs, perform the duties pre- 
scribed for corporals of the guard. They will not be so 
assigned unless the number of corporals detailed for guard 
be less than the number of reliefs. 



I98 ART OF WAR. 

A sergeant should also be familiar with the duties of the 
officer of the guard, since he is often placed in command 
of a guard. In this case, his general duties are the same 
as those of the officer of the guard. 

A non-commissioned officer in command of a guard will 
not receipt for property borne on the guard report, though 
he will be held accountable to the officer of the day for its 
safe keeping and preservation from injury, other than that 
resulting from fair wear and tear in service. 

A non-commissioned officer in charge of a guard will 
perform the duties of the sergeant of the guard as well as 
those of the officer of the guard. 

Whenever the guard is turned out, it is the duty of the 
sergeant of the guard promptly to form it. 

The guard falls in, facing to the right, with bayonets 
fixed, in single or double rank according to the habitual 
formation of the command of which it is a part, and with 
arms at a carry ; the field music will form so that its left is 
two yards to the right of the front rank. The sergeant, 
three yards in front of and facing the centre of the guard 
commands : 

1. Fall in, 2. Left, 3. Face, 4. Support, 5. Arms. 

He then calls the roll,* each man answering "Here" 
and coming to a carry and order arms, as his name is 
called. 

The sergeant then commands : 

1. Carry, 2. Arms, 
faces the commander of the guard, executes the sergeant' s 
salute, and reports : 

Sir, the guard is present ; or, Sir, the guard and prison- 
ers are present ; or, Sir, the guard is present, and the pris- 
oners are secure. 

He will then take his place on the right of the front 
rank of the guard. 



* In calling the roll at night, it is customary for the sergeant to call 
off in succession the numbers of sentinels' posts on each relief sepa- 
rately, each man answering as the number of his post and relief is called. 
Thus, the sergeant will call, the first relief being on post : " Second 
relief. Corporal (So and So,) No. I ; No. 2; etc. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 1 99 

In forming the guard prior to marching off, the sergeant 
will command : 

1. Count, 2. Fours, 
before reporting to the commander of the guard. 

When a guard is visited by grand rounds, the sergeant 
of the guard with two privates is ordered to meet them. 
The sergeant places himself between the two men and ad- 
vances toward the rounds. When within ten paces, he 
challenges. At the answer " Grand rounds" he will say: 
"Advance, sergeant, with the countersign." 

Having received the correct countersign, he will call to 
the commander of the guard, 

1 ' The countersign is right. ' ' 

At the call of the commander of the guard "Advance 
rounds, ' ' the sergeant and the two privates will return to 
their places in the guard. 

Should there be no sergeant on guard, the senior corporal 
performs the duties above prescribed for the sergeant of 
the guard. 

The Corporal of the Guard. 

The corporals of the guard should acquaint themselves 
with the duties of the officer, and the sergeant of the 
guard, as the exigencies of the service may require them 
to perform the duties of either. 

Corporals of the guard are assigned to reliefs by the 
commander of the guard. 

It is the duty of the corporal of the guard to post and 
relieve sentinels, and to instruct the members of his relief 
in their orders and duties as sentinels. 

Immediately after the division of the guard into reliefs, 
the corporals will assign the members of their respective 
reliefs to posts, by number. Experienced soldiers are 
placed over the arms of the guard and at remote and re- 
sponsible posts. 

Each corporal will make a list of the members of his re- 
lief, including himself. This list should specify the num- 
ber of the relief and the number of the post assigned to 
each member thereof. It should be made in duplicate, 



200 ART OF WAR. 

one copy to be given to the sergeant or senior non com- 
missioned officer of the guard as soon as completed, the 
other to be retained by the corporal. 

As soon as the officers of the day have visited their re- 
spective guards, or as soon as directed by the officer of the 
guard, the corporal of the first relief posts his relief. 

The following is the method prescribed : 

The relief is brought to a carry. The corporal then 
commands : 

Call Off. 

Commencing on the right, the men call off alternately 
front and rear rank, one, two, three, four, and so on ; if 
in single rank they call off from right to left. The cor- 
poral then commands : 

i. Right, 2. Face, 3. Support (or, Right shoulder), 4. 
Arms, 5. Forward, 6. March. 

In wet weather the relief may be marched at a secure 
arms. 

The corporal marches on the left, and near the rear file, 
in order to observe the march. The corporal of the old 
guard marches on the right of the leading rank or file, and 
takes command when the last one of the old sentinels is 
relieved, changing places with the corporal of the new 
guard. 

When the relief arrives at fifteen yards from a sentinel, 
he halts and faces to it with arms at a carry. At six yards 
from him the corporal commands : 

1. Relief, 2. Halt. 

The corporal then adds, according to the number of the 
post : 

1. No. ( — ), 2. Arms } 3. Port. 

Or, if the guard be armed with sabre or pistol only, 
1. No. ( — ), 2. Post. 

In the first case, at the third command, the two sentinels 
come to arms port a.nd approach each other. 

In the second case, they approach each other at the 
command "post.'" 

The old sentinel, under the supervision of both corpor- 
als, whispers his instructions to the one taking post. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 201 

The corporals advance and place themselves, facing each 
other, a little in advance of the new sentinel, the old cor- 
poral on his right, the new corporal on his left, both re- 
maining at a carry * 

The instructions relative to the post having been trans- 
mitted, the new corporal steps back two paces and com- 
mands : 

i. Support, (or, right shoulder,) 2. Arms, 3. Forward, 
4. March. 

The corporals take their respective places as the relief 
passes them. The old sentinel takes his place in rear of 
the relief as it passes him, at a support, or right shoulder 
arms. 

The other sentinels are relieved and the new ones posted 
in similar manner. 

The sentinel at the guard house, or No. 1, is the first 
relieved and is left behind. 

The corporals, while posting their reliefs, will usually 
march at a carry, unless the posts are distant when they 
come to the support or right shoulder with their reliefs. 

If sentinels are numerous, reliefs may be posted in de- 
tachments. 

The detachments and sentinels of the old guard, having 
come in, are formed on its left. 

To post a relief at any other time than at guard mount- 
ing, the corporal forms it by the commands : 
1. {Such) relief, 2. Fall in. 

The relief is formed in double or single rank, (accord- 
ing as the guard is formed,) facing to the right with arms 
at a carry, and with bayonets fixed ; the men should take 

* The following diagram will illustrate the positions taken : 
R A 



■:s ■■:■ 



R is the relief; A, the new corporal; C, the old; D, the new senti- 
nel; B, the old. 



202 ART OF WAR. 

place according to the numbers of their respective posts, 
viz.; one, three, five, and so on, in the front rank; two, 
four, and so on, in the rear rank ; or in the order of their 
respective posts from right to left, according as the relief 
is in double or single rank. The corporal, standing about 
two yards in front of the centre of his relief, then com- 
mands : 

i. Left, Face, 2. Call Off, 

The men call off as prescribed above. The corporal 
then places himself on the right of the front rank, and 
executing the sergeant' 's salute reports to the officer of the 
guard : 

Sir, the relief is present. 

The relief, having been inspected, the officer of the 
guard directs the corporal, "Post your relief" The cor- 
poral salutes and posts his relief as above prescribed. The 
corporal will execute, with his relief, the command of the 
officer of the guard for inspection. 

If the necessity exists, the corporal, after his relief has 
been inspected, will command : 

1. Relief 2. Load, 3. Carry, 4. Arms, 
and will post it as above. 

To dismiss the old relief, its corporal halts it in front of 
the guard house. The new corporal falls out at the com- 
mand "halt.'" The old corporal faces his relief to the 
front, places himself on the right of its front rank, and, 
saluting the officer of the guard reports : 
Sir, the relief is present. 

After the inspection, the officer of the guard commands : 
"Dismiss your relief. ' ' 

The corporal, after saluting, then commands : 
1. Arms, 2. Port, 3. Break ranks, 4, March. 

When each corporal of the guard has become acquainted 
with the location of all the posts on which sentinels are 
placed, it is not necessary that both corporals accompany 
the relief when it is posted. 

In this case the new corporal will post his relief as above 
described. Returning, he halts the old relief in front of 
the guard house, faces it to the front, and reports to the 
old corporal, 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 203 

No. I is absent, 
both corporals saluting. The old corporal, having pre- 
viously assured himself of the presence of No. i at the 
guard house, reports to the officer of the guard : 
Sir, the relief is present. 

The relief is then inspected and dismissed as before. 

Should the pieces be loaded while the relief is on post, 
the corporal will, after facing the relief to the front and 
before presenting it for inspection by the officer of the 
guard, command : 

1. Di-aw, 2. Cartridges, 3. Carry, 4. Arms. 

Each corporal should thoroughly acquaint himself with 
all the special orders of every sentinel on his relief, and 
see that each sentinel correctly transmits such orders in 
detail to his successor. 

He will see that each sentinel, on being posted, clearly 
understands the limits and extent of his post. 

Should any sentinel call for the corporal of the guard, 
the corporal whose relief is on post will in every case at 
once and quickly proceed to such sentinel's post. 

Any violation of Regulations or any unusual occurrence 
reported by a sentinel, or coming to his notice in any other 
way, should at once be reported by the corporal to the 
officer of the guard. 

Should any sentinel call for a relief, the corporal will at 
once proceed to the post of such sentinel, taking with him 
the man next for duty on that post. If relieved for a 
short time only, the corporal will see that the sentinel re- 
lieved is again posted as soon as the necessity for such re- 
lief ceases. 

A corporal of the guard receives and obeys orders only 
from non-commissioned officers of the guard senior to 
himself, the officers of the guard, the officer of the day, 
and commanding officer. 

Out of ranks and under arms, the corporal salutes with 
the sergeant's salute. If marching his relief, if not already 
there, he brings it to a carry before saluting. 

The corporal salutes an officer whenever he passes, 
whether by day or night. 



204 ART OF WAR. 

The corporal should carry his rifle with the bayonet 
fixed. 

Immediately before the hour for challenging to begin, 
the corporal whose relief is on post will communicate the 
countersign to all the sentinels of his relief, excepting 
No. i. 

When challenged by a sentinel while posting his relief, 
the corporal will answer "Relief." At the sentinel's order 
to halt, the corporal commands : 

i. Relief, 2. Halt, 
and at the order of the sentinel he advances alone to de- 
liver the countersign, or to be recognized. When the sen- 
tinel says, "Advance relief" the corporal commands: 
1. Forward, 2. March. 

If to be relieved, the sentinel is then relieved as pre- 
scribed above. 

The corporal of the guard will arrest all suspicious-look- 
ing characters prowling about the post or camp, all per- 
sons of a disorderly character disturbing the peace, and 
all persons taken in the act of committing some crime 
against the Government on a military reservation or post. 

All persons arrested by corporals of the guard or senti- 
nels on post will be at once conducted to the officer of the 
guard. 

The corporal will examine parties halted and detained 
by sentinels, and if he have reason to believe the parties 
have no authority to cross sentinels' posts, will conduct 
them to the officer of the guard. 

Corporals will ascertain the tents or bunks of all the 
members of their reliefs, in order to turn them out in ease 
of necessity, in the least time and with the least confusion. 

Should the guard be turned out, each corporal will wake 
his own relief and cause its members to fall in promptly. 

There should be constantly on duty at the guard house, 
one non-commissioned officer, usually the corporal whose 
relief is on post. 

Such non-commissioned officer takes post near the en- 
trance of the guard house, and does not fall in with the 
guard when it is paraded. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 205 

He will answer calls from sentinels for the corporal of the 
guard. If called away, he will notify the sergeant of the 
guard before leaving the guard house. If a sentinel calls 
for the guard, he promptly notifies the officer of the guard. 

He will see that no unauthorized person enters the guard 
house, or crosses the post of No. i. 

He will, at the proper time, notify No. t of the hours, 
if sentinels are required to call the hours or half hours of 
the night. 

He will wake the corporal whose relief is next on post, 
in time for the latter to form his relief and post it the pro- 
per hour. 

As a general rule, he will advance parties approaching 
the guard at night, in the same manner as sentinels on post 
advance like parties. Thus : The sentinel at the guard 
challenges and reports the answer to the corporal, as pre- 
scribed. The corporal, advancing at charge bayonets, or, 
if armed with the carbine, the third position of load, says; 

Advance (So and So) with the countersign, or, to be re- 
cognized, 

if there be no countersign used. The countersign being 
correctly given, or the party being duly recognized, the 
corporal says, 

Advance (So and So), 
repeating the answer to the challenge of No. i. 

The following are the exceptions to this rule : 

1st. In case the answer to the challenge of No. i be 
11 Grand rounds," the corporal will promptly notify the 
sergeant of the guard, and then the officer of the guard ; 
after which he resumes his post. 

2d. In case the answer to the challenge of No. i indi- 
cate of itself, that the party approaching is entitled to 
make grand rounds. (See page 199.) 

Upon receiving the countersign or duly recognizing such 
party in the manner above prescribed, he will say, "Tlie 
countersign is right" and will then call, 

Turn out the guard, (So and So), 
announcing the title of the officer challenged, without ad- 
vancing him. 



206 ART OF WAR. 

Thus, if the answer to the challenge of No. i be "Offi- 
cer of the day, ' ' the corporal advances toward the party 
challenged, and cries, 

Advance, officer of the day, with the countersign, or, to be 
recogfiized. 

The officer of the day being duly recognized, the cor- 
poral says, "The countersign is right," and then calls : 
Turn out the guard. Officer of the day. 

He remains at the charge bayonets or third position of 
load until the commander of the guard calls, "Advance, 
(So and So)," when he returns to his post. 

3d. In case of the approach of a body of armed men, 
other than a relief belonging to his own guard, he will, as 
soon as he perceives that the party is armed, call, 
Turn out the guard. Armed party. 

This, no matter what answer was made to the challenge 
of No. 1. The corporal remains in front of the guard, 
and prevents the approach of any member of such party 
until the call of the commander of the guard, "Advance 
one with the countersign" when he resumes his post. 

If the party be mounted, the corporal calls, 
Dismount, 
before calling "Turn out the guard." If No. 1 turns out 
the guard for an armed party, the corporal will proceed as 
prescribed for grand rounds. 

On the approach at night of any large body of men, 
whether armed or unarmed, the corporal will turn out the 
guard as in the last case. 

Musicians of the Guard. 

At guard mounting, the musicians of the new guard 
form with the band, and march in its rear with the rest of 
the field music of the command. If there be no band, 
they form in line with their left, twelve yards from the 
right of the front rank of the guard, and conform to the 
movements prescribed for the band, except that they do 
not wheel out of line after passing the officers of the day. 
Drummers march in rear of trumpeters or fifers. If there 
be but two musicians, the drummer marches on the left. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 



207 



As soon as the band ceases, the field music begins to 
play. 

The field music conforms to the movements of the guard 
while the latter marches to its post, keeping twelve yards 
in its front. It approaches the old guard from the left 
and marches along its front and six yards from it. When 
three yards beyond the field music of the old guard, it 
wheels to the right, and, when on a line with the file- 
closers of the old guard, to the left, both changes of di- 
rection being without command. 

At the command "fours left, march" the field music 
wheels to the left ; at the command "halt," it halts; at the 
command "left dress ," it closes in so that its left is two 
yards from the right of the front rank of the guard and on 
a line with it, and dresses to the left. 

Musicians of the guard are members of the guard and 
are subject to the orders only of the commanding officer, 
the officer of the day, officers and non-commissioned offi- 
cers of the guard. 

They will fall in with the guard whenever it is formed, 
unless absent in the execution of their proper duty, plac- 
ing themselves on a line with its front rank, and their left 
two yards from its right. 

They will sound all calls prescribed by the commanding 
officer, and such other calls as may be ordered by proper 
authority, at such times and places as may be directed. 

Should the guard be turned out for National or Regi- 
mental colors, the trumpeters of the guard will sound "To 
the color" the drummers beating a march. 

Musicians of the guard sleep at the guard house. 

Orderly for the Commanding Officer. 

The orderly for the commanding officer is selected by 
the adjutant, when so directed, at guard mounting, an 
extra man being detailed for guard for this purpose. 

The selection will be usually made during the inspection 
of the guard. The soldier will be chosen, who is neatest 
in person and clothing, and whose arms and accoutrements 
are in the best condition. If there be doubt as to the 



208 ART OF WAR. 

relative merits of two or more soldiers, the adjutant may 
proceed to the guard house and cause them to form in line 
a few paces to the right of the guard, after it has been 
brought to an order. They fall in facing to the right, 
with arms at a carry. The adjutant will then subject them 
to a more thorough inspection, causing them to take off 
portions of their clothing, if necessary. If doubt still 
exfst, he will cause them to execute the manual of arms, to 
march, etc., both with and without the numbers, the most 
proficient being selected as orderly. 

In making the selection of an orderly, men should not 
be stripped or drilled on the parade ground. 

The adjutant will notify the commander of the guard 
of his selection. 

When the guard has been brought to an order, at the 
guard house, or when the selection has been duly made, 
the commander of the guard will direct the soldier selected 
to report to the commanding officer. The soldier will 
then give his name, Company and Regiment, to the ser- 
geant of the guard, and, leaving his rifle in the arm rack in 
his Company quarters, will proceed at once to the com- 
manding officer, reporting : 

Sir, I report as o?'derly. 

The orderly is subject to the orders of the commanding 
officer only, during his tour. " 

He will follow the commanding officer, keeping about 
six yards in his rear, unless ordered away on duty, or ex- 
cused by him from such attendance. 

The orderly is usually excused from such duty between 
retreat and reveille, and is permitted to sleep in his Com- 
pany quarters, or in such other place as the commanding 
officer may direct. 

At reveille, or at such hour as directed, he will report 
again to the commanding officer. 

He will remain on duty, until relieved by the orderly 
selected from the guard relieving his own. 

The orderly is a member of the guard, and is borne on 
the guard report as such. He will be entered under the 
head of "Detail," as a private. His name, Company, 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 209 

and Regiment, are entered after those of the corporals, in 
the place provided. 

The Soldier on Guard. 

Soldiers will not take off their clothing or accoutre- 
ments while on guard, without permission from proper 
authority. 

They will not leave the immediate vicinity of the guard 
house without permission from the commander of the 
guard. 

No soldier will drink any spirituous or intoxicating 
liquor while on guard.* 

During his tour of guard duty a soldier is subject to the 
orders only of the commanding officer, officer of the day, 
the officers and non-commissioned officers of the guard. 

When not on post nor engaged in the performance of 
some special duty, a soldier on guard will salute all officers 
who pass him ; if armed, with the sergeant'' 's salute; if un- 
armed, with the hand. This rule applies at all hours of 
day or night. 

Immediately upon breaking ranks, after guard mount- 
ing, each soldier not at once required for duty will place 
his musket in the arms rack, if such be provided, and will 
not remove it therefrom unless, he require it in the per- 
formance of some armed duty. 

Soldiers are assigned to reliefs by the commander of the 
guard and to post, generally, by the corporal of their re- 
lief. They will not change from one relief or post to an- 
other during their tour of duty, unless by order of the 
commanding officer, the officer of the day, or of the guard. 

No soldier shall hire another to do his duty for him. 

Soldiers on guard will hold themselves constantly ready 
for any duty upon which they may be ordered by proper 
authority. 

Should the guard be formed, soldiers will fall in ranks 
under arms. At a roll call, each man, as his name, or 

*Art. War, 38. — Any officer who is found drunk on his guard, party, 
or other duty, shall be dismissed from the service. Any soldier who 
so offends shall suffer such punishment as a court martial may direct. 
H 



2IO ART OF WAR. 

number and relief is called, comes successively to carry 
and order arms, or to order arms, if already at a cany. 

While on guard, bayonets should be constantly fixed. 
If the pieces be kept in an arm rack which require bay- 
onets to be unfixed, they should be fixed immediately on 
being taken therefrom. 

Orders for Sentinels on Post. 

Orders for sentinels on post are divided into two classes, 
general orders and special orders. General orders are di- 
vided v&to general orders proper, orders for sahtting, orders 
in case of fire or disturbance, and night oi'ders. 

GENERAL ORDERS.- 

General orders pi'oper. * 

A. sentinel on post will : 

Take charge of his post, and all Gover?i7nent property in 
view ; 

Walk his post in a military manner, keeping constantly on 
the alert, ~\ observing eve?y thing that takes place within sight 
or heari?ig of his post ; 

Report all breaches of orders or Regulations he is in- 
structed to enforce ; 

Repeat all calls from posts more distant frojn the guard 
house than his own ; 

Will not quit his post until pi'operly relieved ;\ 

Take orders from, and allow himself to be relieved by an 
officer or non co??imissioned officer of the guard, the officer 
of the day or commanding officer, and these only. 

A sentinel on post will carry his piece habitually at a 
support, or on either shoulder, but will never quit it. In 
wet weather, if there be no sentry box,, he may carry his 
piece at a secure arms. 

A sentinel will deliver up his piece, when ordered to do 

* The orders printed in italics at the head of each of the divisions of 
general orders should be memorized by the sentinel. 

■f Art. War, 39. — Any sentinel who is found sleeping upon his post, 
or who leaves it before he is regularly relieved, shall suffer death, or 
such other punishment as a court martial may direct. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 21 t 

so, by any person from whom he lawfully receives orders 
while on post, but under no circumstances to any other 
person. 

He will not hold any conversation not necessary to the 
discharge of his duties. 

Upon being spoken to, or in speaking to any person, or 
when calling for any purpose, a sentinel should take the 
position of arms port, facing outward, that is, from that 
which he is guarding. 

The position of carry arms is taken before saluting, 
challenging, or calling. 

Mounted sentinels, in challenging and holding com- 
munications, take the position of advance carbine, raise 
pistol, or guard, according as they are armed with the car- 
bine, pistol or sabre. 

If a relief become necessary, by reason of sickness or 
other cause, the sentinel cries, " Relief, corporal of the 
guard, No. ( — )," giving the number of his post. 

To call the corporal of the guard for any other purpose 
than for a relief, the sentinel calls, " Corporal of 'the guard, 
No. (— )." 

Every unusual or suspicious event noticed by a sentinel 
on post, should be at once reported by him to the corporal 
of the guard. 

Should sentry boxes be provided, the sentinels in them 
stand at an order arms, or parade rest. 

.Sentry boxes are not to be used, excepting in wet 
weather. 

In very hot weather, sentinels may be allowed to stand 
at an order arms or parade rest on their posts, provided 
they can in this position effectively discharge their duties. 
Sentinels must, however, before taking advantage of this 
privilege, obtain the express authority of the officer of the 
guard or of the day. 

On being relieved, a sentinel will turn over to his suc- 
cessor all special orders pertaining to his post, in detail. 

When a relief is fifteen yards from him, he will halt and 
face to it with arms at a carry. If to be relieved himself, 
he will come to arms port at the command of the corporal, 



212 ART OF WAR. 

and will advance toward the new sentinel, and transmit to 
him all the orders of his post. Both sentinels then resume 
the carry, face outward, and step back one pace, aligning 
themselves on the old corporal if he be present. The old 
sentinel comes to a support or right shoulder, at the com- 
mand of the corporal, and takes his place in rear of the 
relief as it passes him. When the relief is fifteen yards 
past him, the new sentinel begins to walk his post. 

ORDERS FOR SALUTING. 

Between reveille and retreat, salute all officers according 
to rank. 

Between retreat and reveille, except when challenging, 
stand attention at a carry, when an officer passes. 

Salicte National and Regimental colors with present arms. 

Saluting distance is thirty yards. Officers passing within 
saluting distance of a sentinel will be saluted by him. 

All officers above the rank of Captain are saluted with 
present arms. 

All officers below the rank of Major are saluted with the 
sergeant 's salute. 

The commanding officer and officer of the day, what- 
ever their rank, are saluted with present arms. 

Officers of the Navy and Marines, and officers of Vol- 
unteers and Militia in the service of the United States, are 
saluted according to their relative ranks. 

The relative ranks of officers of the Navy and Army are 
as follows : — Admiral, General ; Vice Admiral, Lieutenant- 
General ; Rear-Admiral, Major-General ; Commodore, 
Brigadier-General; Captain, Colonel; Commander, Lieu- 
tenant-Colonel; Lieutenant Commander, Major ; Lieuten- 
ant, Captain; Master, First Lieutenant; Ensign, Second 
Lieutenant. 

The President, Vice-President, members of the Cabinet, 
the Chief Justice, and Speaker of the House of Represen- 
tatives, of the United States, Governors in their respec- 
tive States or Territories, American or foreign envoys and 
ministers are saluted with a. present arms. 

Officers of a foreign service, visiting a post, are saluted 
according to their relative ranks. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 213 

Officers are saluted whether in uniform or not. 

All funeral escorts are saluted with present arms. Arms 
should be presented as the escort approaches, and this po- 
sition maintained until the remains have passed. The 
sentinel should then stand attention at a cany until the 
procession has passed. 

Bodies of armed men are saluted according to the rank 
of the person commanding such body. 

A body of armed men commanded by a commissioned 
officer, is saluted with present arms. The position of pre- 
sent arms is maintained until the whole body has passed, 
unless this be very large, in which case the present will be 
made as the officer in command approaches and maintained 
until he has passed. The sentinel then stands attention at 
a carry until the whole body has passed. 

A body of armed men under the command of a non- 
commissioned officer, is not saluted. The sentinel will, 
however, stand attention facing outward, with arms at a 
carry, while such a body passes. 

A body of men unarmed, or armed with side arms only, 
is not saluted. If a commissioned officer be in command 
he is saluted according to his rank. 

If persons of different ranks pass together, the sentinel 
gives that salute only to which the senior is entitled. 

To salute, a sentinel halts, facing in the direction in 
which he was walking, brings his piece to a carry as he 
halts, and then faces outward. This is done when the 
approaching officer arrives at a distance of thirty yards 
from the sentinel. If he approach along the post, the 
salute should be made when the officer arrives at a distance 
of six paces. If he pass in front, but not along the post, 
he is saluted when he passes. If he cross the post he is 
saluted when he crosses. If he pass in rear and within 
saluting distance, he is saluted as he passes. 

The sentinel should remain in the position of the salute 
until it is returned, or until the person saluted has passed. 

When any body of men, armed or unarmed, and com- 
manded by a commissioned officer, passes him, a sentinel 
comes to the carry when such body is at a distance of 
thirty yards. 



214 ART 0F WAR. 

He comes to the carry when an armed party commanded 
by a non-commissioned officer is at a distance of fifteen 
yards. 

If an officer or officers are standing on a sentinel's post, 
without making evident an inteniion of soon leaving, the 
sentinel will, as he walks, bring his piece to a carry, and 
when six yards from such officer or officers, will execute 
the sergeant'' 's salute, keeping the left hand at the right 
shoulder until the person or persons entitled to a salute 
are passed. This, whatever the rank of the officers may 
be. 

In a sentry box, a sentinel salutes all officers of whatever 
rank, by standing attention at an order, and, as the officer 
passes, bringing his left hand briskly to his piece as high 
as the right shoulder. 

In wet weather, with no sentry boxes, the usual salutes 
are rendered. 

Sentinels on post present arms to their own officers of 
the day only. Thus, if the new officer of the day cross 
the post of a sentinel of the old guard before such senti- 
nel has been relieved, the sentinel will give the salute to 
which such officer's actual rank entitles him. 

The sentinel at the guard house salutes in every way as 
prescribed above. 

In addition to the salutes rendered by him, he will, be- 
tween reveille and retreat, on the approach of any body 
of armed troops or a person entitled to compliment, call, 
"Turnout the guard," announcing who approaches. In 
time of peace, it is not customary to turn out the guard 
unless the body of armed men be as large or larger than 
the guard. The guard is not turned out for troops passing 
on ordinary garrison duty, such as drill, etc. 

Though the guard be already formed, No. 1 will not fail 
to call, "Turn out the guard," on the approach of any 
person entitled to such compliment. 

The following persons are entitled to compliment, viz : 
The President, Vice-President, Members of the Cabinet, 
the Chief Justice, Speaker of the House of Representatives 
of the United States ; Governors in their respective States 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 21 5 

or Territories ; all General officers of the Army ; General 
officers of a foreign service, visiting at a post ; Naval, 
Marine, Volunteer and Militia officers in the service of the 
United States, and holding the relative rank of a General 
officer; American or foreign envoys or ministers; com- 
manding officer of the post or camp, and the officer of the 
day. 

The guard is turned out for National or Regimental col- 
ors. 

All guards will be turned out for officers entitled to the 
compliment as often as they pass, except personal guards 
of General officers, which turn out only to the General 
whose guards they are, and to officers his superior in rank. 

The following examples illustrate the manner in which 
No. 1 turns out the guard: "Turn out the guard. Com- 
manding Officer." "Turn out the guard. Governor of 
Territory." "Turn out the guard. National colors of 
the United States. " " Tiwn out the guard. Body of armed 
men" etc. At the approach of the new guard at guard 
mounting, the old guard, if not already formed, should 
be turned out by No. i, as in the last example. 

Should the person named by No. i not desire the guard 
formed, he will touch his hat or say, "Nver mind the 
guard" whereupon No. i calls, "Never mind the guard." 

After having called, "Turn out the guard" No. i must 
not, in any case, call, "Never mind the guard" on the 
approach of a body of armed men. 

If two or more persons entitled to compliment approach 
together, No. i, in his call, mentions first only the senior. 
But if the senior decline the honor, No. i. will then call, 
"Turn out the guard" announcing the next in rank, and 
so on until all entitled to the compliment have been no- 
ticed, when if none desire the guard formed, the sentinel 
calls, "Never mind the guard" If, however, one of the 
number desire the guard to be formed, No. i will not call 
for those to whom such person is senior, though they be 
of rank that would entitle them to compliment. 

The same principle applies when persons entitled to 
compliment approach from opposite directions ; the senior 



2l6 ART OF WAR. 

is first noticed ; if he decline the honor, the junior is no- 
ticed. 

No i will come to the present and carry with his guard 
as the old or new guard passes his own at guard mounting, 
between reveille and retreat? 

ORDERS IN CASE OF FIRE OR DISTURBANCE. 

In case of fire or disturbance, give the alarm. If the 
danger be great, discharge the piece before calling. 

If a small fire break out in sight of a sentinel's post, he 
will at once, in every case, call the corporal of the guard. 
If the fire be on his post, he will try to extinguish it him- 
self. 

If the fire be great, he calls, "Fire! No. ( — )," giving 
the number of his post. 

If a small disturbance occur on or near his post, the 
sentinel will at once arrest the parties causing it, call the 
corporal of the guard, and turn them over to him. 

If the disturbance be serious, the sentinel will call, 
"Guard, No. ( — )," giving the number of post. 

If the danger be great, in case of either fire or disturb- 
ance, the sentinel will discharge his piece before calling. 

No. i, in case of fire or disturbance on his post, calls, 
"Corporal of the guard, No. I," and notifies him of the 
case. 

NIGHT ORDERS.* 

At night exercise the greatest vigilance. Between retreat 
(or the hour appointed by the commanding officer), and broad 
daylight, challenge all parties seen on or near his post, and 
allow no unauthorized persons to pass. 

FIRST. ORDERS FOR ALL SENTINELS EXCEPT THE ONE AT THE 
GUARD HOUSE. 

Between retreat (or the hour appointed by the com- 

* The following orders imply that sentinels have instructions to pass 
persons with the countersign. This is always the case, unless otherwise 
ordered by the commanding officer, who, if the necessity or expediency 
exist, may require all persons to be passed by an officer or non-commis- 
sioned officer of the guard only. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 21 7 

manding officer) and broad daylight, if a sentinel see any 
party on or near his post, he advances rapidly along his 
post toward such party, and when within about thirty 
yards takes the position of charge bayonets, or if armed 
with the carbine, the third position of load, and challenges 
sharply, '■'■Who comes there?" "Wlio stands there?" or 
" WJw goes there ?" as the case may require. 

Until duly recognized, by countersign or otherwise, the 
sentinel will allow no one to approach nearer than within 
reach of his bayonet — a distance of about eight feet. 

After challenging, the sentinel will be governed by the 
answer he receives. A general rule is that the sentinel 
must suffer one only of any party to approach him for the 
purpose of giving the countersign, or of being duly rec- 
ognized if no countersign be used. When this has been 
done the whole party is advanced, i. e., suffered by the 
sentinel to pass. 

If he challenge, and the answer be "Friends" the sen- 
tinel cries : "Halt, friends. Advance one with the counter- 
sign" The countersign being correctly given, the senti- 
nel says : "The countersign is right. Advance, friends ." 

If the answer be, "Friends with the parole" the sentinel 
cries: "Halt, friends with the parole. Advance one with 
the countersign." Then: " The countersign is 7'ight. Ad- 
vance, friends with the parole. ' ' 

If the answer be "Patrol," the sentinel cries: "Halt, 
pat7-ol. Advance non commissioned officer, with the counter- 
sign. ' ' Then : ' ' The countersign is light. Advance patrol. ' ' 

If the answer be "Relief" the sentinel cries: "Halt, 
relief Advance corporal with the countersign" Then : 
1 ' The countersign is right. Advance relief. ' ' 

If the answer be " Gra?id rounds," the sentinel cries: 
"Halt, grand rounds. Advance sergeant with the counter- 
sign." Then: "The countersign is right. Advance 
rounds." It is to be noted that the word grand is omitted 
when the grand rounds as a whole are advanced. This is 
the only exception to the general rule that in advancing 
any challenged party, the exact answer to the challenge is 
repeated by the sentinel. 



2 1 8 ART OF WAR. 

If the answer to the challenge indicate two or more 
persons in the same party of different rank, the junior is 
advanced to give the countersign. Thus if the answer to 
the challenge be, "Officer of the day, a?id officer of the 
guard." The sentinel cries: "Halt, officer of the day. 
Advance officer of the guard, with the countersign." Then, 
"The countersign is right. Advance, officer of the day, and 
officer of the guard. ' ' 

If the answer to the sentinel's challenge indicate that 
one person alone is approaching, the procedure is the same 
in all cases. A single instance' will illustrate: "WJw 
comes there?' 1 '' "Frie?id with the parole." "Adva?ice, 
friend with the parole with the countersign. " ' * The counter- 
sign is right. Advajice, friend with the parole. ' ' 

In case a mounted party be challenged, before advanc- 
ing it, the sentinel will cause it to dismount, crying, 
"Halt. Dismount," after receiving an answer to his 
challenge. He then advances one w r ith the countersign, 
according to the foregoing rules : 

If two or more separate parties approach a sentinel's post 
from different directions and at the same time, all such 
parties are separately challenged and halted in turn. The 
senior is first advanced, in accordance with the foregoing 
rules. If the last party challenged be the senior, if he be 
alone, and if there be no other party on or near his post yet 
remaining to be challenged, the sentinel will advance such 
senior without halting him. The senior, if competent to 
give orders to the sentinel, may direct the sentinel to ad- 
vance any or all of the other parties. Without such direc- 
tion, the sentinel will not advance any of them until the sen- 
ior has left his post. He will then advance the senior only 
of the remaining parties, and- when he directs or has left the 
post, the others are similarly advanced. If the manner of 
advancing two or more parties to receive the countersign 
be the same, the sentinel will repeat the answer to his chal- 
lenge, and then say, "Advance (So and So) with the coun- 
tersign." Thus, if "Friends," and "Friends with the par- 
ole," should approach, after halting both, the sentinel 
would say, "Friends with the parole, advance one with the 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 2IQ 

countersign" etc. If two parties give precisely the same 
answer, he will designate which is to approach first. 

If a party be already advanced and on his post, the sen- 
tinel will challenge any other party who may approach ; if 
the party challenged be senior to the one already on his 
post, the sentinel will advance such party at once ; if jun- 
ior, he will cause them to halt, and advance them as in the 
foregoing case. 

The following order of rank will govern a sentinel in 
advancing different parties approaching his post at night : 
Commanding officer, grand rounds, friend or friends with 
the parole, officer of the day, officer of the guard, patrols, 
friend or friends with the countersign, non-commissioned 
officers of the guard in the order of rank, friends, relief. 

The sentinel will never allow himself to be surprised, or 
permit two parties to advance upon him at the same time. 

In all cases the sentinel must satisfy himself beyond rea- 
sonable doubt, that the parties are what they represent 
themselves to be, and have a right to pass. If he be not 
so satisfied he must cause rhem to stand, and call the cor- 
poral of the guard. So, likewise, if he have no authority 
to pass persons with the countersign, or when the party 
challenged has not the countersign, or gives an incorrect 
one. 

After challenging and duly recognizing an officer, the 
sentinel, unless spoken to, stands attention at a carry until 
such officer has passed him. 

A sentinel will not divulge the countersign to any one 
excepting the sentinel who relieves him, or to a person 
from whom he properly receives orders, on such person's 
order. (See note on page 226.) 

If no countersign be used, the rules for challenging are 
the same. The rules for advancing parties are modified 
only as follows: Instead of saying, "Advance (So and So) 
with the countersign" the sentinel will say, "Advance (So 
and So) to be recog?iized." Upon recognition, the parties 
are advanced conformably to the rules above given, simply 
omitting the words, "The countersign is right." 

Should sentinels be required to call off the hours or half 



2 20 ART OF WAR. 

hours of the night, they will call successively, in the nu- 
merical order of their posts, proceeding from the guard 
house, each one giving the number of his post, the time 
of the night, then reporting, "All's well." Thus: "No. 
2, eleven d clock. Alts well." This call should be made 
in a loud and clear tone of voice, and the number of the 
post and the hour distinctly stated. 

In case any sentinel fails to call, the one next preceding 
him, after waiting a reasonable length of time, will call 
the corporal of the guard, and inform him of the fact. 

SECOND. FOR THE SENTINEL AT THE GUARD HOUSE. 

The sentinel at the guard house, between retreat (or the 
hour appointed by the commanding officer) and broad 
daylight, will challenge all parties approaching the guard 
house, in the manner above prescribed for other sentinels, 
but, unlike them, he advances no one. 

After receiving an answer to his challenge, No. i calls, 
"Halt. Corporal of the guard, (So and So)" repeating 
the answer to his challenge. He does not, in this case, 
repeat the number of his post. 

Similarly in every case, excepting only when the answer 
to his challenge be " Gra?id rounds" or "Armed party." 
In the first case Xo. i calls, "Halt, grand rou?ids. Turn 
out the guard. Gra?id rounds." In the second case, he 
calls, "Halt. Turn out the guard. Armed party." The 
guard will be likewise turned out, if the answer to -his 
challenge indicate, of itself, that the approaching party is 
armed. The guard is not turned out for a returning relief 
of the guard. If the party be mounted, Xo. i will call, 
"Halt. Dismount. Turn out the guard. Armed party." 

No. i remains in the position assumed in challenging, 
until the countersign be given to, or the party be duly 
recognized by, a non-commissioned officer of the guard. 
If the party be entitled to a salute, X'o. i will then stand 
attention at a carry. If not, he will resume walking his 
post. 

In calling the hours of the night, Xo. i will, at the 
direction of a non-commissioned officer of the guard, call, 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 221 

11 No. I, (Such) o' clock" After the call has passed around 
the chain of sentinels he will call, "No. I. All's well.'" 
Between retreat and the hour appointed for challenging 
to begin, and between broad daylight and reveille, No. i 
calls, "Corporal of the guard. No. i" on the approach 
of any person entitled to compliment. 

Special Orders. 

These orders specify the particular duties to be per- 
formed by a sentinel on post, in addition to his general 
duties as described above. They vary according to the 
different posts, the property to be guarded, etc. 

The limits and extent of his post will constitute one of 
the special orders of every sentinel on post. 

Color Line and Sentinels. 

When not in use, the National and Regimental colors 
are habitually kept at the Colonel's headquarters, or in the 
stacks along the color front. 

The color front is that side of the camp which is nearest 
the enemy. The color line is the straight line along the 
color front, in advance of and parallel to the tents occu- 
pied by the troops, and extending from flank to flank. 

When not in use, arms may be stacked along the color 
line. It is usual to form stacks after guard mounting in 
the morning. 

Stacks are regularly broken at police call or about 4 
o'clock p. m., or at once in case of storm. 

If the body of troops encamped be a regiment, three 
sentinels are placed on the color line to guard the colore 
and stacks. If less than a regiment, a less number of sen- 
tinels may be posted. 

In camps for the instruction of troops, the proper nura- 
be for sentinels for the color line may be selected from the 
gurad by the adjutant at guard mounting. Such sentinels 
are selected in order of merit as regards neatness of per- 
son and clothing and condition of arms and accoutre- 
ments. A private wishing to compete brings his piece to 
inspection arms as the adjutant passes. Should competition 
be close, the adjutant may proceed to the guard tent to 



22 2 ART OF WAR. 

more thoroughly inspect competitors. After the new- 
guard has been brought to an order the adjutant may direct 
such competitors, as he may deem necessary, to fall out 
and form in line a few paces from the right flank of the 
new guard. He will then more closely inspect them, their 
arms and accoutrements, and announce his decision. 
Cases of doubt will be decided by testing the proficiency 
of the competitors in the manual of arms, with, and with- 
out the numbers. 

They are named in the order in which selected, first, 
seco?id and third color sentinels. 

Color sentinels so selected are on post only so long as 
the stacks are formed. Their places are taken at night by 
sentinels from the flanks. 

When stacks are broken, they may be permitted to re- 
turn to their respective companies. They are required to 
report in person to the officer of the guard at reveille and 
tattoo. They will fall in with the guard, under arms, at 
retreat and at guard mounting. 

Such sentinels are not placed on the regular reliefs, nor 
are their posts numbered unless more than one are posted 
at the same time. In calling for the corporal of the guard, 
they call, " Corporal of the guard, color line.'''' If more 
than one be posted, they add the number of their posts, 
thus : " Corporal of the guard, color line No. 2."* 

The first color sentinel is permitted to make a time 
table for color sentinels, which he will submit to the offi- 
cer of the guard, who enters the same in his report. The 
time of walking post on the color line is equally divided 
among the color sentinels. 

A color sentinel on post is subject to, and will observe 
all the general orders prescribed for sentinels on other 
posts. 

Patrols and Rounds. 

A patrol is a small detachment of two or more men de- 
tailed from a guard to observe and obtain information of 
the enemy, or to perform some special service connected 
with the guard duty of an army, a post or a camp. 

A patrol is usually command .d by a non-commissioned 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 2 2J 

officer. If the service be important, it is commanded by 
a commissioned officer. 

Patrols are detailed from a guard by its commander, who 
will instruct the commander of the patrol in regard to the 
duties required of it. 

If the patrol be required to go beyond the chain of sen- 
tinels, the officer or non-commissioned officer in command 
should be furnished with the countersign, and the outposts 
and sentinels warned. 

If challenged by a sentinel, the patrol is halted by its 
commander, and the non-commissioned officer accompany- 
ing it advances and gives the countersign. 

By making rounds is meant the visiting of all the senti- 
nels of a guard for the purpose of ascertaining their vigi- 
lance and knowledge of their duties. 

Rounds may be made by any General officer, by any 
person from whom the commander of the guard properly 
receives orders, by any officer or non-commissioned officer 
of the guard. 

By g?'and rounds is meant the visiting, by any officer of 
competent authority, of the guards or sentinels of a com- 
mand, for the purpose of ascertaining the manner in which 
the duties of such guards or sentinels are performed, of 
conveying orders to outposts, or of obtaining information 
of the enemy. 

Grand rounds are made when there are two or more 
guards in the same general command, as when two or more 
regiments are united in a brigade, each regiment having 
its own proper guard. 

Grand rounds may be made by any General officer, or 
by any person from whom the commanders of guards pro- 
perly receive orders. 

An officer making the grand rounds is usually accom- 
panied by an escort consisting of a non-commissioned offi- 
cer, a sergeant, if possible, and two privates. This escort 
is furnished from a guard by its commander. 

In case of danger, the escort of an officer making grand 
rounds may be increased to meet the necessities of the 
case. 



2 2.J. ART OF WAR. 

The officer making the rounds and his escort are col- 
lectively termed the Grand Rounds. 

An officer making rounds or grand rounds, without an 
escort, will advance himself, when challenged by a senti- 
nel, as "Friend with the parole," or "countersign" or will 
announce his rank. 

An officer or non-commissioned officer making rounds, 
may, if necessary, take an escort. When challenged by a 
sentinel, the answer, "Friend (or friends), with the coun- 
tersign," will be made. 

In case grand rounds are made with an escort, the officer 
of such rounds will instruct the sergeant of his escort as to 
his destination. The escort forms in line, the sergeant in 
the centre. At the command of the sergeant the escort 
moves off, the officer following, two yards in its rear. 

If challenged by a sentinel, the sergeant will answer, 
" Grand Founds." At the order to halt by the sentinel, 
the sergeant will command: 

i. Escort, 2. Halt, 
and, on the order of the sentinel, will advance alone to 
give the countersign. At the call of the sentinel, "Ad- 
vance rounds," the private on the right of the escort will 
take a side step to the right, the one on the left a side step 
to the left. Both will then face inward, toward each other, 
with arms at a carry. 

The officer then passes between them, and proceeds to 
question the sentinel as to his orders and duties. After 
the officer has passed, the two privates again face to the 
front, and each, by a side step to the left and right respect- 
ively, resumes his former position. The sergeant then takes 
his place between the two privates. The officer, having 
sufficiently questioned the sentinel, orders his escort to 
move on. As they pass him, he takes his place in rear and 
follows as before. 

When challenged by the sentinel before a guard, the 
sergeant will answer, " Grand rounds ." 

After the guard has been formed, the challenge is re- 
peated. The sergeant will again answer, " Grand, rounds" 
and at the call, "Advance, sergeant, with the countersign," 



MANUAL 07 GUARD DUTY. 22 j 

he will advance alone, give the countersign, and return to 
the escort, taking post on the right of the right private, 
until the officer of the rounds has passed. The two sol- 
diers of the escort, when the sergeant advances, face in- 
ward as before. As soon as the commander of the guard 
calls, "Advance rounds," the officer of the rounds ad- 
vances alone to the commander of the guard, giving the 
parole, if the latter require it. 

He will then examine the guard, order back his escort, 
and, taking a new one, will proceed in the same manner 
to other guards. 

The sergeant of the old escort will march it back to the 
guard to which it belongs, reporting its return to the com- 
mander of his guard. 

Countersigns and Paroles. 

A countersign is a watchword issued daily from the head- 
quarters of a command, to enable guards and sentinels to 
distinguish persons who maybe authorized to pass at night. 

The parole is a word used as a check on the countersign, 
in order to obtain more accurate distinction of persons. 

The countersign is usually the name of a battle ; the 
parole that of a General or other distinguished person. 

When the parole and countersign cannot be communi- 
cated daily to a post or detachment, which ought to use 
the same as the main body, a series of words may be sent 
for some days in advance. 

If the countersign is lost, or if a member of the guard 
desert with it, the commander on the spot will substitute an- 
other for it, and report the case at once to the proper super- 
ior, that immediate notice may be given to headquarters. 

The countersign is given to such persons as are authorized 
to pass during the night, and to officers, non-commissioned 
officers and sentinels of the guards. Sentinels, however, 
have no right to use the countersign themselves. It is 
given to them for the purpose only of enabling them to 
distinguish persons while on duty as sentinels. 

The parole is given to such persons only as have a right 
to make grand rounds, to commissioned officers of the 
i5 



22 6 ART 07 WAR. 

guard, and to non-commissioned officers in command of 
guards. Interior guards receive the countersign only when 
ordered by the commanding officer. 

No person shall make known the countersign or parole 
to any person not entitled to receive them.* 

The use of either countersign or parole, or both, in a 
separate command, may be dispensed with, if the com- 
manding officer deem their use unnecessary. 

In addition to the countersign, use may be made of pre- 
concerted signals, such as striking the rifle with the hand, 
or striking the hands together a certain number of times 
as agreed upon. Such signals may be used by the guards 
throughout the same general command, or by those guards 
only which occupy exposed points. 

They are made before the countersign is given, and 
must not be made known to any person not authorized to 
know the countersign. Their use is intended to prevent 
the surprise of a sentinel. 

In the day time, signals may be used by sentinels to 
communicate with the guard or with each other. They 
may be made by raising a cap or a handkerchief in pre- 
concerted manner. 

The parole, or countersign, or both, are sent by the adju- 
tant-general, or adjutant, to every officer authorized to use 
them. 

They are usually sent in an order of the following form : 

Fort , M. T. 

June ist, 1884. 
Orders : 

Countersign to-night : 

Parole : 

By order of 

( — ) Lieut., Ad'j't (— ) Inf., and Post. 

* Art. War, 44. — Any person belonging to the Armies of the United 
States, who makes known the watchword to any person not entitled to 
receive it, according to the rules and discipline of war, or presumes to 
give a parole or watchword different from that which he received, shall 
suffer death, or such other punishment as a court martial may direct. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 2 .' / 

Reveille and Retreat Gin. 

At posts supplied with proper ordnance and ammunition, 
a morning and evening gun will, in time of peace, be fired 
daily at reveille and retreat. Guns of small calibre, and 
inferior blank cartridges, or powder, when on hand, will 
be used for this purpose. 

The reveille and retreat gun is usually fired by a detach- 
ment of the guard, consisting of a non-commissioned offi- 
cer and two privates detailed for the purpose. 

Grand Guards and Outposts. 

Grand Guards are the advanced posts of an army or a 
position. They cover the approaches of a position, pre- 
vent surprises by the enemy, and gather information re- 
garding him. In time of peace they are of no more prac- 
tical importance than instruction to the troops, but in the 
presence of an enemy the safety of the army, and its suc- 
cess, depends to a great extent upon the thorough manner 
all duties connected with Grand Guards are performed. 
As th/name indicates, Grand Guards are taken from more 
than one regiment or organization. The system upon 
which Grand Guard duty is performed is represented by 
the sketch on page 228. 

The line a, a is the Grand Guard. One -half rests for 
six hours, while the other half, with arms stacked, is awake. 
The line b, b are the picket guards, relieved from the 
Grand Guard every eight hours. Four hours of the eight, 
one-half of the picket rests, while the other half, with arms 
stacked, is awake. The line c, c are the outposts, con- 
sisting of either nine or eighteen men each, and two non- 
commissioned officers. They are relieved from the pickets 
every two hours. The fourth line d, d are the videttes 
or sentinels, and are relieved every hour from the outposts. 

The number, strength, and position of Grand Guards is 
regulated by the commanders of brigades ; or, if in de- 
tached corps, by the commanding officer. When the cav- 
alry is strong, the" Grand Guard is made up of both In- 
fantry and Cavalry, the former furnishing the sentinels when 
the cavalry is weak; but a few cavalry soldiers are used, 
and they only to carry intelligence of the enemy. The 



228 





ART 


07 WAR. 




&> 




O ,0 




..-6"-'-* 


p 


• 
• 


-ft:;--- 


4 
* 














tL. 


V 


V 
V 

\ 

\ 

\ 





Fig. i, 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 229 

strength of a Grand Guard depends upon the nature of 
the country, the position of the enemy, and the inhabi- 
tants of the country. It is generally commanded by a 
captain. The Grand Guards are under the direction of the 
Field Officer of the Day of each brigade, who are in turn 
directly supervised by the Generals of Divisions or Brig- 
ades. If necessary, Captains may be added to the Roster 
of Lieut. Colonels and Majors for Field Officer of the Day. 

Grand Guard Mounting. 

At the first call for guard mounting sounded from head- 
quarters, and repeated in each regimental camp, officers 
and men previously detailed are assembled on the regi- 
mental parade grounds by their respective adjutants, and 
after being verified and inspected, are marched by the 
adjutants or senior officer of each detachment, to the gen- 
eral parade. 

The officer commanding the detachment there forms 
it in rear open order, places himself two yards in front 
of the centre, and saluting "the Adjutant General or staff 
officer mounting the Grand Guard, reports as follows : 
"Sir, I report (so many) officers, non-commissioned offi- 
cers, and men for (such and such) guards." The guides 
of the detachment take their places in the line of file- 
closers, when the detachment is first halted. In case the 
officer marching the detachment is senior to the officer 
mounting the guard, (who may be a staff officer detailed 
for that purpose by the Adjutant General) he does not sa- 
lute first, but simply makes his report, and returns the salute 
of the latter. 

When all the details are reported, the staff officer 
counts the files, verifies the details by reference to written 
orders, and gives the order to "count fours," and then 
divides the guard into two or more platoons, and dresses 
it to the right. Should more than the camp guards 
be mounted, they are established in the following order 
by the staff officer: ist, Police Guard; 2d, Grand or 
Outer Guard; 3d, Camp Guard. The non-commissioned 
officers are two yards in rear of the guard. After dress- 



230 AIxT 07 WAR. 

ing, the staff officer commands "Front," and then 
proceeds to twelve yards in front of the centre of the 
detail and facing the guard commands : "1. Officers and 
non-commissioned officers, to the front and centre. 2. 
March." 

If there is more than one guard formed, the officers and 
non-commissioned officers pass through the intervals, offi- 
cers first, and range themselves in the front and centre, the 
officers in one rank nine yards in front, and the non-com- 
missioned officers three yards in their rear. All take post, 
according to rank, from right to left. If there is but one 
guard formed, they pass around the flank of the guard near- 
est them. 

The staff officer then moves to the right of the line 
of officers, and passing down their front, designates them 
as follows: "Senior Officer of Police Guard," "Sen- 
ior Officer of Picket Guard," "Junior Officer of Police 
Guard," etc. If the guard be divided into but two or three 
platoons, the designations, % " Chief of First Platoon," 
"Right Guide of Second Platoon," etc., is sufficient. He 
also designates the guards the non-commissioned officers 
belong to in same manner, and, returning to his post, 
commands: "1. Officers and non-commissioned officers, 
inspect your guards; 2. March." All face about and 
take the places designated in Tactics at Inspection of 
Arms, the seniors of each guard on arriving at their posts 
giving the commands: "Order, Ar??is ; Inspection, 
Arms. ' ' 

They then inspect them, after which they take their places 
in front of their respective guards, as prescribed in Tac- 
tics. During inspection the band plays; the staff officer 
sheathes his sword, and observes the general military ap- 
pearance of the details, and, as far as possible, satisfies 
himself that all are in a proper condition to perform their 
duty. Should any one be reported to him by the officers 
inspecting as not being in a proper condition, he directs 
the adjutant of that detail to replace him immediately by 
one in proper condition. The inspection completed, all 
take their posts, the guard is brought to a parade rest, the 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 23 I 

band sounds off, the ranks are then closed, and arms pre- 
sented to the Field Officer of the Day, the guard passed 
in review, and then brought to the left into line by the 
staff officer, and halted. The Field Officer of the Day 
then sends the guard by detachments to its various 
posts. 

Extracts from Army Regulations Concerning Grand 
Guards. 

Par. 1 1 23. Grand guards usually mount at the same time 
as the other guards, but may mount before daybreak if the 
General of Brigade thinks it necessary to double the out- 
posts at that time. In this case they assemble and march 
without noise, and during their march throw out scouts — a 
precaution which should always be taken in the first post- 
ing of a grand guard. The doubling of guards weakens 
the corps and fatigues the men, and should seldom be re- 
sorted to, never when preparing to march or fight. 

1 1 24. A grand guard is conducted to its post, in the 
first instance, by the field officer of the day, guided by a 
Staff officer who accompanied the General in his recon- 
noissance. After the post has been established, the com- 
mander sends to the field officer, when necessary, a soldier 
of the guard to guide the relieving guard to the post. He 
also sends to him in the evening a Corporal or trusty man 
of the guard for the note containing the parole and coun- 
tersign, which he communicates before dark to the de- 
tached posts. He will not suffer his guard to be relieved 
except by a guard of the brigade, or by special orders. 

1 1 25. If there be no pass to be watched or defended, the 
grand guards are placed near the centre of the ground they 
are to cover, in a sheltered, and, if possible, high position, 
the better to conceal their strengtr^and observe the enemy ; 
they ought not to be placed near the edge of a wood. 
When, during the day, they are placed very near or in sight 
of the enemy, they fall back at night on posts selected 
further to the rear. 

1 1 26. Grand guards are chiefly to watch the enemy in 
front ; their flanks are protected by each other, and the 



232 ART 07 WAR. 

camp must furnish posts to protect their rear and secure 
their retreat. 

1 127. In broken or mountainous countries, and particu- 
larly if the inhabitants are ill-disposed, intermediate posts 
must be established when it is necessary to post the grand 
guard at a distance from the camp. 

1 1 28. The General of division, if he thinks proper, 
changes the stations and orders of these guards, and estab- 
lishes posts to connect the brigades or protect the exterior 
flanks. v 

1 1 29. The commander of a grand guard receives de- 
tailed instructions from the General and field officer of the 
day of the brigade, and instructs the commanders of the 
small posts as to their duties, and the arrangements for de- 
fense or retreat. The commanders of grand guards may, 
in urgent cases, change the position of the small posts. If 
the small posts are to change their positions at night, they 
wait until the grand guard is in position and darkness hides 
their movements from the enemy ; then march silently and 
rapidly under the charge of an officer. 

1 130. Staff officers, sent from division headquarters to 
inspect the posts of grand guards, give them orders only 
in urgent cases, and in the absence of the field officer of 
the day of the brigade. 

1 131. The following are standing instructions to grand 
guards, beside the special orders which may be given in 
each case: To inform the nearest posts and the field officer 
of the day, or the General of brigade, of the movements 
of the enemy, and of the attacks they receive or appre- 
hend ; to examine every person passing near the post, par- 
ticularly those coming from without ; to arrest suspicious 
persons, and all soldiers and camp-followers who try to 
pass out without permission, and to send to the General, 
unless otherwise directed, all country people who come in. 

1 132. If a body of troops attempt to enter the camp at 
night, unless their arrival has been announced, or the com- 
mander is known to, or is the bearer of a written order to 
the commander of the grand guard, he stops them, and 
sends the commander under escort to the field officer of 
the day, and warns the posts near him. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 233 

1 133. Bearers of flags are not permitted to pass the outer 
chain of sentinels; their faces are turned from the post or 
army; if necessary, their eyes are bandaged; a non-com- 
missioned officer stays with them to prevent indiscretion 
of the sentinels. 

1 134. The commandant of the grand guard receipts for 
dispatches from the enemy, and sends them to the field 
officer of the day or General of brigade, and dismisses the 
bearer; but if he has discovered what ought to be con- 
cealed from the enemy, he is detained as long as necessary. 

1 1 35. Deserters are disarmed at the advanced posts, and 
sent to the commander of the grand guard, who gets from 
them all the information he can. If many come at night, 
they are received cautiously, a few at a time. They are 
sent in the morning to the field officer of the day, or to 
the nearest post or camp, to be conducted to the General 
of the brigade. All suspected persons are searched by the 
commanders of the posts. 

1 1 36. Grand guards are often charged with the care and 
working of telegraphic signals. 

1 137. After a grand guard is posted, the first care of the 
commander and of the field officer of the day is to get 
news of the enemy ; then to reconnoitre his position, and 
the roads, bridges, fords, and defiles. This reconnoissance 
determines the force and position of the small posts and 
their sentinels day and night. These posts, according to 
their importance, are commanded by officers or non-com- 
missioned officers; the Cavalry posts may be relieved every 
four or eight hours. 

1 138. In detached corps, small posts of picked men are 
at night sent forward on the roads by which the enemy 
may attack or turn the position. They watch the forks of 
the road, keep silence, conceal themselves, light no fires, 
and often change place. They announce the approach of 
the enemy by signals agreed upon, and retreat, by routes 
examined during the day, to places selected, and rejoin 
the guard at daybreak. 

1139. The commandants of grand guards visit the sen- 
tinels often ; change their positions when necessary; make 



234 ART OF WAR. 

them repeat their orders; teach them under what circum- 
stances and at what signals to retire, and particularly not 
to fall back directly on their guard if pursued, but to lead 
the enemy in a circuit. 

1 140. The fires of grand guards should be hidden by 
some sort of screen. To deceive the enemy, fires are some- 
times made on grounds not occupied. Fires are not per- 
mitted at small posts liable to surprise. 

1 141. The horses of Cavalry guards are watered or fed 
by detachments; while some are feeding the rest are ready 
to mount. 1 

1 1 42. Advanced posts will not take arms for inspection 
or ceremony when it would expose them to the view of the 
enemy. 

1 1 43. The sentinels and videttes are placed on points 
from which they can see furthest, taking care not to break 
their connection with each other or with their posts. They 
are concealed from the enemy as much as possible by walls, 
or trees, or elevated ground. It is generally even of more 
advantage not to be seen than to see far. They should not 
be placed near covers, where the enemy may capture them. 

1 144. If the post of a sentinel must be where he cannot 
communicate with the guard, a Corporal and three men 
are detached for it, or the sentinels are doubled, that one 
may communicate with the guard. During the day the 
communication may be made by signals, such as raising a 
cap or handkerchief. At night sentinels are placed on low 
ground, the better to see objects against the sky. 

1 1 45. A sentinel should always be ready to fire ; videttes 
carry their pistols or carbines in their hands. A sentinel 
must be sure of the presence of an enemy before he fires; 
once satisfied of that, he must fire, though all defense on 
his part be useless, as the safety of the post may depend on 
the alarm thus given. Sentinels fire on all persons desert- 
ing to the enemy. 

1 1 46. At night, half the men of the grand guard off 
post watch under arms, while the rest lie down, arms by 
their side. The horses are always bridled ; the horsemen 
hold the reins, and must not sleep. 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 235 

1 147. All out-guards stand to arms at night on the ap- 
proach of patrols, rounds, or other parties; the sentinel 
over the arms has orders to call them out. 

1 1 48. To lessen the duty of rounds, and keep more 
men on the alert at night, sentinels are relieved every hour. 
To prevent sentinels from being surprised, it is sometimes 
well to precede the countersign by concerted signals, such 
as striking the rifle with the hand, striking the hands to- 
gether, etc. 

1 149. With raw troops, or when the light troops of the 
enemy are numerous or active, and when the country is 
broken or wooded, the night stormy or dark, sentinels 
should be doubled. In this case, while one watches, the 
other, called a flying sentinel, moves about, examining the 
paths and hollows. 

1 150. On the approach of any one at night, the sentinel 
orders, "Halt." If the order is not obeyed after once 
repeated, he fires. If obeyed, he calls, " Who goes there ?" 
If answered, " Pounds" or "Patrol" he says, "Stand ; ad- 
vance one with the countersign. ' ' If more than one advance 
at the same time, or the person who advances fails to give 
the countersign or Signal agreed on, the sentinel fires, and 
falls back on his guard. The sentinel over the arms, as 
soon as his hail is answered, turns out the guard, and the 
Corporal goes to reconnoitre. When it is desirable to hide 
the position of the sentinel from the enemy, the hail is re- 
placed by signals ; the sentinel gives the signal, and those 
approaching the counter signal. 

1 1 5 1 . When a grand guard of Cavalry is so placed as 
not to be liable to a sudden attack from the enemy, the 
General may permit the horses to be fed during the night, 
unbridling for this purpose a few at a time — the horsemen 
being vigilant to prevent them from escaping. 

1 152. The commander of a grand guard regulates the 
numbers, the hours, and the march of patrols and rounds, 
according to the strength of his troop and the necessity 
for precaution ; and, accompanied by those who are to 
command the patrols and rounds during the night, he re- 
connoitres all the routes they are to follow. 



2 3 J ART OF WAR. 

1 153. Patrols and rounds march slowly, in silence, and 
with great precaution, and halt frequently to listen and 
examine the ground. The rounds consist of an officer or 
non-commissioned officer and two or three men. 

1 154. Cavalry patrols should examine the country to a 
greater distance than Infantry, and report to the Infantry 
guard everything they observe. The morning patrols and 
scouts do not return until broad daylight ; and when they 
return the night sentinels are withdrawn, and the posts for- 
the day resumed. 

1 155. When patrols are sent beyond the advanced posts, 
the posts and sentinels should be warned. 

1 156. On their return, commanders of patrols report in 
regard to the ground and everything they have observed 
of the movements of the enemy, or of his posts, and the 
commandant of the grand guard reports to the field officer 
of the day. 

Beside grand guard duty there is another equally oner- 
ous guard duty. This is guard duty in laying siege to a 
place, and is called Trench duty. 

1 1 63. The field officer of the trenches is charged with 
all the details relative to the assembling of the guards and 
the workmen. He distributes the guards on the different 
points of the attack agreeably to the orders of the General 
of the trenches, and forms the detachments of workmen 
for the Engineers and Artillery ; that he may be prepared 
for this distribution, he receives every day from the Adju- 
tant General a statement of the details for the next day. 

1 1 64. On the arrival of the General of the trenches, the 
field officer of the trenches gives him all the information 
necessary to enable him to station the troops, attends him 
in his visit to the trenches, and takes his orders on the 
changes to be made in the position of the troops. The 
execution is intrusted to the commandants of the troops. 

1 167. The Infantry has two kinds of siege service — the 
guard of the trenches and the work of the trenches. 

ti 68. The guards of the trenches mount every day by 
battalions, in such order of detail that all the troops may 
take an equal share, and no part of the line be left too 






MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 237 

weak. If only one battalion be required, each division 
furnishes it alternately; if two, each division gives one; 
if three, one division furnishes two, the other one, alter- 
nately. The two battalions of the same division are not 
taken from the same brigade. 

1170. The battalions for guard are detailed at least 
twelve hours in advance ; they furnish no other details 
during this tour. If the whole regiment be called out, it 
leaves a sufficient police guard in camp. 

1 171. Twenty-four hours, or twelve at least, before 
mounting guard in the trenches, the battalions detailed for 
guard do not furnish workmen; and the companies of 
those battalions whose tour it would have been to work in 
the trenches do not go there for twenty-four hours after 
guard, if possible, or at the least twelve. 

1 1 73. The battalions first for detail for guard of the 
trenches, and the companies first for detail for work in the 
trenches, furnish no other details, and are held on picket, 
ready to march at the call of the field officer of the 
trenches. 

1 1 75. Guards and workmen going to the trenches march 
without beat of drum or music. 

it 80. The guards always enter the trenches with arms 
trailed, and the workmen also, unless they carry materials 
or tools, when the arms are in the sling. 

1 181. The guards and detachments of workmen send a 
Corporal to the openings of the trenches to guide the re- 
lief. They march out of the trenches by the flank, with 
trailed arms. 

1 182. Sand-bags, forming loop-holes, are placed at in- 
tervals on the parapet to cover the sentinels; they are 
more numerous than the sentinels, so that the enemy may 
not know where the sentinels are placed. 

1 1 84. No honors are paid in the trenches. When the 
General commanding the siege visits them, the guards 
place themselves in rear of the banquette, and rest on their 
arms. The colors are never carried to the trenches unless 
the whole regiment marches to repulse a sortie or make an 
assault. Even in this case they are not displayed until the 
General commanding the si?ge gives a formal order. 



2 $8 ART OF WAR. 

1 1 87. The soldiers sent to the trenches go with their 
cartridge-boxes filled. Cartridges, when needed, are sent 
to the trenches on the requisition of commanders of bat- 
talions, approved by the General of the trenches. 

1 1 88. In the case of a sortie, the guards move rapidly 
to the places that have been designated by the General of 
the trenches, and which afford the best defense for the 
head of the works, the batteries, the communications, or 
the flanks, or best enable them to take the sortie itself in 
flank or reverse. Having lined the banquette to fire on 
the enemy, the troops form on the reverse of the trench to 
receive him. The workmen take arms, retain their posi- 
tions, or retire with their tools, as ordered. The officers 
commanding the detachments of workmen see that their 
movements are made promptly and in good order, so as to 
avoid all confusion in the communications. 

1 189. The troops that advance beyond the trenches to 
repulse the sortie must not follow in pursuit. The General 
takes care that they return to the trenches before the retreat 
of the sortie allows the artillery of the place to open on 
them. When the workmen return, the officers and non- 
commissioned officers of the detachments call the roil 
without interrupting the work, which is immediately re- 
sumed. 

1190. When it is necessary to dismount Cavalry and 
send them to the trenches, they should be employed as 
near their camp as possible, and posted between the de- 
tachments of Infantry. 

1 191. Men belonging to the Cavalry may, in assaults, 
be employed in carrying fascines and other materials to fill 
ditches and make passages. 

Instructions for Outposts, Pickets, and Sentinels. 

When a grand guard is relieved by a new detail, the 
pickets are first relieved by companies, platoons or sec- 
tions, and from the new pickets squads are sent to relieve 
the outposts. The sentinels are then relieved from the 
outposts. The relieving must be superintended by an offi- 
cer. The old guard then returns to quarters as follows : 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 



2 39 



The sentinels return to the outposts ; these then return to 
the pickets, and when these are complete they return to 
the grand guard. 

The officer commanding the grand guard is stationed 
with it, but visits all the pickets at least once every six 
hours. The officers of the picket guards visit at least each 
of their outposts once each time posted. Non-commis- 
sioned officers command the outposts, and visit the senti- 
nels in their front. When a sentinel is attacked, the sen- 
tinels to his right and left close in on him at once, and all 
retire together. The outposts move to the support of the 
sentinels, and the pickets move forward to the outposts. 
Should the attack be strong, so that the whole grand guard 
is obliged to retire, each line falls back on the one in its 
rear, fighting. 

_ Outposts and sentinels never sleep at their posts. Sen- 
tinels are posted every hour. They constantly patrol their 
posts (unless otherwise instructed), so that they can keep 
up constant communication with the sentinels to their right 
and left, and so that nothing occurring near their posts 
will escape their vigilance. 

As the chief object of outposts is to secure the safety of 
the camp, and discover all that can be learned of the 
enemy, the utmost vigilance and care of all details, great 
and small, must be observed. Officers in time of war 
should familiarize themselves with the Army Regulations, 
and some standard work on the subject. 

Guards for the Trenches. 

Police Guards. 
A. R.— 1095. In each regiment a police guard is detailed 
every day, consisting of two Sergeants, three Corporals, two 
drummers, and men enough to furnish the required senti- 
nels and patrols. The men are taken from all the com- 
panies-- from each in proportion to its strength. The 
guard is commanded by a Lieutenant, under the supervis- 
ion of a Captain, as regimental officer of the day. It fur- 
nishes ten sentinels at the camp— one over the arms of the 
guard ; one at the Colonel's tent; three on the color front, 



240 ART OF WAR. 

one of them over the colors ; three fifty paces in rear of 
the field officers' tents ; and one on each flank, between it 
and the next regiment. If it is a flank regiment, one more 
sentinel is posted on the outer flank. 

1096. An advanced post is detached from the police 
guard, composed of a Sergeant, a Corporal, a drummer, 
and nine men, to furnish sentinels and the guard over the 
prisoners. The men are the first of the guard roster from 
each company. The men of the advanced post must not 
leave it under any pretext. Their meals are sent to the 
post. The advanced post furnishes three sentinels — two a 
few paces in front of the post, opposite the right and left 
wing of the regiment, posted so as to see as far as posssble 
to the front, and one over the arms. 

1 197. In the Cavalry, dismounted men are employed in 
preference on the police guard. The mounted men on 
guard are sent in succession, a part at a time, to groom 
their horses. The advanced post is always formed of 
mounted men. 

1098. In each company a Corporal has charge of the 
stable guard. His tour begins at retreat, and ends at 
'morning stable-call. The stable guard is large enough to 
relieve the men on post every two hours. They sleep in 
their tents, and are called by the corporal when wanted. 
At retreat the Corporal closes the streets of the camp with 
cords, or uses other precautions to prevent the escape of 
loose horses. 

1099. The police guard and the advance post pay the 
same honors as other guards. They take arms when an 
armed body approaches. 

1 100. The sentinel over the colors has orders not to per- 
mit them to be moved except in presence of an escort : to 
let no one touch them but the color-bearer, or the Sergeant 
of the police guard when he is accompanied by two armed 
men. 

1 101. The sentinels on the color front permit no soldier 
to take arms from the stacks, except by order of some offi- 
cer, or a non-commissioned officer of the guard. The 
sentinel at the Colonel's tent has orders to warn him, day 
or night, of any unusual movement in or about the camp 



MANUAL OF GUARD DUTY. 241 

T102. The 'sentinels on the front, flanks, and rear, see 
that no soldier leaves camp with horse or arms unless con- 
ducted by a non-commissioned officer. They prevent non- 
commissioned officers and soldiers from passing out at 
night, except to go to the sinks, and then mark if they re- 
turn. They arrest, at any time, suspicious persons prowl- 
ing about the camp, and at night every one who attempts 
to enter, even the soldiers of other corps. Arrested per- 
sons are sent to the officer of the guard, and by him, if 
necessary, to the officer of the day. 

1 103. The sentinels on the front of the advanced post 
have orders to permit neither non-commissioned officers 
nor soldiers to pass the line without reporting at the ad- 
vanced post ; to warn the advanced post of the approach 
of any armed body, and to arrest all suspicious persons. 
The Sergeant sends persons so arrested to the officer of the 
guard, and warns him of the approach of any armed body. 

1 104. The sentinel over the arms at the advanced post 
guards the prisoners, and suffers no one to converse with 
them without permission. They are only permitted to go 
to the sinks one at a time, and under a sentinel. 

1 105. If any one is to be passed out of camp at night, 
the officer of the guard sends him under escort to the ad- 
vanced post, and the Sergeant of the post has him passed 
over the chain. 

1 106. At retreat, the Sergeant of the police guard, ac- 
companied by two armed soldiers, folds the colors and lays 
them on the trestle in rear of the arms. He sees that the 
trader's stores are then closed, and that the men leave 
them ; also that the kitchen fires are put out at the ap- 
pointed hour. 

1 107. The officer of the day satisfies himself frequently 
during the night of the vigilance of the police guard and 
advanced posts. He prescribes patrols and rounds to be 
made by the officer and non-commissioned officers of the 
guard. The officer of the guard orders them when he 
thinks necessary. He visits the sentinels frequently. 

1 108. At reveille, the Sergeant replants the colors in 
place. At retreat and reveille the advanced post takes 

*6 



242 ART OF WAR. 

arms ; the Sergeant makes his report to the officer of the 
guard when he visits the post. 

1 1 09. When necessary, the camp is covered at night 
with small outposts, forming a double chain of sentinels. 
These posts are under the orders of the commander of the 
police guard, and are visited by his patrols and rounds. 

1 1 10. When the regiment marches, the men of the po- 
lice guard return to their companies, except those of the 
advanced post. Ifi the Cavalry, at the sound "boots and 
saddles," the officer of the guard sends one-half the men 
to saddle and pack ; when the regiment assembles, all the 
men join it. 

in 1. When the camping-party precedes the regiment, 
and the new police guard marches with the camping-party, 
the guard, on reaching the camp, forms in line thirty paces 
in front of the centre of the ground marked for the regi- 
ment. The officer of the guard furnishes the sentinels re- 
quired by the commander of the camping-party. The ad- 
vanced post takes its station. 



CHAPTER VI. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY-SMALL ARMS. 

BREECH-LOADING AND MAGAZINE GUNS. 

CANNON-FIELD, SIEGE, AND SEA-COAST. 

ARTILLERY CARRIAGES, PROJECTILES AND FUSES. 

GUNPOWDER, GUN-COTTON, DYNAMITE, ETC. 

CARE AND PRESERVATION OF ARMS AND 
AMMUNITION. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 



The object of this chapter is simply to describe, teach 
the use, proper care and preservation of the arms and im- 
plements, accoutrements, and in general all the materials 
of war, in use in the U. S. Army or U. S. Militia. 

The term, Small Arms, is applied to all weapons used 
for either defensive or offensive purposes, which are carried 
about and manipulated by one person alone. 

(By calibre is meant the diameter of the bore of the 
gun or cannon/) 

Military weapons are divided into two general classes : 
Fire Arms, and Hand Arms. 

Fire Arms are sub-divided into Cannon and Small 
Arms. 

The latter class comprises all weapons used and manipu- 
lated by the individual soldier, and with which the de- 
structive agency is gunpowder ; as the musket, rifle, pistol, 
carbine, etc. 

Hand Arms are those weapons used by the individual 
soldier, and in which the effect is secured by contact of 
the weapon with the object which it is directed against. 

The principal fire-arms used in the U. S. are divided 
into single and magazine guns. The principal single arms 
are the Springfield, Remington, Sharp's, and Whitney. 

All modern fire-arms are breech loaders, i. e., they are 
loaded at the breech instead of the muzzle of the gun. 

All breech-loading guns are divided into two systems : 
ist. Where the breech block opens by swinging on hinges; 
2d. Where it opens by sliding in grooves. 

The Springfield Rifie. 

The principal parts of the Springfield rifle are as fol- 
lows : The barrel, which is 36 inches long, with a bore 
32.75 inches long, and .45 in diameter (the calibre), and 

(245) 



246 



ART OF WAR. 



Fig. 2. 




W5 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 247 

which has on interior surface three grooves, which have a 
depth each of .0075 inches, and a twist of .45 in. The 
grooves and lands are equal in width. To the barrel is 
screwed a receiver [See "A," Fig. 2, page 246,] or breech 
frame. To the frame is hinged the breech block B, 
which swings upwards. A, bottom of receiver ; D, bar- 
rel ; C, breech-pin ; E, cam-latch ; F, hinge-pin ; G, 
cam-latch spring; If, firing-pin; /, firing-pin spring; 
y, circular recess for notch ; K, extractor for withdraw- 
ing cartridge shell ; L, ejector spring. 

The gun is first taken apart by slipping off the two bands 
and unscrewing the breech pin. 

The lock should never be taken out of a gun except by 
an expert. The trigger guard may be taken off while 
cleaning. The breech block is taken off the barrel by 
knocking out gently the hinge-pin. The cam-latch is 
taken out by unscrewing the breech block cap and screw; 
the ejector-spring and spindle are taken out in cleaning 
the gun ; the firing-pin spring and firing-pin are taken out 
by unscrewing the firing-pin screw. To clean the gun 
thoroughly it is first taken apart ; water is then run through 
the barrel until the dirt is all out ; the bore and chamber 
are then wiped thoroughly dry, and then oiled; the 
breech block and its different parts are wiped with rags 
and then oiled. The parts are then put together in the 
reverse of the order of taking apart. 

The Remington Rifle. 

The Remington gun is illustrated and explained in Figs. 
3, 4, and 5, pages 248, 249 and 250. 

Note. — The carbine is a smaller and lighter gun, designated for use 
of mounted troops. The Remington carbine is shown in Fig. 3a, p. 
24S. It has the same mechanism as the gun. 



248 



ART OF WAR. 




ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 



249 




25° 



ART OF WAR. 



The gun is loaded by cocking the hammer, pressing 
thumb-piece with thumb j this throws the breech up and 




clear of the hammer and firing-pin. The cartridge is then 
inserted and the breech closed in one movement. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY 



251 



The principal magazine or repeating guns used, are the 
Lee, or Remington-Lee, as it is sometimes called, the Hotch- 




252 



ART OF WAR. 



kiss gun, the Winchester gun, and the Chaffee- Reece gun, 
and the Sharp's rifle. 




ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY 



2 53 



The Remington-Lee gun is manufactured by the Rem- 
ington Arms Company, of Ilion, N. Y., and before a Board 
of Army Officers appointed for the purpose of testing 
magazine guns, it received the highest endorsement. The 
gun proper is a single breech-loader, and the magazine is 
detachable. The general nomenclature of the gun is the 
same as in all others, the special details being in the breech 
and magazine arrangement. Fig. 6a represents the gun 
and magazine attached, and closed, ready for firing. As 
it stands it holds one cartridge in the breech chamber and 
five in the magazine. It weighs 9 lbs. Fig. 7 represents 
a sectional view of the gun open, with magazine, etc., with 
the different parts. Fig. 6 represents the gun open with 
magazine detached. Fig. 8 represents the magazine, and 

Fig. 8. — Magazine Mechanism, 
component parts. 

M. Magazine. N. Magazine Spring. 

Weight of Magazine and Spring, 3^ ounces. 





Charged Magazine, 
Lee System. 



vv 



The Spring W serves to form 
a bottom to the Receiver, while 
the arm is used as a Single 
Loader. 



254 AR T OF WAR. 

the Government Board reported as follows concerning the 
Lee gun: "The gun belongs to the class of breech-load- 
ing, bolt guns. The peculiarity consists in the application 
of the magazine principle. In other breech-loaders the 
magazine is permanently attached and placed under the 
barrel, over the barrel, or in the butt or stock. These 
magazines are all tubular, the cartridges being placed one 
behind the other, so as to be in dangerous contact when 
the gun is fired. The magazine of the Lee gun is a small 
metallic case, containing five cartridges, which can be at- 
tached or removed at pleasure, and in the time required to 
load a single cartridge, the cartridges are side by side, and 
the magazine when in position is just below the receiver, 
in front of the guard, and the weight of the cartridges is 
therefore in the centre of the piece. When detached, the 
gun may be used as a single loader. In the breech mech- 
anism there are but 22 parts, the recoil is taken upon both 
sides of the bolt, and the gun can be fired with accuracy 
15 times in 30 seconds. The comparative simplicity of 
the mechanism, and the ease with which the magazine can 
be applied, make it a valuable and destructive weapon." 
As many as eight magazines can be carried in the cartridge 
belt, on the person, charged with five cartridges each. It 
takes but five seconds to fill the magazine. If rapid firing 
is not necessary, the gun is used as a single loader. The 
position of gun and soldier when magazine is being at- 
tached is represented in Fig. 9. To introduce the maga- 
zine and cartridges, hold the gun as in the figure, vertical, 
with the right hand grasping the small of the stock, right 
forearm horizontal, barrel to the rear, grasp a magazine 
with the left hand, take it from the belt and introduce it 
through the slot cut in the stock in front of the trigger 
guard, till the catch that holds it snaps tight. To disen- 
gage the magazine the catch is first pressed open, and the 
movement is then the reverse of that just given. A spring 
projects over the opening through which the cartridge 
passes upward from the magazine, forming a bottom to the 
receiver while the arm is in use as a single loader. 

The Lee Bolt System (not referring to its magazine at- 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 



2 55 




256 ART OF WAR. 

tachments) has fewer parts than any other in use, the whole 
being : 

1. Receiver, A, 7. Extractor, G, 

2. Bolt, B, 8. Sere, H, 

3. Firing-Pin, C, 9. Trigger, I, 

4. Main Spring, D, 10. Sere Spring, L, 

5. Thumb-Piece, E, 11. Trigger Guard, O, 

6. Key-Sleeve, F, 12. Extractor Spring, Q, 
together with Tang and Guard Screws R and S, and four 
Pins, two of which are shown in lower part of Receiver A, 

In this system the resistance is direct, and is taken on 
both sides of the receiver, two lugs being constructed on 
the opposite sides of the bolt and which lock firmly into 
corresponding shoulders in the receiver, thereby affording 
an equal bearing on each side, instead of on one side only, 
as in most other bolt systems. 

The extractor is of new design, having direct action and 
great power. 

The arm can be carried while loaded with perfect safety 
by withdrawing the thumb-piece E to the half-cock notch, 
which operation fixes the bolt firmly to its closed position, 
and locks the firing-pin clear from the cartridge until the 
thumb-piece is drawn back to full cock, when the piece 
may be fired. 

The ease and rapidity with which this arm can be dis- 
mounted and assembled is noticeable. By inserting the 
point of a screwdriver into the notch cut on the rear end 
of the extractor spring (see Fig. 7), the extractor spring 
is pressed forward, releasing the hook on its under side 
from the pin with which it engages when in place. This 
releases the extractor spring and the extractor, and the bolt 
may then be drawu out of the receiver. By pressing be- 
tween the lug of the key-sleeve F and the bolt, the thumb- 
piece E, the firing-pin C and the main-spring D are re- 
leased. To assemble the bolt and its parts, the pieces E, 
C and D are placed in their proper position, and the lug 
of the key-sleeve F is pressed into its locking-notch in the 
bolt. Returning the assembled bolt into its place in the 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 257 

receiver, lay the extractor in its notch on the bolt and place 
the extractor spring in position, give the bolt a sharp push 
forward, and the hook will engage itself on the pin in the 
bolt-rib, when the arm will be ready for use. 

To change this single fire breech-loader to a magazine 
arm, a magazine made to contain five (more or less) car- 
tridges is introduced through a slot or opening cut through 
the stock and receiver, forward of the trigger guard, which 
insertion or removal can be effected as quickly as a single 
cartridge can be loaded into or ejected from any ordinary 
single breech-loader. The magazine is held in place by the 
magazine catch, which engages into a notch or depression 
in rear of the magazine, "as shown in Fig. 7, and can be 
released in a moment by pressure on the catch. 

The magazine is retained so securely in position that it 
is impossible for it to become accidentally released, no 
matter how roughly the arm is used or how severe a shock 
it may receive. These magazines are pressed into shape 
from one piece of metal, and are strengthened by a rib 
formed on their rear and bottom exterior, which renders 
them, although weighing but about three ounces, strong 
and rigid enough to endure without injury any shock or 
blow likely to be received in rough service. They may be 
adapted to cartridges of any length. The cartridges are 
held in a nearly horizontal position, the flange or head of 
each being in advance of the one below it, as shown in 
sectional cut, Fig. 7, rendering it impossible for anything 
to impinge upon the primer. By this arrangement of car- 
tridges accidental explosions are rendered impossible, either 
from recoil or from any concussion to which the arm may 
be subjected. 

The cartridges are fed upward into the system by the 
magazine spring N (Fig. 7), as fast as required, and being 
held strongly in position, no deformation of the bullet is 
possible. By actual experiment, the bullets of cartridges 
so held, and exposed to the recoil received from one hun- 
dred shots fired in the arm, showed no diminution in length. 

The magazine mechanism proper of this arm consists 
only of four pieces (see Fig. 8), the Magazine M, Maga- 
17 



258 ART OF WAR. 

zine Spring N and Follower O, and the Magazine Catch 
K. The Spring W operates in a slot in the side of the 
receiver, and. projects over the opening through which the 
cartridges pass upward from the magazine, forming a bot- 
tom to the receiver, while the arm is used as a single loader. 
The lower part of this spring is beveled, so that on intro- 
ducing the magazine into the system, the spring is forced 
back into ijs recess in the side of the receiver, and out of 
the way. The complexity of the magazine mechanism of 
repeating arms hitherto produced, with the consequent lia- 
bility to breakage or derangement, has been one of the ob- 
jections offered to their adoption for military purposes. . 

To dismount the piece. — Insert the point of a screw- 
driver into the notch cut in the rear end of the extractor 
spring (which is on top of the bolt), and press forward, 
thereby releasing the hook on its under side with the pin 
in which it engages when in place. This releases the ex- 
tractor and extractor spring, and the bolt may then be 
drawn out of the receiver. By pressing between the lug 
of the key-sleeve and bolt, the thumb -piece, the firing-pin 
and the mainspring are released. 

To assemble the piece. — Replace the firing-pin and its at- 
tachments in the bolt, and press the lug of the key-sleeve 
into its locking notch. Return the assembled bolt into 
its place in the receiver, lay the extractor in its notch on 
the bolt, and place the extractor spring in position, giving 
the bolt a short push forward, and the hook will engage 
itself on the pin in the bolt rib, when the arm will be 
ready for use. 

The arm is carried loaded by carrying the thumb piece 
to the half-cock notch, which operation fixes the bolt 
firmly in its closed position, and locks the firing-pin clear 
from the cartridge until the thumb- piece is drawn back to 
full cock, when the piece may be fired. 

The Hotchkiss Magazine Gun and Carbine. 

The gun and its parts are illustrated in Figs. 10, 11, 
and 12. 



ORDNANCE AND CU' 



.Y. 



259 




260 



ART OF WAR. 







2 " 


~ ~z 


u 








m 


C :/: 


•£ 


tr 










< 


1:5 


Ed 


O 


u 






(j 
















o 


h 










S5; 






— 




n n 


XT- - 




M 01 


- z 




=SS= 


u 



- . u 

_ — 

z ■ _>> 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 2 6l 

Rules for Operating and Dismounting Hotchkiss Repeating 
Rifle, Model 1883. 

TO OPERATE THE GUN. 

i. To open the breech-bolt: Hold the stock firmly with 
the left hand a little in front of the receiver, and with the 
right hand raise the handle, and draw back the bolt, mak- 
ing but one motion. 

2. Close the bolt by an inverse motion. This operation 
cocks the piece. 

3. To cock the piece without withdrawing the bolt: 
Raise the handle as before, and immediately turn it down. 

4. To load the magazine : Raise the handle and draw 
back the bolt. Take a cartridge between the thumb and 
middle finger, placing the point of the forefinger on the 
bullet ; insert the head of the cartridge in the receiver, 
just in front of the point at which it narrows down, and 
press it back in the magazine until a distinct click — the 
head passing the cartridge-stop — is heard. Repeat the op- 
eration until five cartridges have been inserted. Another 
may then be placed in the chamber. 

TO UNLOAD THE MAGAZINE. 

First Method. — Raise the handle and draw back the 
bolt; the cartridge in the chamber will then be thrown 
out. 

Holding the Muzzle of the Arm well up, push for- 
ward the bolt (do not turn it down), the thumb of the 
right hand pushing the knob on the cocking-piece ; and 
pull the trigger. Draw back the bolt by the knob of the 
cocking-piece, and the cartridge will be pushed forward 
and remain in the receiver. Remove the cartridge, and 
proceed as before. 

Second Method. — Raise the handle, place the wrist of 
the right hand against the handle of the locking-tube, the 
thumb being extended across the bolt in front of the 
handle, and the forefinger resting upon the barrel. Draw 
back the bolt (keeping the hand in the same position) by 
pressing the back of the thumb near the wrist against the 
front of the handle ; remove the cartridge with the thumb 



262 ART OF WAR. 

and fingers, which are thus at liberty to receive it. Push 
forward the bolt (do not turn it down), and pull the trigger. 
Withdraw the bolt with the back of the thumb as before, 
and stop the cartridge coming from the magazine with the 
fore Or index finger. Remove the cartridge, and proceed 
as before until the magazine is exhausted. 

DO NOT TURN DOWN THE HANDLE 

during the operation of unloading the magazine, as any pos- 
sibility of discharging the arm by pulling the trigger while a 
cartridge is in the chamber is thus prevented. 

THE MAGAZINE CUT-OFF. 

This device is found on the left of the piece, just in the 
rear of the bolt-handle. It serves to lock the magazine 
so that the arm may be used as a single loader while the 
contents of the magazine are held in reserve. When the 
thumb-piece of the magazine cut-off is thrown down, the 
arm acts as a magazine gun. When the thumb-piece is 
pushed up, the arrangement of the mechanism is such that 
no cartridges can escape from the magazine to the cham- 
ber, and the arm is practically a single loader. 

THE BOLT-LOCK. 

This piece is placed on the right side of the receiver, 
opposite the magazine cut-off, and serves at the same time 
to lock the bolt and the trigger in such a manner that the 
bolt cannot be turned nor drawn back, nor the arm fired. 
To lock the bolt and trigger, push up the thumb-piece of 
the bolt-lock; this can only be done when the bolt is 
closed and the gun cocked. To unlock the bolt, push 
down the thumb-piece of the bolt-lock. 

TO DISMOUNT THE GUN. 

i. Take out the bolt. To do this, raise the handle, and 
draw back the bolt until the forward end of the cocking- 
piece just clears the rear end of the receiver ; then, letting 
go the handle, take hold of the cocking-piece, and turn 
it down to the right until the projection on the bolt-head 
leaves the groove under the front-end of the locking-tube. 
The latter may then be drawn out at the rear, and the 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 203 

boit-head removed at the front of the receiver. To return 
the bolt, the head must be inserted from the front, and the 
other part from the rear. 

2. Take off the butt-plate, by removing the two butt- 
plate screws. 

3. Take out the magazine nut. ■ 

4. Take out the magazine spring and follower. 

5. Take out the guard side-screws. 

6. Take out the guard- screws and the upper tang-screw. 

7. Take off the butt-stock, by drawing it backwards 
from between the guard and upper tang, and off from the 
magazine tube. 

8. Take out the guard. 

9. Take out the bolt-lock and magazine cut-off springs. 
It will aid persons unacquainted with the gun, when en- 
deavoring to replace these parts, to remember that the flat 
sides of the springs lie next the receiver. 

10. Takeout the bolt-lock and magazine cut-off. While 
these parts resemble each other exteriorly, it will be ob- 
served that the bolt-lock has a short pivot, and is assem- 
bled on the right of the arm, while the magazine cut-off 
has a long pivot, and is assembled on the left. 

11. Take out the magazine tube. This is accomplished 
by drawing back the magazine tube from its seat in the 
frame, and turning it slightly to the right, so that it may 
pass the trigger. 

12. Take out the wiping-rod. 

13. Take off the bands. 

14. Remove the tip-stock. This is best done by separ- 
ating the tip-stock or fore-arm from the barrel; first at 
the forward end of the tip-stock, separating them until the 
stud on the receiver is withdrawn from the slot in the rear 
end of the tip-stock. 

15. Take out the trigger by removing the trigger-screw. 

16. Take off the barrel. This should be attempted only 
by persons provided with proper tools, as the barrel and 
receiver are very firmly assembled together. 

17. The cartridge-stop may be dismounted from the 
guard by unscrewing the cartridge-stop screw, and driving 
out, from the left to the right, the stop-pin. 



264 ART OF WAR. 

TO DISMOUNT THE BREECH-BOLT. 

i. Remove the bolt- head. To do this hold the cock.- 
ing-piece firmly in the left hand, and with the right turn 
down the handles, as in the act of locking the bolt. The 
head will then slip off. 

2. Turn out the firing-pin screw. 

3. Slip the bolt-head partly on the projecting end of the 
firing-pin, and use it as a wrench to unscrew the pin. The 
main-spring may then be removed. 

4. Remove the extractor, by tapping gently on its pro- 
jecting end with a piece of wood. 

To assemble, proceed in the inverse order of the opera- 
tions given above. 

The Chaffee-Reece Gun. 

The Chaffee-Reece gun is described in Fig. 13, p. 266. 
This gun is either a single or magazine breech-loader also. 

Instructions for Use of the Chaffee-Reese Magazine Rifle. 

The half-cock locks the breech. Uncock, or full-cock, 
to open it. 

To Lock the Breech. — If the firing-pin or hammer should 
be at full-cock, let it down slowly to half-cock, by placing 
the thumb upon the* end of the hammer and pressing the 
trigger at the same time. If the bolt is closed, raise the 
handle to a vertical position, and back again, or it can be 
done by pulling the hammer back to half-cock. 

To U?ilock the Breech. — Pull the hammer back to the 
full- cock notch, or draw it slightly back, pressing on the 
trigger at the same time. 

Never attempt to move the cut-off when the bolt is open, 
as the magazine can be put on or cut off only when the 
breech is closed. 

Put the button to the front to cut off the magazine, and 
reverse to attach the magazine. * 

The magazine can be properly charged only when the 
breech is fully open, with the magazine on. The gate in 
the butt-plate can be opened only when the breech is 
open. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY 

rfh 



««5 




Fig. 13. — Cut Showing Parts of Gun in Detail. 



Zb6 ART OF WAR. 

Do not attempt to charge the magazine with the breech 
open and the magazine cut off. 

To Charge the Magazine '.—See that the magazine is on 
by pressing on the cut-off button in the direction of the 
butt, while the bolt is closed; then fully open the breech, 
and take the bolt handle in the left hand, and by it hold 
the rifle, muzzle down, resting on the toe of the boot — 
not on the ground. Take six cartridges from the cartridge 
box, and with the flange of the head of one, or with the 
thumb-nail, open the gate in the butt-plate. Insert the 
cartridges, bullets down, into the magazine tube, pushing 
the last cartridge with the little finger until you feel it pass 
the end notch of the ratchet bar, but no farther ; then shut 
the gate and bolt, and press the cut-off in the direction of 
the muzzle. The arm can now be used as a single loader, 
with the magazine in reserve: 

In charging the magazine for immediate use (the barrel 
being empty), put seven cartridges in the magazine — the 
closing of the bolt will push the front cartridge into the 
chamber, leaving six in the magazine. Do not move the 
cut-off forward in this case. 

All movements of the bolt in loading and firing should 
be made quickly. The bolt should be completely closed 
with one continuous motion. 

TO TAKE OUT THE FIRING-PIN. 

Open the bolt, then with the thumb and finger of the 
right hand, take hold of the hammer, pulling it far enough 
to the rear to disengage it from the notch in the bolt, then 
turn it to the right, and the hammer and its spring will be 
disconnected from the bolt. To replace it, reverse the 
motion to the left until the coupling of the hammer is en- 
gaged with that of the bolt,' by pushing it forward ; then 
turn it to the right until the spring snaps into its notch 
again, and the arm is ready for use. This can be done 
with the bolt in or out of the gun. 

TO TAKE THE ARM APART. 

i st. Take out the ramrod. 
2d. Take off the bands. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 26? 

3d. See that the magazine is disconnected. 

4th. Take out the extractor. This is done by lifting 
the extractor lever cam with a knife blade, or the end of a 
cartridge shell. lift up the extractor lever and take out 
the extractor. This can only be done when the magazine 
is cut off. 

5 th. Take out the bolt, pressing it on the trigger as you 
pull it back. 

6th. Take off the butt-plate. 

7th. Take out the guard screws. 

8th. Take out the tang screw at the rear end of the re- 
ceiver. 

9th. Draw out the magazine tube, as far as it will come 
with ease. 

10th. Lift the barrel out of the stock. 

nth. Take off the guard. 

1 2th. Take the screw out of the elevator spring at the 
bottom of the front end of the magazine. 

j 3th. Draw out the magazine tube. 

To reassemble the parts, reverse the operations de- 
scribed; but pull the right-hand bar of the magazine to 
the front as far as it will go, and the left-hand bar to the 
rear before putting it into the stock. 

Hand Arms. 

Hand arms are designed for offence or defence at close 
quarters. They are divided into three classes, viz : 

1st. Those that act by the point. 

2d. Those that act by the edge. 

3d. Those that act by either the point or edge, or by 
both point and edge. 

The weapons of the first class are the straight sword, the 
bayonet, and the lance or spear. 

The straight sword used in the U. S. Army is represented 
in the accompanying plate as Fig. i . The different parts are 
the handle and the blade. The blade is divided into the 
point a, the middle b, the reinforce c, the shoulder d, and 
the edge e, and the tang, or the portion that is inserted into 
the handle. The blade is from 24 to 34 inches in length, and 



268 



ART OF WAR. 




Fig. 14. — Hand Arms. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 269 

weighs \ x / 2 pounds. The handle is divided into the knob 
f, the gripe g, and the guard h; the gripe is made of wood, 
and covered with leather or sheet brass, and wrapped with 
wire to prevent slipping in the hand. The guard is com- 
posed of the cross-piece i, and the curved branch k. The 
guard is to protect the hand, and sometimes has at the 
cross-piece a plate. 

The lance is composed of a blade, a, Fig. 2, of steel, 
and measuring from 8 to 12 inches in length. It is ground 
like a bayonet, and generally has three or four grooves. It 
has a socket at its base to secure it to the handle, and two 
wire straps which are riveted to the handle. The handle 
b is of wood, about 9^ feet long, with its lance, and 
protected by a tip of iron. At the centre is a leather strap 
c, to hold the lance and enable the men to grind it. The 
weight of the lance is about 4 to 6 pounds. It is not used 
in the U. S. Army except to attach to pennons or guidons, 
in either Cavalry or Artillery. When carried, the lower 
end is placed in a leather cup attached to the stirrup, and 
the right arm is passed through the leather loop. It is 
held vertically. The bayonet is a short blade attached to 
the end of a gun. The musket bayonet is composed of 
the socket a, (Fig. 3,) the clasp, b. The blade is made of 
steel, 18 inches long, with three grooved faces ; the grooves 
are called flutes. The socket is of wrought iron made so 
as to fit carefully over the barrel of the gun at the muzzle. 
It is held in place by a stud fastened on the barrel, which 
fits' in a channel or groove cut in the socket, and by a mov- 
able ring called the clasp. 

The sword bayonet (Fig. 4) is, as its name designates, 
of the form of a sword. The handle is made of a solid 
piece of metal, the back of the handle has a groove which 
fits on the stud of the barrel, and the cross-piece is perfor- 
ated so as to encircle the muzzle end of the barrel. The 
length of the blade runs from 22 to 28 inches, and breadth 
1^ to 2 inches, weight, 2 pounds. 

The weapons of the second class are the various classes 
of swords, generally described in Fig. 1. Swords may be 
double-edged, or with one edge only, as the sabre. The 
Sabre is represented in Fig. 5. 



270 ART OF AVAR. 

Sabres sometimes have a basket hilt in which the guard 
is composed of several branches forming a basket shield. 
The blade of the Cavalry sabre is 36 inches long, and of 
the light Artillery sabre 32 inches long. 

The only weapon of the third class is the short sword ; 
the blade is about 19 inches long. The general form is 
shown in Fig. 6. 

All swords, bayonets, and sabres, are carried in shields 
called scabbards, to protect them from injury. They are ' 
generally made out of leather for foot troops, are of metal 
for mounted troops, and are suspended from the waist belt 
of the soldier. 

Cannon. 

Cannon are divided into three classes, viz.: 1st. Field 
guns are those accompanying troops on the march and in 
the field of battle ; 2d. Siege guns are those which are too 
heavy to move about with troops, but follow armies, and 
are used in the manner indicated in laying siege to fortified 
places; 3d. Permanent guns, are those which are mounted 
on carriages and platforms made specially for them, and 
never moved. These latter are of the greatest size and 
weight, and as they are mostly used in fortified places on 
the sea-coast, they are also termed sea-coast guns. 

Field-guns are divided into Field-guns proper, Magazi?ie 
guns and Howitzers. The field guns used in the U. S. Army 
are the 3-inch rifle, the 3.2 inch steel breech-loading rifle, 
and the Hotchkiss mountain howitzer. The 3-inch rifle 
muzzle loading gun is as follows : [Fig. 15.] The body 
Fig. ik. 






*- <b q> 



U.J.- . M l.....,...„..«.„ „„i 

of the gun is that part in rear of a plane passed perpendic- 
ular to the axis of the piece and tangent to the front part 



ORDNANCE 'AND GUNNERY. 271 

of trunnions marked a, b, d. The chase is that part in 
front of this plane, marked c. The bore is the hollow 
cylinder marked d, d, d, d, which receives the charge. The 
mouth is the front of the bore, marked e ; the bottom of 
the bore is marked/", and is a semi- elliptical curve. 

The axis of the piece is an imaginary line running per- 
pendicular to the plane in front of the trunnion and 
through the centre of the bore ; the vent is a hole through 
which fire is communicated to the charge. It is near the 
bottom of the bore, and perpendicular to the axis. The 
bore is rifled and has three grooves and three ridges called 
bands, all of equal width. The trunnions are the arms g, g, 
perpendicular to the axis of the piece, in the same plane 
with it, and support the piece on its carriage ; the shoulders 
h, h, are the rim bases ; the breech is all the solid portion 
of the gun in rear of the bore, the base of the breech the 
curved surface at bottom of the bore ; the knob i, is the 
cascabel. On the outside of the gun near the front, on 
the upper surface, is a small piece of metal projecting verti- 
cally, called the front or muzzle sight. The rear sight is 
composed of a seat screwed into the base of the gun, on 
which rests the sight, called the pendulum hausse. (For 
dimensions, etc., see table.) 

For 3.2 inch steel. breech-loading rifle, see Fig. 16. 

The gun is made of low steel, all tempered in oil except 
the interior tube. Length of entire gun 90". 7, length of 
entire tube 85". 2, diameter of gun in rear of collar of 
muzzle 4". 6, maximum diameter 6.009"'; chamber is 10" 
long, maximum diameter 3". 8. Shape is that of a frustrum 
of an ellipsoid. This is called the powder chamber ; at 
the end of it the shot chamber commences; it is 3". 4 in 
diameter, and then commences a straight taper 2" long, 
when diameter becomes 3". 2, runs for i".475, then com- 
mences another straight taper of 2" to the bottom of the 
grooves where it is 3". 3 diameter, and to top of lands 
where it is 3". 2 diameter. Number of grooves, 24; width 
of grooves, 0.3"; width of lands, 1.188"; depth of 
grooves, .05. Twist, one turn in 30 calibre, i. e., 90 feet.* 

* Weight, 800 lbs. 



272 



ART OF WAR. 



V 



16. 



The parts of the breech mech- 
anism are as follows (Fig. 16): 
Breech block, which locks into a 
jacket tightly screwed in the gun, 
called breech-block jacket. Its 
length is 5". 95. It has an inter- 
cepted screw thread for four inches 
from its forward end. The fuse 
obdurator or gas check consists of 
a small spindle with a head the 
form of a truncated cone, an ex- 
panding gas ring fitting against this 
head, and a spiral spring. Through 
the spindle runs a vent 2" diam- 
eter, at front end of which is cop- 
per bushing. Two locking vents 
at rear hold it in place. The car- 
rier ring is locked in place by a 
pin at lower part, which is ope- 
rated by a lever handle. The 
gun is loaded and fired as follows : 
Raise the lever handle till its axis 
is parallel to that of the piece; 
this movement unlocks the breech- 
plug, and allows it to be turned ; 
hold the lever handle in left hand, 
in this position, and, with right 
on fixed bronze handle, turn the 
breech-plug with lever handle till 
it stops; depress lever handle as 
far as possible ; this movement 
locks carrier ring. Pull out breech- 
plug through carrier ring with left 
hand, right hand grasping fixed 
handle ; the withdrawing of the 
breech-plug releases carrier straps, 
and as the plug is fully withdrawn 
the carrier ring is unlocked, and 
can be swung around the hinge-pin 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 



273 



with block. Insert projectile first, and then the charge ; 
swing the carrier ring and block around again into place 
smartly ; raise lever handle till its axis is parallel to that 
of piece ; then push breech-plug forward by means of the 
fixed handle ; then turn plug around to the right till it 
stops, keeping lever handle raised while turning ; then 
depress lever handle. The piece is now ready for firing. 

Table I. Field Guns. 

















'./-; 


•x 






















> 


> 


« 


(/> 
















u 































c 


































[~ 


£ 


u 




u 




bJO 


XI 


Xi 


XI 










rt 




id 





O 





O 






XI 


x: 


-o 


-a 


X 


c 


X! 


x! 


x: 


X 






c 

V 


bfl 
c 

V 


* 

1 


a 


£ 


0. 
u 

a! 


T3 
5 


a. 

V 

Q 


1 


Q 


5 


3-inch Rifle .... 


I2".8o 


• 6". 4 5 


Q"-4 


8*.s 


820 


40 lbs. 


8". 4 


.07s 


5 ■ 


S".2 


3.2-inch Rifle . . . 


qo".8o 


8r/'.2 


8".q 


4 ".6 


7QI2 


77110Z 


3" 


.050 


n".88 


II 




Hotchkiss M. B. L. 


47 ".a 


42". 7 






1166 










16.5 





The magazine guns for field use are the Gatling and the 
Gardner, or, as it is sometimes called, the Pratt- Whitney 
gun. 

The machine guns now used by the U. S. and foreign 
governments, are the Gardner, the Hotchkiss, and the 
Gatling. The following is the description of them and the 
service of each. 

Service of the Gardner Machine Gun. 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE GUN AND CARRIAGE. 

The Piece. — This gun has but two barrels whose axes 
are in same horizontal plane, and they are enclosed in a 
brass cylinder or casing which protects them. 

The mechanism is also protected by a brass casing, the 
top of which is a swinging cover, hinged to give access to 
the working parts. The cover, when closed, is secured in 
position by a few turns of the screw-threaded cascabel. 

The Carriage. — The distinctive feature of the carriage 
is the arrangement for oscillation, the lateral movement 
being regulated by a clamp, which compresses, or allows 
to expand, a rrjetallic ring concentric with the pivot around 



2 74 ART OF WAR. 

which the gun moves. The lever for elevating or depress- 
ing, as well as giving the oscillation, is peculiar to this 
gun. 

The Liniber. — The limber-chest is opened in rear by a 
lid, which falls down, and is held in place by jointed braces, 
thereby serving a? a shelf. When down, it exposes a series 
of drawers, six (6) in number, and two recesses for imple- 
ments. In these drawers the ammunition is carried in the 
original pasteboard packages. Each drawer has a capacity 
for 45 packages or 90 rounds, thus giving to each limber 
5400 rounds. 

Weight of gun 142 lbs 

Weight of gun and carriage 502 " 

Fires three times at each revolution of the hand-crank, 
and with a rapidity equal to 357 shots per minute. 

SERVICE OF THE PIECE. 

The detachment for the service of the piece should con- 
sist of one non-commissioned officer and three men. They 
are posted at the piece limbered, as follows : No. 1 outside 
the wheel of the carriage and on a line with the crank- 
handle. No. 2 in corresponding position on the opposite 
side of the carriage. No. 3 aligned on the rear part of 
the limber wheel, and the gunner on the opposite side, and 
on the same alignment. All 1 yard outside the carriage 
and limber wheels, and faced to the front. 

When the piece is not horsed, it is moved by hand, by 
Nos. 2 and 3 working at the end of the pole, and the gun- 
ner and No. 1 at the wheels of the carriage. In unlimber- 
ing and limbering Nos. 2 and 3, work the end of the pole, 
No. 1 assisting the gunner at the trail. 

As soon as the cannoneers are posted, equipments are 
taken. At the command "Take Equipments ' ' from the In- 
structor, Nos. 2 and 3 receive cartridge-pouch from the 
gunner, which they wear from the left shoulder to the right 
side. 

Posts of Canno?iee7'S — -piece unlimbered. — The posts of 
cannoneers at the piece unlimbered are as follows: Nos. 1 
and 2 on opposite sides of the piece and facing it. No. 1 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 275 

on the right, No. 2 on the left, on a line with the rear part 
of the wheels of the piece and 2 feet outside, No. 3 in rear 
of limber. The gunner on the left of the trail handspike, 
near the end and face to the front. 

Loading and Firing. — The piece is loaded and fired by 
the following commands of the Instructor, repeated by the 
gunner. 

1. Load.'- — At this command the gunner steps to the 
piece, prepares it for firing, turns the safety-crank upwards 
to the rear until the crank-stop drops into its rear recess in 
the casing, adjusts the sights and lever, and regulates the 
oscillator, if it is to be used. No. 1 steps in and seizes 
the crank handle with his right hand. No. 2 steps in be- 
tween the piece and wheel, and, standing faced to the 
right, takes from his pouch a package of cartridges, takes 
of! the cover, and, with his left hand, places the heads of 
the cartridges in the grooves of the feed-guide, the wooden 
slide between the two rows of cartridges being held against 
the head of the rib, between the grooves of the feed- guide, 
and, sliding the case down, pulls it off and throws it down. 
He immediately takes from his pouch another package, and 
proceeds in the same manner, thus keeping up a constant 
supply of cartridges. Should any of the cartridges catch 
in the grooves of the feed-guide, he will employ both hands 
to work them down. The feed-guide should be full before 
commencing firing. 

The pasteboard boxes may be preserved for further use. 

No. 3 will, as rapidly as possible after the piece is un- 
limbered, fill his pouch with packages from the drawers, 
and proceed to empty them in regular order, commencing 
with the left hand upper drawer. 

2. Commence Firing. — At this command, repeated by 
the gunner, No. 1 will turn the crank slowly and uni- 
formly. It is better to fire a few shots (say five) with de- 
liberation, to enable the gunner to make any necessary 
alterations in the elevation. On receiving intimation from 
the proper source, the firing will be continued, the rapidity 
being regulated by the Instructor. No. 2 will continue to 
feed, and, before the supply of cartridges is entirely ex- 



276 ART OF WAR. 

hausted, will call Cartridges to No. 3, who will move as 
rapidly as possible to No. 2, and, taking off his pouch of 
cartridges, exchange for the empty one of No. 2, which he 
will proceed to fill. 

Cease Firing. — At the command cease firing, which is 
repeated by the gunner, No. 1 drops the crank-handle and 
resumes his post. No. 2 removes the cartridges from the 
feed-guide and hopper, placing them in his pouch, and 
takes his post. If there is to be no more firing on that 
ground, No. 3 replaces the packages left in his own pouch 
and in that of No. 2 in the drawer — the loose ones being 
consigned to a special one — and closes the lid of the lim- 
ber chest. No. 1 may be employed to assist No. 2 in re- 
moving the cartridges from feed-guide and hopper. 

Changing Posts. — This is executed with piece unlim- 
bered, by the commands: 1. Change Posts, 2. March. 
At the command Change Posts, No. 1 faces to his left and 
Nos. 2 and 3 take off their pouches, No. 2 placing his 
against the wheel, and No. 3 his on the lid of the chest, 
if it be lowered ; if not, against the wheel of the limber. 
At the command March, all step off, No. 1 taking the 
post of No. 3; No. 3 that of No. 2, and No. 2 that of 
No. 1, in double time, No. 2 passing in rear of the trail, 
and, on reaching their posts, Nos. 2 and 3 will equip 
themselves with their pouches. 

Mounting and Dismounting Cannoneers. — To mount the 
cannoneers the commands are: 1. Cannoneers, prepare to 
mount, 2. Mount. At the first command Nos. 1 and 2 
will run to the limber, and each grasping the handle of 
the ammunition chest with the hand nearest to it, and 
placing the opposite foot on the foot-board, will grasp 
their unemployed hands. 

The gunner and No. 3 will take their positions near 
Nos. 1 and 2, and on their own side of the piece. 

At the command, Mount, Nos. 1 and 2 will spring up 
on the chest, and, seating themselves, will turn about, 
throwing their legs over the handles, face to the rear. 
The gunner and No. 3 will mount in the manner described 
for Nos. 1 and 2, and will seat themselves facing to the 
front. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 277 

To dismount cannoneers the commands are: i. Cannon- 
eers, prepare to dismount t 2. Dismount. 

At the first command the gunner and No. 3 will stand 
up in their places ; at the second, all the numbers will 
jump to the ground and run to their posts. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1. If the crank be turned before the feeding of the car- 
tridges is commenced, the first few will fall irregularly and 
check the working of the gun. 

2. Be careful to reclamp firmly the swivel and pointing- 
lever after pointing. 

3. To oscillate the gun without changing the elevation : 
Unclamp the swivel and turn the gun back and forth from 
right to left by means of the pointing-lever, regulating the 
amplitude of the vibration by the oscillation -stop head. 

4. When the firing is discontinued, turn the safety-crank 
downwards and to the front, until the crank-stop drops 
into its front recess in the casing. 

5. This gun may be fired by turning the crank back- 
ward. 

IMPLEMENTS, ETC. 

Wiping rod. Shell driver. 

T Screw driver. Hammer. 

Lock wrench. Drifts. 

Headless-shell extractor. Breech casing cover (leather). 
Packing case. 

TO DISMOUNT THE GUN. 

i. Unscrew the cascabel and raise the breech cover. 

2. Remove the barrels. To do this, drive out the front 
and rear barrel-plate pins ; interpose a plug of wood or a 
cartridge shell between the rear of either barrel and its 
corresponding lock, taking care that it does not enter the 
chamber; turn the crank gently and the lock will force the 
barrels partly out of the casing, when they maybe removed 
by hand. 

3. Remove the locks. To do this, turn' the crank until 
either locking-cam recoil-plate is uppermost ; rotate the 



2 73 ART OF WAR. 

corresponding lock about the recoil-plate until it is vertical 
and draw it out at the front. 

4. Remove the ejectors directly by their pins. 

5. Remove the lock-cam, raising it vertically by means 
of its journal boxes. The journal boxes may be removed 
from the cam by driving out the journal-box and hand- 
crank pins. 

6. Drive out the lock-guide pin and remove the guide. 
The shell-starters may be removed from the lock-guide by 
driving their pins and the cartridge guide by turning out 
its screw. 

7. Turn out the cocking-cam screw which enters the 
cam through the bottom of the casing and remove the 
cam. 

8. Turn out the feed-valve and valve-lever screws and 
remove valve, valve-slide, lever and lever-slide. 

9. Drive out the safety-crank pin and remove the crank. 
The safety-stop head, the stop and spring, may be removed 
from the crank by driving out the stop-head pin. 

10. Drive out the safety-crank shaft and remove the 
splive. • 

11. Slide the main-spring compressor out at the rear of 
the guide. 

12. Drive out the elevating and pointing lever, the 
swivel and casing, and pivot-pins ; remove the casing and 
pointing lever. 

13. Remove the swivel and carriage pivot-bolt lock; 
unclamp the swivel and lift it from the carriage. The gun, 
swivel, etc., may be removed directly from the carriage in 
the manner prescribed for the swivel alone. 

To assemble proceed in the inverse order. 

TO DISMOUNT THE LOCK. 

i. Drive out the extractor pin and remove the extractor. 

2. Unscrew the lock-head by means of the lock- wrench. 

3. Uncock by pressing on the sere and turning the cock- 
ing-lever to the rear ; drive out the cocking-lever pin and 
remove the lever. 

Note. — All the taper pins in the casing are driven in from right to left. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 279 

4. Draw out the firing-pin, remove the rack and unscrew 
the main spring. 

5. Drive out the sear-spring pin and remove the spring. 

6. Drive out the sear-spring and remove the sear. 

7. Drive out the truck-pin and remove the truck. 

To assemble, proceed in the inverse order, taking care to 
return the firing-pin so that its flat will be at the extractor- 
slot and the front tooth on cocking-lever enters front space 
in rack. 

The Hotchkiss Revolving Cannon. 

THE GENERAL SYSTEM. 

The system of this gun may be explained as follows : Five 
barrels grouped around a common axis are revolved in 
front of a breech-block, which has, in one part, an open- 
ing to introduce the cartridges, and another through which 
to extract the empty shells. 

The five barrels, made of the finest oil-tempered cast 
steel, are mounted around a common axis between two 
disks, on a central shaft. The series of barrels are placed 
in a rectangular frame, which is attached to the breech, 
the rear end of the shaft penetrating the same to receive 
the rotary motion from the driving gear. 

The breech itself is composed of a solid cast-iron breech- 
block, weighing 175 kilograms (385 pounds). This ab- 
sorbs the greater part of the recoil. It has a door at the 
rear end, which can be easily opened, so that the mechan- 
ism is accessible, and can, if necessary, be taken out and 
put in place in a few minutes, without the aid of any spe- 
cial tools. 

A peculiar feature in this gun consists in the barrels re- 
maining stationary during the discharge, so that there is 
no movement of any kind to impede the accuracy of fire. 

All parts of the mechanism are very strong and durable, 
and hardly exceed in number those of an ordinary small- 
arm, there being, beside the group of barrels, thirteen 
parts, viz: 

1,2. The breech-block with its door for closing the rear 
end. 



280 ART OF WAR. 

3, 4, 5. The crank-shaft, with its worm for moving the 
barrels, and small crank for working the loader and ex- 
tractor. 

6. The crank. 

7, 8. The firing-pin and main spring. 

9. The extractor. 

10, 11. The loading-piston and rack for moving it. 

12. The cog-wheel for transmitting the movement of the 
extractor to the loading-piston ; and, 

13. The door for regulating the feed of cartridges. 
The operation of the mechanism is as follows — suppos- 
ing the crank to be in continual motion : 

A cartridge is placed in the introduction trough, the 
piston pushes it into the barrel, the barrels begin to re- 
volve, and the cartridge is carried on till it arrives before 
the firing pin held in the solid part of the breech, and 
which has, in the mean time, been retracted by the action 
of the cam. As soon as the cartridge has arrived in posi- 
tion, the barrels cease to revolve, and the primer of the 
cartridge is struck by the firing-pin and discharged ; the 
revolution of the barrels begins again, and the fired car- 
ridge-shell is carried on until it comes to the extractor, 
which in the meantime has arrived up to the barrels, and 
the cartridge-head rolls into it. As soon as the head is 
laid hold of by the extractor, the barrels again cease to 
revolve, and during this period the cartridge-shell is with- 
drawn and dropped to the ground. During every stop- 
page of the barrels the gun is supplied with a new cart- 
ridge, the firing and extraction are also performed, and a 
continuous but slow fire kept up. Supplying the gun in 
this manner with single cartridges, about thirty rounds per 
minute may be fired. 

Should rapid firing be required, the gun is supplied with 
"feed cases," containing ten cartridges each. In this 
manner from sixty to eighty rounds per minute can be 
fired, with only three men to work the gun, viz : One man 
to point the gun and revolve the crank, one man to place 
the " feed-cases" containing the cartridges into the " feed 
trough," and a third at the ammunition chest to charge 
the "feed-cases" and to hand them to the loader. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 281 

Carriage. — The carriage is of steel, and all of the fixed 
parts except the felloes and spokes are of metal. The pe- 
culiarities of this carriage are : An iron trail-handspike 
permanently attached to the end of the trail, the -pivot 
end being let in between two eye-plates raised on the top 
of the trail. 

When not in use it is revolved to' the front and rests in 
a Y fastened to the lid of a tool-box placed between the 
cheeks, midway between the trail and the breech of the 
piece. This tool-box contains the following : 

One spare firing pin. 
" " main spring. 

" feed trough. 
" wrench. 
" oil can. 

A recess for hand-crank. 

Two hammers. 
" drifts (large and small). 

Between the cheeks and in rear of the tool-box are two 
small shifting-planks about two feet in length. They are 
taken out underneath, and are held in place by a leather 
strap buckled betwen the cheeks, and passing through slots 
cut near the lower edge. 

The cheeks are held together by assembling bolts. 

The traversing screw, by which a slight lateral motion is 
given to the gun, is let into a brass shaft running from 
cheek to cheek, and through the centre of which the ele- 
vating screw runs. 

The wheel working the screw is on the left cheek, and 
the clamp for the same on the right. 

To diminish the recoil of the piece, and for light grades 
in traveling, there is attached near each axle-shoulder a 
hand-brake or friction-lever which binds, to a certain ex- 
tent, the axle and hub. 

The carriages are also provided with lock chain, shoe, 
etc., as in Siege Guns. 

The gun and carriage are connected by an iron turn- 
table in the top of which the trunnions sit. The bottom 
of the turn table is pivoted to the top of the carriage, thus 
permitting the action of the traverser. 



282 ART OF WAR. 

There are attached to the cheeks the following imple- 
ments: 

Two wooden hand-spikes (one on each cheek). 

One wiping-rod (on the left cheek). 

One lock chain and shoe (on the right side). 

Limber. — The following are the peculiarities of the lim- 
ber : The pole lets into an iron frame and is held by two 
bolts with threads and nuts. The splinter-bars are of iron 
and are hung by their centres to an eye- plate under the 
ends of the brackets. 

Limber Chests. — The upper-half of the chest is con- 
structed for carrying 200 rounds of ammunition placed in 
a vertical position, the fuse end down and resting in a 
slight depression reamed out of the floor partition, the 
upper end being held steady by thin boards perforated 
with holes the size of the shells, and through which the 
ammunition passes. 

The lower half of the chest is divided into three com- 
partments. The lower half of the centre one holds two 
case-carriers of metal, provided with leather straps to go 
over the shoulder. Over this is a drawer containg imple- 
ments. On either side of the centre compartment is 
another, holding five galvanized-iron feed cases, each car- 
rying ten rounds, thus giving the chest a carrying capacity 
of 300 rounds. 

The lower half of the chest is opened by a drop-lid — 
held by iron braces — which serves as a shelf for serving 
ammunition. Under the foot-boards on the right side, is 
a leather watering-bucket. Under the axle and wound on 
horizontal hooks pointing outwards from each other, is a 
trace-rope or prolonge. 

The iron frame, into which the rear end of the pole is 
fastened, extends to the rear of the limber and terminates 
in a carriage-hook with key and chain. 

On the front of the limber-chest are the following im- 
plements : One axe, one spade, and one pick-axe. The 
handles of the axe and pick-axe rest in iron cleats. The 
blade of the spade is put through a leather loop and the 
handles of all are securely strapped to the chest. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 283 

The top lid is covered by a leather cushion which is 
strapped to the same. 

SERVICE OF THE PIECE. 

For the service and management of the piece there 
should be : maximum number of men — i gunner, 5 can- 
noneers ; minimum number of men — 1 gunner, 2 cannon- 
eers. 

As few men as possible should be kept about the piece, 
consistent with its proper service and management. 

The following is given on a basis of a gunner and 5 can- 
noneers. 

Posts of Cannoneers at Piece Limbered. — The posts of 
the cannoneers at piece limbered are as follows : 

No. 1 on left of piece one yard from front part of car- 
riage wheel. 

No. 2 corresponding position on right of piece. 

No. 3 on the left and one yard from rear part of limber 
wheel. 

Gunner, corresponding position on right of limber. 

No. 4 on right of limber and one yard from front part 
of wheel. 

No. 5 corresponding position on left of piece. All faced 
to the front. 

As soon as the cannoneers are posted, the equipments, 
are taken at the command of the Instructor, Take Equip- 
ments. The gunner steps to the limber-chest and distrib- 
utes to Nos. 3 and 4 a case carrier, which they sling from 
the left shoulder to the right side and then resume their 
posts. 

On arriving on the firing ground, the command is given 
by the Instructor: Action Rear (front, right, or left), 
which is executed in the manner similar to that laid down 
in Artillery Tactics, the gunner and No. 3 working at the 
trail, Nos. 1 and 2 at the wheels of piece, assisted by Nos. 
4 and 5, if necessary, each on his own side of the piece. 

When the piece is not horsed, Nos. 4 and 5 work at the 
end of the pole. 

Posts of Cannoneers, Piece Unlimbered. — Nos. 1 and 2 



284 ART OF WAR. 

on the right and left of the piece respectively, two feet 
outside of the rear part of wheels, facing the piece. 

No. 3 five yards to the right of No. 2, faced to the 
front. 

No. 4 two feet in rear of left limber-wheel, faced to the 
front. 

No. 5 in rear of centre of limber, and within reaching 
distance of chest faced to the front. 

As soon as the trail is lowered to the ground, the gun- 
ner prepares the piece for firing, adjusting the sights, and 
seeing all the parts are in working order, giving the piece 
the desired elevation by means of the elevating screw. 

The gunner points, using -the trail-handspike for an ap- 
proximation to accuracy, and the traverser to complete it. 

If the direction is to be changed after firing has com- 
menced, he is assisted in this by No. 3 or 4, whichever 
happens to be at the piece. In pointing before firing he 
is assisted by No. 1. 

Service. — The firing is executed by the command, Load 
and Commence Firing, from the Instructor. 

Load. — At the command, Load, repeated by the gun- 
ner, No. 1 steps in and seizes the crank-handle. 

No. 2 steps in and adjusts the feed-trough, if it is not 
already in place, and faces to his right, ready to receive a 
feed-case from No. 3, who, at the command, Load, goes 
to the limber and receives from No. 4 a feed -case, which 
he places in the case-carrier and carries quickly to No. 2, 
who opens the lid end and places it in the trough, regulat- 
ing the rolling of the cartridges into the breech-casing 
with his right hand. 

As soon as No. 3 has delivered his case to No. 2, he re- 
pairs in double time to the limber and receives another 
case from No. 5. 

No. 4, as soon as he has passed a filled case to No. 3, 
receives one from No. 5, which he places in his carrier ; 
and, when he sees No. 3 starting back from the piece, will 
himself move quickly to the piece and stand ready to hand 
the case to No. 2, passing it with his right hand and re- 
ceiving the empty case with his left, places it in the carrier. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 2S5 

No. 3 having received another filled case from No. 5, will 
start for the piece as soon as he sees No. 4 leaving it. 
Thus alternating, Nos. 3 and 4 will keep up a constant 
supply of cartridges. 

The duties of No. 5 are to keep the empty feed-cases 
filled from the supply in # the top of the chest, or from the 
original packages, when the supply in the limber-chest is 
exhausted. If the firing will permit, he may be assisted 
by Nos. 3. and 4 alternately. 

At the command, Commence Firing, repeated by 
the gunner, No. 1 will turn the crank with a uniform 
motion. 

No. 2 will see that the cartridges pass evenly into the 
piece, and, as soon as a feed-case is empty, he will turn to 
Nj. 3 or 4 for a filled case, receiving it in his right hand, 
passing with his left the empty one, underneath his right 
arm, to No. 3 or 4. 

Cease Firing. — At the command, Cease Firing, re- 
peated by the gunner, No. 1 ceases to turn the crank. 
No. 2 replaces the cartridges not in the gun in the feed- 
case, closes its lid, and hands it to No. 3 or 4 to carry back 
to the limber. All the feed-cases are replaced in the lim- 
ber, the lid closed, and all the cannoneers resume their 
posts. 

To Remove the Am?nunition and Empty Shells from the 
Barrels. — The gunner opens the door which closes the 
breech, removes the firing pin, and directs No. 1 to turn 
the crank until the cartridges and empty shells fall to the 
ground. 

To Change Posts. — The commands of the Instructor 
are: 1. Change Posts. 2. March. 

At the Piece Limbered. — At the first command, Nos. 3 
and 4 take off their equipments and place them on the 
ground to their right. The cannoneers on the right of the 
piece face about. 

At the second command, all the cannoneers step off, No. 
1 takes the post of No. 3, No. 3 of No. 5, No. 5 of No. 4, 
No. 4 of No. 2, and No. 2 of No. 1, passing in front of the 
muzzle for that purpose. On reaching their new posts all 



2 86 ART OF WAR. 

the cannoneers face to their proper front, Nos. 3 and 4 
putting on their equipments. 

At the Piece U?ili?nbered. — At the first command, Nos. 1 
and 5 face to their left, Nos. 3 and 4 take off their equip- 
ments and place them on the ground to their right. At 
the command March, all step off, No. 1 takes the place of 
No. 5. No. 5 of No. 4, No. 4 of No. 3, No. 3 of No. 2, 
No. 2 of No 1 stepping over the trail for that purpose. 

As soon as the men reach their new posts the equipments 
are taken by the men who wear them. 

Mounting the Cannoneers. — The cannoneers in an emer- 
gency could all be mounted on the limber-chest in the fol- 
lowing manner : 

At the command of the Instructor, Cannoneers prepare 
to Mount, all the cannoneers run to the front of the limber 
from their own sides. Nos. 1 and 2 grasping with their 
right and left hands respectively the handles of the limber- 
chests, placing the opposite foot on the foot-boards and 
clasping hands wait for the command Mount ; as soon as 
it is'given they spring into their seats and throwing their 
legs outward over the wheels remain faced to the rear. 

The gunner and No. 5 now mount in a similar manner 
and take their seats faced to the fipnt. They then assist 
No. 3 to mount, who grasps the chest-handle with his right 
hand and places his left foot on the foot-board. As soon 
as he is up he places his hands on the shoulders of the 
gunner and No. 5 and springs over, taking his seat between 
Nos. 1 and 2. Following No. 3, No. 4 mounts from the 
right and takes his seat between the gunner and No. 5. 

A strap could be passed from the chest-handles, making 
a temporary rest for the feet of those cannoneers who are 
faced to the rear. 

To Dismount the Cannoneers. — The cannoneers are dis- 
mounted by command? : 1. Ca?inoneers Prepare to Dis- 
mount. 2. Dismount. 

At the first command the cannoneers faced to the front 
will stand up. At the second command, all jump to the 
ground and resume their posts. 

The Wheel Brakes. — When it is necessary to use the 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 



287 



wheel-brakes on the light grades, it is done by Nos. 1 and 
2 throwing over to the front the handles and pushing them 
down firmly with the feet. Nos. 1 and 3 adjust the lock- 
chain and shoe on heavier descents. 

Service of the Piece with Diminished Numbers. — The 
following would be the distribution of duties with dimin- 
ished numbers : 



Numbers Retained. 


Distribution of Duties. 




Gunner. 


1 


2 


3 


4 


Gunner i 
" 12 

123 
1234 


G. 2-3-4 

B- 3 

G 


1_ 5 

1 


2-3-4 

2 

2 


3-4-5 
3-4 


4-5 



Precaution. — Great care should be exercised in handling 
the ammunition, as the loaded shells of this piece have 
percussion fuses. 

AMMUNITION. . 

The ammunition consists of a centre fire metallic car- 
tridge of special construction, holding in each one the 
powder, the projectile, and the lubricating wad, arranged 
like the ammunition generally used for small-arms. Both 
solid shot and shell are used. Solid shot made of steel 
are capable of penetrating iron plate of one inch thickness 
at 1000 yards. The shell is of cast-iron. 

Calibre of gun 1-457- 

Rifling one turn in 4 feet. 

(Twist and depth of grooves uniform). 

Number of grooves 12. 

Weight of shell with fuse 16.05 oz. 

Charge of powder 4.3 " 

Weight of complete cartridge . . . 25.04 " 

Weight of piece 1047 lbs. 

Weight of carriage, complete . . . . 1002 " 



2 83 ART OF WAR. 

Hotchkiss 1.65-inch Breech Loading Mountain Gun. 

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF GUN AND CARRIAGE. 

This gun, having been devised especially with reference 
to mountain service, is made as light as practicable. It 
weighs only 116.6 pounds, and one man is able to place it 
upon the back of a mule. The weight of the carriage 
being but 220 pounds, the packing, unpacking, and mount- 
ing of the gun and its carriage require only two men. 

For transportation, the material is distributed as follows : 
One mule carries the piece and two small chests contain- 
ing accessories; another mule carries the carriage and 
shaft, and two others carry the ammunition chests. 

PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS. 

Total length 45.87 inches. 

Total length of bore 41.80 " 

Calibre 1.65 " 

Number of helicoidal grooves . . 10 

Twist (to the right) 49.21 " 

Depth of grooves (uniform) . . . .12 " 

Total weight of piece 116 lbs. 

Cartridge. 

Lbs Ozs. 

Weight of empty shell 1 10^ 

" bursting-charge 1.76 

" loaded shell 2.19 

" powder-charge in cartridge. 5.5 

" cartridge and loaded shell, 2. 1 1 

Initial velocity 1275 feet. 

The Carriage. — The carriage is of steel, and of simple 
construction, the cheeks being two flanged plates, joined 
together by the trail plate, an iron bolt through which the 
elevating screw passes, and an inclined plate under the 
body of the piece. 

SERVICE OF THE PIECE. 

Four (4) men are required for the service of the piece — 
a gunner and three (3) cannoneers. 

General Duties. — The gunner commands, keys up and 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 2S9 

unkeys the shafts, adjusts the rear sight, points, and super- 
intends the service of the ammunition. 

No. 1 opens and closes the breech-block, and fires the 
piece. 

No. 2 introduces the ammunition into the bore, and as- 
sists in pointing. 

No. 3 keeps No. 2 supplied with ammunition, and assists 
the gunner in keying and unkeying shafts. 

Post of Cannoneers at Piece Limbered. — If there is a 
limber, Nos. 1 and 2 are opposite the front part of the 
wheels of the carriage and two feet from them, faced to 
the front, No. 1 on the left and No. 2 on the right. The 
gunner, opposite the rear part of right limber wheel and 
two feet from it, No. 3 in a corresponding position on left 
of limber. When the shafts only are used, the gunner and 
No. 3 would occupy similar positions on the right and left 
of the animal, opposite its head. 

Take Equipments. — The equipments are taken as soon 
as posts are taken at the piece limbered, at the command 
of the Instructor, Take Equipments. Nos. i, 2, and 3 
approach the gunner, who gives to No. 1 a tube pouch, to 
Nos. 2 and 3 a cartridge-pouch, which they wear from the 
left shoulder to the right side. 

Firing. — Having reached the firing-ground, the In- 
structor gives the command, Unhitch, when the gunner, 
assisted by No. 3, unkeys the shafts, and gives the com- 
mand, Drive On. The animal is driven to a convenient 
place, and the piece prepared for action. 

If a limber is used, it will be conducted as prescribed 
in Light Artillery Tactics, the same commands being given 
for unlimbering. 

Post of Cannoneers at Piece Unlimbered. — The post of 
No. 1 is two feet outside the rear of the right wheel of the 
carriage, facing the piece. No. 2 occupies a correspond- 
ing position on the left of the piece. The gunner on the 
left of trail near the end, faced to the front. No. 3 with the 
ammunition chests, or in rear of the limber, if there is one. 

The piece is served by the commands of the Instructor: 
1. Load, 2. Fire. 



290 ART OF WAR. 

Load. — The command is repeated by the gunner, who 
steps to the breech, arranges the rear sight, and superin- 
tends the loading. 

No. 1 opens the breech by turning the handle to the 
rear, and then pulling laterally, until the block strikes 
against the stop-screw. No. 2 inserts the cartridge into 
the chamber until the flange strikes the extractor hook. 
No. 1 then closes the breech by pushing the block, and 
raising the handle to its first position.* 

As soon as the charge is inserted, No. 2 goes to the end 
of the trail and assists the gunner in giving the direction ; 
No. 1 prepares a friction primer. At the signal from the 
gunner No. 2 resumes his post. The gunner then gives 
the necessary elevation, and at the command, Ready, from 
the gunner, No. 1 inserts the friction primer in the vent, 
steps two yards to his left and rear, and at the command, 
Fire, from the gunner, pulls the lanyard with a strong, 
steady movement of the arm. No. 3 keeps No. 2 sup- 
plied with ammunition, and collects the empty shells. 

Change Posts at Piece Limbered. — The commands of the 
Instructor are: — 1. Change Posts. 2. March. At the 
first command, Nos. 1, 2 and 3 take off their equipments 
and lay them at their feet, No. 2 facing about, and at the 
command March, all the cannoneers move off and take 
their new posts and equipments, and face to the proper 
front. 

No. 1 takes the post of No. 3. No. 3 of No. 2, No. 2 
of No. 1. 

Cha?7ge Posts at Piece Unlimbered. — At the first com- 
mand, all remove their equipments and place them at their 
feet, and No. 1 faces to his left. At the command March, 
No. 1 takes the post of No. 3, No. 3 that of No. 2, and 
No. 2 that of No. 1 ; No. 2 passes over the trail for that 
purpose. 

At the command Cease Firing, from the Instructor, 

* Great care must betaken that in pulling out or pushing in the 
breech-block, the handle is horizontal and to the rear, otherwise the 
threads of the block-screw will become battered, and the gun rendered 
unserviceable. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNO' RY. 



repeated by the gunner, the empty shells are gathered up, 
(being intended for further use), and the ammunition 
taken back to the chests or limber, as the case may be. 

Gatling 0.45 Inch Gun. 

NEW MODEL WITH LONG BARRELS. 
DESCRIPTION. 

The Gatling gun consists of a number of very simple 
breech-loading rifled barrels, grouped around and revolv- 




Fig. 17. 



-LIGHT TEN-BARRELED GATLING GUN ON 
CARRIAGE. 



ing about a shaft, to which they are parallel. These bar- 
rels are loaded and fired while revolving, the empty car- 



20 2 ART OF WAR. 

tridge shells being ejected in continuous succession. Each 
barrel is fired only once in a revolution of the group, and 
as many shots are delivered during that time as there are 
barrels, so that the ten-barrel Gatling gun fires ten times 
in one revolution of the group of barrels. The action of 
each part is therefore deliberate, while collectively the dis- 
charges are frequent. The working of the gun is simple. 
One man places one end of a feed -case full of cartridges 
into a hopper at the top of the gun, while another man 
turns a crank by which the gun is revolved. As soon as 
the supply of cartridges in one feed-case is exhausted, 
another case may be substituted, without interrupting the 
revolution or the succession of discharges. The number 
of barrels composing the gun as originally made was ten. 
The bore of each barrel extends through from end to end, 
and the breech is chambered to receive a flanged, centre- 
fire, metallic-case cartridge. The breech ends of all the 
barrels are firmly screwed into a disk or rear barrel-plate, 
which is fastened to the shaft, and the muzzles pass to 
another similar disk, called front barrel-plate, on the same 
shaft. The shaft is considerably longer than the barrels, 
and projects beyond the muzzles, and extends backward 
for some distance behind the breeches of the barrels. 

The gun can be unloaded of any cartridges not fired by 
removing the feed-case, opening the hopper, and reversing 
the motion of the crank. In the new model the mechan- 
ism of the locks has been greatly strengthened, as well as 
otherwise improved, and there are means provided for their 
insertion and removal without taking off the cascabel- 
plate. 

For each lock removed, however, one unexploded cart- 
ridge falls to the ground at each revolution of the gun. 
The gun is incased in a frame which has trunnions, and is 
mounted in the ordinary way, like a field-piece. The screw 
for elevating and depressing the breech, works in a nut 
attached to the trail of the carriage in the usual way. An 
automatic traversing apparatus is applied, by which a lim- 
ited angular movement in a horizontal plane may be given 
to the gun. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 293 

Straight Feed- Cases. — The cases which contain the cart- 
ridges, and which are applied to the hopper when it is 
desired to feed the gun, are long, narrow boxes of sheet- 
iron, reinforced by gun metal, open only at the lower ends. 
The cross-section of the case is trapezoidal, the edge next 
to which the heads lie, being wider than the cartridge- 
heads, while that which receives the points of the balls is 
of the width of the ball. 

Carriage. — The carriage for this piece is similar in its 
construction, and about the same dimensions as the old 
prairie carriage. Firmly bolted to the stock and under 
the trunnions of the gun, is an iron bed-plate. Resting 
on this bed-plate is a Y shaped iron swivel, the branches 
terminating in trunnion-beds, in which the trunnion of the 
gun rests. The swivel turns easily on the bed-plate, and 
is pivoted to it, permitting the action of the traverser and 
oscillator. 

Implements with Carriage. — Two trail-handspikes under 
the stock and hung on washer-hooks. 

One wiping rod and one ejector carried in an iron cas- 
ing or tube under the stock. 

One lock-chain on the right. 

Clamp for elevating screw on the left. 

Gunner's seat of sheet-iron on the stock. 

Limber. — The only peculiarity about this limber, is the 
manner in which the ammunition is disposed. The back 
of the limber is a drop-lid ; when down, it is supported 
by a strong leather strap. In this position, the lid serves 
as a shelf for serving ammunition, and refilling feed- 
cases. 

The body of the chest is divided into compartments, 
fifty for feed-cases and one larger for tools or implements, 
thus giving each limber a carrying capacity of 2000 
rounds. 

The feed-cases are filled by holding the case near the 
middle in the left hand, the closed end inclining slightly 
downward, and placing the cartridges in singly with the 
right hand, and letting them roll to the top. 

The stop-spring may be held back during this operation, 



294 ART 0F WAR. 

by placing some object between it and the case. A wooden 
wedge can easily be made for this purpose. 

Weight of gun 200 lbs. 

Weight of carriage with implements and turn- 
table 360 lbs. 

Weight of limber (without ammunition) .... 440 lbs. 

Service. 

For the service of this piece four (4) men are necessary, 
a gunner and three cannoneers. 

The equipments consist of two pouches, which are hung 
on the knob of the cascabel. 

Posts of Cannoneers at Piece Limbered. — Nos. 1 and 2 
on the left and right of piece respectively, aligned on the 
front part of carriage wheels, and one yard from them. 
No. 3 on left of limber aligned on rear part of wheel, and 
one yard from it. Gunner, a corresponding position on 
right of limber, all faced to the front. 

Take Equipments. At this command from the Instruc- 
tor, Nos. 2 and 3 approach the gunner and receive each a, 
cartridge or case-pouch, which they sling from the left 
shoulder to the right side. No. 1 then assists the gunner 
to remove the covering, if there is one which is placed in 
the limber. 

The piece isunlimbered and prepared for action, accord- 
ing to the principles, and by the commands laid down in 
Light Artillery Tactics, No. 3 assisting the gunner at the 
trail, and No. 1 handing the gunner the trail-handspike. 

Posts of Cannoneers at Piece Unlimbered. — No. 1 on 
right of piece, facing it and two feet from rear part of 
wheel. No. 2-, corresponding position on the left. Gun- 
ner on left of trail-handspike near the end. No. 3 imme- 
diately in rear of limber. 

General Duties. — The gunner prepares the piece for fir- 
ing, adjusting the sights, superintends the firing, gives the 
necessary direction and elevation, regulates the traverser 
and oscillator, and during the firing sees that the shots 
strike the proper point. No. 1 turns the crank and sees 
that the cartridges feed properly, and uses the ejector when 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 295 

necessary. No. 2 feeds the piece with ammunition from 
feed-cases, and sees that the cartridges feed properly. No. 
3 keeps No. 2 supplied with feed-cases, carries back empty 
ones, and assists the gunner in pointing if necessary. 

The commands of the Instructor are: 1. Load, 2. 
Commence firing, 3. Cease firing, 4. Secure piece. 

At the command Load, by the Instructor, the gunner 
repeats the command, and, stepping in, adjusts the rear 
sight for the proper distance. He then gives the piece the 
proper elevation by the elevating screw, correcting the di- 
rection by the traversing screw, and resumes his post. No. 
1 steps in, frees the crank from the latch, which he turns 
under the casing, and seizes the crank-handle with his 
right hand, being careful not to turn it till the command 
Commence firing is given. No. 2 steps in between the 
wheel and piece, and, as soon as he is supplied with feed- 
cases, takes one from his pouch in his right hand, and 
springs it on the hopper, the slit to the right and projec- 
tiles to the front. As soon as a case is empty he takes it 
from the hopper and replaces it by a filled one. The 
empty one is returned to the pouch. No. 3 runs at once 
to the limber, fills his pouch with feed-cases, takes it to 
No. 2, who exchanges his empty pouch for the full one of 
No. 3. The cases are placed in the pouches spring catch 
to the right. No. 3 takes the empty pouch to the limber, 
fills it, and carries it to No. 2, and exchanges with him for 
the pouch of empty cases. No. 3 runs with the empty 
cases to the limber, places them in compartments, fills his 
pouch with filled ones, and proceeds to the piece and ex- 
changes pouches with No. 2, thus keeping up a constant 
supply of cases. 

Commence Firing. — This command is repeated by the 
gunner. No. 1 turns the crank with a uniform motion, 
avoiding all sudden movements or lateral wrenchings, al- 
lowing ample time for the cartridges to drop from the 
feed-cases into the carrier. 

Should any of the shells not be thrown out after firing, 
or the piece become jammed in any manner, he will at 
once notify the gunner, who will see that the proper means 
are taken to remove the obstruction. 



296 



AF' 



If the gun jams, remove the feed-case at once, open the 
hopper, and reverse the crank until all the cartridges are 
taken out. This will be found to save time, unless the 
cause of the jamming is evident, and in the immediate 
vicinity of the hopper. 

When it is necessary to use the ejecting-rod, No. 1 steps 
to the front, unkeys it, and, under the direction of the 
gunner, removes the obstruction by forcing it backwards. 

Cease Firing. — At the command of the Instructor, re- 
peated by the gunner, No. 1 ceases to turn the crank. No. 
2 removes the feed-case and opens the hopper. The gun- 
ner directs No. 1 to slowly reverse the crank while No. 2 
removes the cartridges and restores them to the feed-case, 
which he gives with all the others, empty and filled, to 
No. 3 to return to the limber-chest. No. 1 secures the 
crank by the latch, and all resume their posts. 

If for any purpose it is desired to temporarily arrest the 
firing, the Instructor or gunner commands Halt. No. i 
stops turning the crank, and all remain at their positions 
until the Instructor or gunner commands, Commence fir- 
ing or Cease firing. 

Secure Piece. — The gunner steps to the piece and lowers 
the rear sight, runs down the elevating screw, and, with 
the assistance of Nos. 1 and 2, who step to the front for 
that purpose, places and fastens the canvas over the piece ; 
all then resume their posts. 

Service of the Piece with Reduced Numbers. — When the 
number of cannoneers is reduced, the respective duties are 
performed as indicated by the following : 





Distribution of Di 


TIES. 


Numbers Retained. 


Gunner. 


1 


2 


Gunner i 

" 1 and 2 


G 1 
G 


2 and 3 

1 


2 and 3 



Precautions. — Never lay the cover on the ground, as it 
is liable to have sand or gravel adhering to it when placed 
on the gun, which may derange the working of the parts. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 297 

In traveling, the piece should always be covered. 

See that all the parts are kept well oiled. 

A partially filled feed -case should not be put back into 
the ammunition chest without being filled up, as the car- 
tridges may become inverted and jam the gun. 

Before using the oscillator, be careful to take out the 
swivel pin, so as to give the full field of fire. 

To Take the Gun Apart. 

1. Remove the locks. 

2. Remove the screws and take off cascabel-plate. 

3. Remove the screw from the end of the crank-shaft 
and take off the oscillating-screw, drive out the steady-pin 
and take out the crank-shaft worm and sleeve. 

4. Remove screw from rear end of main shaft and take 
off worm gear, using clamp for that purpose. 

5. Take off brass traversing apparatus. 

6. Take out screws, and remove hopper and breech- 
casing. 

7. Unscrew screw from lock-cylinder, back out steady- 
pin which holds the rear-guide nut, and remove the nut. 
(The nut works on a left-hand thread). 

8. Take off lock-cylinder and carrier-block. 

To remove the barrels singly, stand the cluster of muz- 
zles up, and let the rear end of the main shaft strike gently 
on a block ; the shaft and front plate will be forced off, 
after which the barrels may be unscrewed with a socket- 
wrench. 

To take the breech-casing apart, remove the screws 
which hold the double cam to the diaphragm, and slide it 
out to the rear. 

To Assemble the Gun. 

1. Put the breech-casing together, screw the barrels into 
the rear-plate, replace the front plate and shaft, insert the 
front end of the shaft into the socket in front of the frame, 
and rest the front and rear plates on blocks. 

2. Replace the carrier-block and lock-cylinder. 

3. Put on the rear-guide nut and replace steady-pin and 
screw. 



298 ART OF WAR. 

4. Put on the breech-casing and hopper, and replace the 
screws. 

5. Put on the brass traversing apparatus. 

6. Replace the worm-gear. 

7. Replace worm and sleeve, and insert crank shaft, 
fastening the worm in its place with the steady-pin. 

8. Replace the oscillating nut and set-screw. 

9. Replace the cascabel plate and screws. 

10. Replace locks. 

In taking the gun apart, it will be found much more 
convenient and expeditious to first remove the cascabel 
plate, add then the locks by hand ; and, in assembling it, 
they can be inserted in the same manner before replacing 
the cascabel plate. 

When the lock-extractor is used, the breech plug is 
turned horizontally, the crank-handle is turned until the 
mark on the rear barrel-plate and the arrow on the hopper 
coincide, when the lock is withdrawn. 

Siege Guns. 

The siege guns used in the U. S. are 30 pounder Par- 
rott ;* the 4^ inch rifled gun ; 8 inch howitzer ; 8 and 
10 inch mortar; and 24 pounds Coehorn mortar. 

The general form of the Parrott gun is as follows : It is 
made of cast-iron reinforced by a jacket of wrought iron. 
The bore is 4.2 in diameter, and the length is about izo/'o; 
its weight is about 4200 lbs. It is a rifled gun, has no 
preponderance; it has 7 grooves, 1-10 in depth. Weight 
of projectiles, 25 to 30 lbs. ; charge, 3^ lbs. mortar powder ; 
range upwards of 6000 yards. The 4^ inch rifled gun is 
similar in appearance and shape to the 3 inch rifled field 
gun. Its weight is 3450 lbs. ; diameter of bore, 4^ inches ; 
length of bore, 119 inches; number of grooves, 9; depth 
of grooves, .073 inches; in twist, 15 feet; weight of pro- 
jectile, 30 lbs. ; charge, 3^ lbs. It is made of cast iron. 
The 8 inch howitzer is nearly obsolete ; its form is shown 
in Fig. 3; it is 5 feet long; weight, 2600 lbs., with pre- 

* The 30 lbs. Parrott is not included among the regulation guns of 
the U. S. service, but was used to a greater extent during the war than 
any other. It has been therefore thought best to describe them. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 



299 




^ 



EFC 




Fia.6. 




Fig. 18. 



3°° 



ART OF WAR. 



ponderance of 380 lbs. ; bore, 8 inches diameter and 46^ 
inches long ; projectile, 44 lbs. \ charge, 4 lbs. 

The form of a mortar is shown in Fig. 8. The object 
of a mortar is to obtain a vertical fire, or to place projec- 




Q^/S 




Fig. 19. 

tiles within an enemy's work; the projectiles used are 
shells, weighing 44 lbs. for the 8 inch and 88 lbs. for the 
10 inch mortar. The Coehorn Mortar throws a 24 lb. 
shell. 

The following table gives the dimensions, weights, etc., 
of mortars : 





13 inch. 


10 inch. 
Sea-Coast. 


10 inch. 
Siege. 


8 inch. 


Coehorn. 


Weight 


17120 
54.6" 
35-i" 


7300 
47"-5 
32". 5 


1900 
28" 
20". s 


1010 
22". 
16". 


164 

i6". 3 
8". 7 
4"- 2 5 


Length of Bore ...... 













Sea-Coast Cannon. 

The uses of sea-coast guns are to protect permanent 
works, harbors, etc. They are always in forts or turrets, 
or floating batteries, and are of too great size to carry 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 



301 



about. The sea coast guns now used in the U. S. are the 
20" and 15" smooth bores, and the 12", 10" and 8" rifles. 
The first two and last named guns are comparatively use- 
less, as owing to the rapid progress made in manufacturing 
heavy guns, rifled cannon of far greater power, and less 
weight, will be used almost exclusively. Smooth-bore 
guns are also called Rodman guns, because of their manu- 
facture on a plan proposed by Capt. Rodman, of the U. S. 
Army, shown in the general form of the 20" and 15" guns. 

Their dimensions and weights are given in the table. 

The 12", 10", and 8',' rifles are made by converting old 
15", 12", and 10" smooth-bores. 

Wrought iron and steel tubes are introduced, and the 
guns reinforced. The guns are all more or less in an ex- 
perimental state, and the absolute type of each sized gun 
is not definitely determined upon. 

Table of Projectiles and Powder Weights. 



Gun. 


Charge. 


Projectile. 


Range. 






Lbs. 

200 

150 


Lbs. 
100 
60 


Solid. 

1080 

450 

620 

292 

32-5 


Skell. 


Yards. 






33° 
475 


7800 


















4^2 i n - rifle 
3 2 in. rifle) 
3 in. rifle . . 


2,% 

1 


3% 


25-5 
13.60 
9-5 


3500 
6500 
3800 




1 


10 







Table of Carriages used in U. S. Service. 



Kind. 



Weight. 



Mortar Wagon 

3.2 in. Metal Gun Carriage 

3 in. Gun Carriage and Limber Equipped 

Gatling. Same 

Gardner 

Siege Gun Carriage 

12 in. Rifle and 15 in. Smooth Bore { T°P Car ~ 

^ . ( ri ge . . 

3 in. Caisson 

Gatling 

Gardner 



3185 
1300 
378i 
1546 

578 
3743 
5800 
17000 
3819 
2065 

697 



302 



ART OF WAR. 



Gun Carriages. 

Gun carriages are classified into field, siege and sea- 
coast. The principal parts of field siege carriages are the 
stocks (a), the checks (b, fr), the axletree (V), the wheels (d ), 
the elevating screw (V), Fig. i, p. 299. The stock is made 
of wood, the front end joined to the axle, and the rear 
end covered by a plate of iron, called the trail plate (/), 
and having a large iron ring, called the lunette ring {£). 
When in position for traveling the lunette ring passes over 
a hook, called the pintle hook, of the front axle. When 
in position for firing, the trail rests on the ground, and the 
handspike is inserted in the two rings (J, i), called point- 
ing-rings, to give direction to the gun. The elevating 
screws give the elevation or depression for aiming. The 
checks are two strong pieces of wood firmly attached to 
the stock and axle by bolts called assembling bolts. They 
have a curve cut in their upper surface, and a plate fits in 
this curve, called the trunnion beds. The trunnions of the 
gun rest in the trunnion beds ; they are secured in their 
places by two plates of iron called (/i, K) cap squares. 
The axle is composed of the axle tree, made of wrought 
iron, and the axle body, made of wood. The siege gun 
carriages are similar to the field gun carriages. Their 
principal differences are shown in Fig. 2. The limber is 
the carriage to which the gun carriage is attached when 
traveling. It is composed of [Fig. 4] (a) axle tree, (7) 
fork, (// ) splinter bar, (<f) pintle hook, (g) pole, yokes and 
pads [Fig. 4], limber chest (h). Fig. 4 represents the 
caisson, which is but a double limber, having three chests 
for ammunition, a spare wheel, a spare pole, and a spare 
handspike. The caisson also carries a felling axe, shovel, 
and pickaxe, tarpaulin, two buckets and watering buckets. 
Figs. 5 and 6 represent the traveling forge for repairing 
broken iron work and shoeing horses, and battery wagon, 
which carries tools and supplies for repairs. The 3". 2 gun 
carriage is made of metal throughout. 

(Table gives sizes and dimensions of all gun carriages 
and beds.) 

Mortars, on account of the high angle under which they 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 



3°3 



are fired, are mounted on beds instead of carriages, which 
would break or overturn with the recoil. (Fig. 8) shows 
the mortar bed. it consists of checks made of wrought 
iron (a, a) and two trunnions (b, b) which connect the 
checks (c, c) are projections for placing the handspikes in 
aiming, and a bolt (d, d) for the same purpose. The 
longer mortars have no eccentric axle and wheels, for 
facility in pointing, aiming and loading. Mortars are 
carried in wagons made especially for the purpose. 

It is composed of a limber and body ; the body consists 
of two middle rails and two side rails, which rest directly 
on the axle and are connected together by straps of iron 
and cross pieces of wood ; at the rear is fastened a windlass 
to assist in mounting and dismounting guns and mortars. 
The weight of the wagon complete is 3185 lbs. 

To insure accuracy of fire, mortars and siege guns are 
fired from platforms made especially for the purpose. The 
principle of their construction is lightness, to be transported 
with ease, combined with strength. 

Table giving the Dimensions and Pieces of Different 
Platforms. 



Size 13-inch. 
Platform. 



Size, 10-inch. 
Platform. 

I2 / XI2 , XI^". 



Table of Sea Coast 
Mortar Platforms. 



No. of Pieces. 
Deck planks. . . 

Sleepers 

Bolts 

Nuts 

Wood Screws . . 
Iron Plates . . . 
Planking .... 





13-inch. 






10-inch. 


i 








V 








u 














ft 






4> 


3. 









JZ 

-3 


bJ0 


1 












£ 


3 


H 





£ 


J 


15 


12 


110 


12 


120 


12 


144 


is 


12 


180 


12 


123 


12 


144 


62 


1 


24 


k'd 


48 


1 


18 


62 


2 


^ 


2 


4B 


2 


I 


501 


_5„ 


180 


K'd 


224 


_5_ 


3 


2 


54 


180 


y& 


2 


4« 


144 


is 


12 


180 


2 


I20 


12 


144 



R'd 

2 
R'd 



Oak and yellow pine. 

Sea-Coast or Stationary Carriages are divided into bar- 
bette and casemate carriages. Barbette carriages are those 
in which the gun fires over the parapet. Casemate car- 



304 ART OF WAR. 

riages are those in which the gun fires through a port or 
embrasure of the fortification or battery. Barbette car- 
riages are composed of the gun carriage (1) [Fig. 9], and 
the chassis (2). The gun carriage has an eccentric axle 
and wheels for moving the carriage and gun front or rear 
on the chassis carriage. The top and bottom of the cross- 
section of the chassis is similar in shape to a double /, J. 
The top carriage is similar to the mortar beds, the chassis 
is firmly attached to the permanent platform by a tongue, 
and according to whether the pintle is at the front of or 
directly under the centre of the chassis, it is called a front 
or center pintle carriage. 

The chassis rests on wheels, those near the pintle being 
eccentric on heavier guns, and the rear wheels called the 
traverse wheels, run on iron rails. The direction is given 
to the gun by traversing the chassis to the right or to the 
left, and the elevation and depression is given by the top 
carriage, a ratchet post (d) being firmly attached to it, 
through which an iron handspike passes and engages in the 
notches on the breech of the gun. Between the rails of the 
chassis are one or two long cylinders, filled either with air 
or oil. A piston rod connected with the top carriage works 
in these cylinders and checks the recoil of the guns. The 
gun carriage and chassis are made entirely of wrought iron. 
New carriages are being designed for the 12" and 10" rifles. 

Projectiles. 

Small arm projectiles. Projectiles for small arms are 
divided into two classes of cartridges : centre-fire and rim- 
fire. The former is almost exclusively u^ed. A cartridge 
is divided into four parts (Fig. 10). The shell (a), the 
fulminate (b), the charge (V), and the bullet (*/). The 
shell is formed of a single piece of copper or brass, drawn 
out, so as to be thin near the bullet, and thick near the 
base. At the base is placed the fulminate, which is a com- 
position of chlorate of potassa and sulphate of antimony, 
when the fulminate is placed in a cup in the centre of the 
base so that the firing-pin strikes the centre directly. The 
cartridge is centre-fire ; when this fulminate is around the 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY 



305 



inside of the base it is rim-fire. The charge of gunpowder 
varies in military rifles, from 70 grains to 90 grains, and in 
some cases goes even higher. The bullet, made entirely 




Fig. 20. 

of lead, varies in weight from 400 to 550 grains. In order 
that the bullet may take the grooves or rifling of the gun, 
there is a small recess cut in the base ; the force of the 
gunpowder acting in this recess expands the lead, and 
forces the bullet in the grooves; that part of the bullet 
enclosed by the shell has small grooves called caniines cut 
and filled with a lubricant, which as the bullet passes 
along the rifling, lubricates and keeps the grooves of the 
base clean. 

Cartridges for different guns vary in different particulars, 
but the general principle of construction is the same in all. 
Cartridges for small arms are made entirely by machinery. 



3° 6 



ART OF WAR. 



Cannon Projectiles. 



All cannon projectiles are either spherical or oblong, 
and are made either of cast-iron, wrought -iron, steel or 
bronze, or combinations of these. 

Ammunition for field guns is composed of solid shot, 
shells, case-shot, canister and grape shot. A stand of 
ammunition is made up of the projectile (#), [Fig. n], the 
cartridge bag (J?"), the sabot (V), the strap (d), the cylin- 
der (e). 

Solid shot are used to produce effect by impact or pene- 
tration alone. They are made of cast-iron or steel, and 
require as a rule heavier charges of powder than shells. 
The tables give weight of solid shot and shells, etc., and 
corresponding charges for different guns used in U. S. 
Service. *» 

Tables giving Dimensions of Weights of Cannon used in U. 
S. Service. 













.5 
























O 
























.s 








tn 




u 


KIND. 


73 


u 
a 

V 

13 









V 

S 
5 


u 

s 
5 


> 



O 


> 

O 
O 

O 

O 








O 






c 



X. 


■£ 


& 


'•B 


•5 


<_ 


A 


-= 


£ 






Q. 
Ph 


to 

1 


15° 

V 


C 


i 


§ 




2 


■a 


-3 


a. 
Q 








Lbs. 


In. 




In. 










2o-in\ Smooth 
15-inj bore. 


Cast iron 


None. 


1 16000 


243-5 


10.50 


64.00 


34.00 










" 


" 


49000 


190 


11.00 


48.00 


25.00 
























In. 


In 


In. 


In. 


In. 


12 -! n lRifle. 

10-m J 


" 


" 


52000 


192 


14.00 


48. 


25- 


21. 


1-045 


•75 


• 125 


" 


" 


40600 


180 


158 


41.6 


21. 


i7- 


1. 1 50 


.70 


.850 


4% Rifle. . . 


" 


300 lbs 


357o 


133 


26.5 


iS-6 


9.00 


9- 


•97 


.06 


•075 


3.2 Rifle . . . 


Steel. 


None. 


791 


















3.2 Rifle . . . 


Wrought 
























iron. 


40 lbs. 


820 


72.70 


21.15 


9-4 


6.00 


7- 


.84 


•05 


•075 


Gatling . . . 


Steel. 


None. 


From 

120 to 

250 


















Gardner . . . 


" 


" 


125 


















J3-in. mortar. 


Cast iron 


" 


17120 


54-o5 


2.7 














10-in. mortar. 


" 


" 


J7800 
\1900 


47-o5 I 
28.00J 


f 3- 2 5 
\ 2.00 














8-in. mortar. 


" 


" 


IOIO 


22. 


2.00 














Coehorn . . . 


Bronze. 


" 


164 


16.00 


151 















ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 307 

Table of Siege Guns and Mortar Platforms. 

No. of Sleepers No. 0/ No. of 

Kind of Platform. Size. and Size. Hurter Rails. Plank. 

Siege Gun is'xo/ = 12 inch o'xs'^i^" 1 36 

Mortar g'xg' = 6 same as above. 21 

Rail Platform for Mor- 
tar 9'xo/ 3 sleepers and 2 rails instead of deck planks. 

Weight of siege gun platform 2601% lbs. 

" mortar " 1220 lbs. 

Shells include not only hollow shot used in guns and 
mortars, but also grenades. Shells are fired with less 
charges of powder than solid shot. Shells act by impact 
and explosion both. 

Shells are exploded by means of fuses which are ignited 
as the shell leaves the gun, and are cut to burn any desired 
time. In mortar and all round or spherical shells, the 
principal parts are the body (i) [Fig. 12], the cavity (2), 
the fuse-hole (3), and the ears (4). The cavity is where 
the powder that explodes the shell is put ; the fuse-hole is 
for filling the cavity with powder and holding the fuse, 
and the ears are two notches on the upper surface of the 
shell, to insert hook with which to handle the shell while 
loading. The principal oblong shells used in the United 
States are the Parrott, the Schenkle, the Hotchkiss and But- 
ler shells. The Parrott shell is composed of a cast-iron 
body [Fig. 13] (1), with brass rings fastened to the base 
(2). The shells are made to take the grooves in rifled 
guns by the gases generated by the explosion of the gun- 
powder pressing against the brass ring, and expanding it 
in the grooves. The shell is divided into two compart- 
ments, the upper one filled with a bursting charge. The 
shell is exploded by a time or concussion fuse. The 
Schenkle projectile is composed of a cast-iron body [Fig. 
14] (1), the lower part of which is a cone. Around the 
cone is a ring (2) of papier-mache, which is expanded in the 
grooves of the gun when fired, and causes the projectile 
to take the rifling ; as it leaves the gun this ring is blown 
to pieces. The Hotchkiss projectile is composed of the 
body (1) [Fig. 15], the exploding ring of lead (2), and 
the cup of brass (3). The explosion forces the cup against 
the lead ring, and causes the shell to take the grooves. 



308 ART OF WAB. 

The Butler shell for muzzle-loading guns consists of a 
shell of iron with a double-lipped ring or band, having a 
narrow channel or groove in its rear face. The groove 
separates the ring into two portions, the upper lip and the 
lower lip. The gases remaining in this channel force the 
upper lip into the grooves of the bore, and at the same 
time press the lower lip tightly to the shell, so that the 
ring cannot slip off. 

Oblong projectiles are used in rifled guns only, and are 
caused to take the grooves of the bore by one of three 
methods : ist, the expansive method, where the force of 
the charge, acting on the ring or soft metal sabot, presses 
it into the grooves. 2d, the compressive system, used in 
breech-loading guns only, where the shell fits into a cham- 
ber slightly larger than the bore, and is forced through 
the bore. 3d, the studded or flanged system, in which the 
shell is fitted with studs or flanges that fit in the grooves. 

Case-shot is a collection of small shot or projectiles en- 
closed in a case ; the shell is broken by the shock of dis- 
charge, and scatters the projectiles in a volley. Case- 
shot are used against masses of troops at short distances. 
Case-shot are either canister, or spherical case. Grape- 
shot consists of nine balls, arranged in layers of three balls 
each. The top and bottom (1 and 2) [Fig. 16]. are thin 
iron plates, and (3) and (4) are iron rings. The whole 
stand is held together by a spindle of iron and a nut (5) 
passing through the centre of the plates. Canister shot 
consist of 27 small cast-iron balls arranged in 4 layers, the 
top of 6, the others of 7 each. In field gun canister shot 
there are 48 balls. The case is a tin cylinder closed at the 
bottom by a thick cast-iron plate, and at the top by a thin 
plate of sheet iron. The ends of the case are cut into 
strips and lap over the plates holding them in place. 

Spherical Case or shrapnel consists of a thin cast-iron 
spherical shell, filled with round musket balls. Melted 
sulphur or resin is poured into the shell, filling all the in- 
terstices. (17) shows the spherical case and spherical shot. 

Muzzle-loading cannon are fired by means of friction- 
primers. Primers are composed of two brass tubes (Fig. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY 



3°9 



i8) soldered at right angles to each other. The upper 
tube is the shorter and smaller, and contains the fulminate 
of friction powder. A wire with a roughened edge passes 
through the friction powder, and the outer end is turned 
over into a loop. The long tube is filled with fine rifle 
powder ; as the roughened wire is jerked out of the tube 
it ignites the friction powder, which in turn ignites the 
rifle powder. 




Fig. 21. 

Shells are exploded by means of fuses. Fuses are di- 
vided into three classes, percussion, concussion, and time 
fuses. A percussion fuse explodes by the striking of the 
projectile against an object. In the top of the shell -is 
placed a plunger (i) [Fig. 19], having a nipple (2), and a 
channel (3), filled with fine powder. A percussion cap is 
placed in the nipple, and a nut or cap secured into the 
opening of the shell (4). When the shell strikes, the plun- 



310 ART OF WAR. 

ger is driven by the impact with such force against the nut 
as to explode the cap, which ignites the fine powder, which 
in turn ignites the charge in the shell. 

A concussion fuse is composed of a wooden plug and a 
paper fuse. The case is made of paper, and is filled with 
the fuse composition. A long cavity is formed in the 
lower part of the composition, and in this cavity is in- 
serted a spindle of plaster of Paris, moist, and a long 
needle is inserted in it. As the composition is ignited at 
the top and burns away, it leaves the plaster column un- 
supported when the shell strikes. The shock breaks the 
column and the flame of the composition falls on the 
bursting charge and ignites it. 

There are three kinds of fuses used in the U. S. — the 
Mortar fuse, the Bowman fuse, and the sea-coast fuse. In 
the mortar fuse (Fig. 20), the case is made of wood, 
through which a bore runs nearly to the bottom ; the bore 
is filled with a composition which burns at a fixed rate ; 
at the top the bore is slightly enlarged, and a priming of 
unsealed powder is placed there, which is protected by a 
cap of waterproof paper; the exterior of the case is 
marked off in inches and tenths, corresponding to the 
rate of burning. The sea-coast fuse is distinguished from 
the mortar fuse by having a metal covering constructed 
so as to prevent the water from extinguishing the burning 
composition. 

The Bowman fuse is used in field and siege projectiles ; 
it is made as represented in Fig. 21, of an alloy of tin or 
lead in the form of a circular disc. A slim thread is cut 
in its edge, by which means it is fastened in the shell ; the 
upper surface is marked by the recesses and a graduated 
arc ; beneath the upper face lies a circular groove filled 
with unsealed powder, the graduations on the arc corres- 
ponding to the time of burning of the powder in the 
groove beneath it ; the only outlet to the powder groove 
is directly under the jut of the arc ; at that point it con- 
nects with the bursting charge. 

Rockets are used in warfare, but their use at present is 
nearly obsolete, except when dynamite is the explosive. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 3II 

The personal outfit of the soldier, excluding his arms 
proper, is as follows : 

The equipment comprises the knapsack, belts and plates, 
haversack, canteen, cartridge-box and bayonet-scabbard. 
The implements of the infantry soldier are his gun, bayo- 
net, bayonet-sheath, and shell-extractors. The cartridge- 
box is a leather case carried on a belt fastened around the 
waist ; it is divided into compartments for holding cart- 
ridges ; the box now in use holds 20 cartridges. Two 
boxes are provided for each soldier. 

A field-belt, made of strong pliable material woven in 
one entire piece, with loops for holding cartridges, has 
lately been adopted ; it holds from 40 to 70 cartridges, 
depending upon the length of belt. This is used exclu- 
sively in campaign. 

The equipments of Artillery are, for field service, cart- 
ridge-pouches, primer-pouches, gunner-pouches, and pen- 
dulum hausse, and these are carried usually in the limber- 
chest of the piece ; beneath the piece are the sponge and 
rammer staffs, wormer, bucket and handspikes. In siege 
guns, a box called pass-box is used instead of pouches for 
carrying the cartridges. In sea-coast cannon and mortars, 
special sights and handspikes are used in addition to the 
above-named implements ; and in mortars, pointing cords 
and stakes, quadrant and spirit level. 

The nomenclature of Artillery and Cavalry harness, 
and saddles, etc., their proper use and preservation, may 
be found in the "Tactics" adopted for the use of those 
arms, as well as all manuals, drills and exercises. 

Gunpowder. 

The principal explosives used in warfare are gunpowder, 
gun-cotton, and dynamite or nitro-glycerine. 

Gunpowder is composed of saltpetre, charcoal, and sul- 
phur. In the U. S. the following proportions of each are 
used : 

Saltpetre 75 parts. 

Charcoal 15 parts. 

Sulphur 10 parts. 



312 ART OF WAR. 

Charcoal is the combustible ingredient in gunpowder, 
while the saltpetre furnishes oxygen necessary to make 
rapid combustion, and change the whole into a gas. Sul- 
phur adds intensity to the flame, renders the mass less lia- 
ble to absorb moisture, and increases the column of gas. 

There are five kinds of gunpowder in the U. S. service, 
viz : 

Hexagonal, or mammoth, for largest guns. 

Cannon, for small sea-coast guns and mortars. 

Mortar, for siege guns and field guns. 

Musket, for small arms and rifles. 

Rifle, for pistols. 

The sizes of gunpowder are tabled by means of sieves 
of sheet brass, with round holes, the diameters of which 
are as follows.: 

Large Hole. Small Hole. 

Hexagonal 0.9 in. 0.6 in. 

Cannon 0.31 " 0.27 " 

Mortar . . . ' 0.1 "" 0.07 " 

Musket 0.6 " o-°35 " 

Rifle. All smaller than the above and not mealed. 

The weight of a cubic inch of gunpowder is 2 oz., and a 
cubic foot 54 lbs. 

Gunpowder is packed in barrels of 100 lbs. each. The 
heads of the barrels are painted black, and the contents 
are marked in white oil colors — the number of the barrel, 
the name of the manufacturer, kind of powder, mean in- 
itial velocity, and pressure per square inch. Gunpowder 
is kept in magazines especially built for it, safely. To 
keep it well preserved, the circulation of air must be well 
kept up, under the flooring as well as above, and in dry 
weather the magazine should be opened whenever the air 
outside is cooler than that inside. Chloride of calcium 
placed in open boxes will absorb the moisture in the mag- 
azine. Whoever enters the magazine should carry no 
metal, about him ; should take off his shoes, and put on 
thick woolen socks. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 313 

Gun-Cotton. 

Gun-cotton is prepared by mixing three parts of sul- 
phuric acid to one part of nitric acid, and, when the mix- 
ture has cooled down, putting clean rough cotton in it, in 
an open state. When soaked, the acid is poured off, and 
the cotton tightly pressed and then covered for thirty min- 
utes, after which it is thoroughly washed in running water 
to remove all acid. It is then washed in an alkaline so- 
lution, and then left to dry. Gun-cotton, properly made, 
will not explode under 380 F. It is a very explosive sub- 
stance, and very powerful. It leaves no stain or mark, 
but little smoke. It is used principally in torpedoes and 
shells, as it acts too quickly to be used in fire arms. It is 
kept in a compressed state in little cylinders, 3' long by 
25" diameter, about 3 dozen in a box. The box is filled 
with water. It looks like raw cotton in appearance, but is 
more brittle, and harsher to the touch. 

Nitro-glycerine is made by mixing glycerine and nitric 
acid at a low temperature. When fresh it has a creamy 
white color, but by standing it becomes colorless. Its 
taste is sweet and odor aromatic. When made properly 
of pure material, it is perfectly safe to handle, as it is not 
sensitive to percussion or friction unless violent ; but made 
of impure materials, it easily decomposes, and while de- 
composing it is extremely sensitive, often exploding by the 
slightest concussion, even when unconfined. It is trans- 
ported and kept in tin cans of about 45 lbs. each, and 
frozen. Water does not affect it, and it will not mix with 
water. When mixed with various substances it is known 
as dynamite, dustine, explosive gelatine, Rend Rock, giant 
powder, etc. The force of pure glycerine is estimated as 
about ten times that of the best gunpowder. 

Pure nitro-glycerine is almost colorless, slightly yellowish, 
1^ times as heavy as water, dissolves in wood alcohol, from 
which it may be precipitated by adding water. It freezes 
at 40 F. Freshly made nitro-glycerine requires, however, 
a lower temperature. It is difficult to explode while frozen, 
and it is therefore kept, when not wanted for use, in that 
state. It is poisonous, and when handled or touched, 



314 ART OF WAR. 

causes severe headache. Black coffee is a partial anti- 
dote. 

Dynamite is the most commonly used of all the combi- 
nations of nitro-glycerine. It is made by the absorption 
of nitro-glycerine in kieselguhr, a white, porous, soft pow- 
der, resembling flour. Kieselguhr is a silicious earth, 
found in New Hampshire and Hanover, and when of good 
quality, it is about one-fifth the weight of flour, and ab- 
sorbs three times its weight of nitro-glycerine without 
becoming wet. When well made, dynamite in small 
quantities will burn, but in large quantities it must be kept 
from the fire or it will explode. 

Dynamite is made in two qualities, known as No. 1 and 
No. 2. Dynamite No. 1 is manufactured by the Govern- 
ment, and is pure and safe to handle, extremely powerful 
and very expensive. Dynamite No. 2 is known by various 
other names, as Giant Powder, Rend Rock, etc. In these 
mixtures the absorbent agent is usually an active agent 
also, and consists of a mixture of saltpetre and charcoal 
with other substances; sometimes Gun- Cotton is used. 
The quantity of nitro-glycerine in No. 2 is usually small. 
The great expense of the material and manufacture, and 
the danger attending it, renders the manufacture of Dyna- 
mite No. 1 possible only to governments. It is used in 
torpedoes, etc., charge amounting to 500 lbs. at times. 
When any of the free acid is left in nitro-glycerine, the 
mixture is dangerous in the extreme. When dynamite or 
nitro-glycerine in any of its forms turns slightly green, 
spontaneous degeneration or decomposition has set in, 
and the mixture must be at once destroyed and without 
handling. 

Preservation and Care of Arms and Ammunition. 

As soon as possible after using, all small arms should be 
cleaned, after dusty or rainy marches. The barrel is thor- 
oughly wiped out, and an oiled rag run through it ; if any 
moisture has settled on the locks or breech mechanism, 
the gun or pistol should be dismounted and the parts 
cleaned and oiled. The stocks should be oiled frequently. 



ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY. 315 

Arms should be covered by a curtain or door, when in 
barracks or quarters, to keep the dust off. All spare parts 
of guns, pistols, etc., are kept packed away in boxes in the 
Armory, and every box is marked with the amount and 
nature of its contents; "20 rifles with bayonets," etc. 
Cannon should be lacquered once a year with a lacquer 
consisting of coal-tar and turpentine. The muzzles of 
guns mounted are kept depressed, and tompions are in- 
serted. A vent plug should be inserted also, and once a 
month the boxes should be sponged dry, and oiled. In 
all breech-loading pieces the breech mechanism is kept 
oiled and cleaned continually. All sponges, rammers, 
worms and ladles, etc., etc., are placed in racks. Projec- 
tiles for smooth-bore guns are lacquered, and for rifled 
guns oiled only. Fuses and friction primers are kept in 
their original packages until used, and stored in dry and 
safe places. All implements of brass are kept spread out 
on shelves, and clear alcohol or vinegar and rotten-stone 
and whiting are used for cleaning brass articles Oil and 
rotten-stone and canvas cloth for iron or steel implements. 



CHAPTER VII. 



TARGET PRACTICE. 

RIFLE AND CARBINE FIRING. 

SKIRMISH FIRING. 



TARGET PRACTICE. 



The instruction in rifle, carbine and pistol firing re- 
ceives at the present time more attention than any one 
particular branch of the soldier's education. 

Four months in the year is now the period of the practice 
season, and these months are designated by the Department 
Commander for the various posts in his department, accord- 
ing to the best season at each post for shooting on outdoor 
ranges. 

During the winter season the troops practice firing at re- 
duced targets, which are made of a size so small that they 
can just be distinctly seen. This practice is called gal- 
lery practice — the troops either firing in their barrack- 
rooms or in galleries prepared for the purpose. An iron 
plate, 30 x 30 inches and ^ inch thick is used ; on this is 
painted the target, 7 inches high and 6 inches wide, with 
a circular bull's eye, 1 inch in diameter; and 2 other cir- 
cular divisions, 3 inches and 5 inches in diameter respect- 
ively for 50 feet ranges. If the gallery be 75 feet long, 
these dimensions should be increased one-half. If 100 feet 
long, they should be doubled. A shot in the bull's eye 
will be scored 5; in the next ring, called the center, 4; 
in the other, called the outer, 3 ; and a shot in the remain- 
der of the target, called the outer, 2. About 3^ grains of 
powder, and a round ball, which weighs 140 grains, is 
used. The service shells can be used for making these 
cartridges about 200 times. 

After the troops have had their season of gallery prac- 
tice, and the recruits have received all necessary prelimin- 
ary instruction, they are taken upon the Range and prac- 
ticed at various distances, in order to qualify as 2d and 1st 
class men, marksmen, and sharpshooters. All commence 
at 100 yards, and fire at least four scores of five shots each ; 
those that are able to make 50 per cent, with any four 

(3i9) 



320 ART OF WAR. 

scores of five consecutive shots are advanced to 200 yards ;* 
this latter is the first range however, at which qualifying 
scores can be made, and the men are advanced from it as 
follows : 

For the second class a total of 50 is required at each of 
the ranges, 200, 300 and 500 for troops armed with the 
rifle, and totals 50, 48 and 45 at each of the same ranges 
respectively for those armed with the carbine. 

For the first class, a total of 65 is required at each of the 
ranges 200, 300 and 500 yards for troops armed with the 
rifle, and totals of 65, 60 and 55 at each of the same ranges 
respectively for those armed with the carbine. 

For a marksman a total of 80 is required at each of the 
ranges 200, 300, 500 and 600 yards for those firing with the 
rifle; and totals of 80, 75, 70 and 65 at each of the same 
ranges respectively for troops armed with the carbine. 

For a sharpshooter a total of 90 is required at each of 
the ranges 200, 300 and 500 yards ; a total of 85 at each 
of the ranges 600 and 800 yards, and a total of 80 at 1,000 
yards ; these scores for cavalry troops may be made with 
either the rifle or carbine. 

For these ranges there are three targets furnished, called 
A, B, C. Target A is used for all firing up to and includ- 
ing 30 yards; it is 6x4 feet, with an elliptical bull's eye 
10 inches high by 8 in breadth, the center to be 30x24 
inches, the inner to be 50 x 40 inches. Target B is used 
for all ranges above 300 yards and to include Too yards ; 
it is 6 feet square, with an elliptical bull's eye 24 inches 
high and 18 inches broad; the center to be 48 x 36 inches, 
the inner to be 72x54 inches. Target C is for all ranges 
over 600 yards, and is 6 feet high by 1 2 feet broad ; has 
an elliptical bull's eye 45x30 inches, the center 72x51, 
the inner 72 x 72, square in shape. See "Blunfs Rifle and 
Carbine Firing" 

The education of the soldier in individual firing, as thus 
conducted, is merely preliminary to the instruction of the 
company, as a body, in firing (1) by file, (2) by volley, and 

* Marksmen of previous years begin at 200 yards. 



TARGET PRACTICE. 32 I 

(3) as skirmishers, under conditions as nearly as possible 
representing those found in actual service. 

The first consists of firing by file (each man firing 5 
shots) at 200 yards standing and 300 yards kneeling. The 
"useful effect" is shown by computing, from the number 
of hits actually made and the time required, the number 
of hits that would have been made by 100 men in one 
minute. The second consists of five volleys at 200 yards 
standing and five each at 500 and 800 yards lying down. 
The efficiency of the company is shown by the percentage 
of hits. The target for both kinds of practice consists of 
sixteen figures representing men standing, placed in line 
one yard apart. (Target H, Plate XVIII., Blunt's " Rifle 
and Carbine Firing.") 

The target for company skirmish firing is made up of 
figures placed alternately representing men kneeling, stand- 
ing and lying down ; the number of figures being equal to 
the number of skirmishers. (Target G, Plate XVIII.) 

"The skirmish line will be formed, with intervals of one 
yard between the files, as prescribed by the infantry tac- 
tics (except that there will be no reserve). For organiza- 
tions armed with the rifle the line will be formed at about 
600 yards from the targets ; those armed with the carbine 
will use it for this practice and form skirmish line at about 
500 yards from the targets." (Par. 328.) "At the proper 
commands for manceuvering skirmishers they will be ad- 
vanced, at quick time, until a point a little more than 200 
yards from the targets is reached, when they will be with- 
drawn, at double time, to their first position. During the 
advance 5 halts will be made. * * * The same rule will 
govern during the retreat." (Par. 326.) The commands 
"Skirmishers halt," " Commence firing," and " Cease 
firing," are so given as to allow six seconds for estimat- 
ing the distance and adjusting sights, and fifteen seconds 
firing interval, during which each man fibres two shots. 

The general merit of the company in rifle firing is then 
determined by considering its record in both the individ- 
ual target practice and the company skirmish firing. 

To stimulate marksmen in their endeavors to excel, the 
?! 



32 2 ART OF WAR. 

War Department annually awards twenty- four gold and 
thirty-seven silver medals to winners of places on the De- 
partment, Division and Army teams. The competition for 
places on the Department team is open to one enlisted man 
from each company and two commissioned officers from 
each regiment serving in the Department. The several 
Department teams of each Division are then assembled, and 
the members compete for places on the Division team. 
The members of the Army team (12 in all) are, every two 
years, selected by the Division Commanders and assembled 
at some designated military post for the final competition 
for the Army team medals. 

For forms of Reports of Target Practice see pp. 323-328. 



TARGET PRACTICE. 



3 2 3 



REPORT of the Target Firing of Co. "G" jolh Regiment of Infantry, 

for the month of July, /S8j. 

(See Part IV., Chapter IV., Instructions in Rifle and Carbine Firing.) 



Names and Rank of Officers and 
Men, excluding Sharpshooters 
and Marksmen, firing less than 
50 shots in regular practice dur- 
ing the month. 



en 

Ej 


"0 

wg 

V 

U 


Reasons for this Limited 
Practice. 


Henry Fry, 1st Lieut 

Nicholas Schimmelfinig, Private . 
Hozeas Demorest, Private .... 


30 
25 
IO 


2d 

3d 
3d 


Absent with leave, July 12 to 31. 
In confinement, July 8 to 31. 
Sick in Hospital, July 5 to 31. 



















































INDIVIDUAL CLASSIFICATION AND FIGURE OF MERIT OF THE COM- 
PANY AT THE END OF THE MONTH. 



None Sharpshooters . . 

Five . . . . ( 5 ) . Marksmen . . . 
Twenty -nine . {20) . First-class men . . 

Ten (10) . Second-class men . 

Six ( 6 ) . Third-class men . 

None Present not firing 



• X 


IOO 


•X 


60 


• X 


30 


• X 


IO 


•X 






500 

1740 

300 

60 



So 



2600 



Individual Figtire of Merit , 52 

Average number of practices per man in individual skirmish fir- 
ing , j Six (6) 

Number of practices in Company skirmish firing Two (2) 



I certify, on honor, that the regular practice has in all cases been conducted in 
scores of five shots each, and under the supervision of a commissioned officer ; that 
the requirements of the Instructions in Rifle and Carbine Firing for the United 
States Army, with reference to sighting shots, to limitation in the number of scores, 
and to the methods of marking and scoring, have been fully complied with ; that 
such additional precautions as seemed necessary to secure an honest record and cor- 
rect report based only upon the results actually attained have also been taken, and 
that I am therefore fully assured that this report is entirely correct. 

Henry Fry, 1st Lieui. William Boutelle, 

Julius Eels, 2d Lieut. CaJ>t 30th Infantry, 

Commanding Company. 



324 ART OF WAR. 



REPORT 

OF THE 

TARGET FIRING 



Co. "G" 30th Reg't of Infantry. 
For the month of July, 1885. 



First Indorsement. 

Fort Del Norte, I. T., 

August 1, 188 J. 
Respectfully forwarded to the Inspector of Rifle Practice, Depart- 
ment of the Missouri. ■ 

I have examined the methods of conducting practice and of mark- 
ing and scoring followed in this Company, and believe this report to be 
correct. 

Selos B. Dackett. 
Colonel 20th Cavalry, 
Commaitding Post. 



TARGET PRACTICE. 



3 2 5 



Report of Sharpshooters and Marksmen of Co. "G," 30th Reg't 

of Infantry, completing their qualification in the 

month of July, 1885. 

(See Part IV., Chap. IV., Instructions in Rifle and Carbine Firing.) 





RANK. 


w 


•A 

< 


TOTALS OF BEST FOUR SCORES. 




NAMES. 


w 

H 
< 

Q 


H 

a 
c 
u 

CO 


w 

H 
< 
A 


w 

K 
O 
U 

■s. 

21 
20 
21 

20 


W 
H 

A 


w 

Si 

: 
u 


H 

H 
<! 
Q 

1885. 

15 July 
15 " 
20 " 
15 " 


a 



u 

Wj 

22 
21 

20 

2 3 


-J 

< 
H 
O 
H 


James H. Williamson. 


Serg'nt. 


20O 
300 
500 
600 


1885. 

2 July 
2 " 
5 " 
2 " 


i3 
21 
20 
21 


1885. 

5 July 
5 " 
9 " 
5 " 


1885. 

9 July 
9 " 
9 " 

9 " 


20 

18 

22 
20 


81 






?3 
84 






Marksman 1883-1884. 

























































































































































































































I certify, on honor, that the regular practice has, in all cases, been conducted in 
scores of five shots each, and under the supervision of a commissioned officer; that 
the requirements of the Instructions in Rifle and Carbine Firing for the United 
States Army with reference to sighting shots, to limitation in the number of scores, 
and to the methods of marking and scoring, have been fully complied with ; that 
such additional precautions as seemed necessary to secure an honest record and cor- 
rect report, based only upon the results actually attained, have also been taken, and 
that I am therefore fully assured that this report is entirely correct. 

Henry Fry, 1st Lieut. William Boutelle, 

Julius Eels, 2d Lieut. Captain 30th Inf. , 

Commanding Company. 



326 ART OF WAR. 



REPORT 



SHARPSHOOTERS AND MARKSMEN 



Co. "G," 30th Reg't of Infantry, 
for the month of July, 1883. 



First Indorsement. 

Fort Del Norte, I. T., 

■ Aug>t j, 1885. 
Respectfiilly forwarded to the Inspector of Rifle Practice, Depart- 
ment of the Missouri. 

I have examined the methods of conducting practice, and of mark- 
ing and scoring followed in this Company, and believe this report to be 
correct 

Selos B. Dackett, 
Col. 20th Cavalry, 
Commanding Post. 



u 



328 ART OF WAR. 



ANNUAL REPORT 



8. t 

9. 1 

10. V OF 

n. ^ 

Si TARGET FIRING 

14. iv 

15. A 

16. B 0F 

17. IV 

18. P 

*9- 4 Co< « Gj » J0 ^ A >^ rV y infantry, 

22 ' E ./'br //£<? ymr i8Sj. 

23.' H . . . 

24. e; _____ . 

25. T First Indorsement. 

Fort Del Not 

Janua 

Respectfully forwarded to the Inspector of Rifle Prai 

: merit of the Missouri. 

I have examined the methods of conducting practice an 
D and scoring followed in this company, and believe this 

correct. 

Selos B. Dac 

Oct. 1' Colonel 20th 

• ' * Commai 



2. Henri- Frv 

t &f£,owles " 

;. James H. William*.. 
p. Earnest Devine . . . 



: William Muir . . . 

ii. Marvin Conduit . . 

12. Elbert Manning . . 

,_;. h^u Birthright. . . 

14. Moses Mount .... 

1=;. Ardiihald Holden . 

16 Darin.-. Adams . . . 

17. March Hicrdstadt . . 

18. Peter Bolls 

19. Arthur Bing .... 

20. Benjamin Bradshaw 
2i. Henry Carter. . . . 

22. Evelyn Cruikshanks 

23. Hosea Cuthbert . . 
:,( bills Darius .... 
bb, Thomas Darrow . . 



Report of Target Firing of Company "G," 30th Re± 

(See Part IV., Chap. IV., Instructions in F 



of Infantry, for the yt 



2d Lieut. 
Serg't . . 



OF BLS T FOUR SCORES. 



M : 1 1 I '- > 1 1 .' 1 1 

.St Class. 

\l.u'l;sn,.,n. 



Class. 

Marksma 



, William Dunellen . 
. James Du Bois . . 
. James Engleharck 
. John Filch .... 
. Henry Furlong . . 
. Ira French ... 
. 'Arthur Green . . . 
. Burton Gabriel . . 
. Gilmore Galbraith 
Nicholas Henry . 



,7- Benjn i 

-: Ijr ,: J r 



. I 1 1- 1 .'-'Oiacn . . . 

. Martin Mountebland . 

. James McDermott . . 

. Henrv Melrose . . . . 

. Eathcm Prime . . . . 

. Moses Rose . . . . 

IMusuSmtelle . . . 



TOTAL OF BEST FOUR SCORES. 



















BEST SIISTOXjE 


PEACTICE IIKr- 




















COMPANY SKIRMISH FIRING. 


COMPANY FIRING BY FILE. 


COMPANY VOLLEY FIRING. 




Per Cent, of 

to Number 
Available. 




Number < ,f Hits - 


Per Cent. 

Possible 
Score. 


Remarks. 


Date. 


RA.OE. 


Number 
Firing. 


Shots Fired. 


Time 
Required. 


Number of 
Hits. 


Useful 
Effect. 


Date. 


Range. 


Number 
Firing. 


Number of 
Shots Fired. 


Number 
of 

Hits. 


Per Cent, of 


I'm) Vvailablefor Number 
Practice. Firing. 


Number of 
Shots Fired. 


Standing 
Figures. 


K iKrclinc: 
Figures. 


Lying 


Total. 


Possible 


Oct. IO, - S, .| 2 7 1 22 1 80 


;;.'.': .1: ; ; : : 


120 


7° 


250 


57 


Bad light .... 


Oct. 2, 1885 . . 


..?... 


32 
3 = 


160 


1-45" 


t 


182 


Oct.7j.i88s . . 


500 
800 


38 
38 
38 


190 
190 


'Is 

60 


43 












: 



































med necessary both i 
lilts actually attained 
LY, 1st Lieut. 



General Figure of i 



328 ART OF WAR. 



ANNUAL REPORT 



TARGET FIRING 



Co. "G," 30th Reg't of Infantry, 
For the year jSSj. 



First Indorsement. 

Fori Del Norte, I. T., 

January 2, 1886. 
Respectfully forwarded to the Inspector of Rifle Practice, Depart- 
ment of the Missouri. 

I have examined the methods of conducting practice and of marking 
and scoring followed in this company, and believe this report to be 



Selos B. DACKErr, 
Colonel 20th Cavalry, 
Commanding Post. 



CHAPTER VIII 



MILITARY SIGNALLING. 



MILITARY SIGNALLING. 



The object of military signalling is to transmit intelli- 
gence by either sight or sound, without the knowledge of 
the enemy. It is one of the most important branches of 
the military service, as by it communication is maintained 
between the different parts of the same army, or different 
armies, and messages, orders and intelligence of any kind 
can be transmitted quickly and accurately to whatever 
point desired. 

Signals are of two general classes : 

i st. Permanent signals are those kept in sight or hear- 
ing for some time, such as a flag flying from a mast, or a 
whistle blowing, or bell ringing, for some minutes. 

2d. Transient signals are those kept in sight or hearing 
but a short time, as a single wave of a flag or a report of a 
gun. 

Signalling in the U. S. Army is conducted by either the 
telegraph, flags, lanterns, torches or heliograph. 

The code of signals for the service is made up of combi- 
nations of elementary signals, dots and dashes. The alpha- 
bet and digits are both formed by combination of these 
signals. The code is first learned by means of words, after 
which the signal flags are used, and then follow the lan- 
terns, or torches, for night sigpalling. 

Signal flags are of red bunting 4 feet square, with white 
centers 16 inches square, or they may be of white bunt- 
ing, with red centers, of the same size as the red flag. 
Strings in couples are attached to the flag on that side 
which is to fasten it to a pointed staff. The pole or staff 
is from 8 to 12 feet in length, and is pointed for conveni- 
ence in carrying, and divided into three joints. After the 
flag is fastened to the staff, the flagman holds the staff in a 
vertical position with both hands, in front of the center 
of the body ; the left hand grasps the lower end or butt 

(33O 



332 ART OF WAR. 

of the staff, and the left forearm is horizontal, the right 
hand grasps the staff about 18 inches above the left hand. 
This is the first position [see Fig. 22]. The elemen- 
tary signal dot "." is made by carrying the staff over 
to the right in a vertical plane, till it nearly touches the 
ground, and then bringing it to the vertical position again ; 
the movement must be made quickly, and the end of the 
staff and flag describe an elliptical curve, to the rear, as 
they approach the ground, in order that the flag may 
be kept fully spread out during the movement [see Fig. 
22]. Elementary signal dash " — " the flag is carried 
quickly to the left in the same manner. To make the ele- 
mentary signal "front," the flag is swung in a vertical plane 
directly to the front, until it nearly touches the ground, 
when it is immediately brought to the first position again. 
Thus to make "a," which is denoted in the signal code by 
a dot and dash, make one distinct and complete swing of 
the flag to the right, then the same to the left, and bring 
the flag to a vertical position. 

Night signaling is carried on by means of lanterns or 
torches. The equipments consist of a pointed staff, 12 
feet long, at the upper end of which is attached, by means 
of clamp screws, a torch. This is called the "flying torch,''' 
and is a copper cylinder, 18 inches long, 1^ inches in 
diameter, and is filled with turpentine.* On the ground, 
about 18 inches in front of the signal man, is placed an- 
other torch, called the " foot torch." This is 18 inches 
long, 2 inches in diameter, and is also copper. Both 
torches have extinguishers: In signalling, the front torch 
is kept burning all the time, and is the point of location 
or reference. When messages are to be sent, the flying 
torch is lighted from the foot torch, and the message sent 
in the same manner as by the flag. When completed, the 
flying torch is extinguished. All the motions, positions, 
etc., with the torch are the same as with the flag. If the 
turpentine in the foot torch gives out, a small fire should 

*Note. — Kerosene oil of 150 test, water white, is also used, and is 
preferable to turpentine. 



MILITARY SIGNALING. 333 

be at once be made of leaves, twigs, grass, etc., etc. The 
telegraph is used in military signalling, with the same code 
as the flag and torch. It and the telephone are too well 
known to need description. 

The heliograph or sun-mirror is used to transmit mes- 
sages to great .distances, and in places where the formation 
of the country does not permit effective use of flags. It 
consists of a mirror of polished steel or glass, and when 
used is mounted on a tripod. By means of tangent 
screws it can be adjusted so as to flash the sun's rays in 
any direction. If the messages are to be sent in a direc- 
tion opposite the sun's rays, then a second mirror is used, 
and placed opposite the first, the rays striking the first 
one reflected on the second, and thrown by it in the di- 
rection required. The A. and N. code is used with the 
heliograph. 

In signalling with torches or heliograph, the signals are 
made in the same manner as with the electric telegraph 
key, except that the spaces between the elements of a let- 
ter are slightly larger. " To call a station," turn a steady 
flash on the station, and keep it there until answered by a 
steady flash. Both stations must then adjust nicely on 
each other's flash. When the adjustment is satisfactory, 
the calling station will cut off its flash three seconds, and 
then ''acknowledge." Signals are then sent as by the 
flag, except that a flash of four seconds is made whenever 
"front" would be used by the flag. Should the receiver 
break the message, he does so in same manner as with flag, 
but the sender answers with a steady flash. No abbrevia- 
tions will be used in the body of the message.* 

The code used is designated the Army and Navy Code 
for visual signalling, and is the same as the European 
Morse code of telegraph signals. At the end of each word, 
abbreviation or conventional signal, a "front" motion is 
made. No pause is made between the motions required 

*Note. — If the receiver sees that the sender's mirror needs adjust- 
ment, he will turn a steady flash on the sender until answered by a 
steady flash. Then the receiver will " acknowledge," and the sender 
will resume his message, beginning with the word broken into. 



334 


ART OF WAR. 




for any single letter. The European 


Morse 


lows : 






A - — 


J 


S - 


B 


K 


T - 


C 


L 


U - 


D 


M 


V - 


E - 


N — - 


w - 


F 


O 


X - 


G 


P 


Y - 


H 


Q 


Z - 


I -- 


R 




These are read : 


A , as dot, dash ; B 


dot, dot, dot, etc. 


, etc. 

Numerals. 




i 


2 3 





- -, dash, 



Punctuation. 

Period (.) 

The following abbreviations may be used in the body 
of a message : A — after, B — before, C — can, H — have, 
N — not, R — are, T — the, U — you, UR — your, W — word, 
WI — with, Y — w hy. 

Numbers which occur in the body of a message must be 
spelled out in full ; dates and other numbers not in the 
body of the message will be signaled by numerals. A 
" front" motion will not be made between separate nu- 
merals of a number, but only after the last figure. The 
numerals may be used between stations having the Naval 
Signal Books. 

To transmit a message, we will suppose a party consist- 
ing of two men, one holding a flag and the other a note- 
book and pencil, at a station, "A." They wish to call up 
Station "B." "To call" a station, the flagrran signals 



MILITARY SIGNALING. 



335 






Fig. 22. 



336 ART OF WAR. 

its initial or "call" letter "B," until answered. 

If the call letter is unknown, signal the letter "A" until 
acknowledged. "To acknowledge," signal the letters 
"O. K.," followed by "Front," and initial or call letter. 
After " B" has acknowledged, "A" answers "O.K.," 
and then signals his message according to rule. At the 
end of each sentence, and of the address, both at head- 
ing and ending of message, he signals period (.), fol- 
lowed by a " front." Should " B" fail to catch a word, 
he breaks the message by signaling "A" till acknowl- 
edged by A. To start again, he signals "G. A.," fol- 
lowed by " Front," and the last word received correctly; 
or, if no word was received correctly, he signals " R. 
R.," followed by "Front." "A" then repeats all. If 
"A" makes an error in sending, he signals six dots 

( ) very rapidly, followed by a " Front," and then 

resumes the message, beginning with the last word sent 
correctly. 

Just before reaching the name of the sender, "A" sig- 
nals "signature follows," by the word S I G, followed by 
"Front." 

To signal "cease signaling," signal the word "close" 
followed by three "fronts." The communicating station 
will "acknowledge" followed by three "fronts." 

For convenience, the numerals are also used to signal 
the following sentences : 

i. "Wait a moment." 2. " Are you ready?" 3. "I 
am ready." 4. "Go up higher." 5. "Come down 
lower." 6. " Move to your right." 7. " Move to your 
left." 8. "Use other flag." 9. "Use larger flag, and 
longer staff." o. "Your flagman is not facing me 
squarely." 

Cipher Signals. 

The figure represents the cipher disk. It consists of 
two disks moving on a common axis, the larger one hav- 
ing the capitals reading in the direction the hands of a 
watch move, and the smaller disk reading the reverse. 
An arrow head pointing to small a is marked on the 



MILITARY SIGNALING. 



337 



smaller disk. To use it, if there be no previous agree 
merit, the letter "a " of the inner circle will be set oppo 



oppo- 



s? 



H- 



e> 



v 







* 



o 



<&. 



<^ 



-A 



tf> 



to 



&. 



* 



Of 



m 



u 



CO 



cp 



•© 



A 



A 



* 



site the letter"^" on the outer circle. The message 
being written in plain English: by using letters on the 
outer circle, it is sent by using the corresponding ones on 
the inner circle. The message is deciphered by writing 
down from the letters received, the outer circle letters cor- 
responding. By preconcerted agreement, any letter may 
be chosen on the inner circle as the key letter to be set 
opposite the " A" on the outer circle; or countersign 
words may be used, in which case the key-jetter is changed 
as often as there are different letters in the countersign. 



338 ART OF WAR. 

In all cases, the unciphered message should be divided 
into groups of letters, four letters in each group ; and when 
signaling with flag or torch, the signal "front" for end 
of word should be made at end of each group. 



CHAPTER IX. 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 



/. The Law of War. — The law of war in the United 
States is made up of the rules and principles which define 
military authority and jurisdiction in time of war, or like 
emergency, over person or property, either within a dis- 
turbed locality, or wherever the public safety may demand. 
Such rules and principles are derived from International 
Law, from certain legislative provisions, and from author- 
ized precedents as established by acts and orders of mili- 
tary commanders, or of the Executive authority, and 
depend for their constitutionality upon the war powers of 
Congress and the Executive. 

In its application, the Law of War affects the rights, 
obligations, and intercourse of persons upon the theatre 
of war, whether subjects or enemies, [armed or otherwise,] 
also of persons resident, or simply present, as well as all, 
otherwise under military government or martial law. It 
may supplement or supersede the laws of the land, and 
even the Constitution. It authorizes the taking of private 
property, but only in case of absolute necessity or imme- 
diate exigency; severs all business and social relations and 
interchange between the members of the opposing armies; 
suspends pecuniary obligations and forbids new business 
relations ; prescribes the civilized nature of warfare and 
forbids the use of illegitimate weapons as well as wanton 
or malicious destruction of private or public property; 
especially such institutions as churches, colleges, asylums, 
museums, etc. — also firing of towns. 

It sanctions the putting to death of those who abuse the 
flag of truce, or are guilty of a breach of parole ; but 
prescribes that prisoners of war shall be humanely treated. 
The general remedy for breaches of the law of war, by a 
belligerent, is retaliation ; but offenders may be tried and 

(341) 



342 ART OF WAR. 

punished for all infractions of the law of war. This pun- 
ishment of individuals- is generally exercised by military 
tiibunals or commissions usually appointed under military 
government or martial law. 

II Military Government and Martial law. — Chief Jus- 
tice Chase defines military government as " military juris- 
diction to be exercised by the military commander under 
direction of the President, in time of foreign war without 
the boundaries of the United States, or in time of rebellion 
and civil war within States and districts occupied by rebels 
treated as belligerents." This government is sometimes 
confused with martial law proper, which the same authority 
defines as ''military rule exercised in a locality or district 
maintaining adhesion to the general government and over 
its own citizens, not enemies, where the public danger 
requires it." Military government exists as an immediate 
result of military possession and the state of war, and re- 
quires no formal proclamation of its beginning, but is 
usually preceded by it. Martial law requires proclamation 
to inaugurate it, and is measured in duration by the emer- 
gency justifying it. It is usually terminated in the same 
way as it is inaugurated. Military government is absolute 
in authority except so far as it is limited by the law of war. 
It is in fact an exercise of sovereignty superseding wholly 
or in part the local municipal laws at the .discretion of the 
executive of the dominant military power, but generally 
delegated expressly or impliedly by him to the military 
commanders under him. 'Under this authority, subordi- 
nate officers, such as governors, mayors, etc., may be ap- 
pointed, and judicial systems, with civil and criminal 
jurisdiction, may be instituted, as for instance the Pro- 
visional Court of Louisiana, established by an executive 
order in 1862. 

Many instances of the establishment of civil and mili- 
tary courts by the commander of the army of occupation 
with powers which belong, under ordinary circumstances, 
to civil courts, have occurred during our wars. 

Under military government the laws of war are observed, 
and martial law may be declared and exercised in a most 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 343 

stringent manner. Martial law may be called into exist- 
ence at times of " public danger," whether this danger is 
shown on the theatre of war or in isolated parts of the 
country during war or times of peace. While it is neces- 
sarily incident to a state of war, it may legally be pro- 
claimed in any case in which Congress is by the Constitu- 
tution empowered to provide for the public danger arising 
from either internal or external cause, and whenever "or- 
dinary law no longer adequately secures public safety and 
private rights." Martial law may also be proclaimed by 
a State government either by its legislature or executive — 
depending on its constitution and laws — within its own 
territory. This right does not belong to a territorial gov- 
ernment. Being for the protection of public safety when 
threatened by hostile persons, as well as for the protection 
of private rights of all citizens, its exercise in reference to 
time and scope of authority will depend on the particular 
emergency. 

However, in general, it will not restrict the rights of 
peaceful citizens or the office of civil institutions, but be 
directed towards offenders against military authority, and 
to repress acts of violence. 

Military Commissions. — Martial law vests in the military 
commander the right to establish military tribunals or 
commissions to try offenses of a civil character, as well as 
those in violation of the laws of war, and not in general 
cognizable by a court martial. 

These tribunals are constituted of such persons and in 
such numbers as the commanders may designate, though 
commissioned officers have usually been chosen. The 
offences within its jurisdiction must have been committed 
within the geographical command of the military com- 
mander who convenes the commission, and during the ex- 
ercise of the military authority over that territory, but 
does not include purely military offences, nor, unless spe- 
cifically empowered, civil controversies between private 
citizens. A. military commission has a wider discretion in 
its procedure, and in making up its record, than a court 
martial; and, except in the case of spies, has no limita- 
tions as to the sentence it can pronounce. 



344 



ART OF WAR. 



The proceedings and sentence are subject to review by 
the convening authority, who has a wider discretionary 
action than in the case of courts martial, but they cannot 
be revised by a civil court, though the question of juris- 
diction may be tried. 

III. The Mutual Relations of the Civil and Military 
States, and the Individuals Composing Them. — This rela- 
tion involves the employment of the Army for civil pur- 
poses, as well as the effect of the military upon the abso- 
lute rights of individuals, and the jurisdiction of civil and 
military courts over military subjects and private citizens. 

Ej?iployment of the Army for Civil Purposes. — It is not 
lawful to employ any part of the Army of the United 
States as a. posse comitatus or otherwise, for the purpose of 
executing the laws, except when it is expressly authorized 
by the Constitution or by act of Congress. The constitu- 
tional provision here referred to authorizes the use of the 
military forces for the purpose of guaranteeing every State 
a republican form of government, to protect them against 
invasion, and against domestic violence. The republican 
form of government would be endangered by the hostile 
action of a foreign power should it proceed to set up some 
form of government therein ; by the revolutionary action 
of the people themselves should they forcibly attempt to 
change their republican form of government, or attempt to 
do so peaceably under their existing constitution. 

Insurrection Agamst a State Government. — Congress has 
provided, in case of insurrection against a State gov- 
ernment, that the President, upon the application of the 
Legislature of the State, or, if it cannot be convened 
soon enough to prepare for the emergency, then upon the 
application of the Governor, may, by an executive order, 
provide a sufficient military force, and give it proper di- 
rections to suppress the existing disturbance. The military 
forces to be used for this purpose are to act in a national 
capacity, and are composed of the land and naval forces, 
which would, of course, include the militia, if called out 
by the President. Their instructions would, therefore, not 
come from State officials, but would in general be to act 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 345 

in accord with them, and their action would be the small- 
est consistent with the gravity of the situation. The con- 
stitutional provision terms this insurrection " domestic vio- 
lence," by which is meant insurrection or rebellion against 
State laws, which may not necessarily require the declaring 
of martial law, but any obstruction of the law which the 
State may deem itself powerless to remove. 

Lisurrection in Violation of Civil Rights. — The same 
forces may be employed "whenever insurrection, domes- 
tic violence, unlawful combinations or conspiracies in any 
State so obstruct or hinder the execution of the laws 
thereof, and of the United States, as to deprive any por- 
tion or class of the people of any constitutional rights, 
privileges, immunities or protection, and the State author- 
ities cannot, or fail to protect the people in such rights, 
it is then lawful for the President, and is declared to be 
his duty, to take such measures, by employment of the land 
forces * * * as he may deem necessary for the sup- 
pression of such insurrection, domestic violence or combi- 
nations." 

Insurrection Against U.S. Government. — Also, "when- 
ever by reason of unlawful obstructions, combinations or 
assemblages of persons, or rebellion against the authority 
of the Government of the U. S., it shall become imprac- 
ticable, in the judgment of the President, to enforce, by 
the ordinary course of judicial proceedings, the laws of the 
U. S. within any State or Territory." Whenever the 
Army is to be employed in the preceding cases, the Presi- 
dent must first issue a proclamation commanding the in- 
surgents to disperse and retire peaceably to their homes 
within a limited time. 

Other Cases in which the Army is Allowed to be Em- 
ployed Civilly. — The Army may be employed by the Pres- 
ident to enforce the non-intercourse acts with Indians ; to 
arrest Indians accused of crimes under State or Territorial 
laws who have fled into the Indian country ; to aid in the 
execution of the quarantine and health laws of the States 
at their respective sea-ports ; to enforce the neutrality acts 
of Congress ; to prevent in Florida the cutting down or 



346 ART OF WAR. 

other destruction of the timber of the U. S.; to safely keep 
and protect individuals surrendered to the U. S. under ex- 
tradition treaties ; to protect the rights of discoverers of 
guano ; to prevent the removal of contraband vessels or 
cargoes ; to aid in enforcing the law abolishing peonage 
in New Mexico ; to remove persons from lands secured to 
the U. S. who are not authorized by law to make settle- 
ment thereon. In addition to these uses of the Army, 
Army officers may be employed as Indian agents ; to aid 
in taking the census, and for topographical work in the 
Coast Survey. The Army may be employed in the field, 
on the frontier, and to garrison the sea-coast fortifications, 
to prevent or terminate hostilities between any of the In- 
dian tribes, or between them and the U. S. and its citi- 
zens, to resist invasion by any foreign nations, and to pro- 
tect the property of the U. S. 

The Rights of Individuals and their Violation. — There 
are certain obligations which individuals owe to the pub- 
lic as well as to each other. Any violation of these obli- 
gations or duties gives corresponding wrongs. Among 
these wrongs may be noticed violations of legal duties to 
the public. These are crimes, and are punished by indict- 
ment, while violations of legal duties to private individ- 
uals, called civil wrongs, are punishable by private action. 
It may be laid down as a general principle that such vio- 
lations are illegal, and make the offender liable to punish- 
ment. This subject becomes important to a military per- 
son in the execution of the orders of a superior, as well 
as in the voluntary discharge of his supposed duties. The 
specific wrongs most frequently committed are violations 
of the absolute rights of personal security, which in- 
cludes injuries to life, limb, body and health, personal lib- 
erty and private property. The order of a superior mili- 
tary officer to an inferior will not of itself justify the wilful 
killing of another. No mere words will justify the use of 
a deadly weapon, nor reduce the act of killing from mur- 
der to manslaughter ; so, in the suppression of disorder, 
or a mutiny among soldiers, the means should be propor- 
tionate to the end to be gained. Violent measures clearly 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 347 

unnecessary will not be justified. But officers charged 
with the good order of a camp or fort will not be required 
to weigh with scrupulous precision the exact amount of 
force necessary to suppress disorder. 

When any part of the Army is legally employed to quell 
a civil disturbance, while the same general principles will 
apply, even a greater discretion is vested in the command- 
ing officer. 

In his capacity as private individual, a military person 
may, without a warrant, arrest any man, provided treason 
or felony has actually been committed and he can prove 
just cause of suspicion that the person arrested has com- 
mitted it, or was implicated in it ; so also for an actual 
breach of the peace whilst the strife is going on and to 
prevent its continuance; and the liberty of the person 
arrested may be restrained so long as the conduct of such 
person shows that the public peace is likely to be endan- 
gered by his acts. 

If one man enters the house of another with force and 
violence, the owner of the house is justified in turning him 
out, without a previous request to depart ; but if he enters 
quietly there must be a request to retire before hands can 
be lawfully laid upon him to turn him out, but the force 
used is only as much as is necessary. Any seizure of pri- 
vate property will in general be illegal, so that the arrest 
of a deserter taking his private property from the place 
where he is found, would constitute a cause of action. 
These instances illustrate the general principles indicating 
whether an act about to be done, will be in itself illegal 
as being a violation of a legal right. But these principles 
would of course only apply in time of peace, where public 
exigency would not overrule them. 

Orders to do Illegal Acts. — In general an order must be 
clearly illegal, as requiring a violation of the law of the 
land or of military usage, before its disobedience would be 
justified, and under any circumstances the subordinate 
takes the risk of not knowing the actual cause for the issu- 
ance of the order. It has been held in our service that a 



34S ART OF WAR. 

superior officer cannot lawfully give a command which 
does not relate to military duty or usage, or for the fur- 
therance solely of some private end, as for instance, an order 
to do private work for an officer. Except in extreme cases, 
the better rule is to obey the order, as a Military Court 
would in general protect the inferior and hold the superior 
responsible, and the tendency of civil courts, if the in- 
ferior has acted in good faith, is towards justifying the in- 
ferior by order of his superior. This is shown by charging 
slight damages to the former, while holding the latter to 
much stricter accountability. 

In case of martial law it has been held that a military 
officer is justified by an order from a superior apparently 
within the scope of his authority, and that an inferior is 
not responsible for a secret abuse of power. 

For wrongs and injuries committed by superior officers 
against inferiors, civil, courts are not inclined to interfere, 
and in these cases actual malice must be proven. 

In general, army officers are almost judicial, and being 
vested with discretion, cannot be held to so strict an ac- 
countability civilly for the manner of performing or for 
the consequences of their official acts and duties. 

V. Relations between the Civil and Military Laws. — 
Citizenship, with its rights and obligations^ is not forfeited 
by entering the military service. The jurisdiction of civil 
courts over offenses committed against individuals, or local 
laws, apply equally to civilians and soldiers, and the ben- 
efit of the civil law cannot be denied because of being in 
the military service. 

Military Law is only for the government of those in the 
military service, and is not subordinate in its sphere to, 
nor in conflict with, the general laws of the land. 

In many cases, civil and military courts have concurrent 
jurisdiction, and that court which first assumes jurisdiction 
is the first to pass upon the case. Here, the important 
point is, where jurisdiction begins. Purely military offen- 
ses are, of course, only punishable by military courts ; 
beyond this their jurisdiction extends only to such cases as 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 349 

are expressly provided for by statutory law ; or the offender 
may also be liable before a civil tribunal even after a mili- 
tary trial, and vice versa. Thus a military person may be 
liable civilly for damages or imprisonment for illegal acts 
in violation of person or property. 

There are some cases in which it seems there might arise 
a conflict between civil and military authority, but in these 
cases there is a settled principle upon which the authority 
of each rests. As to arrest on civil process, the Revised 
Statutes exempt soldiers except in certain cases of debt 
contracted before enlistment. Public policy extends to 
and protects all public officers, actually engaged in the 
specific performance of their official duties. As to arrest 
on criminal process, there is no exemption. Here, how- 
ever, the question may arise as to where the offence was 
committed. If this be upon reservations under the exclu- 
sive jurisdiction of the United States, then the State or 
Territorial Courts have no jurisdiction, and the United 
States Courts only have concurrent jurisdiction with the 
Military Courts. In some cases, States have reserved the 
right to execute, within the Reservation, process issued by 
their Courts, on account of criminal offences committed or 
causes of action initiated without or within the same. 
The local courts of a Territory have power to cite officers 
or soldiers of the Army stationed upon Reservations within 
the Territory, to appear before them, and to attach or take 
their personal property in proper cases. 

Habeas Corpus. — The serving of the writ of habeas cor- 
pus issuing from State and U. S. courts upon officers of the 
Army for the relief of parties, either civil or military, held 
by the authority of the U. S., is another instance. Here 
the principle is that no State court or judge thereof can au- 
thorize the discharge of a prisoner so held, but a U. S. 
court or judge thereof has authority to issue the writ, and 
order (in a proper case) the discharge of the prisoner. 
Should a State court judge issue the writ, it would be the 
duty of the officer to make return as follows : 



35 O ART OF WAR. 

Fort Columbus, New York Harbor, Jan. n, 1871. 

To the Hon , Judge of the Superior Court of the 

City of A T ew York. 

Sir : I have the honor to make return to the within writ of habeas 

corpus, issued in the case of , a private soldier in 

the service of the United States ; that the said is a 

regularly enlisted soldier, and held to service in the Army of the United 
States by virtue of said enlistment \_or, in the case of any other party, 
the reasons for holding the same will be giveii\ ; that under the decis- 
ion of the Judge Advocate General of the Army, in December, 1871, 
sustained by the Supreme Court of the United States in the case of 

Tarble, it is not my duty to produce the body of said 

in court; that such declaration and denial of the jurisdiction of your 
Honor is a matter of official duty, and not from any disrespect or con- 
tempt of your honorable court. 

I am, Sir, very respectfully, 

Your obedient servant, 

Timothy Lane, 

Colonel 30th Cavalry 
Commanding Post. 

If, after such return, the State court should order the 
discharge of the prisoner, or attempt to enforce process for 
contempt, the execution of such order should be resisted 
by military force. [Should the officer be committed for 
contempt, he should at once sue out a writ of habeas cor- 
pus for his own release in the U. S. circuit or district 
court.] These principles apply to parties deeming them- 
selves illegally enlisted or held to service by reason of mi- 
nority or otherwise, to parties arrested charged with deser- 
tion or undergoing sentence for the same, and to prisoners 
in a State Penitentiary undergoing sentence duly imposed 
by a court martial. Should discharge be effected through 
the writ as issued^ it would be the duty of the military au- 
thorities to rearrest the party released. 

The writ of habeas corpus may issue out of U. S. courts 
for the purpose of collaterally reviewing the proceedings 
of a court-martial. Here the question is, whether the 
'court was legally constituted, had jurisdiction, or if the 
sentence was legal ; but the court would not judge of the 
merits of the case. This extends, also, to the Court of 
Claims, where the right to recover pay, etc., depends upon 
whether the court has transcended its authoritv. So also 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 35 1 

such review may be made in an action for damages or false 
imprisonment under sentence. The authority of the court 
in this instance extends no further than to release the pris- 
oner when the sentence is absolutely void. 

Military Law. 

By Military Law is meant the system of rules made for 
the internal government of the Army. 

It applies alike in peace and in war, and has for its 
object to secure the efficient discipline of the military 
forces while governing them as a separate community. 
The military forces with us include the Regular and Vol- 
unteer Armies of the United States, including drafted 
men, and the Militia when called into the actual service 
of the United States. Military law has been extended by 
special statutory enactment to the Marine Corps when de- 
tached for service with the Army by order of the President ; 
to members of the Signal Service, to all retainers of the 
camp, and all persons serving with the Armies of the 
United States in the field (though not enlisted soldiers), to 
professors and cadets of the Military Academy, to post- 
traders, chaplains, and to citizens under the 45 th and 46th 
Articles of War, and under Section 1343 Revised Stat- 
utes ; also to inmates of the Soldiers' Home, of the Mili- 
tary Prison, and of the National Home for Disabled Vol- 
unteers. It is quite difficult to define the line between the 
civil and military jurisdiction over civilians attached to or 
accompanying an Army, and the statutes which relate to 
the subject should be strictly construed. In general, mil- 
itary jurisdiction is special and limited, and the civilian in 
time of peace cannot be legally subjected to or made liable 
under it. This applies to officers and soldiers who by 
legal modes of separation from the service have become 
civil persons, with such exceptions as are mentioned in the 
Articles of War and Sections 1230, 1361, 4824, 4835, 
Revised Statutes. 

As to amenability of the militia to military law, it may 
be noticed that it begins properly at the time when they 
are mustered in, and extends to the period of discharge, 



352 ART OF WAR. 

which is usually done by formal muster-out accompanied 
by written discharges, though it has been done by an order 
to disband and return to their homes. Should the militia 
refuse to comply with the call of the President, they, 
though not in the public service, have committed a mili- 
tary offence against the United States, and may be pun- 
ished by Courts Martial as authorized by Section 1649, 
Revised Statutes. 

The court martial here contemplated is composed of 
militia officers, and is not necessarily governed by the 
Articles of War, but may be as a matter of usage, and the 
offence is a refusal or neglect to obey an executive order. 

The authority for military law is based upon the Con- 
stitutional provisions giving to Congress and to the Presi- 
dent the right to provide armies and to discipline them. 

Under this authority we have a written law and an 
unwritten or common law (the latter being recognized 
as a guide to military justice in the 84th Article of War). 

Military Law then comprises : 

1st. The Articles of War and other statutory enact- 
ments. 

2d. Army Regulations (subject to existing laws) as made 
by the President. 

3d. Orders — both general and special. 

4th. Customs of War. 

Of these, the last three have the force of law as far as 
regulating the Army is concerned, but form no part of the 
law of the land. 

Courts Martial. 

For the preservation of order, and to maintain discipline 
in the Army, courts martial are provided for by the Arti- 
cles of War. These are of several kinds, viz : 

The General Court. 
This is composed of not less than five, nor more than 
thirteen members, with a Judge-Advocate. All offences 
committed by commissioned officers against the military 
law are cognizable by, and if the offenders are tried at 
all they must be tried by, a general court martial. Certain 



MILITARY LAW A^'D COURTS MARTIAL. 553 

offences committed by enlisted men must also be tried by 
this court, such as desertion, drunkenness on duty, sleep- 
ing on post, and such other offences which, in the discre- 
tion of the power authorized to convene a court, requires a 
greater punishment than can be inflicted by a minor court. 

General courts martial can be ordered by any general 
officer commanding the Army of the United States, a sep- 
arate Army, or a separate Department, in time of peace or 
war ; or by a colonel commanding a geographical depart- 
ment, when the accused is junior to himself and serving in 
his command. When an officer who has authority to con- 
vene a court prefers charges himself, either over his own 
signature or by his order, a court to try the same must be 
ordered by superior authority, and the proceedings for- 
warded to the convening authority. 

General courts may also take cognizance of certain 
offences committed by soldiers against the civil codes, but 
in all such cases the sentence of the court must conform to 
the statute providing punishments for like offences in force 
in the State or Territory in which the offence is committed. 

In time of war the commander of a division or a separ- 
ate brigade of troops shall be competent to appoint a gen- 
eral court martial. But when such commander is the ac- 
cuser or prosecutor of any person under his command, the 
court shall be appointed by the next highest commander. 

The Garrison Court. 
This court is convened by the same character of order 
as the general court (which may be issued by any post 
commander), and the proceedings during a trial are con- 
ducted in like manner also ; but the number of members 
is limited to three and a Judge Advocate. It is constituted 
for the trial of minor offences of enlisted men. It has no 
power to try officers, and its sentences cannot exceed re- 
duction to the ranks of a non-commissioned officer, for- 
feiture of one month's pay, and confinement for the same 
period in any one case. 

The Regimental Court. 
This court is constituted the same as a garrison court, 
23 



354 ART 0F war. 

and its powers are limited to the same degree. A regi- 
mental court is only ordered when there are no officers 
present for duty with it but those belonging to the regi- 
ment. One officer only of the general staff, or any other 
organization doing duty with it, requires it to be changed 
into the garrison court. 

The Field Officer's Court. 

This court is only legalized in time of war. There a 
field officer may be detailed in every regiment to try sol- 
diers thereof for offences not capital ; and no soldier serv- 
ing with his regiment shall be tried by a regimental or 
garrison court martial when a field officer of his regiment 
may be so detailed. 

The Record. 

A court martial is required to keep a complete and ac- 
curate record of its proceedings in detail. This record 
must be clearly and legibly written, without erasures or in- 
terlineations, especially so in the finding and sentence. 
All papers received in evidence or otherwise should be 
attached, after being distinctly numbered in the order in 
which they have been introduced. The Judge Advocate 
is responsible for the correct keeping of this record, but 
the court has control over it, and may determine whether 
any portion of its proceedings shall be recorded or not. 
It is, however, irregular for a court to expunge any part of 
its proceedings from the record, but such act would not 
necessarily affect the validity of the final judgment, unless 
the part struck out was material to the trial, as, for in- 
stance, testimony, plea, etc. All orders referring to or 
modifying the court should appear on the record. Recom- 
mendations to mercy should, however, be entirely separate. 
The hours of meeting and adjournment must be stated in 
the record, to show they are authorized. {See 94th Arti- 
cle of War ; also see Arts. 72 to 95 inclusive, in relation to 
Courts Martial.} The record should be written on the 
successive pages of legal cap paper, each page numbered 
at the upper left-hand corner, and should be down one 
page, then commenced at the top of the next when turned, 
so as to use both sides of the paper. 



military law and courts martial. 355 

The Form for the Proceedings. 

The court assembles at the appointed time and place. 
The senior member present acts as President, who takes 
his seat at the end of a long table. The other members 
take their seats in order of rank, the senior on the right of 
the President, the next in rank on the President's left, and 
so in succession on the opposite sides of the table ; the 
Judge Advocate, who is designated as such in the order 
convening the court, being at the end of the table oppo- 
site the President. The President calls the court to order. 
The roll is then called by the Judge Advocate, and the ab- 
sentees noted. The prisoner is then called before the 
court, and should take his place near the left of the Judge 
Advocate, and all witnesses subsequently examined should 
take their place on the right of the Judge Advocate. 

The following form gives not only the essential parts of 
the record, but indicates the successive steps in the case, 
the italicized parts in brackets being additional instruction, 
and the places, dates and times fictitious : 

Page 1. Case i. 

Proceedings of a General Court Martial convened at Fort Washington, 
N. Y., by virtue of the following order : 

Headquarters Division of the Atlantic, 

July 15, 1879. 
Special Orders ) 
No. 6. J 

A General Court Martial to meet at Fort Washington, N. Y., on Mon- 
day the 20th day of July, 1879, at 11 o'clock a. m., or as soon there- 
after as practicable, for the trial of such persons as may be brought be- 
fore it by authority from these headquarters [or may be properly brought 
before it\. 

detail for the court. 

1. Colonel , — U. S. Artillery. 

2. Major , — U. S. Artillery. 

3. Captain , — U. S. Cavalry. 

12. 1st Lieut. , — U. S. Artillery. 

13. 1st Lieut. , — U. S. Infantry. 

1st Lieut. , — U. S. Infantry, is appointed Judge 

Advocate of the Court. 



350 ART OF WAR. 

[Should less than thirteen members be detailed, the order must here 
read : " No other officers than those named can be assembled without 
manifest injury to the service." So also the order may state : "The 
court is authorized to sit without regard to hours."] 

By command of Major General 



[Na?ne.~\ 



[Official, Asst. Adjt. General. 



the \ 



A. A. G. or A. D. C. 
in case the signature to 
order is printed. 

Fort Washington, N. Y. 
July 20, 1879. 
The court met pursuant to the foregoing order at n o'clock a. m. 
Present. 

1. Colonel , — U. S. Artillery. 

2. Major , — U. S. Artillery. 

* * * * * * * 

11. 1st Lieut. , — U. S. Artillery. 

12. 1st Lieut. , — U. S. Infantry. 

1st Lieut. , — U. S. Infantry, Judge Advocate. 

Absent. 
Captain , — U. S. Cavalry. 

[Here state the cause of the absence, if known, and if a medical 
certificate or other evidence of cause of absence is furnished, it should 
be appended properly marked and referred to as being appended.~\ 

The Court then proceeded to the trial of Sergeant , 

Company C, — Infantry, who then came before the Court, and having 
heard the order convening it read, was asked if he had any objection 
to being tried by any member present named in the order ; to which he 
replied in the negative. [Should there be any objection, the record 
would be as follows .•] 

The prisoner accused submitted the following objection to 1st Lieut. 
(here insert the objection.) 

The challenged member then stated that : [here insert the statement 
of the challenged member.) 

(Should the accused desire that the challenged member be Placed on 
his voir dire, the oath administered by the Judge Advocate would be as 
follows : " You do swear that you will make true answer to such ques- 
tions as may be put to you touching your competency to serve as a mem- 
ber in this case : So help you God." And the record would continue 
as follows : ) 

The prisoner then requested that the challenged member be sworn on 
his voir dire. 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 357 

First Lieut. was then duly sworn by the Judge- Advo- 
cate and testified as follows : 

Question by prisoner. * * * 

Answer. * * * * 

* * * * * * * 

The Court was then cleared, the challenged member and the prisoner 
retiring, and after due deliberation the Court was re-opened, the accused 
and challenged member being present, and the decision of the Court 
was announced by the Judge Advocate, that the objection of the prisoner 

is sustained and ist. Lieut. , is excused from serving as 

a member of the Court in this case [or, that the objection of the pris- 
oner is not sustained). 

( Objection can only be made to one member at a time, and a record 
as above must be made in each instance. If no objection is made to any 
member this part of the record here inclosed in brackets woitld not ap- 
pear and the record would continue as follows .•)] 

The members of the Court were then severally duly sworn by the 
Judge Advocate, and the Judge Advocate was duly sworn by the Presi- 
dent of the Court; all of which oaths were administered in the presence 
of the prisoner. (7)z swearing the Court, all present stand, whereupon 
the Judge Advocate calls each member by na?ne, then reads the oath but 
once ; the President then administers the oath to the Judge Advocate. — 
For form of oaths, see 84th and 85th Articles of War.) \_Here im- 
viediately after swearing the Court, the accused should introduce his 
counsel, though the introduction maybe made at any time of the trial. 
Should the Court refuse to allow a particular person to act, the reason 
should be stated in the record ; if no objection is ?nade the record would 
read as follows .•] 

The accused then requested to introduce as his counsel, 

which request was granted. (If any delay in the trial is desired, applica- 
tion should now be made ; the application and decision of the Court are 
here entered upon the record.) The accused was then duly arraigned 
on the following charges and specifications. 

Charge 1. * * * * 

Specification I. * * * * 

Charge 2. * * * * 

Specification I. * * * * 

Specification II. * * * * 

[ The follozving is the form of the arraig7iment : the prisoner stand- 
ing, the charges and specifications should be read to him by the Judge 
Adocate, who then should say : " You have heard the charge and speci- 
fications preferred against you, how say you to the {ist) specification, 
guilty or not guilty ? how say you to the charge, guilty or not guilty ?" 
Here notice the specifications under each charge are plead to in their 
order, ist, 2d, etc., and lastly the charge : the record of this continues 
as follozus /] 

To which the prisoner pleaded as follows : 



353 ART OF WAR. 

To specification to first charge, "guilty" (or) " not guilty." 

To first charge, "guilty" (or) "not guilty." 

To the first specification, second charge, "guilty (or) "not guilty." 

To the second specification, second charge, "guilty" (or) "not 
"guilty." 

To the second charge, "guilty" (or) "not guilty." 

[This is pleading to the merits, when the pj-isoner stands mute, see 
8gth Article of War ; or the prisoner may make any other plea, such as 
a plea in bar of trial, or in bar of judgment, or may plead guilty to 
part of a specification and not guilty to the other part, and may sub- 
stitute other words for part of a specification^ instead of pleading to the 
merits ; any arguments made in support or against these pleas, and the 
decision of the Court, would be entered in lieu of the plea to the merits.^ 

1st Lieut. , — U. S. Infantry, a witness for the prose- 
cution, then came before the Court, was duly sworn by the Judge 
Advocate and testified as follows : (for form of oath, see Q2d Article 
of War. It may here be stated that the first question asked of a wit- 
ness is to establish his identity, the second to see if he knows the pris- 
oner, and subsequent ones to bring out material facts.) 

Question by the Judge Advocate. * * * * 

Answer. * * * * 

******* 

C' oss- £ xamination. 
Question by prisoner. * * * * 

Answer. * * * * 

***** * * 

[ The prisoner asks his questions through the Jtidge Advocate. It 
should appear on the record that he has had an opportunity to cross- 
examine the witness (by stating hi the record " that the prisoner then 
declined to cross-examine the witness.") If the cross-examination brings 
out new matter essential to the issue, the yudge Advocate re-examines 
the witness if necessary. The Court now asks such questions as it may 
deem necessary. A queslioti by a member of the Court, if objected to, 
and the objection is sustained by the Court, must be recorded as " question 
by a member" If not rejected, the record will continue as follows : 

Question by the Court. * * * * 

Answer. * * * * 

(After all the testimony for the prosecution has been presented the 
record continues as follows : | 

The Judge Advocate then announced that the prosecution here rested. 

(Suppose adjournment is here moved and agreed to, the record wouid 
read as follows :) 

The Court then at two o"clock p. m. adjourned to meet the 22d inst., 
at io o'clock a. m. 

[ Name) , 

1st Lieut., — Infantry. 

jud^e Advocate. 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 359 

(This adjournment may be on motion of a member, or at the request 
of the prisoner, or of the Judge Advocate.) 

Second Day. 

Fort Washington, N. Y., 
July 22, 1879. 
The court met pursuant to the foregoing order and adjournment. 

Present. 

{Here give names and rank of members present, and of the Judge 
Advocate, as in the first day record.) 

Absent. 

[Here give names, rank, and cause of absence.} The prisoner (and 
-, his counsel) also present. 



The proceedings of the 20th inst. were read and approved. [If not 
approved, corrections should now be made, so as to be approved by the 
court, and the record would continue :) 

Sergeant , — Infantry, a witness for the defense, then 

came before the court, and was duly sworn; testified as follows: 

Question by accused. * * * 

Answer. * * * * 

* * # * * * * 

Cross- Examination. 

Question by Judge Advocate. * * * * 

Answer. * * * * 

{Re- Examination should here take place, if necessary.) 
Question by Court. * * * * 

Answer. * * * * 

Question by member. * * . * * 

Answer. * * * * 

[After all the zvitnesses for the defense have been called, the record 
would continue) made the following statement in his defence (or) sub- 
mitted a written statement which was read to the Court by the prisoner 

(or by the Judge Advocate), and is hereto annexed, marked " " 

(or) declined to make any statement in his defense (or) requested until 

to prepare his statement. (Notice : the appropriate heading is 

to be chosen from the several given above. Also, that any written state- 
ment, argument or plea by the accused should be signed by himself) 
The Judge Advocate replied as follows : (Here insert the reply if ver- 
bal ; if written, u should be read, marked, annexed, and referred to 
as in the defense) (or) the Judge Advocate submitted the case without 
remark. {At this point in the case the proceedings of the Court become 
secret. No one is allowed to be present but the members of the Court 
and the Judge Advoaatc. The utmost caution must be exercised, as a 



360 ART OF WAR. 

violation of this secrecy is a fatal defect to the legality of the proceed- 
ings. The record continues as follows :) 

The Court was then cleared and closed for deliberation; and, having 
maturely considered the evidence adduced (or, where no evidence is 
offered on either side "having maturely considered the case") finds the 
accused, Sergeant , — Infantry, 

Of the specification, first charge, "Guilty" (or) " not Guilty." 

Of the first charge, "Guilty"' (or) " not Guilty." 

Of the first specification, second charge " Guilty" (or) "not Guilty." 

Of the second specification, second charge " Guilty" (or) " not 
Guilty." 

Of the second charge, " Guilty" (or) "not Guilty." 

( Of course, whatever the finding of the Court may be, it should be 
recorded exactly. ) 

And the Court does therefore sentence him, Sergeant , 

— Infantry, (here insert sentence), (or) the Court does 

therefore acquit him, , — Infantry. 



Colonel , U. S. Artillery, 

President. 



1st Lieut. U. S. Infantry, 

Judge Advocate. 

(A space of about one page should be left blank at this poittt in the 
proceedings for the decision and orders of the reviewitig authority. 
An adjourntnent now usually occurs, to give the Judge Advocate an 
opportunity to write up the day 's proceedings. If so, the record of the 
adjourn77ient and the subsequent meeting to read over the proceedings, 
reads similarly to that at the previoits adjournment in this case. Final 
adjournment will be added to the record oj the case ; if more than one 
case be brought before the Court, then to the record of the last one, or 
whenever the Court has no further business before it, and reads as fol- 
lows :) 

There being no further business before it, the court then, at I o'clock 
p. m., adjourned sine die. 



Colonel — U. S. Artillery, 

President. 



1st Lieut. — U. S. Infantry, 

Judge Advocate. 

Endorsement. — The record of the case (or of each case, 
being separately on legal cap paper) should be folded in 
four folds, and endorsed on the first fold as follows : 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. ,361 

Fort Washington, N. Y., 
July 24, 1879. 

Proceedings of a General Court Martial convened by Special Orders 
No. 6, dated Headquarters Division of the Atlantic, July 15, 1879. 

Colonel I—: — V , 

— U. S. Artillery, 

President. 

1st Lieutenant A B G , 

— U. S. Infantry. 

Judge Advocate. 

First Case Tried. 

Serg't E F , 

Co. , Infantry. 

Record of Revision : (//" the record is returned to the Court by the 
reviewing authority for revision, the subsequeiit proceedings thereon 
should be recorded as follows :) 

Revision. 

Fort Washington, N. Y., 
September — , 1 879. 
The Court re-convened with closed doors, pursuant to the following 
order, at 10 o'clock a. m. : 

(Here insert copy of order which orders the revisions.*) 

Present : 
****** * 

Absent : 



The Communication from the Commanding Officer, Division of the 

Atlantic, of date , 1879, (or memorandum) containing 

the instructions to the Court, and the reasons of the reviewing authority 
for requiring a reconsideration of the findings, (or sentence, or correction 
of the record,) was then read to the Court by the Judge Advocate, and 
is attached to the record and marked " — ." 

The Court then maturely deliberated upon and considered the said 
communication, and the reasons set forth for revision; and on motion, 

a. Now revoke the foregoing findings, and having maturely considered 
the evidence adduced, find, etc., etc., 

or 

b. Now revoke the foregoing sentence, and do sentence, etc., etc., 

or. 



362 ART OF WAR. 

c. Respectfully adheres to the foregoing findings and sentence, 

or, 

d. Corrects the record by, etc., etc., 



Colonel — U. S. Artillery, 

President. 



1 st Lieutenant — Infantry, 
Judge Advocate. 



CHARGES AND SPECIFICATIONS. 

The charge is based upon and should be stated as a 
"violation of an existing Article of War or other statute 
of the United States." 

The specification should be an explicit and concise state- 
ment of all the facts which go to make up the specific 
offence alleged in the charge, with time, place and circum- 
stances. When doubt exists, the allegation may be as 
"at or near" a certain place, and "on or about" a cer- 
tain date. The following indicates the general form es- 
tablished by custom, and the manner of preferring them : 

Charge and specification preferred against Sergeant , 

Company — , U. S. Infantry. 

Charge : Violation of the 38th Article of War. 

Specification : In that, Sergeant , Company — , U. S. 

Infantry, having been regularly mounted as sergeant of the guard on 
the morning of June I, 1879, was found so drunk between the hours 
of five and six p. m. as to be unable to properly perform his duties. 
This at Fort Washington, N. Y., on the 1st day of June, 1879. 

(Name of officer preferring charges.) , 

Captain U. S. Infantry, 

Officer of the Day. 
Witnesses : 

Captain , U. S. Infantry. 

Corporal , Company "A," U. S. Infantry. 

EXAMINATION OF WITNESSES. 

The following rules from Gardiner's " Instruction for 
Court Martial" show the procedure in the examination of 
witnesses, and in securing their attendance : 

Care should be taken in the direct examination to prove, as nearly as 
possible, the averments of time and place laid down in the specifica- 
tions. 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. $6$ 

Leading questious, or such as from their construction plainly suggest 
to the witness the desired answer, are not admissible in an examination- 
in-chief. 

In the trial of a case, the court should usually defer questioning a 
witness until after his examination by the Judge Advocate, and the pris- 
oner, has been completed. Such questions should be for the purpose 
of clearing doubts in the minds of members, or of reconciling discrep- 
ancies. 

■ The cross-examination should be confined to testimony elicited in the 
examination-in-chief, and not run into a general defence involving new 
matter. When facts are to be elicited from witnesses for the prosecu- 
tion, advantageous to the prisoner, such witnesses can be recalled by 
the defense for that purpose. 

Re examination is only for the purpose of explaining any facts that 
may come out in the cross-examination, and should, as a general rule, 
be confined to this. 

Witnesses may be recalled by the court at any stage in the proceed- 
ings for such examination as may be deemed necessaiy, in which case 
both parties must be present. .The court may also call before it wit- 
nesses not summoned by either the prosecution or defence. 

When the court takes evidence after a plea of " guilty," the prisoner 
may cross-examine the witnesses, and he may produce evidence to re- 
but them, and evidence as to character, and may address the court in 
extenuation of the offence or in mitigation of punishment. 

The best attainable evidence should always be adduced, and should 
be confined to the allegations at issue. 

Hearsay testimony is inadmissible ; as also are opinions of witnesses, 
except upon questions where witnesses are called to testify as experts, 
and the fact they are such clearly shown. 

In allegations of drunkenness, witnesses, in other respects competent, 
can give their opinion and belief as to the state of sobriety of the pris- 
oner at the times specified. 

Documentary evidence is only admissible when its authenticity has 
been established by sworn testimony, or under the seal of a court of 
record, according to the laws of the State where taken, or of the United 
States. 

When original documents are introduced, and are of such a character 
that the originals cannot be retained, copies, certified as correct by the 
Judge Advocate, may be attached to the record. 

When transcripts from the records of any of the Executive Depart- 
ments of the Government are used, they should be ceitified to by the 
chief officer of the bureau in which the originals are filed, and the au- 
thenticity of the certification verified under the seal of the Department 
by the Secretary thereof, or otherwise established. 

After a witness has given his evidence in full, it should be read over 
to him, that he may see whether it has been recorded as he gave it, and 
that he may make corrections, if necessary. 



^6' ART OF WAX. 

Courts martial are governed by the Common Law Rules of Evidence, 
except where subsequently modified by specific acts of Congress. 

To secure the attendance of necessary and material witnesses before 
a General Court Martial, the Judge Advocate should proceed as follows : 

If the witness is an officer or an enlisted man, the summons should 
be addressed to him through the proper military channels, so that the 
necessary orders for attendance may be issued. 

The 91st Article of War authorizes the taking of the depositions of 
witnesses residing beyond the limits of the State, Territory or District 
where the court may be ordered to sit, if taken on reasonable notice to 
the opposite party, and duly authenticated. Depositions will, to save 
expense to the Government, be taken whenever practicable. 

In order to subpoena a citizen witness, it must be made to appear to 
the satisfaction of the court, that his testimony is " material and neces- 
sary," and the fact entered on the record. It usually happens that a 
Judge Advocate receives the "charge and specifications" (which stand 
in place of an indictment in the civil courts), prior to the assembling 
of the court; and that, to prevent delay in the trial, it becomes neces- 
sary to summon or subpoena the military or civilian witnesses whose 
names are attached. 

In such case, the subpoena (in duplicate) for the citizen witness may 
be issued, pro forma, as above indicated — without, of necessity, wait- 
ing for the court to assemble; but in the event of the witness not obey- 
ing it, the Judge Advocate, upon moving for a writ of attachment, must 
show to the court additionally, and have it entered on the record — "that 
the witness is a material and necessary one." 

Duplicate subpoenas should then be sent to the nearest Post Com- 
mander for service, if the witness resides within the department, or else 
to department headquarters, unless otherwise specially directed by the 
department commander. 

Service is made, under the laws of the United States, by delivering 
the subpoena to the witness ; and proof of service, by returning the 
duplicate original to the Judge Advocate, with an affidavit endorsed 
to the effect, that on such a day, date, and place, the affiant personally 
served the within named witness, by delivering to him a subpoena, of 
which the within is a complete copy. 

Any military person, instructed by the Judge Advocate or Post Com- 
mander, can serve the subpoena ; but service by mail is not a legal 
service. 

Should the witness fail to appear on due and reasonable notice, the 
Judge Advocate has, by Section 1202, Revised Statutes of the United 
States, power to issue like process, to compel any witness to appear and 
testify, as the courts of criminal jurisdiction within the State, Territory, 
or District where such Court may be convened. This power includes 
also the power to execute such process through some officer, who shall 
be specially charged with its execution. 

The ludge Advocate should, therefore, present to the Court, and have 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 365 

attached to the record, and therein noted, the duplicate subpoena and 
affidavit of service, and formally move the Court for a writ of attach- 
ment against the contumacious witness. 

If the motion is granted, the record should show it; and the Judge 
Advocate should then, unless otherwise specially directed by the De- 
partment Commander, apply to the nearest Post Commander to the 
residence of witness, if within the Department, for the name of some 
military officer to serve the process, and formally direct the writ of at- 
tachment to him, and attach thereto a certified copy of the order con- 
vening the Court, and copies also of the original subpoena and charges 
and specifications. The Post Commander will thereupon furnish the 
officer a sufficient force for the execution of the process, whenever 
such force shall be actually required. 
The following forms should be used : 
{Subpoena .) 
General Court-Martial Rooms, 

{Station of Court.) 

THE PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA: 

To* 

Greeting : 

Pursuant to section 1202 Revised Statutes of the United States, you are hereby- 
required to be and appear, in your own proper person, on the . . day of , 

187 . , at . . o'clock in the . . . noon, before a General Court-Martial of the United 

States, convened at said by virtue of Special Orders 

Number . . , of , 187 . , from the Headquarters of the Department of 

the ....; , to testify and give evidence all that you may know- 
concerning the pending case then and there to be tried, of the United States versus 

, accused of under the laws of the United 

States, and have you then and there this precept. 

Witness : {Name of Presiding Officer) , President 

of said Court, this . . day of , 187 . . 

{Name.) 

{Rank.) 

fudge Advocate. 
{^■Insert name and address of witness, if knozvn.) 

If the witness resides without the Department, the Judge Advocate 
should transmit the writ of attachment, with certified copies of orders 
convening Court, subpoena, and charges, to these Headquarters, prop- 
erly signed and filled in, except as to the name of the officer who may 
be subsequently indicated to serve the writ. 

{Process of Attachment.) 

THE PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA: 

To 



Stationed at 

Greeting : 
Whereas, a General Court-Martial of the United States was duly convened at 

, on the . . day of , 187 . , pursuant 

to Special Orders No. . . of , 187 . , from Headquarters . . . 

, a copy of which said order is hereto annexed, marked " A," 



366 ART OF WAR. 

and, Whereas, on the . . da}' of ......... , 187 . , at 

the said General Court-Martial having been duly sworn, , 

of the United States Army, was duly arraigned, and his trial proceeded with on a 
certain charge, instituted at the prosecution of the United States, for the offence of 

under the laws of the United States, a copy of which is 

hereto annexed, marked " B ;" and Whereas, one* of 

, in the was, on 

the . . day of , 187 . , personally served with a subpoena (a dupli- 
cate of which is hereto annexed, marked " C"), directing him to appear and testify 
in said cause at the time and place therein commanded ; and Whereas, the said J 

did, on the . . day of , 187 . , fail and 

neglect to appear before said Court, or testify in said cause, as required by said sub- 
poena, and still fails and neglects to appear or testify in said cause, he being a ne- 
cessary and material witness therein, and no just excuse has been offered for such 
neglect : 

Now, therefore, under and by virtue of section 1202 Revised Statutes of the 

United States you are hereby commanded that you take the said * 

wherever he may be found within the United States, and him safely 

keep, and bring you his body without delay before the said General Court-Martial 

convened at said , and of which , 

United States Army, is President, at the Court Room thereof, on the . . . day of 

187 . , at . . . o'clock in the forenoon, at the opening of said 

Court, to then and there testify in the said cause of the United States versus . . . 

...... now depending, and then and there to be continued and 

tried. 

And have you then and there this writ. 

By order of the Court : 
In witness whereof, I, as Judge Advocate of said Court, duly appointed and 

sworn, have hereto set my hand and seal, at , this . . day 

of , 187 . . 

{Name.) 

{Rank.) 

yudge Advocate. 
i*Insert the name of contumacious witness.) 

Articles of War. 

Section 1342. The armies of the United States shall be governed by 
the following rules and articles. The word officer, as used therein, 
shall be understood to designate commissioned officers ; the word sol- 
dier shall be understood to include non-commissioned officers, musi- 
cians, artificers, and privates, and other enlisted men, and the convic- 
tions mentioned therein shall be understood to be convictions by- 
court martial. 

Article i. Every officer now in the army of the United States shall, 
within six months from the passing of this act, and every officer here- 
after appointed shall, before he enters upon the duties of his office, sub- 
scribe these rules and articles. 

Art. 2. These rules and articles shall be read to every enlisted man 
at the time of, or within six days after, his enlistment, and he shall 
thereupon take an oath or affirmation, in the following form: " I, A. B., 
do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will bear true faith and allegiance 
to the United States of America ; that I will serve them honestly and 
faithfully against all their enemies whomsoever, and that I will obey 
the orders of the President of the United States, and the orders of the 
officers appointed over me, according to the rules and articles of war." 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 367 

This oath may be taken before any commissioned officer of the 
army. 

Art. 3. Every officer who knowingly enlists or musters into the mil- 
itary service any minor over the age of 16 years without the written 
consent of his parents or guardians, or any minor under the age of 16 
years, or any insane or intoxicated persons, or any deserter from the 
military or naval service of the United States, or any person who has 
been convicted of any infamous criminal offense, shall, upon conviction, 
be dismissed from the service, or suffer such ni j r punishment as a 
court martial may direct. 

Art. 4. No enlisted man duly sworn shall be discharged from the 
service without a discharge in writing, signed by a field officer of the 
regiment to which he belongs, or by the commanding officer, when no 
field officer is present ; and no discharge shall be given to any enlisted 
man before his term of service has expired except by order of the 
President, the Secretary of War, the commanding officer of a depart- 
ment, or by sentence of a general court-martial. 

Art. 5. Any officer who knowingly musters as a soldier a person 
who is not a soldier, shall be deemed guilty of knowingly making a 
false muster, and punished accordingly. 

Art. 6. Any officer who takes money, or other thing, by way of 
gratification, on mustering any regiment, troop, battery, or company, or 
on signing muster rolls, shall be dismissed from the service, and shall 
thereby be disabled to hold any office. or employment in the service of 
the United States. 

Art. 7. Every officer commanding a regiment, an independent 
troop, battery, or company, or a garrison, shall, in the beginning of 
eveiy month, transmit through the proper channels, to the Department 
of War, an exact return of the same, specifying the names of the officers 
then absent from their posts, with the reasons for and the time of their 
absence. And any officer who, through neglect or design, omits to send 
such returns, shall, on conviction thereof, be punished as a court martial 
may direct. 

Art. 8. Every officer who knowingly makes a false return* to the 
Department of War, or to any of his superior officers, authorized to call 
for such returns, of the state of the regiment, troop, or company, or 
garrison under his command, or of the arms, ammunition, clothing, or 
other stores thereunto belonging, shall, on conviction thereof before a 
court martial, be cashiered. 

Art. 9. All public stores taken from the enemy shall be secured for 
the service of the United States, and for neglect thereof the command- 
ing officer shall be answerable. 

Art. 10. Every officer commanding a troop, battery, or company, is 
charged with the arms, accoutrements, ammunition, clothing, or other 
military stores belonging to his command, and is accountable to his 
colonel in case of their being lost, spoiled, or damaged otherwise than 
by unavoidable accident, or on actual service. 



368 ART OF WAR. 

Art. ir. Every officer commanding a regiment or an independent 
troop, battery, or company, not in the fiel 1, may, when actually quar- 
tered with such command, grant furloughs to the enlisted men, in such 
numbers and for such time as he shall deem consistent with the good 
of the service. Every officer commanding a regiment, or an independ- 
ent troop, battery, or company, in the field, may grant furloughs not ex- 
ceeding thirty days at one time, to five per centum of the enlisted men, 
for good conduct in the line of duty, but subject to the approval of the 
commander of the forces of which said enlisted men form a part. Every 
company officer of a regiment, commanding any troop, battery, or com- 
pany not in the field, or commanding in any garrison, fort, post, or 
barrack, may, in the absence of his field officer, grant furloughs to the 
enlisted men, for a time not exceeding twenty days in six months, and 
not lo more than two persons to be absent at the same time. 

Art. 12. At every muster of a regiment, troop, battery or company, 
the commanding officer thereof shall give to the mustering officer cer- 
tificates, signed by himself, stating how long absent officers have been 
absent, and the reasons of their absence. And the commanding officer 
of every troop, battery, or company shall give like certificates, stating 
how long absent non-commissioned officers and private soldiers have 
been absent and the reasons of their absence. Such reasons and time 
of absence shall be inserted in the muster rolls opposite the names of 
the respective absent officers and soldiers, and the certificates, together 
with the muster rolls, shall be transmitted by the mustering officer to 
the Department of War, as speedily as the distance of the place and 
muster will admit. 

Art. 13. Every officer who signs a false certificate relating to the 
absence or pay of an officer or soldier, shall be dismissed from the 
service. 

Art. 14. Any officer who knowingly makes a false muster of man or 
horse, or who signs, or directs, or allows the signing of any muster roll, 
knowing the same to contain a false muster, shall, upon proof thereof 
by two witnesses, before a court-martial, be dismissed from the service, 
and shall thereby be disabled to hold any office or employment in the 
sendee of the United States. 

Art. 15. Any officer who, wilfully or through neglect, suffers to be 
lost, spoiled, or damaged, any military stores belonging to the United 
States, shall make good the loss or damage, and be dismissed from the 
service. 

Art. 16. Any enlisted man who sells, or willfully or through neglect 
wastes the ammunition delivered out to him, shall be punished as a 
court martial may direct. 

Art. 17. Any soldier who sells or, through neglect, loses or spoils 
his horse, arms, clothing, or accoutrements, shall suffer such stoppages, 
not exceeding one-half of his current pay, as a court martial may deem 
sufficient for repairing the loss or damage, and shall be punished by 
confinement or such other corporal punishment as the court may direct. 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 369 

Art. 18. Any officer commanding in any garrison, fort, or barracks 
of the United States who, for his private advantage, lays any duty or 
imposition upon, or is interested in, the sale of any victuals, liquors, or 
oilier necessaries of life, brought into such garrison, fort, or barracks, 
for the use of the soldiers, shall be dismissed from the service. 

Art. 19. Any officer who uses contemptuous or disrespectful words 
against the President, the Vice-President, the Congress of the United 
States, or the chief magistrate or legislature of any of the United States 
in which he is quartered, shall be dismissed from the service, or other- 
wise punished, as a court martial may direct. Any soldier who so 
offends shall be punished as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 20. Any officer or soldier who behaves himself with disrespect * 
towards his commanding officer shall be punished as a court martial 
may direct. 

Art. 21. Any officer or soldier who, on any pretense whatsoever, 
strikes his superior officer, or draws or lifts up any weapon, or offers 
any violence against him, being in the execution of his office, or diso- 
beys any lawful command of his superior officer, shall suffer death, or 
such other punishment as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 22. Any officer or soldier who begins, excites, causes, or joins 
in any mutiny, or sedition, in any troop, battery, company, party, post, 
detachment, or guard, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as a 
court martial may direct. 

Art. 23. Any officer or soldier who, being present at any mutiny or 
sedition, does not use his utmost endeavor to suppress the same, or hav- 
ing knowledge of any intended mutiny or sedition, does not, without 
delay, give information thereof to his commanding officer, shall suffer 
death, or such other punishment as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 24. All officers, of what condition soever, have power to part 
and quell all quarrels, frays, and disorders, whether among persons be- 
longing to his own or to another corps, regiment, troop, battery or com- 
pany, and to order officers into arrest, and non-commissioned officers 
and soldiers into confinement, who take part in the same, until their 
proper superior officer is acquainted therewith. And whosoever, being 
so ordered, refuses to obey such officer or non-commissioned officer, or 
draws a weapon upon him, shall be punished as a court martial may 
direct. 

Art. 25. No officer or soldier shall use any reproachful or provok- 
ing speeches or gestures to another. Any officer who so offends shall 
be put in arrest. Any soldier who so offends shall be confined, and 
required to ask pardon of the party offended, in the presence of his 
commanding officer. 

Art. 26. No officer or soldier shall send a challenge to another offi- 
cer or soldier to fight a duel, or accept a challenge so sent. Any offi- 
cer who so offends shall be dismissed from the service. Any soldier 
who so offends shall suffer such punishment as a court martial may 
direct. 

24 



370 ART CF WAR. 

Art. 27. Any officer or non-commisioned officer, commanding a 
guard, who, knowingly and willingly, suffers any person to go forth to 
fight a duel, shall be punished as a challenger; and all seconds or pro- 
moters of duels, and carriers of challenges to fight duels, shall be 
deemed principals, and punished accordingly. It shall be the duty of 
any officer commanding an army, regiment, troop, battery, company, 
post, or detachment, who knows or has reason to believe that a chal- 
lenge has been given or accepted by any officer or enlisted man under 
his command, immediately to arrest the offender and bring him to trial. 

Art. 28. Any officer or soldier who upbraids another officer or sol- 
dier for refusing a challenge shall himself be punished as a challenger; 
'and all officers and soldiers are hereby discharged from any disgrace 
or opinion of disadvantage which might arise from their having refused 
to accept challenges, as they will only have acted in obedience to the 
law, and have done their duty as good soldiers, who subject themselves 
to discipline. 

Art. 29. Any officer who thinks himself wronged by the command- 
ing officer of his regiment, and, upon due application to such commander, 
is refused redress, may complain to the general commanding in the State 
or Territory where such regiment is stationed. The general shall ex- 
amine into said complaint and take proper measures for redressing the 
wrong complained of; and he shall, as soon as possible, transmit to the 
Department of War a true statement of such complaint, with the pro- 
ceedings had thereon. 

Art. 30. Any soldier who thinks himself wronged by any officer 
may complain to the commanding officer of his regiment, who shall 
summon a regimental court martial for the doing of justice to the com- 
plainant. Either party may appeal from such regimental court martial 
to a general court martial ; but if, upon such second hearing, the appeal 
appears to be groundless and vexatious, the party appealing shall be 
punished at the discretion of said general court martial. 

Art. 31. Any officer or soldier who lies out of his quarters, garrison, 
or camp, without leave from his superior officer, shall be punished as 
a court martial may direct. 

Art. 32. Any soldier who absents himself from his troop, battery, 
company, or detachment, without leave from his commanding officer, 
shall be punished as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 2>2>- Any officer or soldier who fails, except when prevented by 
sickness or other necessity, to repair, at the fixed time, to the place of 
parade, exercise, or other rendezvous appointed by his commanding of- 
ficer, or goes from the same, without leave from his commanding offi- 
cer, before he is dismissed or relieved, shall be punished as a court 
martial may direct. 

Art. 34. Any soldier who is found one mile from camp, without 
leave in writing from his commanding officer, shall be punished as a 
court martial may direct. 

Art. 35. Any soldier who fails to retire to his quarters or tent at 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 37 1 

the beating of retreat, shall be punished according to the nature of his 
offence. 

Art. 36. No soldier belonging to any regiment, troop, battery, or 
company shall hire another to do his duty for him, or be excused 
from duty, except in cases of sickness, disability, or leave of absence. 
Every such soldier found guilty of hiring his duty, and the person so 
hired to do another's duty, shall be punished as a court martial may 
direct. 

Art. 37. Every non-commissioned officer who connives at such 
hiring of duty shall be reduced. Every officer who knows and allows 
such practices shall be punished as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 38. Any officer who is found drunk on his guard, party, or 
other duty, shall be dismissed from the service. Any soldier who so 
offends shall suffer such punishment as a court martial may direct. No 
court martial shall sentence any soldier to be branded, marked or tat- 
tooed. 

Art. 39. Any sentinel who is found sleeping upon his post, or leaves 
it before he is regularly relieved, shall suffer death, or such other pun- 
ishment as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 40. Any officer or soldier who quits his guard, platoon, *jr 
division, without leave from his superior officer, except in a case of ur- 
gent necessity, shall be punished as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 41. Any officer who, by any means whatsoever, occasions false 
alarms in camp, garrison, or quarters, shall suffer death, or such other 
punishment as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 42. Any officer or soldier who misbehaves himself before the 
enemy, runs away, or shamefully abandons any fort, post, or guard, 
which he is commanded to defend, or speaks words inducing others to 
do the like, or casts away his arms or ammunition, or quits his post or 
colors to plunder or pillage, shall suffer death, or such other punish- 
ment as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 43. If any commander of any garrison, fortress, or post, is com- 
pelled, by the officers and soldiers under his command, to give up to the 
enemy or to abandon it, the officers or soldiers so offending shall suffer 
death or such other punishment as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 44. Any person belonging to the armies of the United States 
who makes known the watchword to any person not entitled to receive 
it, according to the rules and discipline of war, or presumes to give a 
parole or watchword different from that which he received, shall suffer 
death, or such other punishment as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 45. Whosoever relieves the enemy with money, victuals, or 
ammunition, or knowingly harbors or protects an enemy, shall suffer 
death, or such other punishment as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 46. Whosoever hold correspondence with, or gives intelligence 
to the enemy, either directly or indirectly, shall suffer death, or such 
other punishment as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 47. Any officer or soldier who, having received pay, or having 



372 ART OF WAR. 

been duly enlisted in the service of the United States, deserts the same, 
shall, in time of war, suffer death, or such other punishment as a court 
martial may direct; and in time of peace, any punishment, excepting 
death, which a court martial may direct. 

Art. 48. Every soldier who deserts the service of the United States 
shall be liable to serve for such period as shall, with the time he may 
have served previous to his desertion, amount to the full term of his 
enlistment; and such soldier shall be tried by a court martial and pun- 
ished, although the term of his enlistment may have elapsed previous to 
his being apprehended and tried. 

Art. 49. Any officer who, having tendered his resignation, quits his 
post or proper duties, without leave, and with intent to remain perma- 
nently absent therefrom, prior to due notice of the acceptance of the 
same, shall be deemed and punished as a deserter. 

Art. 50. No non-commissioned officer or soldier shall enlist himself 
in any other regiment, troop, or company without a regular discharge 
from the regiment, troop, or company in which he last served, on a 
penalty of being reputed a deserter, and suffering accordingly. And in 
case any officer shall knowingly receive and entertain such non-commis- 
sioned officer or soldier, or shall not, after his being discovered to be a 
deserter, immediately confine him and give notice thereof to the corps 
in which he last served, the said officer shall, by a court-martial, be 
cashiered. 

Art. 51. Any officer or soldier who advises or persuades any other 
officer or soldier to desert the service of the United States, shall, in time 
of war, suffer death, or such other punishment as a court martial may 
direct; and in time of peace, any punishment, excepting death, which 
a court martial may direct. 

Art. 52. It is earnestly recommended to all officers and soldiers dil- 
igently to attend divine service. Any officer who behaves indecently 
or irreverently at any place of divine worship shall be brought before a 
general court martial, there to be publicly and severely reprimanded by 
the president thereof. Any soldier who so offends shall, for his first 
offence, forfeit one-sixth of a dollar; for each further offence he shall 
forfeit a like sum, and shall be confined twenty-four hours. The money 
so forfeited shall be deducted from his next pay, and shall be applied, 
by the captain or senior officer of his troop, battery, or company, to the 
use of the sick soldiers of the same. 

Art. 53. Any officer who uses any profane oath or execration shall, 
for each offence, forfeit and pay one dollar. Any soldier who so of- 
fends shall incur the penalties provided in the preceding article ; and 
all moneys forfeited for such offences shall be applied as therein pro- 
vided. 

Art. 54. Every officer commanding in quarters, garrison, or on the 
march, shall keep good order, and to the utmost of his power, redress all 
abuses or disorders which may be committed by any officer or soldier 
under his command; and if, upon complaint made to him of officers or 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 373 

soldiers beating or otherwise ill-treating any person, disturbing fairs or« 
markets, or committing any kind of riot, to the disquieting of the citi- 
zens of the United States, he refusus or omits to see justice done to the 
offender, and reparation made to the party injured, so far as part of the 
offender's pay shall go toward such reparation, he shall be dismissed 
from the service, or otherwise punished, as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 55. All officers and soldiers are to behave themselves orderly 
in quarters and on the march ; and whoever commits any waste or spoil, 
either in walks or trees, parks, warrens, fish-ponds, houses, gardens, 
grain- fields, inclosures, or meadows, or maliciously destroys any prop- 
erty whatsoever belonging to inhabitants of the United States (unless by 
order of a general officer commanding a separate army in the field), 
shall, besides such penalties as he may be liable to by law, be punished 
as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 56. Any officer or soldier who does violence to any person 
bringing provisions or other necessaries to the camp, garrison, or 
quarters of the forces of the United States in foreign parts, shall suffer 
death, or such other punishment as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 57. Whosoever, belonging to the Armies of the United States 
in foreign parts, or at any place within the United States or their Terri- 
tories during rebellion against the supreme authority of the United 
States, forces a safeguard, shall suffer death. 

Art. 58. In time of war, insurrection, or rebellion, larceny, robbery, 
burglary, arson, mayhem, manslaughter, murder, assault and. battery 
with intent to kill, wounding, by shooting or stabbing, with an intent 
to commit murder, rape, or assault and battery with an intent to commit 
rape, shall be punishable by the sentence of a general court martial, 
when committed by persons in the military service of the United 
States, and the punishment in any such case shall not be less than the 
punishment provided, for the like offence, by the laws of the State, 
Territory, or District in which such offence may have been committed. 

Art. 59. When any officer or soldier is accused of a capital crime, or 
of any offence against the person or property of any citizen of any of 
the United States, which is punishable by the laws of the land, the 
commanding officer, and the officers of the regiment, troop, battery, 
company, or detachment to which the person so accused belongs, are 
required, except in time of war, upon application duly made by or in 
behalf of the party i'njured, to use their utmost endeavors to deliver him 
over to the civil magistrate, and to aid the officers of justice in appre- 
hending and securing him, in order to bring him to trial. If, upon such 
application, any officer refuses or willfully neglects, except in time of 
war, to deliver over such accused person to the civil magistrates, or to 
aid the officers of justice in apprehending him, he shall be dismissed 
from the service. 

Art. 60. Any person in the military service of the United States 
who makes or causes to be made any claim against the United States, 
or any officer. thereof, knowing such claim to be false or fraudulent; or 



374 ART 0F war. 

Who presents or causes to be presented to any person in the civil or 
military service thereof, for approval or payment, any claim against the 
United States", or any officer thereof, knowing such claim to be false or 
fraudulent; or 

Who enters into any agreement or conspiracy to defraud the United 
States by obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the allowance or payment 
of any false or fraudulent claim ; or 

Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the ap- 
proval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States 
or against any officer thereof, makes or uses, or procures or advises the 
making or use of. any writing, or other paper, knowing the same to 
contain any false or fraudulent statement; or 

Who. for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the ap- 
proval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States or 
any officer thereof, makes, or procures or advises the making of, any 
oath to any fact or to any writing or other paper, knowing such oath to 
be false ; or 

Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the ap- 
proval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States 
or any officer thereof, forges or counterfeits, or procures or advises the 
forging or counterfeiting of any signature upon any writing other paper, 
or uses, or procures or advises the use of, any such signature, knowing 
the same to* be forged or counterfeited ; or 

Who, having charge, possession, custody or control of any money or 
other property of the United States, furnished or intended for the mili- 
tary service thereof, knowingly delivers, or causes to be delivered, to 
any person having authority to receive the same, any amount thereof 
less than that for which he receives a certificate or receipt ; or 

Who, being authorized to make or deliver any paper certifying the 
receipt of any property of the United States, furnished or intended for 
the military service thereof, makes or delivers to any person such writ- 
ing, without having full knowledge of the truth of the statements therein 
contained, and with intent to defraud the United States; or who steals, 
embezzles, knowingly and wilfully misappropriates, applies to his own 
use or benefit, or wrongfully or knowingly sells or disposes of any ord- 
nance, arms, equipments, ammunition, clothing, subsistence stores, 
money, or other property of the United States furnished or intended for 
the military service thereof; or 

Who knowingly purchases, or receives in pledge for any obligation 
or indebtedness, from any soldier, officer, or other person who is a part 
of or employed in said forces or service, any ordnance, arms, equip- 
ments, ammunition, clothing, subsistence stores, or other property of the 
United States, such soldier, officer, or other person not having lawful 
right to sell or pledge the same ; 

Shall, on conviction thereof, be punished by fine or imprisonment, or 
by such other punishment as a court martial may adjudge. And if any 
person, being guilty of any of the offenses aforesaid, while in the mili- 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 375 

tary service of the United States, receive his discharge, or is dismissed 
from the service, he shall continue to be liable to be arrested and held 
for trial and sentenced by a court-martial in the same manner and to 
the same extent as if he had not received such discharge nor been dis- 
missed. 

Art. 61.. Any officer who is convicted of conduct unbecoming an 
officer and a gentleman shall be dismissed from the service. 

Art. 62. All crimes not capital, and all disorders and neglects, 
which officers and soldiers may be guilty of, to the prejudice of good 
order and military discipline, though not mentioned in the foregoing 
articles of war, are to be taken cognizance of by a general, or a regi- 
mental, garrison, or field officers' court martial, according to the 
nature and degree of the offense, and punished at the discretion of such 
court. 

Art. 63. All retainers to the camp, and all persons serving with the 
armies of the United States in the field, though not enlisted soldiers, 
are to be subject to orders, according to the rules and discipline of war. 

Art. 64. The officers and soldiers of any troops, whether militia or 
others, mustered and in pay of the United States, shall at all times and in 
all places, be governed by the articles of war, and shall be subject to be 
tried by courts martial. 

Art. 65. Officers charged with crime shall be arrested and confined 
in their barracks, quarters, or tents, and deprived of their swords by the 
commanding officer. And any officer who leaves his confinement be- 
fore he is set at liberty by his commanding officer shall be dismissed 
from the service. 

Art. 66. Soldiers charged with crimes shall be confined until tried 
by court martial, or released by proper authority. 

Art. 67. No provost marshal, or officer commanding a guard, shall 
refuse to receive or keep any prisoner committed to his charge by an 
officer belonging to the forces of the United States; provided the officer 
committing shall, at the same time, deliver an account in writing, signed 
by himself, of the crime charged against the prisoner. 

Art. 68. Every officer to whose charge a prisoner is committed shall, 
within twenty-four hours after such commitment, or as soon as he is re- 
lieved from his guard, report in writing, to the commanding officer, the 
name of such prisoner, the crime charged against him, and the name of 
the officer committing him; and if he fails to make such report, he shall 
be punished as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 69. Any officer who presumes, without proper authority, to re- 
lease any prisoner committed to his charge, or suffers any prisoner so 
committed to escape, shall be punished as a court martial may direct. 

Art. 70. No officer or soldier put in arrest shall be continued in 
confinement more than eight days, or until such time as a court martial 
can be assembled. 



376 ART OF WAR. 

Art. 71. When an officer is put in arrest for the purpose of trial, 
except at remote military posts or stations, the officer by whose order 
he is arrested shall see that a copy of the charges on which he is to be 
tried is served upon him within eight days after his arrest, and that he 
is brought to trial within ten days thereafter, unless the necessities of 
the service prevent such trial; and then he shall be brought to trial 
within thirty days after the expiration of said ten days. If a copy of 
the charges be not served, or the arrested officer be not brought to trial, 
as herein required, the arrest shall cease. But officers released from 
arrest, under the provisions of this article, may be tried, whenever the 
exigencies of the service shall permit, within twelve months after such 
release from arrest. 

Art. 72. Any general officer, commanding the Army of the United 
States, a separate Army, or a separate department, shall be competent 
to appoint a general court martial, either in time of peace or in time of 
war. But when any such commander is the accuser or prosecutor of 
any officer under his command, the court shall be appointed by the 
President, and its proceedings and sentence shall be sent directly to the 
Secretary of War, by whom they shall be laid before the President, for 
his approval or orders in the case. 

Art. 73. In time of war the commander of a division, or of a sepa- 
rate brigade of troops, shall be competent to appoint a general court 
martial. But when such commander is the accuser or prosecutor of any 
person under his command, the court shall be appointed by the next 
higher commander. 

Art. 74. Officers who may appoint a court martial shall be compe- 
tent to appoint a Judge Advocate for the same. 

Art. 75. General courts martial may consist of' any number of offi- 
cers from five to thirteen, inclusive ; but they shall not consist of less 
than thirteen when that number can be convened without manifest in- 
jury to the service. 

Art. 76. When the requisite number of officers to form a general 
court martial is not present in any post or detachment, the commanding 
officer shall, in cases which require the cognizance of such a court, report 
to the commanding officer of the department, who shall, thereupon, order 
a court to be assembled at the nearest post or department at which there 
may be such a requisite number of officers, and shall order the party 
accused, with necessary witnesses, to be transported to the place where 
the said court shall be assembled. 

Art. 77. Officers of the Regular Army shall not be competent to sit 
on courts martial to try the officers or soldiers of other forces, except as 
provided in Article 78. 

Art. 78. Officers of the Marine Corps, detached for service with the 
Army, by order of the President, may be associated with officers of the 
Regular Army on courts martial for the trial of offenders belonging to 
the Regular Army, or to forces of the Marine Corps so detached ; and 
in such cases the orders of the senior officer of either corps, who may 
be present and duly authorized, shall be obeyed. 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 377 

Art. 79. Officers shall be tried only by general courts martial ; and 
no officer shall, when it can be avoided, be tried by officers inferior to 
him in rank. 

Art. 80. In time of war a field officer may be detailed in every reg- 
iment, to try soldiers thereof for offences not capital; and no soldier 
serving with his regiment, shall be tried by a regimental or garrison 
court martial when a field officer of his regiment may be so detailed. 

Art. 81. Every officer commanding a regiment or coips shall, sub- 
ject to the provisions of article eighty, be competent to appoint, for his 
own regiment or corps, courts martial, consisting of three officers, to try 
offences not capital. 

Art. 82. Every officer commanding a garrison, fort, or other place, 
where the troops consist of different corps, shall, subject to the provisions 
of article eighty, be competent to appoint, for such garrison or other 
place, courts martial, consisting of three officers, to try offences not 
capital. 

Art. 83. Regimental and garrison courts martial, and field officers 
detailed to try offenders, shall not have power to try capital cases or 
commissioned officers, or to inflict a fine exceeding one month's pay, or 
to imprison or put to hard labor any non-commissioned officer or 
soldier for a longer time than one month. 

Art. 84. The Judge Advocate shall- administer to each member of 
the court, before they proceed upon any trial, the following oath, which 
shall also be taken by all members of regimental and garrison courts 
martial: "You, A. B., do swear that you will well and truly try and 
determine, according to the evidence, the matter now before you, between 
the United States of America and the prisoner to be tried, and that you 
will duly administer justice, without partiality, favor, or affection, ac- 
cording to the provisions of the rules and articles for the government 
of the armies of the United States, and if any doubt should arise, not 
explained by said articles, then according to your conscience, the best 
of your understanding, and the custom of war in like cases; and you 
do further swear that you will not divulge the sentence of the court until 
it shall be published by the proper authority; neither will you disclose 
or discover the vote or opinion of any particular member of the court 
martial, unless required to give evidence thereof, as a witness by a court 
of justice, in a due course of law. So help you God." 

Art. 85. When the oath has been administered to the members of 
a court martial, the president of the court shall administer to the Judge 
Advocate, or person officiating as such, an oath in the following form: 
" You, A. B., do swear that you wi'll not disclose or discover the vote 
or opinion of any particular member of the coujrt martial, unless re- 
quired to give evidence thereof, as a witness, by a court of justice, in 
due course of law, nor divulge the sentence of the court to any but the 
proper authority until it shall be duly disclosed by the same. So help 
you God. : ' 



378 ART OF WAR. 

Art. 86. The court martial may punish, at discretion, any person 
who uses any menacing words, signs, or gestures in its presence, or who 
disturbs its proceedings by any riot or disorder. 

Art. 87. All members of a court martial are to behave with decency 
and calmness. 

Art. 88. Members of a court martial may be challenged by a pris- 
oner, but only for cause stated to the couit. The court shall determine 
the relevancy and validity thereof, and shall not receive a challenge to 
more than one member at a time. 

Art. 89. When a prisoner, arraigned before a general court martial, 
from obstinacy and deliberate design, stands mute, or answers foreign 
to the purpose, the court may proceed to trial and judgment, as if the 
prisoner had pleaded not guilty. 

Art. 90. The judge -advocate, or some person deputed by him, or by 
the general or officer commanding the Army, detachment, or garrison, 
shall prosecute in the name of the United States ; but when the prisoner 
has made his plea, he shall so far consider himself counsel for the 
prisoner as to object to any leading question to any of the witnesses, 
and to any question to the prisoner, the answer to which might tend to 
criminate himself. 

Art. 91. The deposition of witnesses residing beyond the limits of 
the State, Territory, or district in which any military court may be or- 
dered to sit, if taken on reasonable notice to the opposite party and duly 
authenticated, may be read in evidence before such court in cases not 
capital. 

Art. 92. All persons who give evidence before a court martial shall 
be examined on oath, or affirmation, in the following form : " You swear 
(or affirm) that the evidence you shall give in the case now in hearing, 
shall be the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth. So help 
you God." 

Art. 93. A court martial shall,, for reasonable cause, grant a contin- 
uance to either party, for such time, and as often as may appear to be 
just : Provided, That if the prisoner be in close confinement the trial 
shall not be delayed for a period longer than sixty days. 

Art. 94. Proceedings of trials shall be carried on only between the 
hours of eight in the morning and three in the afternoon, excepting in 
eases which in the. opinion of the officers appointing the court, require 
immediate example. 

Art. 95. Members of a court martial, in giving their votes, shall be- 
gin with the youngest in commission. 

Art. 96. No person shall be sentenced to suffer death, except by the 
concurrence of two-thirds of the members of a general court martial, and 
in the cases herein expressly mentioned. 

Art. 97. No person in the military service shall, under the sentence 
of a court martial, be punished by confinement in a penitentiary, unless 
the offense of which he may be convicted would, by some statute of the 
United States, or by some statute of the State, Territory, or District in 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 379 

which such offense may be committed, or by the common law, as the 
same exists in such State, Territory, or District, subject to such punish- 
ment. 

Art. 98. No person in the military service shall be punished by flog- 
ging, or by branding, marking, or tattooing on the body. 

Art. 99. No officers shall be discharged or dismissed from the ser- 
vice, except by order of the President, or by sentence of a general court 
martial ; and in time of peace no officer shall be dismissed, except in 
pursuance of the sentence of a court martial, or in mitigation thereof. 

Art. 100. When an officer is dismissed from the service for cow- 
ardice or fraud, the sentence shall further direct that the crime, punish- 
ment, name, and place of abode of the delinquent shall be published in 
the newspapers in and about the camp, and in the State from which the 
offender came, or where he usually resides; and after such publication 
it shall be scandalous for an officer to associate with him. 

Art. ioi. When a court martial suspends an officer from command, 
it may also suspend his pay and emoluments for the same time, accord- 
ing to the nature of his offence. 

Art. 102. No person shall be tried a second time for the same 
offense. 

Art. 103. No person shall be liable to be tried and punished by a 
general court martial for any offense which appears to have been com- 
mitted more than two years before the issuing of the order for such trial, 
unless, by reason of having absented himself, or of some other manifest 
impediment, he shall not have been amenable to justice within that 
period. 

Art. 104. No sentence of a court martial shall be carried into exe- 
cution until the whole proceedings shall have been approved by the 
officer ordering the court, or by the officer commanding for the time being. 

Art. 105. No sentence of a court martial, inflicting the punishment 
of death, shall be carried into execution until it shall have been con- 
firmed by the President, except in the cases of persons convicted, in 
time of war, as spies, mutineers, deserters, or murderers, and in the 
cases of guerilla marauders, convicted, in time of war, of robbery, bur- 
glary, arson, rape, assault with intent to commit rape, or of violation of 
the laws and customs of war; and in such excepted cases the sentence 
of death may be carried into execution upon confirmation by the com- 
manding general in the field, or the commander of the department, as 
the case may be. 

Art. 106. In time of peace no sentence of a court martial, directing 
the dismissal of an officer, shall be carried into execution until it shall 
have been confirmed by the President. 

Art. 107. No sentence of a court martial appointed by the comman- 
der of a division or of a separate brigade of troops, directing the dis- 
missal of an officer, shall be carried into execution until it shall have 
been confirmed by the general commanding the army in the field to 
which the division or brigade belongs. 



380 ART OF WAR. 

Art. 108. No sentence of a court martial, either in time of peace or 
in time of war, respecting a general officer, shall be carried into execu- 
tion until it shall have been confirmed by the President. 

Art. 109. All sentences of a court martial may be confirmed and 
earned into execution by the officer ordering the court, or by the officer 
commanding for the time being, where confirmation by the President, 
or by the commanding general in the field, or the commander of the 
department, is not required by these articles. 

Art. 1 10. Xo sentence of a field officer detailed to try soldiers of 
his regiment, shall be carried into execution until the whole proceed- 
ings shall have been approved by the brigade commander, or, in case 
there shall be no bngade commander, by the commanding officer of the 
post. 

Art. hi. Any officer who has authority to carry into execution the 
sentence of death, or of dismissal of an officer, may suspend the same 
until the pleasure of the President shall be known ; and, in such case, 
he shall immediately transmit to the President a copy of the order of 
suspension, together with a copy of the proceedings of the court. 

Art. 112. Every officer who is authorized to order a general court 
martial shall have power to pardon or mitigate any punishment ad- 
judged by it, except the punishment of death or of dismissal of an 
officer. Every officer commanding a regiment or garrison in which a 
regimental or garrison court martial may be held, shall have power to 
pardon or mitigate any punishment which such court may adjudge. 

Art. 113. Every Judge Advocate, or person acting as such, at any 
general court martial, shall, with as much expedition as the opportunity 
of time and distance of place may admit, forward the original proceed- 
ings and sentence of such court to the Judge Advocate General of the 
Army, in whose office they shall be carefully preserved. 

Art. 114. Every party tried by a general court martial shall, upon 
demand thereof, made by himself or by any person in his behalf, be 
entitled to a copy of the proceedings and sentence of such court. 

Art. 115. A court of inquiry, to examine into the nature of any 
transaction of, or accusation or imputation against, any officer or sol- 
dier, may be ordered by the President or by any commanding officer ; 
but, as courts of inquiry may be perverted to dishonorable purposes, and 
may be employed, in the hands of weak and envious commandants, as 
engines for the destruction of military merit, they shall never be or- 
dered by any commanding officer except upon a demand by the officer 
or soldier whose conduct is to be inquired of. 

Art. 116. A court of inquiry shall consist of one or more officers, 
not exceeding three, and a recorder to reduce the proceedings and evi- 
dence to writing. 

Art. 117. The recorder of a court of inquiry shall administer to the 
members the following oath : " You shall well and truly examine and 
inquire, according to the evidence, into the matter now before you, 
without partiality, favor, affection, prejudice, or hope of reward. So 



MILITARY LAW AND COURTS MARTIAL. 38 1 

help you God." After which the president of the court shall adminis- 
ter to the recorder the following oath : " You, A B, do swear that you 
will, according to your best abilities, accurately and impartially record 
the proceedings of the court and the evidence to be given in the case 
in hearing. So help you God." 

Art. 118. A court of inquiry, and the recorder thereof, shall have 
the same power to summon and examine witnesses as is given to courts 
martial and the Judge Advocates thereof. Such witnesses shall take the 
same oath which is taken by witnesses before courts martial (*), and 
the party accused shall be permitted to examine and cross-examine them, 
so as fully to investigate the circumstances in question. 

Art. 119. A court of inquiry shall not give an opinion on the mer- 
its of the case inquired of unless specially ordered to do so. 

Art. 120. The proceedings of a court of inquiry must be authenti- 
cated by the signatures of the recorder and the president thereof, and 
delivered to the commanding officer. 

Art. 121. The proceedings of a court of inquiry may be aimitted 
as evidence by a court martial, in cases not capital, nor extending to the 
dismissal of an officer : Provided, That the circumstances are such that 
oral testimony cannot be obtained. 

Art. 122. If, upon marches, guards, or in quarters, different corps 
of the Army happen to join or do duty together, the officer highest in 
rank of the line of the Army, Marine Corps, or militia, by commission, 
there on duty or in quarters, shall command the whole, and give orders 
for what is needful to the service, unless otherwise specially directed by 
the President, according to the nature of the case. 

Art. 123. In all matters relating to the rank, duties, and rights of 
officers, the same rules and regulations shall apply to officers of the 
Regular Army and to volunteers commissioned in or mustered into said 
service, under the laws of the United States, for a limited period. 

Art. 124. Officers of the militia of the several States, when called 
into the service of the United States, shall, on all detachments, courts 
martial, and other duty wherein they may be employed in conjunction 
with the regular or volunteer forces of the United States, take rank next 
after all officers of the like grade in said regular or volunteer forces, 
notwithstanding the commissions of such militia officers may be older 
than the commissions of the said officers of the regular or volunteer 
forces of the United States. 

Art. 125. In case of the death of any officer, the major of his regi- 
ment, or the officer doing the major's duty, or the second officer in 
Command at any post or garrison, as the case may be, shall immediately 
secure all his effects then in camp or quarters, and shall make, and 
transmit to the office of the Department of War, an inventory thereof. 

Ak r. 126. In case of the death of any soldier, the commanding officer 
of his troop, battery, or company, shall immediately secure all his effects 



*Sic in the roll. 



382 ART OF WAR. 

then in camp or quarters, and shall, in the presence of two other offi- 
cers, make an inventory thereof, which he shall transmit to the office of 
the Department of War. 

Art. 127. Officers charged with the care of the effects of deceased 
officers or soldiers shall account for and deliver the same, or the pro- 
ceeds thereof, to the legal representatives of such deceased officers or 
soldiers. And no officer so charged shall be permitted to quit the regi- 
ment or post until he has deposited in the hands of the commanding 
officer all the effects of such deceased officers or soldiers not so ac- 
counted for and delivered. 

Art. 128. The foregoing articles shall be read and published once 
in every six months to every garrison, regiment, troop, or company in 
the service of the United States, and shall be duly observed and 
obeyed by all officers and soldiers in said service. 

Sec. 1343. All persons who, in time of war, or rebellion against the 
supreme authority of the United States, shall be found lurking or acting 
as spies, in or about any of the fortifications, posts, quarters, or encamp- 
ments of any of the armies of the United States, or elsewhere, shall be 
triable by a general court martial, or by a military commission, and shall, 
on conviction thereof, suffer death. 



CHAPTER X. 



CAMP AND GARRISON CALLS. 

OFFICIAL CORRESPONDENCE AND ORDERS. 

RECRUITING SERVICE. 

LEAVES OF ABSENCE AND FURLOUGHS. 

DISCHARGES. 

BOARDS OF SURVEY. 

COUNCILS OF ADMINISTRATION. 

INSPECTIONS. 

CERTIFICATES OF MERIT. 



CAMP AND GARRISON CALLS. 



All garrison and camp life is about the same in routine. 

Reveille is the name given to the first call for the for- 
mation of troops during the day. This formation is for 
the purpose of calling the roll of the company, and is an- 
nounced by the firing of a piece of ordnance, the beating 
of drums or sounding of bugle notes, and takes place at 
daylight, unless otherwise ordered by the commanding 
officer. 

Stable Call is next in order for mounted troops, and is 
sounded "immediately after the report of the result of the 
reveille roll-call is made. Mounted troops turn out at 
reveille roll-call in stable frocks and overalls, in order 
that as soon as reveille is over they may be marched direct 
to the stables to groom their animals. 

Breakfast call comes next, and is sounded at such time 
as the commanding officer deems proper, generally half an 
hour after reveille. 

Fatigue Call is the signal for all labor to commence at 
the post, and is generally fixed at 7 o'clock a. m. in sum- 
mer, and 7^ or 8 o'clock in winter. 

Sick Call is the signal for all soldiers who may be sick 
to repair to the post hospital for examination by the sur- 
geon, and the hour for its sounding fixed a short While 
before or at the same time as "Fatigue Call." 

Orderly Call, whenever sounded, is the signal for all 
First Sergeants to repair to the Adjutant's Office. 

Officers' 1 Call is the signal for all officers to repair at 
once to the Commanding Officer's office. 

Rett eat is a roll-call that marks the close of the working- 
day, and takes place at sunset. The troops are paraded 
(with arms, generally, in fair weather), the bugles or drums 
sound the retreat, the evening gun is fired, and the flag 
hauled down from the flag-staff. 

(385) 



386 ART OF WAR. 

Tattoo is the signal for the roll-call of troops prepara- 
tory to going to bed, about 8}£ or 9 o'clock p. m. 

Taps is the signal that all lights must be put out, except 
those authorized by the officer of the day or the command- 
ing officer, and are sounded about ha]f an hour after 
tattoo. 

Between Reveille and Retreat, all the drills, practice, 
fatigue and police calls, are sounded at such times as may 
be ordered by the Post or Camp Commander. 

Recruiting Service. 

The United States Army is kept up to its numerical 
standard by a system termed recruiting, of which the 
Adjutant General of the Army is the head and director, 
assisted by such officers as will be hereinafter mentioned, 
under such orders as may be from time to time given gov- 
erning the same. 

The headquarters of the General Recruiting Service are 
located in New York City, and a Colonel of Infantry is 
usually selected to take charge of the same for two years. 

There are also two recruiting depots — the general, at 
David's Island, New York harbor ; and the sub-depot, at 
Columbus, Ohio. To these two depots are sent all men 
that are enlisted for the general service, except as herein- 
after mentioned. 

At different points throughout the country (in peace 
times, only the largest cities), recruiting rendezvous are 
established for the purpose of enlisting such men as pre- 
sent themselves, after having passed a satisfactory physical 
examination. These rendezvous are in charge of officers 
detailed from the different regiments in the service to re- 
port to the superintendent for this duty, and the officers 
are assisted by a sergeant and two privates. 

Upon the presentation of a man at a recruiting rendez- 
vous, he is examined as to his moral and physical condi- 
tion, and if found satisfactory, the following paper is made 
out, which he must sign : 



RECRUITING SERVICE. 38 J 

THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 
Oath of Enlistment and Allegiance. 



£ State of New York, \ 

"~ City or Town of Albany, j 

►5; 

.'S« I, yames Deland, born in Melrose, in the State of Ne?v Jer- 

"> sey, and by occupation a machinist, do hereby acknowledge to 

^ have voluntarily enlisted, this first day of March, 1880, as a 

^ SOLDIER in the Army of the United States of Amer- 

v ICA, for the period of FIVE YEARS, unless sooner discharged 

§ by proper authority: And do also agree to accept from the 

<u United States such bounty, pay, rations, and clothing as are or 

jy may be established by law. And I do solemnly swear that I am 

<u twenty-one years and six months of age, and know of no im- 

^ pediment to my serving honestly and faithfully as a Soldier for 

^ five years under this enlistment contract with the United States. 

._ And I, James Deland, do also solemnly swear that I will bear 

true faith and allegiance to the United States of America, 
and that I will serve them honestly and faithfully against all 
their enemies or opposers whomsoever; and that I will observe 
and obey the orders of the President of the United States, and 
the orders of the officers appointed over me, according to the 
Rules and Articles of War. 

James Deland. [seal.] 

Subscribed and duly sworn to before me this first day of 
March, A. D. 1880. Orlando B. Cornestaldt, 

Capt. 4jth Infantry, 
■ Recruiting Officer. 

I certify, on honor, that I have carefully examined the above-named 
man agreeably to the General Regulations of the Army, and that, in my 
opinion, he is free from all bodily defects and mental infirmity which would, 
in any way, disqualify him from performing the duties of a soldier. 

ROCHEFORDT B. BATEMAN, 

A. A. Surgeon, U. S. Vols., 
Examining Officer. 

I certify, on honor, that I have minutely inspected the above-named 
man, James Deland, previous to his enlistment, and that he was entirely 
sober when enlisted ; that, to the best of my judgment and belief, he is of 
lawful age ; and that I have accepted and enlisted him into the service of 
the United States under this contract of enlistment as duly qualified to per- 
form the duties of an able-bodied soldier, and, in doing so, have strictly 
observed the Regulations which govern the Recruiting Service. This sol- 
dier has black eyes, brown hair, fair complexion, is j" feet, 8 inches high. 
Orlando B. Cornestaldt, [seal.] 
Capt. 47th Infantry, 
Recruiting Officer. 
(A. G. O. No. 73.) 



& 


r4 - 






d 


.<a 














O 


& 


c 


\j 











u 




CD 


^ 


Oh 




<u 


'§ 


rC 


^ 






a 

c 


t 





\j 














TT 


•<s> 


C 









1 


c 




■M 




& 




<&J 


a 


3 


s 


Q 
-^ 


tj 


^P 


e 


^ 


a 


."■U 


if: 

CS 
O 


1 


1 


<»3 


1 


** 


K 


^T 


h 




O 


5 


£ 


.<-> 



333 



ART OF WAR. 



DECLARATION OF RECRUIT. 

I, James Deland, desiring to ENLIST in the Army of the 
United States for the term of FIVE YEARS, do declare that I 
have neither wife nor child ; that I am of the legal age to enlist of my 
own accord, and believe myself to be physically qualified to perform 
the duties of an able-bodied soldier; and do further declare that I 
have never been discharged from the United States service (Army or 
Navy) or any other service on account of disability, or by sentence of 
either civil or military court, or in any case except with good charac- 
ter, and for the reasons given by me to the recruiting officer prior to 
this enlistment. 

Given at Albany, JV. Y., thisjirst day of March, 1880. 

Witness : ~\ 

Jo/in Comings, l James Deland. 

Caleb Harkness. \ 



<S 



s •> 



o g 
• ^ <o ° 

. « >> G 

^ 1 eg -a 



00 



DOOH)_j.O-rl> 

£ a ~ o ^ - ' J >, 

« o " o is E a 



1 I * 



u g 1 

o o 



C = *~ = — ■ 



'- . n! - a hr,'- 



gJgS-J 



T3 C 2 ■" B 
O-OO 



^llli:J|lilll| 



• T3 






C5_JJ. 
DO B< 



H Si 



g 

O 

<2 



V u 



W rt 4) « 

£" r- r- (U .- O V 
~ +3 "3 -o u ,e S 



Jsjf ".11 g: 



< O 



CONSENT IN CASE OF MINOR. 

I, DO CERTIFY that I am the 

of • . . . ; that the said is ... . 

years of age ; and I do hereby freely give MY consent to his enlisting 
as a Soldier in the Army of the United States for the period of 
FIVE YEARS. 

Given at 

Witness : the . . day of 



RECRUITING SERVICE. 389 

The men thus enlisted become recruits, and are clothed 
in the United States Army uniform, and fed ; and when 
three or four are collected (in time of peace), they are 
forwarded, in charge of one of the recruiting party, to the 
nearest depot — New York or Columbus. 

The recruits are placed under instructions at the depots, 
and when sufficiently drilled, organized into companies, 
from which, under orders from the War Department, they 
are sent to fill vacancies in such regiments as need them. 

The recruiting depots are commanded by field officers 
of the line, detailed for this duty by the Adjutant General 
of the Army. 

All details for the recruiting service are for two years, the 
company officers from the odd-numbered regiments being 
detailed one year, and the even-numbered the succeeding 
year, in order that all officers on this duty may not be re- 
lieved at the same time. Each regiment of infantry and cav- 
alry in the service furnishes one company officer for this duty. 

In addition to the above, there is an independent branch 
for the recruitment of the Cavalry arm of the service. The 
headquarters of this service are located at Jefferson Bar- 
racks, Mo., and a Colonel of Cavalry is detailed as super- 
intendent. Stations are established for the enlistment of 
men at suitable points, and all matters pertaining to the 
service are conducted on the same principles as above de- 
scribed, except that recruits after enlistment are sent to the 
Cavalry depot, which is also located at Jefferson Barracks.* 

In time of war, the recruiting for the regular service is 
continued the same as in time of peace; but when the ne- 
cessity occurs for a greater force than the law allows for 
the permanent troops, then Congress, if not already as- 
sembled, is called into an extra session by the President, 
and that body designates by enactment the number of 
volunteers to be called into service. The President of the 
United States thereupon issues a proclamation calling upon 
the States for volunteers. The Governors of the various 

* Since the above was written the recruiting service has been consol- 
idated, with but one superintendent, with headquarters at New York 
city. (See G. O. No. 39, Hdqrs. Army, June 22, 1886.) 



390 ART OF WAR. 

States of the Union establish their own recruiting stations 
and State depots, and organize their forces into regiments, 
equip them, appoint their officers, and, upon notification 
that they are ready for United States duty, an officer of 
the regular army is sent to muster them into the United 
States service for the length of time required under the 
call. They then belong to the General Government for 
all duty until properly discharged from the United States 
service. 

By the laws of the United States, all able-bodied males 
between the ages of 18 and 45 years are enrolled as mili- 
tia, and, in case of necessity, any or all are liable to be 
called upon, and must serve the country in a military ca- 
pacity if called on to do so. 

To enlist in the regular army, there are certain condi- 
tions to be fulfilled, as regards health, size, weight, age 
and character, which vary somewhat for the different arms 
of service. These conditions are rules established by the 
Department which supplies recruits for the army, and is 
therefore known as the "Recruiting Service." 

In the State militia the conditions of enlistment vary 
considerably, and are different in each State. In some, 
the term of enlistment is but three years, and companies, 
battalions and regiments are local in character, their mem- 
bers being citizens living in the vicinity in which the or- 
ganization is stationed. 

After a man has once joined as a recruit, he cannot 
leave the service until his time of enlistment has expired, 
unless he is discharged for good and sufficient reason, by 
competent authority. Should he leave at any time during 
his service without a proper discharge, he becomes a de- 
serter, and as such is liable to the punishment of death in 
time of war, and hard labor and imprisonment in time of 
peace. 

Retired List. 

As a reward for faithful service, the Government has es- 
tablished for the Army, both officers and soldiers, a retired 
list, and any soldier who has served the country 30 years 



RETIRED LIST. 39 1 

may, at his request, be retired on three-fourths of the pay 
and allowances that he is receiving at the date of his re- 
tirement. 

Any officer who may have incurred a disability incident 
to the service may, upon the recommendation of a Board 
of Officers convened for the purpose, be placed upon the 
retired list, provided a vacancy exists for the same. This 
list, however, is limited to four hundred. 

Any officer who may have served for 40 years contin- 
uously, will, upon his application, be placed upon this list 
by the President of the United States, if a vacancy exists. 

Any officer who may have served until he reaches the 
age of 64 years shall be placed upon a retired list which is 
unlimited. 

Any officer who may be found incapacitated for military 
service by a Board of Officers convened for the purpose, 
and said incapacity the result of his own indiscretions, 
may be "wholly retired" — that is, granted one year's pay, 
and his name dropped from the rolls of the Army. 

All officers or soldiers borne on the rolls as retired are 
to be considered as still belonging to the service, and al- 
though not, under the present laws, eligible to be called 
upon for duty, yet are liable at any time, by resolution of 
Congress, to be called upon to perform such duties as their 
disabilities may permit them to assume. 

Officers, when placed on the retired list, receive three- 
fourths of the pay to which they are entitled at date of 
retirement. 

Official Correspondence and Orders. 

All communications passing from an inferior to a super- 
ior should be signed by the inferior ; but communications 
passing from a superior to an inferior may be signed by a 
staff officer by order of the superior. On subjects not ex- 
clusively personal, all officers should be addressed as "The 
Adjutant General U. S. Army," "Commanding Officer 
Military Division of the Mo.," "Commanding Officer 4th 
U. S. Inf.," "Commanding Officer Company <G,' 20th 
Inf.," etc. 



392 



ART OF WAR. 



An inferior addressing a letter to higher authority should 
address it to the Adjutant or Adjutant General of the 
nearest commander, thus : "Post Adjutant, Fort Dismal," 
"Assistant Adjutant General, Department of Arizona," 
etc., etc. 

In addressing an officer personally, the title, such as 
"Captain," "Major," "Colonel," or "General," should 
precede the name; but when affixing the official signature 
the rank and name of the regiment or corps should follow 
the signatures in a line underneath. 

LETTERS. 

All letters should comprise either of the following 
forms : 

Headquarters of the Army, 
Adjutant General's Office, 

June i, 1884. 
Commanding General, 

Divisio?i of the Missouri, 
Chicago, Ills. 
Sir : By direction of the Lieut. General of the Army, I have the 
honor, etc., etc. 

Very respectfully, 

Your obedient servant, 

R. C. Drum, 
Adjutant General. 

Again, from a superior to an inferior : 

Headquarters Military Division of the Mo., 
Chicago, lhi.s.,June 25, 1885. 
Commanding Officer, 
Fort Omaha, A r eb., 

( Through C. O. Department of the Platte.) 
Sir: You will please cause one Major, etc. 

By command of Major Gen. Schofield : 

R. Williams, 
Asst. Adft General. 

From an inferior to a superior : 



OFFICIAL CORRESPONDENCE. 393 

Fort Blank, Minn., 
May i, 1884. 
Assistant Adjutant General, 

Department of Dakota, 

Fort Snelling, Minn. 

( Through military channels.) 
Sir : I have the honor to apply for leave of absence for ten days. 
I am, Sir, very respectfully, 

Your obedient servant, 

Thomas Brown, 
is I Lieut. 14th In-fy. 

All communications of this character that terminate in 
the office where first received, should be briefed and filed 
away, but those which require the action of higher author- 
ity must be briefed in the first office where received, and 
forwarded with proper endorsements, as follows : 

jst Endorsement. 

Fort Blank, Minn., 
May 2, 1885. 
Respectfully forwarded. Approved. 

John Robinson, 
Col. 3d Arfy, Comd'g the Post. 

2d Endorsement. 

Headquarters Dep't of the Platte, 
Omaha, Neb., Jan. 1, 1885. 
Respectfully forwarded to the Headquarters Military Division of the 
Missouri. Approved (or disapproved, or such remarks as the case de- 
mands.) O. B. Dixon, 

Brig. Gen' I Comd'g Dep't. 

Official letters should be written on regular sized letter 
paper, folded neatly in three equal folds, the top of the 
letter forming the outside fold, on the back of which the sub- 
ject of the communication should be briefed,*^ follows : 



„ 






1 *■ 


s, 


>> 


£00 


^ 




^", 


*$ 


£ « 




S3- 




3* 

& 

O 
fa 




■w 



394 ART of war. 

Generally, officers forwarding official communications, 
indorse thereon their views or opinions, without other let- 
ter of transmittal. 

All official communications must be signed by the pen, 
and not by stamps, fac similes, etc. 

Whenever more than than three pages of the sheet used 
are required for the communication, an additional half 
sheet, or more if necessary, is neatly pasted to the first 
sheet, so that the outer page may be left entirely blank. 
Letter paper is folded in three, and legal cap in four folds, 
parallel to the writing. The inner edge of the sheet is 
the top fold, and the left-hand fold is the outer fold. The 
first fold has only the office marks on it, and a brief sum- 
mary of the contents; while indorsements proper com- 
mence at the top of the second fold, and run down in 
regular order. Inclosures are numbered consecutively. 
If the communication covers one inclosure, it is num- 
bered "i" above the office marks of the original letter. 
When an officer to whom it is referred incloses a paper in 
addition to his indorsement, the additional enclosure is 
numbered " 2," and below the office marks is noted the 
?mmber. Original inclosures are noted on the first fold of 
the letter, covering them, just below the brief, and below 
this are noted the inclosure of the several indorsements. 
The model form attached explains the communication, in- 
dorsement and inclosure. 

If the inclosures are few in number, they may be kept 
inside the original paper. Otherwise, they are folded to- 
gether in a wrapper marked " Inclosures," as an accom- 
panying package. In no case should a loose wrapper be 
placed around an official paper, except as a mere covering 
on which nothing is written. Additional space for in- 
dorsements should be provided by neatly pasting on slips 
of paper on the under side of the fold, each slip when 
pasted on to be just the length and width of the original 
fold. In the form given, W. D. are the initials for War 
Department, A. G. O. are those of Adjutant General's 
Office, E. B., Endorsement Book, while the numbers refer 
to the volume, and page and number of communication. 



OFFICIAL CORRESPONDENCE. 395 



Fort 

July . . . , 18 . 
Sir: 

\_Ac knowledges reference to him of anonymous letter making cer- 
tain complaints, and furnishes evidence of falsity of charges contained 
therein. Is of opinion, after careful examination of the chirography 
of the co77i7nunication, that a certain soldier, on duty as clerk at De- 
partment Headquarters, is the anonymous correspondent.^ 

W. L. E., 

Capt. Co. "A," 1st U. S 

The Commanding Officer, 

Fort 



ART OF WAR. 



[Endorsement.] 
2. 

400 A. G. 0. 1870. 
(Fifth Indorsement.) 



OFFICIAL CORRESPONDENCE. 397 

Fort 

June 1, 18 . . . 
To 

The Honorable 

The Secretary of War. 

Sir : 

\_C01nplaints that certain officers at this 
post disregard the Regulations and inflict punishment arbitrarily . 
Does not send this paper through the proper channel of correspondence, 
as he fears the complaint would not be forwarded, but sends it to a 

friend in , who will give it the proper direction.] 

A Private of Captain E's 

Company ("A") 1st U. S. 



1380 W. D., , 1886. 

400 A. G. O., , 1886. 

250 Div. of , , 1886. 

187 Dept. of ..... , , 1886. 



Fort 














June 


1, 


18 . . 


Captain 


W. L. E . . 

1st U. S. 






" 



One of the privates of Captain F's Company complains anony- 
mously of mode of punishment adopted by certain officers, &c., 6-Y. 



(One Enclosure.') 
( One Enclosure — Fifth Indorsement.') 
Redd back, A. G. O., July . . , 1880. 

Redd back, Div. of , July . . , 1880. 

Redd back, Dept. of , July . . , 1880. 

Redd, Dept. of , July . . , 1880. 

Redd Div. of , July . . , 1880. 

Redd, A. G. O., June . . , 1880. 
Redd, W. D., June . . , 1880. 



39S 



ART OF WAR. 



First Indorsement. 



War Dept., June . . , 18 . 
Respectfully referred to the Adjutant General for investigation and report. 

By order of the Sec. of War : J. P., Chief Clerk. 

Second Indorsement. 

Adjutant General's Office, June . . , 18 . 

Respectfully referred to the Commanding General, Department of 

(through Division Headquarters) for a thorough investigation of this case. 

'6 E. D. T., Adjutant General. 

Third Indorsement. 

Hdqrs. Mil. Div. of , July . . , 18 . 

Respectfully referred to General S., commanding Department of 

By order of Major General R S. H. W., Asst. Adjt. Gen. 

E ' B -!io- 

Fourth Indorsement. 

Hdqrs. Dept. of , July . . , 18 . 

Respectfully referred to the commanding officer of Fort . . . . , who will inquire 
into the assertions contained in the anonymous letter, and submit a full report on 
the subject. 

By order of Brig. Genl. W : J. B. D., Asst. Adjt. Gen. 



Fifth Indorsement. 

Fort , July . . , 18 . 

Respectfully returned to the General commanding the Department of , 

and his attention invited to the inclosed statement of Captain E , com- 
manding Company "A," ist U. S C. F. B., Commanding Post. 

E. B. — 

ioo 

(One Enclosure.) 
Sixth Indorsement. 

Hdqrs. Dept. of , July . . , 18 . 

Respectfully returned to the Headquarters of the Army, through Headquarters 
Military Division of 

The cleric at Dept. Headquarters emphatically denies any knowledge of the com- 
plaint or being concerned in the matter. E. W. S., Brig. Gen. Co7nma7tding. 

2 

E. B. 

Seventh Indorsetnent. 

Hdqrs. Mil. Div. of , July . . , 18 . 

Respectfully forwarded. G. H. R., Maj. Gen. Commanding. 

E.B.-^- 

45o 

Eighth Indorsement. 

Hdqrs. of the Army, July . . , 18 . 
Respectfully submitted to the Secretary of War for his information. 

W. T. S., General of the Army. 



OFFICIAL ORDERS. 399 

Orders. 

Orders issued in companies, regiments and posts should 
never be general or special ; they are simply designated as 
orders, and numbered according to the series of the year 
in which they are issued. 

Orders issued by officers who have the rank of Colonel 
or less should be designated as "by order of" while those 
issued by higher officers should be designated, li by com- 
mand of" and embrace both special and general, each 
being numbered in separate series. 

The term "Headquarters" should never be used in the 
headings of any official organization of minor importance 
to the headquarters of a geographical department, except 
the headquarters of a regiment. 

Orders are numbered General and Special, or simply 
" Orders," in separate series, each beginning with the year. 

General orders announce the time and place of pay- 
ments, issues, hours for roll-calls and duties, police regu- 
lations, promotions, appointments, and generally what 
may be important to be made known to the entire com- 
mand. Special orders do not concern troops generally, 
but relate to particular divisions or individuals of them. 
General and important special orders must both be read and 
approved by the officer whose order it is, before issued and 
signed by a staff officer. Orders state at the head whether 
they are General, Special, their number, date, and place 
of issue, and at the foot the name of the commander mak- 
ing it an order. Orders and instructions will be transmit- 
ted through intermediate commanders, when they are of a 
nature that such commanders have no authority to modify 
or suspend them. The following are the forms used for 
orders and reports : 

(1st.) Headquarters of the Army, 

Washington, D. C, June — , . 

General Orders, No. 6. 

Par. I. — (The order follows on this and succeeding line.) 

By command of General Sherman. 

(Here signature of Adjutant General,) 

Adjutant General. 



400 ART OF WAR. 

(2d.) Headquarters Division of the Atlantic, 

Governor's Island, N. Y., Dec. — , . 

Special Orders, 
No. — . 

Par. I. — Major , Artillery, is hereby detailed to 

inspect, etc., etc. 

Par. II. — Leave of absence for 30 days is hereby granted First Lieu- 
tenant . 



By command of Major General 



(Signature of Asst. Adj't General,) 

Assistant Adjutant General. 

In this case, the- order above is sent to Major 



without Par. II., and to Lieut. without Par. I., 

through their post commanders, and Lieut. through 

his battery commander also. 

(3d.) Fort , Wisconsin, 

August — , . 

Orders, \ 
No. I. j 

Par. I, — Until further orders Reveille will be sounded as follows : 
1st Call, 5 a. m. 
Reveille, 5:10 a. m. 
Assembly, 5*15 a. m. 
Par. II. — A Garrison Court Martial, etc. 

* * ***** 

By order of Colonel Hicks : 

(Signed) , 

1st Lieut. 20th Cavalry, 

Post Adjiitant. 

(4th.) Form of Report. 

Fort , Neb., 

July— , . 

To the 
Post Adjutant, 

Fort , Neb. 

Sir: 

In compliance with A. R., Par. — , I have the honor 
to report that etc., etc., etc. * * * * 

I am, Sir, very respectfully, 

Your obedient servant, 



Captain, 6th Artillery. 
V. R. are the initial letters of Army Regulations. 



LEAVES — FURLOUGHS — DISCHARGES. 40I 

Leaves of Absence and Furloughs. 

The permission granted officers of the Army to be ab- 
sent from their duties is called a " leave of absence," 
while in the case of the soldier it is called a "furlough." 

Under the law of Congress an officer is entitled to one 
month's leave in each fiscal year, on full pay ; and in the 
event of his not wishing to go away every year, he is al- 
lowed to accumulate four months by staying that, or a 
greater length of time at his post of duty. No more than 
four months on full pay will however be allowed. 

Officers on leave are required to report their address 
once each month to the Adjutant General of the Army, 
the Adjutant of their Regiments, and the Post Adjutant 
of their posts. 

A Post Commander can give a leave of absence not to 
exceed seven days to an officer, and a furlough of twenty 
days to a soldier; a Department Commander can give one 
month to an officer, and two months to a soldier ; a Divis- 
ion Commander can give two months to an officer, and 
three months to a soldier. 

Leaves of absence, or furloughs, for a longer period of 
time than the above, must be granted by the War De- 
partment. 

Discharges. 

A soldier may be discharged from the service of the 
United States, after enlistment, for several reasons, viz.: 

1st. By order of the Secretary of War, on application, 
for good and sufficient reasons. 

2d. On Surgeon's Certificate of Disability, where the 
man becomes disabled through wounds or disease. If in- 
curred in line of duty, a pension is awarded him. 

3d. By sentence of a General Court-Martial (dishonor- 
ably) on account of some crime, of which he has been 
convicted. 

4th. By expiration of term of service, five years from 
the date of his enlistment. He is then furnished with a 
Discharge and Final Statement in duplicate, as follows : 



402 



ART OF WAR. 



S 



ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES. 
To All whom it May Concern. 

Know ye, That T/iomas Jones, a Private of Captain N. H. 
Ross y Company ( G) of the 4th Regiment of Infantry, who was 
enlisted the nineteenth day of May, one thousand eight hundred 
and seventy-nine, to serve five years, is hereby discharged from the 
Army of the United States in consequence of expiration of term 
of service. 

Said Tkotnas Jones was born in Oberlin, in the State of Ohio; 
is 2j years of age, 3 feet 10 inches high, dark complexion, brown 
eyes, red hair, and by occupation when enlisted a carpenter. 

Given under my hand at Fort Black, Arizona, this sixth day 
of May, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred 
and eighty-six. 

Henry Moulton, Commanding. 

BMPSeiBEMa I l UIIB BMM^MC— —— I I ■ V\ ■ !! I I HI I ■llll ■ « «« 

Unmarried. CHARACTER. 

No objection to his being re-enlisted is known to exist. 
An excellent soldier and a sober man. 

Wm. H. Ross, 
Captain 24th Inf. 
A. G. O. No. 98. 



Indorsentent. 



■-OTJ O 

' S C fl 



*3§ 



iScSJSi' 



o - 

* "5 

en £ 



05 -a 



O 4) "■ FC3 






iiJJl 1 



'} 



DISCHARGES. 403 



FINAL STATEMENT of Thomas Jones, a private, Captain 
Wm.H. A'oss' Company, [•' G,"~\ of the 4th U. S. Regiment of Infuitry, 
born in Oberlin, in the State of Ohio, aged (at enlistment) 22 years, 5 feet 
10 inches high, dark complexion, brown eyes, black hair, and by occu- 
pation a carpenter, was enlisted by Captain Smith, at New York City, 
on the seventh day of May, eighteen hundred and seventy-nine, to serve 
for five years, who is now discharged by reason of expiration of term 
of service. 

The said Thomas Jones was last paid by Paymaster Samztel Mul- 
doon, to include the joth day of April, eighteen hundred and eighty- 
four, and has pay due from that time to day of discharge, inclusive. 

DUE SOLDIER. 

For . . years' continuous service, under Sec. 2, act 

August 4, 1854 $ . . per month. 

"For retained pay, act of May 15, 1872. (See note.) 

(Seventy -two dollars) , . 72.00 dollars. 

For clothing not drawn in kind, Fifty-seven dollars and 

twenty cents ( 5 7. y 2 ^- dollars.) 

For deposits (the date and amount of each deposit to 
be stated. See note 7.) 

With Major Freeliver, Aug. 7, 1884 $100.00 

With Major Stanley, Sept. 7, 1884 50.00 

With Major Lawson, Dec. 17, 1884 25.00 

$175.00 
DUE UNITED STATES. 

For Clothing overdrawn, TF5 - dollars. 

For tobacco, ' t ^q dollars. 

For , 

Remarks : 

I certify that the above Final Statement, given in duplicate at 
Fort Blank, Dak., this seventh day of May, 1885, is correct. 

Wm. H. Ross, 

Capt. 4th Infantry, 

Commanding ..... 

Note. — In case the deposits or the retained pay are forfeited, the amounts should 
not be stated under the head of" Due Soldier," but the fact and authority for such 
forfeiture must be given in tbe Remarks. 

A. G. O. No. 30. 



404 



ART OF WAR. 




Il 1lloji^ & ^l-^s!lliyfl^^lJPifif*l!S2illrfII 1 

1? zUsls If 153 ^Jl a *ll ill-is l-sl i.2^I-I1.^sMHii= I 



-So^o-ago- 




DEPOSITS — BOARDS. 405 

These papers are then taken to the Paymaster, and upon 
them he pays what is due, returning the discharge to the 
soldier, and filing the other papers away as vouchers to 
accompany his monthly accounts current. 

Deposits. 

Any soldier, during his term of service, may deposit 
any or all of his pay, exceeding $5 in amount, with any 
Paymaster, and receive the same back again at the date 
of his discharge, together with the addition of 4 per cent, 
per annum interest on the whole amount. In the event 
of death, this money would be paid to the heirs of the 
deceased ; but if the soldier desert, the amount of deposit 
at the time is forfeited to the Government. 

Boards of Survey. 

These are composed of three officers, the junior being 
the recorder of the proceedings, which must be signed by 
all the members to render them complete. They are in- 
stituted for the purpose of establishing facts or opinions 
by which questions of administrative responsibility may be 
determined, and the adjustment of accounts facilitated ; 
as, for example, to assess the amount and kind of damage 
or deficiency which public property may have sustained 
from any extraordinary cause, not ordinary wastage, either 
in transit or in store, or in actual use, whether from acci- 
dent, unusual wastage, or otherwise, and set forth the cir- 
cumstances and fix the responsibility of such damage ; to 
make inventories of property ordered to be abandoned 
when the articles have not been enumerated in the orders \ 
to assess the prices at which damaged clothing may be is- 
sued to troops, and the proportion in which supplies shall 
be issued in consequence of damage that renders them, at 
the usual rate, unequal to the allowance which the regula- 
tions contemplate ; to verify the discrepancy between the 
invoices and the actual quantity or description of property 
transferred from one officer to another, and ascertain, as 
far as possible, where and how the discrepancy has oc- 
curred — whether in the hands of the carrier or the officer 



4-00 



ART OF WAR. 



making the transfer, and to make inventories and report 
on the condition of public property in the possession of 
officers at the time of their death ; also to investigate and 
report upon the circumstances attending the desertion of 
any man from the army, as well as to determine what, if 
any, articles of government property have been lost or 
taken by the deserter. In no case, however, will the re- 
port of the Board supersede the dispositions which the 
law requires with reference to deficiencies and damage. 

A Board of Survey has no legal power to swear either 
itself, its members, or witnesses before it ; and it cannot be 
convened by any other than the commanding officer pres- 
ent. If there should be only two officers present beside 
the commanding officer and the officer responsible, they 
will form the Board ; if only one of them, he will consti- 
tute it. Should there be none present but the command- 
ing officer and the responsible officer, then the former will 
constitute himself a Board. When the responsible officer 
is the only officer at the post, he will, instead of consti- 
tuting himself a Board, furnish his own certificate of the 
facts of the case, accompanied by affidavits of non-com- 
missioned officers of the post cognizant thereof, to the de- 
partment commander. 

Neither the commander nor any member of the Board 
should be parties interested in the matter to be, investi- 
gated. 

For special details see Army Regulations, pp. 136-7. 

Councils of Administration. 

There are three kinds — the Post, the Regimental, and 
the Company. They are each composed of three officers — 
the Post Council of the three line officers next in rank to 
the commanding officer ; and its duties are to audit the 
accounts of the Post Treasurer, make an equitable distri- 
bution of accumulated funds, make appropriations for the 
pay of the bakers and assistant librarian, for the purchase 
of utensils and materials wherewith to bake bread for the 
troops, for the purchase of books and papers for the post 
library, garden seeds and tools for the post garden, etc., 



COUNCILS — INSPECTIONS. 407 

etc., and such other matters as may pertain to a proper 
expenditure of the Post Fund. 

The Regimental Cowicil is composed of the three regi- 
mental officers stationed at the headquarters of the regi- 
ment next in rank to the commanding officer, and the 
duty of this Council is to audit the accounts of the Regi- 
mental Treasurer, (usually the Adjutant), make appropria- 
tions for extra pay of musicians, and for the purchase and 
repair of instruments and ornamental dress for the Regi- 
mental Band. 

The Company Council is composed of the company 
officers, who audit the accounts of the company fund. 
This Council is convened by the Post commander present. 

The Post and Regimental Councils are convened on the 
last day of February, April, June, August, October and 
December, and at such other times as the Post Commander 
may deem proper. The Company Council is convened 
only on the last days of March, Tune, September, and 
December. 

Inspections. 

Captains will make an inspection of their companies 
and barracks every Sunday morning. In garrison no sol- 
dier will be excused except the guard, the sick and the 
necessary attendants in hospital. In camp it is customary 
to excuse any member of a working party who may have 
been employed on fatigue up to retreat of the previous 
day. 

Commanders of posts and regiments will make an in- 
spection of their commands on the last day of every 
month, and the troops will be mustered at the time of the 
inspection on the last days of February, April, June, Au- 
gust, October and December. 

Divisions and brigades will be inspected in time of war 
by an inspecting officer between the 15th and 20th of each 
month. 

In time of peace, except when otherwise specially pro- 
vided for by the Secretary of War or General of the Army, 
every rniljtary post, cemetery, station and command in the 



40 8 ART OF WAR. 

Army will be inspected at least once in every year by di- 
vision or department inspectors, under the direction of 
their respective commanders. This inspection embraces a 
thorough examination of all books, papers and records, the 
application of tactics in the drill of the troops, and a 
minute examination of clothing, arms and equipments, 
and such property as may require the action of an inspec- 
tor. Whenever practicable it is preceded by a review of 
the troops. 

In addition to the above, the commanding officer of the 
post or regiment, the captains and the medical officers, are 
required to make frequent visits to the men's quarters, the 
guard- house, hospital, etc. 

The ceremonies for inspecting troops under arms will be 
found in the Tactics. 

Certificates of Merit. 

Certificates of merit are authorized by Section 1216, 
Revised Statutes, to be awarded soldiers, and extra pay of 
two dollars per month is granted to holders of these as 
long as they remain continuously in service. 

These are only awarded for acts of extraordinary gal- 
lantry in presence of the enemy, which must be specific, 
and certified to by an eye-witness, preferably the imme- 
diate commanding officer of the soldier. 

Uniform, Etc. 

As the uniform of the United States Army is changeable 
at the will of the President of the United States, it is not 
deemed necessary to give a description of the same to any 
extent — not more than what may be necessary to distin- 
guish the rank of individuals. 

Full Dress Coats for All Officers. 

All officers shall wear a double-breasted frock coat of 
dark blue cloth, the skirt to extend from one-half to three- 
fourths the distance from the hip-joint to the bend of the 
knee. 

To Designate a General. — Two rows of buttons on the 



UNIFORMS. 409 

breast, twelve in each row, placed by fours, the distance 
between each row five and one-half inches at top, and three 
and one-half inches at bottom. Buttons of gilt with spread 
eagle, and stars and plain border. Trousers of dark blue 
cloth without welt or stripe. Chapeau worn with the front 
peak turned slightly to the left, with three black ostrich 
feathers and gilt ornaments on right side. Epaulettes of 
gold with solid crescent; device, two silver embroidered 
stars, with five rays each, one and one-half inches in diam- 
eter, and the "Arms of the United States" embroidered 
in gold placed between them. Shoulder Straps (when 
worn) will be of dark blue cloth, i3/% inches wide by four 
inches long, bordered with an embroidery of gold ^ of 
an inch wide ; two silver embroidered stars of five rays 
each, and gold embroidered "Arms of the U. S." between 
them. Gloves. — Buff or white gauntlets or gloves. Sash, 
buff silk net or buff silk and gold thread, with silk bullion 
fringe ends, to go twice around the waist and to tie behind 
the left hip, pendent part not to extend more than 18 
inches below the tie ; and when above the grade of Brig- 
adier, may be worn across the body from the left shoulder 
to the right side. Sword Belt of red Russia leather, with 
three stripes of gold embroidery, and gilt rectangular plate 
two inches wide. Sword Knot of gold cord with acorn 
end. Spurs yellow metal or gilt. Sword, straight, gilt 
hilt, silvtr grip, brass or steel scabbard. 

To Designate a Lieutenant General. — Coat the same as 
for a General, except that there will be ten buttons in each 
row on the breast, the upper and lower groups by threes, 
and the middle group by fours. Buttons, Trousers, Cha- 
peau, with two feathers, same as for a General. Epaulettes 
of gold, with solid crescent ; device : three silver embroi- 
dered stars of five rays each, respectively 1^,1^ and i}& 
inches in diameter, the largest placed in the centre of the 
crescent, the others placed longitudinally on the strap, and 
equidistant, ranging in order of size from the crescent. 
Shoulder Straps (when worn) same as for a General, ex- 
cept that there will be three silver-embroidered stars of 
five rays, one star on the centre of the strap and one on 



4IO ART OF WAR. 

each side, equidistant between the centre and outer edge 
of the strap, the centre star to be the largest. Gloves, 
Sash, Sword, with its belt, plate and knot, and Spurs, same 
as for a General. 

To Designate a Major General. — Coat same as for a 
General, except that there will be nine buttons in each 
row on the breast, placed by threes. Buttons, Trousers, 
Chapeau, with two ostrich feathers, same as for a General. 
Epaulettes same as for a Lieutenant General, omitting 
smallest star, and the smallest of the two remaining stars 
placed in the centre of the strap. Shoulder Straps (when 
worn) the same as for a Lieutenant General, except that 
there will be two stars instead of three, the centre of each 
star to be one inch from the outer edge of the gold em- 
broidery on the ends of the strap; both stars of the same 
size. Gloves, Sash, Sword, with its belt, plate, and knot, 
and Spurs same as for a General. 

To Designate a Brigadier General. — Coat same as for a 
General, except that there will be eight buttons in each 
row on the breast, placed in pairs. Buttons, Trousers and 
Chapeau same as for a Major General. Epaulette same as 
for a Lieut. General, omitting all but the largest star. 
Shoulder Strap (when worn) the same as for a Major Gen- 
eral, except that there will be one star instead of two, the 
centre of star to be equidistant from the outer edge of the 
embroidery on the ends of the strap. Glove, Sash (except 
that it cannot be worn across the shoulder), Sword, with 
its belt, plate, and knot, and Spurs, same as for a General. 

The line of the. Army of the United States is clothed in 
two shades of blue, the dark being for coats and blouses, 
and the sky-blue for trousers. Black helmets, with spike 
for enlisted men and company officers, and with horse-hair 
plumes the color of the facing of their respective arms of 
service for the field officers of infantry, and men and offi- 
cers of mounted corps, constitute the full-dress hat. For- 
age caps are worn with the undress uniform, and campaign 
hats of dark or gray felt are used for field service. White 
helmets are permitted to be used by all officers and men 
in warm climates when not on duty. 



UNIFORMS. 411 

The various arms of the service are designated by the 
colors of the facings of their coats, by their chevrons and 
their stripes. The chevrons and service stripes for all arms 
of the service are of gold lace for the dress coat. On all 
other articles of the dress, however, they are as follows : 

Infantry, white ; Cavalry, yellow ; Artillery, scarlet ; 
Engineers, scarlet and white ; Ordnance, cri7nson ; Medi- 
cal Department, green; Subsistence Department, gray; 
Quartermaster's Department, buff; Signal Corps, orange. 

Devices to Indicate Arms of Service. — Infantry, crossed 
rifles ; Cavalry, crossed sabres ; Artillery, crossed cannon ; 
Engineers, castle; Ordnance, shell and flame ; Medical De- 
partment, tl U. S." enclosed in wreatfi ; Commissary De- 
partment, white crescent; Quartermaster's Department, 
crossed pen and key ; Signal Corps, crossed flags. Adj. Gen- 
eral's Department, shield in gold wreath. 

The rank is indicated by shoulder straps, as follows : 2d 
Lieut., plain field; 1st Lieut., one bar on each end of 
field ; Captain, two bars on each end of field ; Major, 
gold leaf; Lieutenant Colonel, silver leaf; Colonel, silver 
eagle. Field is the color of the facings. Corporals, two 
stripes, and Sergeants three stripes on the arm. 1st Ser- 
geants have in addition a lozenge. The stripes are the 
color of the facings. 



CHAPTER XI. 



RECONNOISSANCES, IN TIME OF PEACE AND WAR. 
ITINERARIES, ETC. 



RECONNOISSANCES. 



A ^Reconnoissance is a survey made for the purpose of 
obtaining all useful information regarding an enemy, and 
the country he is in. Whenever troops are on the march 
or in the enemy's country, officers are selected by the 
commanding officer to make reconnoissances. The quali- 
fications of a good reconnoissance officer are energy, 
ability, courage, and coolness. He should also be a man 
sparing of words, and tell only what he sees and knows. 

Reconnoissances are made both in peace and war. 
When made in peace, they are more general than in war, 
and always made in view of a future war. When a recon- 
noissance has for its object the gaining of information re- 
garding a particular portion of a country, it is designated 
a Topographical reconnoissance. This information is then 
put down in an accurate memorandum, and an accurate 
sketch is made of the country gone over. [When the 
time and means allow, an accurate map of the country is 
made, and the representations of all trees, houses, swamps, 
etc., are made by conventional signs. When the time 
and means do not allow, the officer making a reconnois- 
sance should provide himself with a pencil, note book, 
watch, pocket-level, colored crayons, sketching paper, 
box compass, and rations for the time he is to be gone.] 

The officer is mounted and ordered to reconnoitre a 
certain portion of the country, and have ready by a cer- 
tain time the map and descriptive memoranda of the 
reconnoissance. He first puts on his map a point which 
indicates the position from which he first commenced his 
reconnoissance ; he then rides to a certain place, keeps 
note of the time it takes him to get there, and knowing 
the rapidity with which his horse goes, he calculates the 
distance passed over ; he knows by his compass the loca- 

C4i5) 



41 6 ART OF WAR. 

tion he is from his starting point, and making a scale he 
draws on his paper the line representing the distance 
passed over. He then proceeds to other points to the 
left and right of the road passed over, and by means of 
the compass, he marks down accurately on the map all 
these other roads passed over. If he crosses a stream, he 
notes down its depth and width, also the dimensions of 
any bridge he may pass over ; he notes by means of his 
level the heights of different parts of the country and 
principal objects therein ; he notes all roads and houses, 
swamps and woods, etc., etc., and puts down on his map, 
by means of conventional signs, representations of them. 
After he has thoroughly gone over the allotted ground, if 
he has time, he makes another map on a larger scale, and 
fills it properly by means of conventional signs; he then 
supplements his map by a descriptive memoir made up 
from his notes and memory. The points to be noted are : 
ist. The nature of the country, whether it is hilly or 
level ; the contour of rises in the ground, the nature of 
the soil, its climate, amount of rain-fall, its productive- 
ness and products, its fences, whether rail, stone, or 
hedges, and their size and direction. 2d. The height and 
nature of hills, and any passes they may have also. 3d. 
Character and number and occupation of the inhabitants 
and their disposition, whether peaceable or not. 4th. 
Marshes, their extent and situation, and how and where 
to cross them. 5 th. Streams, rivers, canals, their breadth, 
depth, and rapidity, their liability to overflow, the nature 
of their beds, and whether they are navigable or not ; 
also the position, dimension, and character of all bridges, 
fences, landing-places, nature of the banks, fords, means 
for rafts, the numbers and kinds of boats. 6th. Roads, 
their numbers, directions, dimensions, character of road- 
beds, whether suitable for infantry, cavalry, artillery ; the 
gradients and drainage, state of repair, the kind of roads, 
also all obstacles crossing the roads, or means at hand to 
obstruct the roads ; positions of hills, ravines, and woods, 
etc. , how they can be utilized, either for or against the 
enemy. 7th. The position of woods, kinds of trees and 



RECONNOISSANCES. 417 

amount of brushwood around them, and communication 
through and around them. 8th. All watering-places, 
springs, ponds, fountains, wells, etc. 9th. The nature of 
the cultivated portion of the country, kinds of grain, size 
of fields, and condition of crops. 10th. Positions that 
may be utilized, and the best situations for defensive works, 
camps, etc., etc. nth. Number of lines of railroads, 
gauge, amount of rolling stock, etc., condition of road- 
beds, length of, and principal towns on them. 12th. The 
size of towns and villages, and number of inhabitants and 
supplies they possess, the principal buildings of the towns, 
with a view of their being used as hospitals, barracks, 
shops, store-houses, etc.; the general health of the people, 
and the country, and amount of accommodations afforded 
to men and animals. 

(Armed reconnoissance, or a reconnoissance in an -ene- 
my's country.) In addition to the above, there should 
also be learned all that can be gleaned of the enemy, his 
numbers and organization, his position and condition as 
regards supplies, health, the number, position and strength 
of his works, permanent or temporary, his headquarters, 
etc. Information of all kinds should be obtained by per- 
sonal inspection, if possible; but whenever resort is had to 
inquiry of any of the inhabitants, it should be carried on 
in such a way as to excite no suspicion of its object. 

It will facilitate the reconnoissance if a map can be ob- 
tained, of the country, before reconnoitering, and adding 
to the information gained. To determine distances, let 
the horse go at different paces over a certain length of 
ground, and note the time at each pace. The horse should 
never go at any other than one of the measured paces, if it 
can be helped. In reconnoitring, all information should 
be put down as clearly and intelligibly as possible. All 
reconnoissances made in the presence of the enemy, or 
near him, are armed reconnoissances, and are principally 
for the purpose of procuring information regarding the 
condition and whereabouts of the enemy. They may be 
either secret or open, and the officer making them is ac- 
companied by an armed detachment. These detachments 



41 S ART OF WAR. 

are preceeded by scouts, and move very cautiously, so as 
not to be discovered by the enemy. In the case of secret 
reconnoissance, if discovered, the detachment must retreat 
to its own troops. The qualities that make a good recon- 
noissance officer are here called into play better than at 
any other time. The officer must be cool and judicious; 
he must have a quick and correct eye, know how to esti- 
mate distance, numbers and quality at a glance, and try to 
verify his estimation. Unless verified, he should never re- 
port as a fact, for a poor or incorrect report is worse ■ 
than none. 

Open reconnoissances are made by large detachments of 
troops that seek to push through the enemy's outposts to 
gain exact information. They often precede battles, and 
by their means information is often gained of the exact 
strength and position of the enemy. They are also termed 
reconnoissances in force. 

Itineraries. 

An itinerary is a reconnoissance made of the route 
passed over by troops on the march. They should be 
made whenever a column of troops moves from one place 
to another, and the information kept safely for future use. 
The usual form of an itinerary is to take a note book and 
rule its pages into squares according to the scale selected. 
One side of the book is used for the sketch, and the other 
for the map. [See Fig. 23.] 

The entire subject of reconnoissances and itineraries is 
so important and practical a one that commanders should 
constantly exercise subordinate officers at it. Experience 
alone can make the truly valuable and trusty reconoissance 
officer. 

When time is of importance, rough sketching alone can 
be employed for military purposes. It can be done rap- 
idly and afterwards worked up into a highly finished sketch. 
It will facilitate a reconnoissance of this nature, if a plan 
is made from an existing one before going out, and cor- 
recting; errors in the field. 



E ECONNOISS-ANCES. 



1 ^ 









*» i5 "t 

s "Si 



e-s 



^ *S w " > * J ""> 



cs, a, u> ,^\ 

1^ $o~» 



«u. 







E-^A: 



*\MZ huua g J ^y™ f 



&ym g 




^9 7^ %" 
Fig. 2 



420 ART OF WAR. 

Every officer detailed for reconnoissance duty, should 
have in his possession, a pocket-book already prepared, 
with proper lines ruled for time and distances. 

Never trust to memory, but always put down important 
information, and name the authority or source. 



CHAPTER XII. 



MARCHES AND CAMPS IN TIME OF PEACE AND 
WAR. 



MARCHES AND CAMPS. 



The details of marching and camping belong to Logis- 
tics, and the art of directing them properly belongs to 
Strategy. 

Marches are Route, Strategical and Tactical in their na- 
ture. 

Route marches are those made without, and at some dis- 
tance from the enemy's lines. 

Strategical marches are those made with a view of meet- 
ing the enemy. 

Tactical marches are those made in the presence of the 
enemy. Roicte marches are either ordinary, forced, or 
marches by rail. 

When a march is made over ordinary roads, and does 
not exceed 25 miles a day for a body of troops composed 
of all arms of the service, it is an ordinary march. If the 
march is in bad weather, or over very poor and rough 
roads, and is of the same length, or if made over ordinary 
roads, and exceeds 25 miles a day, it is a forced march. 
When troops are transported to their destination by rail- 
roads it is a march by rail. 

All route marches have the comfort and convenience of 
the troops as their first condition, but strategical marches 
have security first, and the comfort and convenience of 
the troops as the second condition. 

Tactical marches have much greater precautions taken 
to avoid attack than strategical marches, and differ only 
therein from the latter. 

In arranging for a march, the officer commanding first 
fixes the points or places along the route that he intends 
different corps and divisions to halt. He learns all he can 
of the country, its capacity for supplying the army, etc. 
He fixes the halting and camping places, and assigns the 
different routes to the different divisions of the army. In 

(423) 



424 ART OF WAR. 

making concentration of large bodies of troops from dif- 
ferent parts of the country at a certain time and place, he 
arranges the time and routes so as not to interfere with 
each other. An officer's strategic ability is taxed to the 
greatest, and has as large a field to work in as in seizing 
the opportune moment in battle. 

When the routes and halting and camping places are 
fixed, the army starts, and there are then certain general 
fixed rules applicable to all marches, which are here given. 

The number of columns will depend on the number and 
size of the roads. The hardest and best roads should be 
given up to the artillery and trains. Communication is 
kept up between the different columns at all times. Artil- 
lery and cavalry should march in front or rear of infantry, 
so as not to impede its advance. Trains follow the col- 
umns in the following order : 

ist. Reserve ammunition column. 

2d. Ambulances and field hospitals. 

3d. Provisions for the day's supply. % 

4th. Baggage in order of regiments in column. 

5th. Commissariat provisions columns. 

Infantry should march about 3 miles an hour with the 
present length of step, and should halt 10 minutes each 
hour. It should move about ten hours, and including the 
halts, it would make 25 miles a day. The pace at the 
head of the column must be a steady one, and the column 
must be kept closed up throughout its length ; soldiers 
should be allowed to carry their equipments and guns at 
ease except when starting out from a halt or approaching 
one. No soldier should be allowed to fall out of ranks 
without permission of his captain. The permission, if 
possible, should be written. All shallow rivulets or streams 
should be passed as though it were a meadow, no soldier 
being allowed to pick his way out. All intervals and dis- 
tances between sub-divisions should be maintained. The 
roll should be called after each long halt, just before the 
ranks are broken for the night halt. 

Cavalry should march at a walk and make at least 25 
miles a day. There should be several halts at intervals of 






MARCHES AND CAMPS. 425 

2 hours each, and the men should dismount and let the 
horses drink and graze. 

Artillery should be governed in its march by the move- 
ments of the column to which it has been assigned. Every 
moment of halt should be used by men and horses in rest 
or refreshment. Forced marches are made in the same 
general way, except as to pace and halts. Fewer halts are 
made and the pace is increased. With Cavalry, halts are 
made every hour and men dismount and for 15 minutes 
lead their horses at a walk. 

Marches by Rail. 

The approaches to the stations of embarkation are kept 
clear, and each car is marked with the company and regi- 
iment it is to carry, and each sub-division marches on the 
platform at attention. Knapsacks are taken off, cartridge- 
boxes, canteens and bayonets, are slung around to the 
front of the soldiers, who then file into the car, and take 
their seats in order, each man retaining possession of his 
arms and accoutrements. No man should be allowed to 
fall out of the station, and silence should be maintained 
till the car has started. A commissioned officer should be 
assigned to each car. Horses should remain harnessed or 
saddled, supplies should be loaded and packed m wagons, 
and wagons be hauled on to cars in that condition. Fa- 
tigue parties are detailed with the wagons. In Artillery, 
horses are unhitched and put in box cars, teams being kept 
together, and sections and platoons in the same car as far 
as possible. 

In long journeys horses are unharnessed, and harness 
and baggage, and horse equipments carried in a special 
car, where it is marked with section and team and horse. 
Guns and carriages are placed on open cars, trails and 
stocks resting on the floor of cars, strips are nailed on 
either side, and front and rear of each wheel, to keep car- 
riage from slipping. No poles, or guns, or parts of car- 
riages, should project beyond the car. Halts are made 
for horses every 8 or 10 hours ; they are then watered and 
fed. Halts are made for men every three hours. Cars 



426 ART OF WAR. 

should move at a low average speed, about 15 or 20 miles 
an hour, and in calculating the time table, provision should 
be made for making the halts at places where water and 
food for the men and animals are found in plenty. 

At halts no man is allowed off the train without permis- 
sion. There should be a telegraph operator with portable 
instruments with each train, so that in case of mishap he 
may communicate with other trains or stations. If there 
is danger on the road, a guard train should precede the 
main column, and should have tools for repairing track 
and telegraph, and removing rocks, etc. Baggage of each 
column or division is loaded on train with that division. 
Baggage trains are loaded On open cars. Skids and plat- 
forms should be on trains for disembarking artillery, horses 
and trains. Men disembark in same order of embarkation, 
and march away from the station a sufficient distance for 
all the troops to form without inconvenience. 

Marches in the Enemy's Country. 

Such are known as strategical marches, when not in the 
actual presence of the enemy. In making a forward move- 
ment, or in approaching the enemy's country, the general 
issues his orders to the corps or division commanders, spe- 
cifying the routes, direction of each corps and division ; 
the hour of starting, the halts, general instructions for 
field hospitals, reserve ammunition, engineers' supplies, 
and provision column, position of general and headquar- 
ters, advance and rear guards, communications, postal ar- 
rangements, and telegraph, etc., etc. 

The different arms of service march so as to support each 
other. If no attack is expected the Artillery should be 
placed in the rear, otherwise at head of column. 

The Engineers precede the main column in a rough or 
wooded country. Each corps and division commander 
arranges the detail of the march of his command so as to 
conform with the general instructions of the general com- 
manding. The order in which a large body of troops 
marches is as follows : 

1 st. The advance guard. 



, 



MARCHES AND CAMPS. 427 

2d. A small detachment of Cavalry. 

3d. A battery of Artillery. 

4th. Main column of Infantry. 

5th. Remaining Artillery. 

6th. Remaining Cavalry. 

7th. Wagon train. 

8th. Rear guard. 

The advance guard is a detachment which precedes the 
main column in a march, to avoid surprise by the enemy. 
Its strength depends upon the total strength of the column 
and the vicinity of the enemy, and nature of the country. 
It marches ahead of the main column, at a sufficient dis- 
tance to give the latter time to deploy and take up position 
in case of attack. Its strength is about one-sixth of the 
entire force. For a division it is composed as follows : 

1st. Detachment of Sappers and Miners. 

2d. One Squadron of Cavalry. 

3d. Battery of 4 pieces of Artillery without caissons. 

4th. Battalion of Infantry. 

For a Corps it is as follows : 

1st. One company Engineers. 

2d. Three squadrons of Cavalry. 

3d. A battery of 6 pieces of Artillery. 

4th. Brigade of Infantry. 

The advance guard is divided into the advance party, 
support, and reserve. 

The advance party is divided into three or more detach- 
ments. One of the detachments is off to the right of the 
road, deployed as skirmishers. They are termed flankers. 
Another to the left also deployed, while the third is de- 
ployed across the road. The composition of the guard 
will depend to a great extent on the nature of the country. 

If it is woody, infantry should comprise the principal 
part. In open country, cavalry. If rough and with bad 
roads, the detachment of engineers should be a large one. 

The supports also have flankers on either side at a dis- 
tance of about from 300 to 400 yards. 

The advance party is from 200 to 300 yards in advance 
of the supports. The supports about 300 to 400 yards in 



428 ART OF WAR. 

front of the reserve. The reserve numbers one-half the 
strength of the advance guard, the advance party and sup- 
ports about one-quarter each. If the advance guard be 
all mounted the distances are double those given. 

The flankers generally have supporting flankers about 
ioo to 200 yards closer in than the outer. 

The same general order is followed out in advance guard 
of a regiment or company marching by itself. The regi- 
ment being composed of one arm of service only, cannot 
unite the three arms in the advance guard. 

A Regiment of Infantry of 1000 to 1200 men, should 
have an advance guard of two companies, or 200 men. 
The advance guard is divided as before into the advance 
party, supports and reserve, the reserve consisting of one 
company, 100 men. The advance party would send out 
squads of skirmishers to the right and left, and front. 
The supports would follow about 300 yards in rear of the 
advance, and throw out flankers on both sides to a distance 
of 200 to 300 yards. 

The skirmishers of the advance spread out on a front of 
about 150 to 200 yards both sides of the road. The sup- 
port throws out flankers only to keep up communication 
with the advance. The reserve is 600 yards in advance 
of the main column. 

A Regiment of Cavalry has for advance guard, the ad- 
vance party consisting of one non-commissioned officer 
and six men, a support of one officer and eighteen non- 
commissioned officers and men, and a reserve of one offi- 
cer and thirty-six men. The reserve supplies flankers for 
the advance guard, and the supports only sufficient to keep 
up communication with advance. 

In the march of a regiment or larger body of troops, the 
distance between the main column and advanced guard is 
so great that an enemy concealed, and beyond the line of 
flankers, has time to attack the main column before it could 
face the proper direction and deploy. To avoid surprise, 
flankers are thrown out from the main column to 300 or 
400 yards either side of the road. 

Rear Guard. — In any forward march in an enemy's 



MARCHES AND CAMPS. 429 

country, the selection of officers and men composing the 
advance guard is made from among the best troops of the 
army. In a retrograde movement, or retreat, the rear 
guard is composed of the best. The rear, in a forward 
movement, is established to collect and send forward all 
stragglers, both men and animals, and to prevent surprise 
from an attack in rear. Its strength is about one-twentieth 
of the entire force, and is mostly infantry. A small de- 
tachment of cavalry, to communicate with the main col- 
umn, is added to it. 

The rear guard is divided into the main guard and skir- 
mishers. The main guard is about 600 yards in rear of 
the column, and skirmishers are about 200 yards in rear of 
it. The skirmishers deploy to a distance of 300 yards 
either side of the road. 

In a retreat, the rear guard is composed of about one- 
sixth of the entire force of infantry, and all the cavalry 
and artillery that can be advantageously used. The com- 
mand of the rear guard on a retreat is a most important 
one, and the commander of it must be a man respected 
and feared by the enemy, and possessing the confidence of 
all of his own men and army. The rear guard in an open 
country marches by several roads, so as to allow rapid de- 
ployment. 

It is divided into three parts, the main guard, the rear 
detachment, and the intermediate detachment. When the 
rear detachment discovers the enemy, it sends word by the 
intermediate to the main guard, which immediately de- 
ploys, and the rear and intermediate detachments fall back 
to it. The best light artillery march with the rear detach- 
ment, and on the attack of an enemy open fire, and retreat 
at the same time. The rear detachment is spread out in 
skirmish line, and the main guard supplies flanking squads. 

Wagon or Supply Trains. — The order of march of the 
wagon train is as given on page 416. The reserve ammu- 
nition wagons carry- all the ammunition required by the 
army for the day's march, or any encounter with the en- 
emy. That for small arms is carried in army wagons, and 
for cannon in extra limbers, caissons and army wagons. 



430 ART OF WAR. 

All ammunition is packed in boxes by the Ordnance De- 
partment, and the kind and calibre of ammunition is 
marked outside the box. The army wagon is of the fol- 
lowing dimensions: Straight body 3' 6" wide, 1' 9" deep, 
and 9' 6" long at bottom, 10' long at top, six bows of good 
ash or oak ; 4 wheels — forward wheels 3' 8" in diameter, 
and hind wheels 4' 8" diameter, 16 spokes each. Tongue 
10' 6" long. Weight, 1325 pounds; is drawn by 4 mule? 
or horses. 

The number of ambulances in a train depends on the 
number of men in the column or division to which they 
belong. There are three ambulances allowed to every in- 
fantry regiment of 500 men or more, and two when the 
number is less than 500 and greater than 200; one only 
when less than 200. Two to each regiment of cavalry of 
500 men or more, and one only when regiment is less 
than 500. One permanently attached to each battery of 
artillery. 

To each corps headquarters, two ambulances. Two 
army wagons are allowed to each division train of ambu- 
lances. The baggage of each company, regiment, brigade, 
and division, must be kept by itself. 

When an army is about to march, the wagons packed, 
with the proper guards and drivers, are taken charge of by 
the brigade or division quartermaster. 

The baggage consists of the clothing, cooking utensils, 
camp equipage, etc. The following is the U. S. Army 
allowance in the field : 

Major General 1000 pounds. 

Brigadier General 700 " 

Field Officers 500 " 

Captains 200 " 

Subalterns 150 " 

These amounts are reduced pro rata, whenever the Gen- 
eral commanding desires to do so, and increased, if the 
Quartermaster has transportation for them. 

Camp and Field Equipage Allowance. 

General Officer — three wall tents, one axe, one hatchet. • ; 



MARCHES AND CAMPS. 43 1 

Field Officers and Staff — three wall tents, one axe, one 
hatchet. 

Officers above rank of Captain — two wall tents, one axe, 
one hatchet. 

Other Staff Officers and Captains — one wall tent, one 
axe, one hatchet. 

To every two Lieutenants — one wall tent, one axe, one 
hatchet. 

To every six foot or four mounted men — one common 
tent. 

To every fifteen foot or thirteen mounted men — two axes, 
two hatchets, two spades, two pick-axes, two camp-kettles> 
five mess-pans. 

To every twenty foot or seventeen mounted men — one 
Sibley or conical wall tent. 

Hospital tents and flies require 18 large and 24 small 
pins. 

Wall tents and flies require 12 large and 18 small pins. 

Common tents require 17 small pins. 

Sibley or conical wall tents require 24 small pins. 

Commissariat or supply is carried in army wagons. The 
wagons for the day supply follow immediately in rear of the 
ambulance division ; the general commissariat comes last 
of all in the train. Wagons are always filled up from the 
country if possible. Always kept full, and time and place 
of delivering of supplies carefully arranged beforehand. 

A man eats two to three pounds of food daily. 

Horse rations are: Horse, 14 pounds hay, 12 pounds 
grain ; mule, 14 pounds hay, 9 pounds grain. 

A man drinks three to five pounds water daily. A horse 
six to eight gallons daily. 

Live stock is picked up in the country, if possible, and 
driven only a day or two with the column. 

A sheep will make 35 to 60 rations. 

A pig will make 80 to 100 rations. 

An ox will make 300 to 600 rations. 

Twenty-eight pounds of green forage is equal to ten 
pounds of hay. 



432 ART OF WAR. 

Convoys. 

Wago?is in Convoy. — A convoy is a train that conveys 
the supplies from the base or bases of operation to the 
army, and is always accompanied by an armed force. 
"Wagons in convoy travel about two miles an hour, and 
ioo wagons will take up one mile of road. If the convoy 
amounts to several hundred wagons, they are arranged in 
divisions not exceeding 500 each. If the number reaches 
to the thousands, several divisions are formed into a grand 
division. The time of departure and arrival at each point 
is calculated and made known. The divisions are marked, 
and each day they change the order of marching. When- 
ever a wagon breaks down, it is hauled to one side of the 
road and repaired, and then takes its place in rear of its 
own division. 

The convoy must be kept together at all times , and no 
stoppage allowed anywhere throughout the train. The 
strength of the guard depends on the importance of the 
train, the character of the country, and the position of the 
enemy. A halt is made every hour for a few minutes' rest. 
The escort is divided into front, centre and rear guards, 
besides divisions on the flanks, which are from 200 to 400 
yards from each other. 

Besides wagons, in mountainous countries, pack-mules 
and horses are used to transport supplies ; but, owing to 
the growth of railroads, the importance of the wagon train 
has greatly diminished in all civilized countries. 

Tactical Marches, 

When near the enemy, or in his presence, marches 
are conducted so as to be prepared to receive the 
enemy should he attack. The wagon train is generally 
posted in the rear, and strongly guarded, and the ad- 
vance guard and flanking detachments heavily reinforced. 
The troops are then deployed in light marching order, 
if the nature of the country admits of it. The country 
may be heavily wooded, in which case the main column 
halts, and successive detachments of infantry follow, re- 
inforcing each other. The engineers cut a road through 



MARCHES AND CAMPS. 433 

for the artillery, cavalry and trains. Should the woods 
be occupied by the enemy, skirmishers, backed up by 
heavy artillery fire, will drive in the enemy to the 
denser parts of the wood. The skirmishers are then re- 
inforced, and advance until the enemy is driven far enough 
away to relieve the line of march. 

If the march is in a mountainous country, and the col- 
umn is about to enter a defile, skirmishers must first ad- 
vance and seize and hold all the heights on either side of 
the defile. The advance guard having seized the heights, 
then sends out a single skirmisher, followed by others in 
succession, each keeping the preceding one in view, and 
on emerging on the further side, they reform and hold to- 
gether until a sufficient portion of the column has ad- 
vanced. If the enemy hold the defile, he must be driven 
therefrom, either by turning his flanks or getting a more 
elevated position, and in his rear. Artillery and trains do 
not pass a defile until it is perfectly safe. 

The passage of bridges, swamps, rivers, etc., etc., are 
all conducted on the same general principles. The main 
body does not attempt to cross until the advance guard 
has passed, and with reinforcements to hold the further 
side. The rear of the column is as strongly guarded as 
the front. In the same general manner, and after once 
passing a defile or bridge, or crossing of any waters, a 
strong guard is left at both entrances to insure its safety in 
case of ret?-eat. 

An army marching towards one end or side of the ene- 
my's position, is making a. flank march. If directly to- 
wards it, it is called a march to the front. If drawing from 
it, it is a retreat. Any march made by which an army 
gains such a position as compels the enemy to change his 
position is called a manoeuvre march. When several col- 
umns start from different points and meet at one point, 
they are called marches of concentration. 

General Directions for Marches, of Small Bodies of Troops. 

Troops, either regular or militia, often make short 
marches for practice, or are called on to assist the civil 
28 



434 ART of war. 

authorities, and are compelled to make short marches and 
endure for a few days all the hardships of a march in 
active service. 

The best time to start will, of course, depend on the 
season of the year and the nature of the march. If some 
distance is to be travelled without water, the start should 
be made in the afternoon, and continued until night, and 
then again early in the morning, halting before the sun 
rises; otherwise, it is best to start so that a halt can be 
made for the night in plenty of time before dark to allow 
men to cook their suppers, pitch tents, clean and wash 
themselves and their clothing, etc. In starting early in 
the morning, breakfast must be eaten first, and everything 
carefully packed in the wagons or blanket-bags, canteens 
and haversacks filled. No man is allowed to fall out of 
ranks except by permission of the captain. If he is sick, 
he is placed in the ambulance. A halt is made every hour 
of ten minutes ; at noon it is from a half to an hour. la 
passing over bridges, step must be broken. If in a dan- 
gerous country, at every halt lookouts must be placed on 
heights to prevent surprise ; and on the march advance 
and rear guards and flankers must be posted. In crossing 
shallow streams, men should keep closed up, and not be 
allowed to pick their way. In deep streams, temporary 
bridges should be constructed as described ; or, if boats 
can be had, the stream can be crossed in them. Every 
command should be provided with some kind of a boat, 
when marching in a rough or wild country, with streams 
too deep to ford. All signals for halts are arranged before- 
hand. Before starting, each man should examine all his 
clothing, and see that all spare articles required are in his 
blanket-bag, but must be careful not to be overloaded. 
Orders for the march are made known before starting. 
They consist of details of reveille, manner of forming and 
marching off, orders for baggage and guards, patrol ar- 
rangements, etc., etc. 

Light marching order is in either full or undress uniform, 
and a soldier carries his arms, ammunition, canteen and 
haversack. In heavy marching order he is in undress uni- 



MARCHES AND CAMPS. 455 

form, and carries arms, ammunition, haversack, knapsack, 
canteen and blankets. 

The following are the Regulations on marching of large 
bodies of troops : 

1264. The object of the movement and the nature of 
the ground determine the order of march, the kind of 
troops in each column, and the number of columns. 

1265. The "general" sounded one hour before the 
time of marching, is the signal to strike tents, to load the 
wagons, and pack horses, and send them to the place of 
assembling. 

1266. When the troops should form suddenly to meet 
the enemy, the signal "to arms" is sounded, or the "long 
roll" is beaten. The troops after assembling on their 
company parades form rapidly in front of their carnp^. 
In the Cavalry, if the troops are to form mounted, the 
signal "to horse" will be sounded. 

1267. Batteries of Artillery and their caissons move with 
the corps to which they are attached ; the field train and 
ambulances march at the rear of the column, and the bag- 
gage with the rear guarxl. 

1268. Cavalry and Infantry do not march together, un- 
less the proximity of the enemy makes it necessary. 

1 269. In Cavalry marches, when distant from the enemy, 
each regiment, and, if possible, each squadron, forms a 
separate column, in order to keep up the same gait from 
front to rear, and to trot, when desirable, on good ground. 
In such cases, the Cavalry may leave camp later, and can 
give more rest to the horses, and more attention to the 
shoeing and harness. Horses are not bridled until the 
time to start. The officers and non-commissioned officers 
of Cavalry companies attend personally to the packs and 
girths. 

1270. When necessary, the orders specify the rations the 
men are to carry in their haversacks. The field officers 
and Captains make frequent inspections during the march; 
at halts they examine the knapsacks, valises, and haversacks, 
and throw away all articles not authorized. 

1271. When it can be avoided, troops should not be as- 



436 ART OF WAR. 

sembled on high-roads or other places where they interrupt 
the communication. 

1272. Generals of division and commanders of detached 
corps send a Staff officer to the rendezvous, in advance, to 
receive the troops, who, on arriving, take their place in the 
order of battle, and form in close column, unless otherwise 
ordered. Artillery, or trains halted on the roads, form in 
file on one side. 

1273. The execution of marching orders must not be 
delayed. If the comrnander is not at the head of his 
troops when they are to march, the next in rank puts the 
column in motion. 

1274. If possible, each column is preceded by a detach- 
ment of pioneers, to remove obstacles to the march, aided, 
when necessary, by Infantry. The detachment is divided 
into two sections ; one stops to remove the first obstacle, 
the other moves on to the next. 

1275. In night marches, and at bad places on the line 
of. march, when practicable, and at cross-roads, if neces- 
sary, intelligent non-commissioned officers are posted to 
show the way, and are relieved by successive details from 
the regiments as they come up. 

1276. On the march no one shall fire a gun, or cry 
"halt" or "march" without orders. 

1277. Soldiers are not to stop for water unless the com- 
manding officer deems it necessary ; the canteens should 
be filled before starting. 

1278. In night marches, the Sergeant Major of each 
regiment remains at the rear with a trumpeter or a drum- 
mer, to give notice when darkness or difficulty stops the 
march. In cavalry, a trumpeter is placed in rear of each 
squadron, and the signal is repeated to the head of the 
regiment. 

1279. The General and field officers frequently stop, or 
send officers to the rear, to see that the troops march in the 
prescribed order, and keep their distances. To quicken 
the march, the General warns the Colonels, and may order 
a signal to be sounded, which is repeated in all the regi- 
ments. 



MARCHES AND CAMPS. 437 

1280. In approaching a defile, the Colonels are warned ; 
each regiment passes separately in column of fours in the 
order designated by the commanding officer, two battal- 
ions, when posssble, marching abreast ; on emerging from 
the defile, the battalions form line under the immediate 
direction of the General, the flank battalion being so 
posted as to prevent the enemy from passing between them 
and the entrance to the defile. 

1 28 1. Halts to rest and reform the troops are frequent 
during the day, depending on the object and length of the 
march. They are made in preference after the passage of 
defiles. 

1282. Led horses of officers, and the horses of dis- 
mounted men, follow their regiments. The baggage wag- 
ons never march in the column. When the General orders 
the field train and ambulances to take place in the column, 
he designates the position they shall take. 

1283. If two corps -meet on the same road, they pass to 
the right, and both continue their march, if the road is 
wide enough ; if it is not, the first in the order of battle 
takes the road ; the other halts. 

1284. A corps in march must not be cut by another. If 
two corps meet at cross roads, that which arrives last halts 
if the other is in motion. A corps in march passes a corps 
at a halt, if it has precedence in the order of battle, or if 
the halted corps is not ready to move at once. 

1285. A column that halts to let another column pass 
resumes the march in advance of the train of this column. 
If a column has to pass a train, the train must halt, if ne- 
cessary, till the column passes. The column which has 
precedence must yield it if the commander, on seeing 
the orders of the other, finds it for the interest of the 
service. 

Camping. 

A camp is a place where troops are established in tents, 
huts, or bivouacs. Castrametation is the art of laying out 
camps. 

Whenever troops are on the march, reconnoissances 



438 ART OF WAR. 

should precede each establishment of a camp. Camps of an 
army are laid out in the number of lines or columns that the 
army is in, and of the length of the enemy's line of battle. 

The conditions that are sought for in all camps are : 
1 st. Positio?i, defence and safety. 2d. Water and fuel. 
3d. Health. Camps should be on good ground, well 
drained, sheltered from streams and their overflow, and 
have sunny exposures. All hills and eminences near, 
when in an enemy's country, should be occupied by guards 
and pickets. When a camp is established for an indefinite 
period, drainage should be attended to among the first 
things. The different regiments camp together and the 
camps are laid out according to the following directions : 

Each company has its tents in two files, facing on a 
street perpendicular to the color line. The width of the 
company street depends on the front of the camp. 

The front of the camp should be equal in extent to the 
regiment when inline; from 5 to. 15 paces is the width 
of the street generally. The tents should be two paces 
apart. The files of tents of adjacent companies are two 
paces apart; between regiments, 22 paces. The color 
line is a line established 10 paces in front of front line of 
tents. The kitchens are 20 paces behind the rear rank of 
company tents. The non-commissioned staff and sutler, 
20 in rear of the kitchens. The company officers, 20 
paces in rear of non-commissioned staff, and regimental 
officers, 20 paces in rear of company officers. 

The police guard is at the centre of the line of non- 
commissioned staff, facing to the front, the stacks of arms 
to the left. The advance post is 200 paces in front of the 
color line, and opposite centre of the regiment. The 
prisoners' tent, four paces in rear. The sinks of men, 150 
paces in front of color line; of officers, 100 paces in rear 
of train, both concealed if possible. When not in pres- 
ence of the enemy, regiments usually camp in column of 
divisions, as Upton's Tactics, page 334, par. 751. 

Cavalry. — Upton^ see page 479, Cavalry Tactics. 

Artillery. — Upton, see Figs, on pages 507, 509, par. 
1 192, 1 194, Artillery Tactics. 






MARCHES AND CAMPS. 439 

In front of every camp there should be a parade of a 
size sufficient for the drill of all the troops of the camp. 

When troops are on the march, a small party from each 
regiment should precede the column of each regiment. 
Upon arrival of train in camp, tents are pitched as follows : 
A line is stretched to mark the company street, the tent is 
closed and laid flat, four corner pins are driven in the 
ground, front of tent opened, the ridge and upright poles 
inserted, then raised and placed in an upright position, 
correctly aligned on what is intended 10 be the company 
street. Shelter tents can be aligned or not. If a wall 
tent, lay the ridge pole on the ground at right angles to 
the street, at each end insert the pins of upright poles so 
that uprights will be perpendicular to the ridge pole, then 
drive in four common pins for the tent corners, and if there 
is a fly, four outer common pins ; in the tent fly put in the 
ridge pole and uprights, drawing the ridge of tent tightly 
over the pole and inserting the pins of the uprights 
through the eye-holes, then raise the uprights till vertical 
position, the corner ropes, straighten the front pole, and 
fasten the remaining ropes and pins. 

To strike the tent, a man should- stand at each pole ; the 
pins are withdrawn, the corner pins last ; the tents are then 
allowed to fall, all in the same direction. The canvas is 
then rolled up in complete bundles, the poles tied to- 
gether in one bundle, and the pins put in a box or bag. 
Common or A tents are for the use of enlisted men. They 
are about 6' 10" high, 7' square, and hold 6 men. 

Wall tents for officers have low walls, 3' 6" high, ridge 
10' 4" high, 9' long, 9' wide. The Sibley and the conical 
wall tent is a circular tent with one pole, and will accom- 
modate 16 men. 

Hospital tents are 14 feet long, 15 feet wide, 11 feet 
high ; walls, 4^ feet high. 

Each tent should have a shallow trench dug around it, 
to carry off any rain or moisture, and the trenches should 
all connect with one common deep trench that carries the 
water away from camp. On level ground, a hole may be 
dug in rear of the tents that will answer the purposes of a 



440 ART OF WAR. 

deep trench. Men who are not detailed for any work or 
duty, upon arriving in camp, immediately set to work to 
make the tents comfortable. When leaves or small boughs 
and twigs can be collected, they make the best kind of 
beds.* 

Kitchens. — A trench from 12 to 18 inches deep and 
about 18 inches wide is dug when the ground is dry. If 
wet, sod walls placed on the level ground will do. Two 
iron uprights on either side of the trench support a hori- 
zontal iron rod ; on this rod the camp kettles are hung ; 
two logs about 18 inches apart make a good kitchen. A 
filth hole to throw slops in should be dug a few feet in 
rear of the kitchen. All grass in the neighborhood should 
be cut down to prevent it from catching fire and commun- 
icating it to the camp. 

To make an oven, take a barrel with iron hoops, dig a 
hole sufficient to hold it, lay it in horizontally to a depth 
of one-fourth its diameter, cover it over with a coat of wet 
earth or clay 6 or 8 inches thick, except at the open end, 
which is to be the mouth ; form an even surface or floor 
of mud or clay on the bottom, cover over all except the 
mouth with several inches of sand, earth, etc., light a fire 
within the oven or barrel, make a flue of two or three inches 
in diameter at the further end. Keep the fire burning 
briskly till all the staves are completely burned out, and 
the clay or earth hardened ; scoop out the ashes, and when 
it is desired to use the oven, heat it up with a fire, lay the 
bread or food within, cover up the mouth and flue so that 
air cannot get in. 

A hole dug some two feet deep, and a fire kept burning 
in it till it is full of hot ashes, forms an excellent oven ; 
put whatever is to be cooked in covered pans, and place 

*Note. — To heat a tent, if there be no tent stoves, build a chimney 
outside and close against wall or back of tent. Dig a trench from foot 
of chimney, passing through the tent to a fire-hole outside and beyond. 
Cover the trench with a layer of thin boughs and earth. Over the 
fire-hole place a cover of earth, leaving an opening for a draught. 
Light the fire. The smoke and hot air must pass through the trench 
and up the chimney to escape, thus warming the tent. This method 
is used only where a tent is to stand for some time. 



MARCHES AND CAMPS. 44 1 

the pans in the ashes, covering them up and keeping the 
fire burning briskly above. 

Latrines or Sinks. — They should be about two feet wide 
at top, two feet deep, and one foot wide at bottom, about 
20 feet long ; the inner faces of the ditch can be riveted 
with brush, pickets, etc., and the earth as it is thrown out 
will form a bank on either side, which should be riveted 
with pickets, stone, sod, etc. A rail should be placed on 
the edge and about 18 inches above ground, for men to 
sit on. It can be supported by forked posts at either end. 
Where a command is encamped for some time at one 
place, the sink-holes should be six feet deep and three feet 
wide at top. Twice a day, in the morning and evening, 
the fatigue or police party should cover the bottom with a 
slight layer of earth or sand, and when nearly full the 
earth must be packed and a slight mound made above it. 

Brush-wood should be stuck in the ground around to 
obscure the latrine from the view of the camp. 

Upon arriving in camp, the following orders are issued, 
viz. : Fixing the hours of reveille and tattoo, guards and 
pickets, details and duties, police arrangements, positions 
of headquarters, of commissioned officers, of hospitals, 
arrangements for rations and forage, for letters and tele- 
grams, and for promulgation of orders. The different 
details made in each company are for cooks, latrine, wood, 
water, rations, etc. 

Permanent ca7nps are generally intrenched, unless they 
be camps of instruction. 

A Cantonment is where the troops are lodged in huts or 
houses. 

A Bivouac is where they rest for a short time, and have 
no shelter of tents or huts. 

The huts usually made by soldiers in a cantonment are 
the same as in camp except that in the former more lati- 
tude is allowed as to comfort. 

Bivouacs are made for the night, and troops rest with 
their arms at hand. When fires are permitted, soldiers 
must cook their food over the camp-fires. Horses unsad- 
dled have saddles placed near by. Horses are picketed. 



442 ART OF WAR. 

The trains in camp are always packed in the rear of the 
company, and strong guards placed around them. 

(The general rules for health, cooking, eating, diet, that 
every soldier should know and observe while in camp, or 
on the march, are given below.) 

Upon arriving in camp, wagons are unpacked and 
horses and mules unhitched, watered, and then hobbled 
and turned out, being herded or picketed. 

The fire-wood should be collected and placed in piles 
by the company detail, previous to arrival of main body 
in camp. Dry fire-wood is found under logs or roots of 
trees. Men should never leave camp without permission. 
The tents should have a rope or line stretched from front 
to rear pole, about six feet above ground, on which to 
hang clothes. Bedding should be aired daily, and tents 
frequently taken down and changed, and ground under 
tents exposed to sun for some hours. 

Bunks can be made of small poles about 6^ feet long, 
laid close together, the lower ends resting on the ground 
and the upper on a cross pole 6 inches in diameter and of 
a length the width of the bed, or raised entirely from the 
ground by forked stakes at each corner: on the poles, 
grass, leaves, etc., should be thrown. 

In case of a fire in camp, blankets, underbrush, etc., 
are used to beat it out, and on a prairie a counter-fire 
should be started, and the place thus cleared be occupied. 
To keep tents from blowing down, posts may be driven 
firmly in the ground at the corners and the tents fastened 
to them, or ropes may be passed over the ridge poles, and 
fastened to pickets firmly driven in the earth. 

Health. 

Recruits and militia who are not used to camp life or 
marching, are liable to be taken seriously ill, if particular 
attention be not paid to minor symptoms, that in ordinary 
life would have but little notice taken of them. 

Feet. — When the feet are sore or blistered from march- 
ing, a little tallow from a lighted candle, mixed with a 
little common spirits, and rubbed on well, will cure them. 



MARCHES AND CAMPS. 443 

The socks must be put on at once. A little alum mixed 
in with warm or tepid water will be found an excellent 
remedy for tender feet. Before starting on a march the 
feet should be thoroughly washed and then rubbed with 
hard soap. Woolen socks, and shoes that fit well but 
don't chafe, will keep the feet from being sore or blistered. 
It is necessary to keep the feet clean, and they should be 
washed every morning and night, and the nails must be 
cut close and square. If the feet itch from frost-bite, 
apply camphorated oil.* Slight frost-bites may be cured 
by rubbing with cold hands or flannel, and avoiding a 
heated room. Serious frost-bites may be cured by slipping 
the feet in cold water just above the freezing point, and 
drawing the frost out gradually. 

Sunstroke j\ — In case of sunstroke, the patient should 
be laid in a shady place immediately, and if one be not at 
hand, a shade must be made over him. The head must 
be raised, the clothes about the chest loosened, and ice or 
cold wet cloths changed frequently, applied to the nape 
of the neck and head. 

Broken limbs. \ — A physician should be sent for at once. 
While waiting for him, if the leg of the patient be broken, 
place him on his other side, put flannel or cotton between 
legs, and lay injured leg on top of well one, and bandage 
both together in that position with straw, hay, grass, thin 
twigs, etc. A broken arm should be at once encased 
firmly between two pieces of board, supported in a sling. 
Diluted stimulants must be given internally, and the pa- 
tient kept quiet and not moved till the limb is set. 

Burns ; Scalds. — Cover the injured part immediately with 
lint or cotton ; if flour can be had, apply that. Sweet oil 

* Camphorated oil, I dr. camphor to I oz. of olive oil. 

I Immerse patient in cold water, if practicable. 

\ While waiting arrival of surgeon, place limb in an easy position ; 
cold applications to prevent swelling — if necessary to move patient, 
suggestions laid down correct, if not unnecessary. Avoid tight band- 
aging for fear of gangrene. Arm, support in sling, apply cold, keep 
quiet until arrival of surgeon. 



444 ART 0F war. 

also is soothing. Bandage so that air cannot get to the 
burn. 

Bites. — If from poisonous snakes, cut with a knife im- 
mediately. Suck * out the blood and poison with the 
mouth. Bathe in warm water to encourage the bleeding, 
and burn the bite with caustic or ammonia ; give liquor 
ammonia in doses of six drops every 15 or 20 minutes for 
1 to 1^2 hours ; strong rum or brandy can be given instead 
of ammonia till patient is drunk. If bite f is from scor- 
pions, centipedes, wasps, bees, etc., apply ammonia and 
strong liquors. If bite is from a dog, cat, fox, wolf, etc., 
cut the part ; apply caustic or hot iron. Apply a ligature 
between the wound and the body. If the bite is from car- 
nivorous birds, suck the bite, apply ammonia and caustic, 
etc. 

Arsenic and Strychnine. — Use strong emetics. \ — Vitriol, 
muriatic and oxalic acid ; give lime water at once, chalk, 
magnesia, soapsuds, etc., a teaspoonful of sweet oil. Avoid 
emetics. Caustics — gunpowder dissolved in water, copper, 
gum specal, etc. 

Loose Bowels. — When the bowels act more than once 
a day, || they must be immediately attended to, as it is the 
first step to cholera or diarrhoea, and is sure to bring on a 
feeling of weakness and debility if nothing more. Quiet 
is the best remedy, but if obliged to march, the bowels 
must have woolen cloths or flannels tightly bound around 
them. A diet of simple rice and boiled milk must be kept 
up till the trouble is over. Men should be careful to be 
regular in habits. 

* If wound is sucked, be sure there is no abrasion of membrane of 
mouth. 

f If depression follows bite, stimulate instantly. 

\Emetics. — Mustard : Tablespoonful to glass of water. Common 
salt or alum : Teaspoonful to glass of water. Assist action of above 
by large draughts of warm water. 

|| In some individuals, bowels move twice a day in health. If chol- 
era is prevailing in vicinity, looseness of bowels is suspicious, and 
should be treated at once. 



MARCHES AND CAMPS. 445 

Bleeding* — If a cut or hurt indicates a bleeding of a 
bright red color, spurting with the beats of the pulse, an 
artery has been cut, and the bleeding must be stopped at 
once. Feel with the hand for the pulsating artery, and 
keep a steady pressure of fingers against it \ take a hand- 
kerchief or towel, or part of the clothing ; tie it above the 
wound, pass a stick through the knot and tighten the band- 
age. Apply soft earth, or cotton, or silk cloth to the 
mouth of the wound. If a -vein has been cut the bleeding 
will be regular and slow, and the bandage or tourniquet 
must be applied below the wound. Small cuts may be 
stopped bleeding by covering the wound with cobweb 
found on bushes, trees, houses, etc., etc. 

Drowning.^ — To restore a half-drowned man, place him 
in open air, face upwards ; expose the chest; gently turn 
him over on face, and place his wrist under his forehead. 
If he does not breathe soon, turn him quickly on his side, 
rub his face and dash cold water over it, place ammonia at 
his nose, tickle his throat, remove boots and stockings, 
place feet against warm bricks or stones; if none are to be 
had at once, place feet against a warm stove-arch. Rub 
limbs upwards, steadily and with energy. If still unsuc- 
cessful, place him on face, put a folded blanket under 
chest, turn him on side and nearly over, then back again 
alternately, about fifteen times a minute. 

Cooking. 

The Quartermaster's Department of the U. S. Army is- 

w Where bleeding vessel is deep, apply graduated compress, made by 
folding handkerchief in shape of cone. Secure compress over bleed- 
ing point by bandage, firmly applied. 

^Sylvester's Method. — Place patient on back, cushion (folded coat wdl 
answer) under shoulders. Keep head in line with trunk ; draw tongue 
forward and keep it there. Grasp arms just above elbows and draw 
upward until they nearly meet above the head. Then at once lower 
and place by side. This should be immediately followed by pressing 
on belly with both hands, just below breastbone. Repeat 15 to 18 
times per minute. After breathing commences, warmth and friction. 
Artificial respiration is everything. Do not waste time trying anything else 
until natural respiration is restored. Continue efforts at least one hour. 



__:' ART OF WAR. 

sues a book of cooking receipts for use of soldiers. The 
following are only the most important, that every body 
should know : 

Coffee. — The kettle or pot in which it is made should 
be used solely for the coffee, and at all times should be 
kept clean. Fill it with water, and when boiling, pour in 
the ground coffee. Take the kettle from the hot fire, but 
placed over fire so that it may be kept hot, but not boil ; 
let it stand for five minutes that way, then pour in sugar 
and let it dissolve ; pour in a quart or two of cold water, 
from as high as the arms can reach, but steadily, so as not 
to splash : this will settle the grounds ; dip out into cups 
with a dipper. 

Soup. — In making soup, boil until all the vegetables are 
tender, cut up meat in small pieces, and after boiling them 
off, season well. Pea and bean soup requires two pounds 
of salt pork to every pound of peas or beans. 

Drinking and Eating. — Avoid drink of all kinds except 
coffee in morning and at night, and cold water on the 
march ; during the day drink as little as possible ; if cold 
water, take a long drink before going to rest, and again on 
getting up in the morning ; never eat heartily before any 
hard work, wait till the work is accomplished, and rest can 
be had after the appetite is appeased. Bread and soup are 
the best articles of a soldier's food, and all old soldiers 
know the value of the above directions. 

The peas and beans must be soaked for six or eight 
hours in cold water, previously. 

Meats are best cooked by roasting or boiling ; they 
should be cooked until tender, but never until hard and 
dry. If possible, it is best to avoid boiling meat, as a 
great percentage of the good is lost. Potatoes require 
half an hour's cooking, fifteen minutes of which, at least, 
the water should be kept at boiling point. All vegetables 
must be cooked till the peel or rind comes off 'readily, or 
a fork will pierce them easily ; all decayed or unripe fruit 
must be removed before cooking; the water in which they 
are boiled should be sufficient only to cover them, and 
they should be kept covered until well cooked. 



CHAPTER XIII. 



MILITARY ROADS AND BRIDGES. 



MILITARY ROADS AND BRIDGES. 



Good roads have always been considered as one of the 
most essential conditions of successful warfare. The 
Romans never undertook the conquest of a country with- 
out building roads as they advanced, and many of their 
roads were so excellently laid that they last to the present 
day. In modern times the railroad has taken the place of 
the stone or "macadamized" roads, but in warfare there 
are so many sections of country, especially in the United 
States, that the railroad is unable to penetrate, that other 
roads are resorted to. Thus in crossing a swampy or low 
country, in passing over mountains, or through forests, it 
will take so much time to build railroads, that the trouble 
costs so much more than can be repaid by any immediate 
success, that corduroy or other similar roads are resorted 
to. The roads used and built by troops are common earth, 
or gravel, plank, and corduroy roads, and railroads. In 
making temporary military roads, the object to be arrived 
at is, a road that will answer for the passage of the troops 
and trains of the army during the war ; therefore all hills 
are avoided if possible, also all cuttings; when necessary 
to pass over hills, the roads are made zig-zag in which the 
curves are level. The grade of military roads should never 
be above £5, that is, for every twenty-five feet in length it 
should rise but one in height, though under urgent circum- 
stances this may be lessened to tV. In passing through 
woods, the trees and brush-wood are cut down on either 
side twenty feet. Military roads are from sixteen to twenty- 
four feet wide; two-thirds of the road is "macadamized." 
The maximum breadth of military roads enclosed by walls, 
is seven feet. In making a road,* the fatigue details follow 

* The first thing to do is, make a reconnoissance. In an enemy's 
country, where this cannot be done, a good map will answer very well. 

29 (449) 



45 O ART OF WAR. 

the line marked by the pickets driven in the earth, or the 
cuts on trees ; the earth is thrown up at the centre of the 
road-way and packed. The drains on the sides are at least 
two feet below the centre of the road ; side-drains are dug 
every one hundred to two hundred yards, to carry off the 
collections of water in the road-drains. In passing over hard 
or rocky beds, but little is required beyond clearing the 
roadway and digging drains; if the earth is soft, stones 
broken about the size of hens' eggs are first laid to a thick- 
ness of 6", and over this a layer of gravel 8" ; if stones and 
gravel are hard to get, clay, burnt and packed, will answer. 

The following table gives the resistance in pounds per 
ton offered by different roads to the ordinary Army wagons, 
exclusive of force of gravity : 

Paved roads, 33 lbs. per ton. 

Macadam roads, 45 to 65 lbs. per ton. 

Gravel roads, 150 lbs. per ton. 

Sand roads, 210 lbs. per ton. 

Wherever lumber is cheap and plentiful, plank roads are 
laid in preference to others, as they make the best kind of 
military roads. The simplest form of a plank road is to 
level the ground and lay the planks directly on, and on 
the outer edge of the planks nail timbers or beams, 4^x4^ 
in diameter, to each plank. A better way is to lay sleep- 
ers on the ground lengthwise ; they should be laid in rows 
from 3' to 4' apart, and the outer sleepers should be laid 
double, and come just to the ends of the planks. The 
sleepers should be 4"x6" in size. When not to be had, 
plank 3" thick will do. The planks are laid across the 
sleepers, and leveled and spiked. The sleepers should be 

From the reconnoissance or map, the course of the streams, the contour 
of the ground can be learned, and a general course marked out. The 
next step is, the survey of the route selected. From the survey, the 
various distances from different points are made known ; also the easiest 
and most practicable routes through woods, over hills and streams. 
The route is staked out carefully, so that the fatigue parties building the 
road will have no trouble in following it. Where there is more than 
one route between two places, all should be reconnoitered, and the 
easiest, and safest, and most economical as regards cost of building, 
chosen. 



MILITARY ROADS AND BRIDGES. 45 1 

sunk to a level with the surface. The spikes should be 
five inches long, with chisel-shaped edges, which are driven 
across the fibre. Wooden pins will answer if there are no 
spikes. Along the centre a scantling 5" by 6" is laid to 
keep carriages in proper place. In order that a wheel 
may be easily put on the road if it should go off by any 
chance, the planks are laid so that every two yards they pro- 
ject 6" beyond the others. If sand or gravel can be had, 
a layer of it one inch thick will protect the planks from wear 
for a long time. 

In swampy or marshy countries, the corduroy roads are 
laid for military purposes. They are made as follows : logs 
of about twelve inches in diameter are first laid lengthwise 
in rows, 4' to 6' apart. On these are laid crosswise and 
close together, young trees 6" to 8" in diameter, and of a 
length of the width of the road. On the outer edges of 
the road trees about 6" diameter are spiked or pinned to 
keep the trees of the road bed in position. If the ground 
is very swampy, several layers of logs may be laid, as 
shown in Fig. 24, before the roadway itself is laid. The 






Fig. 24. 

trees forming the roadway are adzed where the wheels run, 
in order that the carriage may roll smoothly. 

Railroads. 

The transportation of rations and material of war, and 
the quickness and ease of concentrating any desired num- 
ber of troops at any point, are two of the most important 
and hardest problems in modern warfare. The introduc- 
tion of railroads has so nearly solved the difficulty that 
their construction, use and preservation are considered as 
elements of the military officer's education. In all Euro- 
pean armies there are special corps trained especially for 
building and operating railroads. The subject is so im- 
portant a one, and involves so much technical instruction, 



45 2 



ART OF WAR. 



that nothing more than a glance at the principal condi- 
tions can be given in this work. The two most important 
essentials in a military railroad are rapidity and economy 
in building. Grades and curves are of course avoided 
wherever possible, but as the principal things to be avoided 
are cuttings and fillings, there are of necessity more curves 
than in the ordinary railroad. The track is laid on the 
ground directly wherever the soil is hard and firm ; and 
wherever very soft, and there are great obstacles to be 
overcome, detours are made to avoid them. The gauge 
should be the usual gauge of railroads in the country, in- 
order that the rolling stock of such roads may be utilized. 
The rate of traveling, the number of stoppages or halting- 
places, etc., are all determined by the General command- 
ing. In building stations, the requirements looked after 
.are platforms from which the troops may be loaded at 
once, grounds near by for forming troops, and entrances, 
sheds for stores, also for refreshments for troops, and cook- 
ing, fuel, forage, and water for troops, animals and en- 
gines, hospitals near by, side tracks for extra cars, and 
shops for engines, etc., skids of wood, or sliding platforms 
for artillery, wagons, horses, etc. Artillery and wagon 
trains are carried on platform or flat cars. They are about 
thirty feet long and eight feet wide ; they will carry two 
field guns and two caissons complete ; also two siege guns 
with carriages and limbers complete can be carried on one 
flat car. Thirty thousand pounds is a safe load to carry. 
In transporting horses box cars are used ; sixteen horses 
are put in one car. Troops are put in ordinary passenger 
cars \ they will carry sixty men comfortably and ninety if 
crowded. Trains should not travel over a new road at a 
greater rate of speed than twenty miles an hour for passen- 
ger, and fifteen for freight trains. To supply an army of 
ten thousand men in the field, by one track, the proportion 
of rolling stock is : Twenty-five engines and six hun- 
dred cars to every mile of road. This does not take 
into account the transportation of the troops. A line of 
railroad used as the means for connecting an army with its 
bases is, if it be of any great length, liable to injury from 



MILITARY ROADS AND BRIDGES. 453 

the enemy, unless thoroughly guarded. The army itself 
protects it from the front, but the enemy's cavalry, by 
making wide detours, may suddenly present themselves at 
some unguarded point, and tear up and twist a few yards 
of track, blow in a tunnel, or burn or burst up a bridge. 
Guards should always be stationed at the most important 
points, and the road constantly and carefully watched by 
patrols. Wherever detachments are stationed a block- 
house or redoubt should be built. Cavalry detachments 
should constantly scour the country on all sides of the line 
of road, to give warning of any approach of the enemy; 
no one should be allowed on or near the road, except those 
authorized. The destruction of a bridge which would re- 
quire but a few hours might take days to repair, and thus 
the very life of the army itself be put in danger. The tele- 
graph is an indispensable adjunct to military roads, and 
operators should be at every station ; also squads of repair 
men of both telegraph line and railroad track. 

The following article on railroads is taken from the work 
used at Fort Monroe, Va., written by Captain James Ches- 
ter, 3d U. S. Artillery : 

There are three objects connected with railroads which belong to the 
military profession. They are: I. Railway Destruction ; 2. Railway 
Construction ; 3. Railway Management. 

Section i. Railway Destrttction. — There are two cases: First, to 
destroy an enemy's road, so as to interrupt his communications; second, 
to destroy the road over which an army retreats, so as to retard an en- 
emy's advance. The first case is generally the work of a raiding party, 
and must be quickly done. The attack is made wherever most damage 
can be done in the least time, without running too great risk. Destruc- 
tion, and not fighting, is the mission of the party. Points heavily 
guarded should be avoided. If it can destroy 1000 feet of bridges, it 
matters little whether it be all in one or in ten bridges. Bridges are 
generally the objective with such parties, and unguarded bridges arc 
specially inviting. 

To Destroy a Trussed-Arch Bridge. — If the road is on the lower 
chord, insert torpedoes in the lower chord beams at the middle of the 
span, and exploue them. They should shatter the chord beams, but 
wdl not bring down the span. Insert torpedoes in the first braces from 
the pier or abutment, and also in the arches near the heels, and explode 
them, and the span will come down. If the road is on an upper chord, 
insert torpedoes in the upper chord beams, at the middle of the spar, 



454 ART 0F war. 

and explode them. Insert torpedoes in the end braces, and in the arches 
as before, and explode simultaneously. 

To Destroy a Railway Trestle Bridge. — If there be no danger in 
delay, the bridges may be destroyed by fire. The fire should be started 
at both ends of the bridge. Oil poured on the timbers will accelerate 
the fire. If in a hurry, destroy the stringers and longitudinal braces 
which bind the first trestles to the abutments, at both ends of the bridge. 
Insert torpedoes in the upper ends of the trestle legs of at least three 
trestles near the middle of the bridge, and explode simultaneously. 

To Destroy an Iron Bridge. — The speediest and most effective way 
is to plant mines behind the abutments, and blow them down. The 
mines should be sunk so that the line of least resistance will pass 
through the masonry. The charge of powder in pounds is equal to 
the square of the line of least resistance multiplied by the width of the 
abutment. If supplied with proper tools, iron braces and bars may be 
bent and broken. 

The bridge torpedo consists of a bolt 8 in. long, 7/% in. diameter, 
with a head 2 in. diameter arfd I in. thick; a tin cylinder i^f in. diam- 
eter is around the bolt and resting in the bolt-head. A washer and nut 
which screws on the bolt holds the cylinder in place. A hole is in the 
washer through which the fuse is inserted. The cylinder is filled with 
gunpowder. To use the torpedo a two-inch hole is bored in the tim- 
ber, and the torpedo inserted, head first ; the fuse is then lighted. 

To Destroy the Track. — When a desirable bridge is not available, 
the road may be cut by destroying the track. This is best done by using 
a tool called the U wrench. It is made of iron or steel, about a foot 
long, shaped like the letter U, and weighs about 6^ lbs. The branches 
of the U are 7 inches apart, and their upper extremities are provided 
with claws to lay hold of the rail. A lever 5 inches in diameter and 1-2 
feet long, and a rope 6 yds. long are required ; also a small block of 
wood to use as a fulcrum. The U wrench is slipped under the rail 
claws up, the claws are made to lay hold of the bed-plate of the rail. 
The rope is then attached to the end of the lever, the lever is raised 
and the butt end inserted in the loop, the wedge or fulcrum placed be- 
tween it and the rail, the rope manned and the rail is twisted. Two 
machines may be used at the same end of the rail at the same time, and 
the rail so twisted that it has to go to the rolling mill to be made ser- 
viceable again. To operate the U wrench requires about ten men. A 
party organized to destroy a railway should be divided into squads of 
that size, with the necessary non-commissioned officers. The outfit to 
each squad should be 2 wrenches, 2 axes, and 2 pieces of rope. An 
expert squad can twist a rail in 5 minutes. This would make for 20- 
foot rails 240 feet of rail per hour, or one mile of track for 40 squads in 
one hour. 

Rail-way Destruction in Retreat. — The retreating army should be 
one day's march behind the destruction corps. Track lifters in this case 
should be provided with the most approved tools for their work. As 



I 



MILITARY ROADS AND BRIDGES. 455 

the rails are ripped up they should be sent to the rear on flat cars. 
Ties should be burned. Bridges, culverts, retaining walls, water tanks, 
depots, etc., should be destroyed. 

If the object be to simply disable a railway temporarily, that the enemy 
may be deprived of its immediate use, then tanks, depots, shops, etc., 
can be burned, and portions of tracks, on high embankments, lifted 
bodily and thrown over the embankment. 

Section 2. Railway Construction. — Although it is sometimes neces- 
sary in military operations to construct short lines de novo, the more 
common case is the reconstruction of a line that has been destroyed. 
In case of entirely new lines, all preliminary operations of reconnois- 
sance, survey, plotting, grading, etc., have to be gone through with. 
In case of reconstruction of old lines, it is dispensed with almost entirely. 
If the track to be laid is the standard gauge, 4 ft. 8)4 ln -> the width 
of road bed should be 10 feet; if it is double track, road bed should 
be 20 feet. Instead of the surfacing with which a common road is 
finished, a railway bed is covered with from 9 to i2 // of gravel, gravelly 
earth, cinders, broken stone, or other gritty material that will pack well 
and allow water to pass off. 

Railway ties are about seven feet long, hewn from round sticks to a 
thickness of six inches. They are hewn only on two opposite sides and 
have a bed and bearing surface of six inches. They may be oak, chest- 
nut, or pine ; oak is the best. They are laid about three feet apart 
from centre to centre, and embedded in the ballast at least two-thirds 
of their thickness. 

Track-laying gives occupation to four squads of men, tie-carriers, 
tie-layers, rail carriers, and rail-setters. The second and fourth should 
be skilled workmen, supervised by men familiar with the work. The 
first and third are laborers under non-commissioned officers. A car is 
brought up with rails and ties both, two rails to eight ties, and the car- 
riers should be numerous enough to lift the load at once. The empty 
car is run to the rear, and a full one brought up, by a shunting engine. 
Spikes and fish plates sufficient for the number of rails carried, are part 
of the load of each car. Material required per mile is 440 rails, 24 
feet long, 440 pair fish-plates, 1760 fish-plate bolts, 7920 spikes, 1760 
sleepers or ties. Add ioper cent, of all items except rails, for wastage. 
Where there is but a single track, there should be many turn-outs. 
The parts of a turn-out are the switch, the points, the curved track, and 
the siding. The switch is a portion of the track about 15 feet long, 
so arranged that the rails can be slipped to one side by a lever, the 
points or ends of the rails moving about four inches. The siding is the 
part of the turn-out parallel to the main track. It should be connected 
with the main track at both ends. In laying track on a curve, the outer 
rail is elevated more or less to overcome the tangential force of the 
train. The amount of elevation depends on the radius of the curve and 
the speed of the train. As rails expand and contract with heat and 
cold, allowance should be made of ^ of an inch for 24-foot rails at 



456 ART OF WAR. 

6o° F., or If if laid at 32 F. In laying rails, four spikes are driven 
in each tie. 

Section 3. Raihvay Management. — Railway management com- 
prises two distinct parts, namely, the Department of Accounts, and the 
Department of Operation. These departments are independent of each 
other. The first receives, audits, and consolidates all accounts of money 
and property pertaining to the road, and makes all payments. The 
second is the executive or working part, which runs trains, depots, 
purchases all necessary stores, makes repairs, etc., and operates the tel- 
egraph line. The Department of Accounts consists of — 

I General Superintendent of Accounts . Brigadier General. 

GENERAL STAFF. 

I Auditor of Accounts ' . Colonel. 

I Chief Paymaster " 

And for each Division in operation : 

1 Paymaster Major. 

1 Inspector of Accounts " 

The number of clerks allowed, to be commensurate with the busi- 
ness of the roads. 

The Department of Operation consists of — 

I General Superintendent Brigadier General. 

EXECUTIVE STAFF. 

I Chief Engineer Colonel. 

I Master General of Transportation . . " 

I Master General of Motive Power and 
Rolling Stock 

1 Inspector General " 

I General Supt. of Telegraphs .... " 

1 Surgeon-in- Chief " 

For each Division in operation : 

1 Division Supt Lieut. Col. or Major. 

I Division Engineer Captain. 

I Division Master of Rolling Stock, etc. " 

1 Quartermaster " 

1 Division Supt. of Telegraphs .... " 

1 Assistant Surgeon " 

For each Section : 

1 Section Inspector Lieutenant. 

I Section Engineer " 

For each Station : 

1 Station Master Captain. 

1 Train Dispatcher Lieutenant. 

1 Freight Agent " 

I Telegraph Operator Sergeant. 



MILITARY ROADS AND BRIDGES. 45 7 

For each Train : 

I Conductor Lieutenant. 

I Guard Sergeant. 

I Engine Driver Staff Sergeant. 

1 Stoker Private. 

2 Brakemen Corporals. 

The General Supt. commands the whole department. 
• The Executive Staff under the Supt. control and command their spe- 
cial branches of the department. To them all reports and returns are 
made, and through them all orders from higher authority are transmit- 
ted. 

The Division Supt. commands everything in his division, and is re- 
sponsible for its efficiency. 

The Division Engineer is responsible for the condition of the perma- 
nent way, bridges, buildings, etc. The Section Engineers are under 
his command, and through them he controls all the engineering work 
in the several sections of his division. 

The Division Master of Motive Power, etc.. is responsible for the 
condition of everything on wheels. He commands the workshops and 
workmen of his division, and superintends the building and repairs of 
engines and cars, and the purchase of materials. 

The Quartermaster purchases and issues all fuel and oil and expend- 
able stores required for the operation of the trains of his division. 

The Supt. of Telegraphs is responsible for the condition of the tele- 
graph plant, and the efficiency and attention to duty of the operators of 
his division. 

The Ass't Surgeon is charged with medical attendance on officers 
and men of his division. 

The Section Inspector is responsible for the condition of his section, 
and daily reports the condition to the Division Supt. 

The Section Engineer reports to the Division Engineer upon the en- 
gineer work of his section. 

The Station Master is commanding officer of the station. All reports 
going up and orders going down pass through his hands, if they pertain 
to his station, or officers and workmen connected therewith. 

The Train Dispatcher is the Station Master's adjutant. To him con- 
ductors of trains report their arrival. From him they get their instruc- 
tions and orders on departure. 

The Freight Agent is the forwarding quartermaster of the station. 

The Telegraph Operator is responsible to his own chief for the plant 
and condition of the office, but as far as his duties are concerned he 
is under the control of the station master. 

The Conductor commands the trains. The Guard knows the con- 
tents and destination of every car in the train. 

Divisions are not of the same length and importance. They average 
ioo miles long. A section is about 25 miles long. 



458 ART OF WAR. 

Bridges. 

The subject of bridges is as important to the military 
officer as roads. An army on the march will come across 
streams large and small that will impede its march, and 
perhaps imperil the success of the campaign, unless some 
way of crossing is speedily found ; or the line of commun- 
ication may be broken because of the destruction of a 
bridge on the route, and it becomes necessary to repair it 
immediately. There are three ways in which troops cross 
rivers, streams, chasms, etc., viz : fords, ferries and bridges. 
Wherever the water in the river is not too deep or rapid, 
and there is a good river bottom, fords are made use of. 
The water should not be over three feet deep for Infantry, 
and four for Cavalry. Whenever possible to cross in some 
other way, Artillery and trains will not use fords, unless 
depth of water is under two feet, and the bottom hard and 
firm. The force of the current is broken by Cavalry sta- 
tioned across the stream and above the ford. Fords should 
never be crossed without examination first, and after every 
freshet a new examination should be made. A ford can 
be rendered impassable by digging trenches across it, or by 
dumping logs with large branches across it. The direction 
and extent of a ford should be marked by poles. A bot- 
tom of large stones is bad for cavalry, and impracticable 
for artillery or trains. Gravel is the best bottom. 

When a river has to be crossed, and no knowledge is 
had of the fording places, the condition of the bottom 
may be ascertained by sending a man across, who is a 
good walker and also a good swimmer. By walking rap- 
idly, he will not sink, if he comes to quicksand. Then a 
number of men cross rapidly, packing the bottom, to pre- 
pare the way for wagons, if there be any to follow. 
Horses and mules should be watered before entering the 
water, and then crossed rapidly without stopping, and 
wagons must be driven steadily and rapidly. If the mules 
or horses lie down they must be pulled out with ropes. 
Double teams should be attached, if the bottom is bad. 
If the water is high enough to reach the wagon beds, the 
bed should be raised on blocks placed at each corner under 



MILITARY ROADS AND BRIDGES. 459 

the bed. Mounted men should ride ahead of the first 
team, leading it by a rope, and a man may also be placed 
on the lower side of the team to urge it. If rivers are 
swift, they should be forded obliquely, as there is consid- 
erable assistance from the current, in forcing the wagon 
across. If the landing place be soft and yielding, a good 
bottom should be made of brush and earth. In swimming 
horses across, the rider should have a loose rein and never 
pull, except to guide the horse. He can steady himself 
by holding on to the mane. If he dismounts and swims 
with his horse, he should hold on to the tail, and guide 
the horse by a strap or rope attached to the bit. 

Whenever the nature of the bottom makes a crossing 
impracticable, and there are no bridges near, crossing is 
done by means of a ferry. A raft, or flat-boat, with ropes 
at both ends stretching across the stream to pull from side 
to side, is the simplest kind of ferry. The rafts or boats 
may be propelled by oars, or carried across by the current. 
In this latter case, a rope is stretched across the water 
tightly, the boat is attached by a traveling pulley and 
rope at the bow to this rope, and by means of a rudder, it 
is made to have and keep an angle of 55 with the rope. 

The action of the current against the sides of the boat 
pushes it across. Where the width of the stream is 150 
yards or less, the rope is stretched above the water and the 
ferry called a trail-bridge. Where the width of the stream 
exceeds 150 yards, the rope is anchored at intervals in the 
stream and the ferry called a flying-bridge. 

The boat may be attached to the main cable by two 
ropes and traveling pulleys, one at the bow and the other 
at the stern. The last should be a longer rope than the 
first, in order that the boat may make the necessary angle 
to the main cable. 

If it is necessary to make a raft, small trees are cut 
down and laid in rows. On top of them is put another 
layer of logs at right angles to the first. If necessary, a 
third layer can be put down at right angles to the second ; 
holes two inches in diameter are bored through the logs 
where they cross each other, and stout pins (wooden) are 



460 ART OF WAR. 

driven in the holes and wedged in, to hold the logs firmly 
together. If possible, the timber should be coated with 
tar wherever the limbs have been cut off, and at the ends, 
to prevent absorbing water, which will increase the weight 
of the raft, and decrease its buoyancy. 

A bridge called the "Floating Bridge," is often used 
when casks or boats are at hand. It is made by calculat- 
ing first the amount of floating power the bridge should 
have, which is for artillery 525 pounds per running foot, 
and for infantry 350 pounds. To this should be added 
the weight of the bridge, which will average 100 pounds 
to the foot. 

Cubic contents of cask may be calculated as follows : 
Cubic contents =1 yi L tt (r 2 + R 2 + v R) in which L — 
length of cask, tt= 3.1416, v — radius of head, and R = 
radius at bung. Multiply cubic contents by 62.5 = dis- 
placement ; deduct from this weight of cask. Result is 
floating power. 

The casks are placed in rows of six, eight, or ten each, 
and a double row of casks forms one pier ; the piers should 
be about ten feet from each other. On the piers, beams 
are laid, and planks are then nailed to the beams cross- 
wise. Streams over three feet and less than six feet can be 
covered by ladder bridges. They are made by running 
out into the stream a trestle, or a ladder, or a cart, and 
securing it there, with its shafts or pole in a vertical posi- 
tion ; by ropes tied to the trees on the bank, ladders are 
then laid from the banks to the cart, and planks laid on 
the ladders. The bridges just described are used wherever 
no better can be had. In all armies, however, there is a 
construction corps, whose duty it is to have bridges all 
ready made and ready to be laid whenever necessary. 
The engineers generally have charge of the construction 
and building of bridges. These bridges are divided into 
two classes : 1st, those with fixed supports, and 2d. Those 
with floating support's. 

First Class. Bridges with Fixed Supports. — -The sup- 
ports used are piles, trestles and crib work. Where the 
bridges rest on piles, they are generally preceded by pon- 



MILITARY ROADS AND BRIDGES. 46 1 

toon bridges, over which the army has crossed, which are 
taken .up as soon as the pile bridge is finished. The piles 
used are those cut down in the country surrounding. 
When the current of a river is so rapid that it will not ad- 
mit of using a pile-driver with advantage, or the bottom is 
rocky or hard, so as to prevent the driving of piles, cribs, 
or large open-work boxes, are made of rough timber, and 
towed out in the stream and loaded with stone till they 
sink to the bottom. Crib-work supports are also used as 
pile supports for bridges of the army line of communica- 
tion, and where the river is very wide. 

Trestle bridge supports are made of wooden frames con- 
sisting of a horizontal beam supported by two or more 
legs. To make the bridge, several trestles are placed in 
the water, and connected by beams over which planks are 
laid. Trestles of different sizes, with corresponding beams 
and planking, are kept all ready made by an army on the 
march. Trestle bridges are used in streams 6 feet in depth, 
and with not a greater rapidity of current than 4 miles 
per hour. The form and appearance of the two-legged 
trestle is given in 2 Fig. 25. 

We insert here a few paragraphs from Capt. Chester's 
work on Military Bridges. 

Scarfed Stringer Bridge. — Where stringers of sufficient 
length to reach across the span cannot be procured, or are* 
too heavy for convenient hauling, resort is had to the 
scarfed stringer bridge. It is assumed in this case, that 
this is to replace a bridge destroyed, the abutments still 
standing, and material on both sides. For a span of 20 
to 30 feet, six stringers 25 feet long and 6 inches in diam- 
eter, their smaller ends prepared for scarfing ; that is, 
hewed on their upper side for a distance of 18 inches, and 
then pushed out from the abutments 10 feet. They are 
laid two feet apart from centre to centre, their shore ends 
securely anchored down and secured by laying a corduroy 
road of heavy logs. Six short stringers, 8 to 12 feet long, 
and 10 inches in diameter, and their ends scarfed on the 
under side ; they are then passed across the gap, and laid 
accurately on the long stringers. Two three-inch auger 



462 



ART OF WAR. 



holes are bored in each end, and hard wood pins driven 
and wedged at the ends. Planking or flooring poles are 
then laid. 




Fig. 25. 

The six-legged trestle is made of round logs, and com- 
posed of four vertical legs, six inches in diameter, two 
bracing legs, six inches in diameter, one cap or girder, 



MILITARY ROADS AND BRIDGES. 463 

eight inches in diameter and twelve feet long, two foot 
pieces, eight inches in diameter, three feet long, ten white 
oak pins, three inches in diameter. No tools are required 
for making this trestle, except axes and augers. For rais- 
ing the trestles, two sliding beams, eight inches in diame- 
ter, and twice the length of the span, four short rollers, 
two of which are 12 inches in diameter, and two 26 inches. 
To make the trestle, first ascertain depth of water and 
determine length of trestle-legs accordingly. Select a 
level spot near the water, and construct a framing platform. 
This consists of t-wo logs parallel to each other and the 
width of the bridge apart, laid with an inclination to the 
water. The upper face of the platform logs should be 
hewed. They are designated right and left, with reference 
to the trestle-legs as they lay on the platform. Then lay 
logs of requisite length for trestle-legs on the proper sides 
of the platform. The cap-piece is laid across at the height 
of the roadway, the foot pieces across the feet of the tres- 
tles. The other two vertical legs are laid on top, resting 
on the cap and foot pieces, and auger-holes bored through 
the three legs at each corner. Pins are then driven, and 
if necessary, wedged, and the bearing legs pinned to the 
foot pieces. The trestle is then launched, and towed or 
poled into position for hoisting. Meantime, preparations 
for hoisting have been going on. The sliding beams have 
been advanced, one on each side of the road, until their 
front ends are over the position of the foot trestle ; the 
large roller in front a very little in advance of the centre 
of gravity of the beam, the small roller in the rear. The 
trestle is brought abreast of the bridge head, the cap 
towards the bridge, the sliding beams are lowered by rais- 
ing their ends until they nearly touch the water ; short 
slings are passed around the ends of the sliding beams. 
The trestle is then raised slowly by lowering the rear end 
of the sliding beams, until it hangs directly over its place. 
It is then allowed to drop into position, by raising the 
rear ends of the sliding beams ; the side stringers are 
slipped across the span and secured, the bracing legs are 
driven into place and pinned, short pieces are spiked or 



464 ART 0F WAR. 

pinned across the vertical legs under the ends of the cap 
piece as supports, and the trestle is finished. The stringers 
and floor are then laid. 

Paine 1 s Trestle Bridge. — Where a stream intercepts the 
march of a detachment, and it is desired to simply get the 
detachment across in a short time, with little labor, and in 
streams not over 6 feet deep, the following method is used : 
Trees are felled into the stream and trimmed of their 
branches. Bore 2 3-in auger-holes near the butt end 
about 3 inches apart, and making an angle of 30 with 
each other. Cut, trim and insert in the holes legs of suffi- 
cient length to raise the butt of the log the desired dis- 
tance out of the water. Pass a rope once around the butt, 
and make fast to one of the legs. Float down the stream 
to the position desired, butt end first. When the butt end 
of the log has arrived on the line of the bridge, the end 
of the rope is thrown to parties on the shore, who haul 
upon it until the log is turned upon its feet. The effect 
of this, and the action of the current, is to sink the top 
end of the tree and keep it on the bottom. A bracing leg 
is then prepared, its foot set down stream, so as to give it 
an inclination of about 45 °, and its top driven hard be- 
tween the two legs already- in position. Log after log is 
thus placed until these improvised trestles reach across the 
stream. Stringer logs are cut, and floated down stream, 
and rolled up the incline of the trestle logs in position — 
the smallest being placed on the upper, the largest on the 
lower side, to level the roadway. 

The most valuable of all bridges to an army is the pon- 
toon bridge, in which the supports are floating. A pon- 
toon is a boat of wood 31 feet long, 5' 5" wide at the top, 
and 4' 5" wide at bottom, 2' 8" deep. The bow and stem 
are built higher than the body of the boat. The bow is 2 
2 feet 9 inches wide, and the stem 4' 8". A pontoon of 
the size above has capacity to carry 40 men, armed and 
equipped, and its crew of 7 men (pontoniers) also. To 
make a pontoon bridge, the site is first selected, the pon- 
toons brought to the banks near by; close to the bank a pon- 
toon is anchored securely, its length at right angles to the 



MILITARY ROADS AND BRIDGES. 465 

direction of the bridge. Five beams or balks, which are of 
white pine, measuring 21'^"^" each are then brought, 
and their ends are lashed to the outer gunwale of the boat. 
On the under side of each balk is fastened a small cleat, 
called a claw. The claws are seven inches long. The 
balks are lashed to the boat with one-inch manilla rope, 
called rock lashings. The anchor is then taken up, and 
the pontoon pushed out till the shore end of the balks rest 
on a string beam planted in the earth firmly, and called an 
abutment sill. The boat is then securely fastened to the 
shore by cables. Planks called chess > of white pine, 13' 
long, 12" wide, and i^" thick are then laid along the 
balks till within one foot of the boat. Another pontoon 
is then brought alongside of the first, and five balks are 
lashed to it as to the first, and it is then pushed out till the 
inner ends of its balks rest just inside the outer guards of 
the first boat. The second boat is securely anchored in 
the stream at both ends; the two sets of balks are then 
lashed together, and chess laid till within one foot of the 
second boat. The distances between the boats are termed 
bays, and as each bay is covered, side rails or balks are laid 
on the outer edges of the flooring, and lashed firmly to 
the balks. The first bay is sometimes strengthened by 
two additional balks. The bridge is continued in this way 
till the river is crossed (see 3, Fig. 25). 

Pontoons are carried in special wagons, and a pontoon 
train accompanies each army in its march; As soon as the 
army and its material has crossed, the pontoon bridge is 
replaced by one of trestle or truss work, and the pontoons 
taken up for other crossing. 

The U, S. Army organization carries in each pontoon 
division all the material for a bridge 220' long. 

The Reserve Bridge Equipage is divided into trains, the 
trains into divisions, the divisons into sections. 

Sections are Pontoon Sections and Abutment Sections. 

The Pontoon Section consists of 3 pontoon wagons and 
1 chess wagon. 

The Abutment Section consists of 1 pontoon wagon, 1 
chess wagon, and 1 trestle wagon. 
30 



466 ART OF WAR. 

The Division is the unit of the equipage. It consists 
of 2 pontoon sections and 2 abutment sections, and con- 
tains 14 wagons, namely, 8 pontoon wagons, 4 chess wag- 
ons, 2 trestle wagons. In addition, there is a tool wagon 
and a traveling forge. 

A division carries material for n bags, 7 pontoons, 2 
abutments and 2 trestles — 225 feet. 

The train has 4 divisions, 3 officers, 5 non-commissioned 
officers, and 56 privates. 

The Advance Guard Equipage consists of the same num- 
ber of wagons, officers and men. The pontoon carried 
by it is made of canvas, and all its material is lighter and 
easier to transport. 

Temporary bridges may be easily constructed of timber 
when advisable, as shown by the illustrations 4, 5, 6, Fig. 
25. They are termed the single lock, double lock, and 
single sling respectively. 

A site for a military bridge should be chosen with refer- 
ence to the following considerations : It should be at a 
place where it can be sheltered from the fire of the enemy, 
and as far as possible from his view. It should be as near 
by the troops using it as possible. The banks should not 
be high, and there should be in the near neighborhood 
good positions for artillery. The river bed should be firm, 
the current not rapid — the stream, in case of a freshet, not 
liable to overflow the ground. Guards are placed at both 
ends of the bridge, who see that infantry always break step 
marching over; that cavalry dismount and lead their 
horses ; that wagons crossing are not too heavily loaded, 
and cattle are driven over six or eight at a time, and in 
no larger droves. Other guards, furnished with boats, 
grappling irons, etc., are stationed above the bridges, and 
watch out for anything coming down the stream liable to 
injure the bridge. 

Railroad tracks are never laid on pontoons or floating 
bridges ; only on bridges with fixed supports. 

Safeguards. 

Safeguards are protections granted to persons or prop- 



MILITARY ROADS AND BRIDGES. 467 

erty in foreign parts by the commanding general, or by 
other commanders within the limits of their command. 

1084. Safeguards are usually given to protect hospitals, 
public establishments, establishments of religion, charity, 
or instruction, museums, depositories of the arts, mills, 
post offices, and other institutions of public benefit ; also 
to individuals whom it may be the interest of the Army to 
respect. 

A safeguard may consist of one or more men of fidelity 
and firmness, generally non-effective non-commissioned 
officers, furnished with a paper setting out clearly the pro- 
tection and exemptions it is intended to secure, signed by 
the commander giving it, and his staff officer; or it may 
consist of such paper, delivered to the party whose person, 
family, house, and property it is designed to protect. 
These safeguards must be numbered and registered. 

The men left as safeguards by one corps may be replaced 
by another. They are withdrawn when the country is 
evacuated ; but if not, th6y have orders to await the arri- 
val of the enemy's troops, and apply to the commander 
for a safe conduct to the outposts. 

1087. Form of a safeguard : 

By authority of . 

A safeguard is hereby granted to [A. B ; stating precisely the 

place, nature, and description of the person, property, or buildings. ~\ 
All officers and soldiers belonging to the Army of the United States are 
therefore commanded to respect this safeguard, and to afford, if neces- 
sary, protection to \_the person, fa?)iily or property of , as 

the case may be.~\ 

Given at Headquarters, the day of . 

A. B , 

Major General commanding-in-chief. 

C. D- , 

Adjutant General. 

(See 57th Article of War.) 



CHAPTER XIV 



MILITARY ENGINEERING. 

GENERAL DEFINITIONS. 

HASTY FORTIFICATIONS. 

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

REVETMENTS. 

OBSTACLES. 

ATTACK AND DEFENCE OF FIELD 
LINES AND WORKS. 

DEMOLITION, ETC. 



MILITARY ENGINEERING. 



Military engineering is that branch of the art of war 
which has for its object the arrangement and strengthening 
of positions whereby an inferior force may successfully re- 
sist a superior one ; also the method of removing obstacles 
and reducing positions, which are strengthened or fortified 
by artificial means. The artificial means by which posi- 
tions are strengthened are termed fortifications. There are 
two general classes of fortifications — Permanent, and 
Tetnporary. 

Permanent fortifications are those usually built in time 
of peace, and are designed to last a long time. They 
fortify positions of great importance, and are therefore 
built of durable and strong materials, and occupy consid- 
erable time in building. 

In the United States they are found on the sea-coast at 
the entrance of the principal harbors and rivers. They 
are mostly built of masonry and earth. Modern perma- 
nent fortifications are built of large masses of earth or 
sand supported by walls of masonry or concrete ; or they 
are revolving turrets of iron or steel plates. The entire 
subject of Permanent Fortifications is so scientific and im- 
portant a one, that it is entrusted to those only who have 
made a special study of it. 

Temporary fortifications are those built in a short time, 
generally after a war has commenced. They fortify posi- 
tions that acquire only a temporary importance while the 
war continues ; and are built by the labor of the troops, 
and are called Field Fortifications. 

Temporary Fortifications are divided into two classes : 
Hasty and Ordinary fortifications. 

Hasty Fortifications are those built very quickly, gener- 
ally in the presence of an enemy, and are therefore very 
imperfect in construction. 

(471) 



472 



ART OF WAR. 



Ordinary Fortificatio?is are those constructed in a short 
time, but not in the presence of the enemy as a rule, and 
therefore there is time to finish them. 

Field Fortifications are also divided into Field Works 
and Field Lines. The field works are to protect a small 
body of men, and do not cover, as a rule, a very great 
extent of ground. Field lines are built to protect a 
large body of troops, and coveF an extended area of 
ground. 

Field works and lines as a rule come under the head of 
Ordinary Fortifications. 

In building fortifications there are certain primary con- 
ditions to be fulfilled, in order to make the positions de- 
fensive ones. These conditions in brief are : ist. A shelter 
to protect the defenders from the missiles of the enemy, 
and to screen them from his view. 2d. A command over 
the surrounding country so that an enemy cannot approach 
within cannon shot without being seen, and exposed to 
the fire of the defenders. 3d. The arrangement of the 
fortification should conform to the nature of the ground, 
so that the defenders may not be impeded in their work 
of defense under any condition. 

These conditions are satisfied by taking possession of 
ground that commands all other within range of its guns, 
and throwing up earth to shelter the defenders, removing 
any obstacles that impede their free movements, and plac- 
ing obstacles in the way of the enemy, or by locating 
the fortifications where there is some natural defence be- 
tween it and the enemy, as a river or swamp, etc., etc. 

Hasty Fortifications. 

The study of hasty fortifications has become one of the 
most important branches of the science of War. This is due 
to the great range, precision and power of modern guns, 
which renders shelter of some kind absolutely necessary in 
order to maintain a close formation of troops, or even to 
hold them together sufficiently to command their move- 
ments. Men engaged in battle are obliged to seek shelter 
of any description, and therefore the first step in fortifica- 



MILITARY ENGINEERING. 473 

tion is to teach each man how to take advantage of every 
natural shelter, such as a bush or log, a slight inequality in 
the ground, and even a tuft of grass. This kind of forti- 
fication is taken advantage of only when there is no time 
to prepare any artificial means, and the soldier must fight 
and hide himself as he best can. When there is a small 
amount of time, he throws up the simplest kind of hasty 
fortification, called intrenchment. This is done by digging 
a shallow trench in which he may lie down, and the earth 
excavated thrown up in front of him will afford a shelter 
from the enemy's view. Such trenches are designated shel- 
ter trenches. When the earth is excavated enough to al- 
low the soldier to remain in a sitting or kneeling posture 
and be screened from the enemy's view, it is called a rifle 
pit. A shelter trench is constructed by digging first a 
trench one foot three inches deep, and throwing the earth 
in front of it, forming a mound or parapet. The width 
of the trench is two feet, and its size is only large enough 
to shelter one man. It can be thrown up by one man in 
fifteen minutes. (See i, Fig. 26.) This trench may be deep- 
ened (see 2, Fig. 26) in forty minutes' time, and shelter two 
men. A rifle-pit is a hole dug in the ground, four feet 
deep and four and one-half feet in diameter at the top and 
two and one-half feet in diameter at the bottom. In front 
the earth excavated can be piled, making a parapet one 
foot high. It takes a man two hours to make a rifle-pit 
(see 3, Fig. 26). 

Shelter trenches should be joined together so as to form 
one continuous trench if time allows. In rear of the shel- 
ter trenches additional ones may be dug for the shelter of 
supernumeraries. When there are several field works, cov- 
ering a large piece of ground, they may be put in com- 
munication with each other by connecting them by shelter 
trenches. In such a case, and to shelter infantry troops 
thoroughly, they should be of the dimensions and size 
given in 4. If it is not to be used, however, for the 
passage of artillery or cavalry, it is dug as in 5. 

Shelter trenches follow the contour of the ground, and 
are never made in a straight line unless there is some 
marked advantage to be gained by so doing. 



474 



ART OF WAR. 




Fig. 26. 



MILITARY ENGINEERING. 475 

A gun pit is made for the protection of artillery. It is 
made as shown in 6, and of the dimensions there given. 
Six men can dig a gun pit for one gun in one hour in 
ordinary earth. Shelter trenches for guns are usually 
made on the reverse slope of ground as in Fig. 7. In 
throwing up hasty fortifications, troops are rarely given 
shovels and picks, but dig and scoop out the earth with 
knives, tin cups and plates, bayonets or other instruments 
they may carry with them. In digging a line of intrench- 
ments, troops go to the position marked out by stakes in 
the ground ; and while one rank digs with shovels and 
picks, etc., the other rank rests on the ground some yards 
in rear, with their guns ready in case of an attack. The 
diggers are frequently relieved. 

All impediments, such as stone walls, fences, woods, 
houses, roads, etc., may be utilized as hasty fortifications, 
and all commanders should frequently exercise their men 
in such drills. 

High stone walls have loop-holes made in them, and the 
space in front of them filled with obstacles to an enemy's 
progress. Low stone walls can have shallow trenches dug 
in their rear, and the earth thrown over the wall so as to 
cover it. Wooden fences and hedges can be utilized in a 
similar manner, and by rolling logs, piling rails, etc., in 
front of them. 

Woods are formed into defences by taking shelter be- 
hind the trees, or by cutting down the trees (''slashing"), 
leaving stumps, logs, branches, etc., just where they fall. 
A serious obstacle is thus presented to an enemy's near ap- 
proach. 

Houses are made into defensive positions by knocking 
out all the glass and boarding up the doors and windows. 
Then earth is thrown up all around that part of the house 
exposed to an enemy's fire as high as possible, and a ditch 
formed around the house, outside the embankment; bar- 
rels and buckets of water are placed in every room as a 
protection against fire, and loopholes are cut through 
wherever possible, and a good result can be obtained. 
The roof and floors are strengthened by additional beams 



476 ART OF WAR. 

and joists. For some space in front of the house the 
ground is cleared sufficiently to see an enemy, but filled 
with obstacles to prevent his getting at the house easily. 

In defending positions of great extent, as a camp, etc., 
the same general measures are taken. If there are field 
works in or about the position, they are connected by shel- 
ter trenches. The ground is then cleared from six hundred 
to one thousand yards in front of the position, and cov- 
ered with obstacles. 

Rifle pits give shelter, and are made in front of shelter 
trenches. Arrangements for perfect communication, either 
by signal stations or telegraph, are made; also for food 
and water. The distances from any part of the position 
to different marks outside are measured and made known ; 
and finally, inside nothing is left undone to impede the 
free movements of the defenders. 

Ordinary Field Fortifications. 

The first thing to consider in building a field fortifica- 
tion is the site or location. This location is termed the 
position, and it should be chosen on the general principle 
that it is such a place whereby an inferior force may suc- 
cessfully defend itself against a superior one. 

There are of course many other considerations that may 
arise, but what they are can only be determined by the 
peculiarity of the position itself. After the position is 
taken, the next step is the " tracing" or marking off of the 
exterior lines of the work on the ground, and the dimen- 
sions according to the plans of the engineers in charge. 
At the principal points of the exterior lines pickets are 
driven into the ground ; then lines are drawn by means of 
a pick, a pointed stick, or other instrument on the ground 
from picket to picket. The exterior lines being known, 
the next step is to get the height and thickness of the dif- 
ferent parts of earth to be thrown up. This is called pro- 
filing. It is done by driving into the earth sticks, and 
nailing lath across, and running cords across, so that the 
outline thus formed will show the different parts (see 8, Fig. 
26) of the work to be thrown up. After the profile of the 



MILITARY ENGINEERING. 



477 



different parts of the work is made, then the working par- 
ties go on the ground. They first remove all the brush, 
sticks, and stones, and pile them 
on the ground over which the 
earth is to be piled. The men are 
distributed over the ditch, about 
one man to each yard. To every 
three men with spade or pick 
there should be two men with 
shovels. As fast as the earth is 
loosened from the ditch it is 
thrown up to form the embank- 
ment or parapet, as it is termed. 
There should be for every three 
shovelers one man on the parapet 
to level the earth and give it the 
proper shape and slopes; of 
course, in hard or rocky soils the 
proportion of men with picks to 
those with shovels will vary, and 
must be determined in each case 
by the nature of the soil to be 
excavated. The squads are each 
in charge of a non-commissioned 
officer, who is responsible for. the 
work done on the space allotted 
to him. The several- squads con- 
stitute a fatigue detail, which is 
commanded by a commissioned 
officer. In easy or soft soil one 
man can excavate one cubic yard 
of earth an hour, and in hard 
soil about one-half cubic yard in 
one hour. A shoveler will be able 
to throw the earth horizontally 
twelve feet, and vertically six feet. 
When the embankment exceeds 
six feet in height, there should be 
The fatigue details generally 




Fig. 27. 
four instead of two shovelers. 



478 ART OF WAR. 

work six hours, and then are relieved by other details. 
After the embankment has reached that height, additional 
working parties are then put behind it to form the sup- 
ports for the embankment (see Fig. 27 which gives in de- 
tail the different parts of the ordinary field-works, and 
their names and dimensions). After the ditch has been 
excavated, its sides are given the proper slopes, and that 
part of the work beyond the ditch is then thrown up. 

Revetments. 

The interior slopes of the parapet are supported by var- 
ious means, which are termed in general "revetments." 
Any means which can be used to protect earth from falling 
from any desired slope, is called a revetment. 

The simplest revetment is sod or turf, and when there is 
time it should always be placed in those slopes that have 
but little fall. Sods for revetments are eighteen inches 
long and ten inches wide and four and one-half thick ; 
they should never be laid wet. The principal kinds of 
materials which are used in making revetments are barrels, 
timbers, casks and planks, gabions, fascines, hurdles, sand- 
bags, etc. When timber is used in making revetments, 
one of the methods employed is to cut logs and timbers 
into short lengths, about five feet, and from four to six 
inches in diameter, and driving them into the ground, 
giving them the proper slope, and putting them in contact 
with each other ; they are driven in a sufficient distance to 
leave just space enough for a capping piece about six inches 
in diameter to be laid on top of them, and to reach just 
to the crest of the parapet ; the capping piece is securely 
anchored by a notched log buried in the parapet, and con- 
nected by cross ties; each upright is securely spiked to the 
capping piece [10, Fig. 28]. Another method consists 
in piling logs on top of each other the necessary height 
and slope and securing them by uprights driven into the 
ground, and nailed at the top to a capping piece which is 
held by means of scantling driven firmly in the earth, or 
the plank may be laid horizontally and nailed to the scant- 
ling. 



MILITARY ENGINEERING. 



479 





480 ART OF WAR. 

Timber, and especially planking, forms the best of all 
revetments for field works on account of facility of hand- 
ling and durability. Whenever it can be procured and 
spared, it should be used in preference to other materials. 

A gabion is a cylinder made of basket work ; it is about 
two feet in diameter, and three feet high [see 12]. 
Gabions are made as follows : A circular piece of wood 
two feet in diameter is laid on the ground and pickets 
three and one-half feet long are driven closely around it 
in the ground, the form, as the circular piece of wood is 
called, is then raised one foot from the ground and a rope 
passed under it around the pickets and bound tightly; 
brush-wood one-half inch in diameter, and stripped of all 
branches and leaves, is then woven in and around the 
pickets in a basket form ; the brushes being kept pressed 
down tightly, the top and bottom withes are secured by 
thread, string, or fine withes. Gabions are used in interior 
slopes. Gabions are principally used in trenches, especially 
in gun-pits ; they are set up on fascines and filled with 
earth ; two men can make a gabion in one and one-half 
hours. 

A Fascine is a bundle of brush-wood made into cylin- 
drical form and banded together with cords, or withes, or 
wire. Fascines are from nine to twelve inches in diameter 
and from twelve to eighteen feet long, and are made as 
follows : Trestles are made about four feet apart and on 
these the brush is laid, stripped of leaves and twigs ; when 
sufficient brush is laid [see 13], the bundle is bound 
tightly together with cords or withes passed around and 
tied ; these bands are about six inches apart and every 
third or fourth band is. made to project, forming a small 
loop ; this loop is to pass over a stake driven into the par- 
apet to hold it. [A fascine can be made by five men in 
one hour ; they weigh about one hundred and forty-five 
pounds.] Fascines are used in revetments as follows : A 
row is partly embedded in the earth so that only half its 
thickness is above ; pickets are driven through it to hold 
it firmly in place, and then other fascines are placed on 
top of it, having the proper slope. They are held in place 
by pickets driven through the projecting loops. 



MILITARY ENGINEERING. - 48 1 

A Hurdle is a basket work similar to the gabion, except, 
instead of being cylindrical in form, it is flat or only 
slightly curved. It is about two feet nine inches in height. 
When used in revetments it is made continuous [see 14], 
the pickets are driven into the ground with the proper 
slope and held in place by anchoring pickets. Barrels and 
casks are used in a similar way to that in which gabions 
are used ; the heads are knocked out, and the barrels filled 
with earth or sand. Sand-bags are made of canvas or 
gunny cloth sewed witlf cotton twine ; they are two feet 
and three inches wide when empty and flat (when used 
they are filled up about three-fourths with earth or sand, 
and tied securely at the top), when filled they weigh about 
seventy-five pounds. They are laid in the following man- 
ner in revetments : In each course the bags are laid alter- 
nately with the side and head to the front ; the next course 
given the proper inclination, is laid so as to break joints 
with the first. Sods are also used for revetments of interior 
slopes ; the sods are cut the size given previously, and laid 
with the grass side downwards, in courses, breaking joints 
in the different courses; the courses are connected by 
wooden pins about twelve inches long, driven through each 
alternate course. Brick, clay, stone and other material 
are used for revetments also, but they are not as practicable 
generally as those given. Field works may be built so as 
to enable the defenders to make a defence in only one di- 
rection, the front, or in three directions, the front and 
both sides, or on all sides. According to the manner in 
which the work is built, it is named. 

Field Works. 

A Redan consists of a work with two sides, making an 
angle which is pointed towards the enemy (see 15). 
The sides of a redan are from thirty to sixty yards in 
length. When less than thirty yards the work is called a 
Fleche. If the work be made with a front side (see 
16) it is called a blmited redan. When the redans are 
joined to each other they form a double redan, and if the 
outer faces of the double redan are longer than the con- 
31 




482 ART OF WAR. 

nected faces, they make a priest cap or swallow tail (see 

A Licnette (see 18) is a work similar to a redan, but hav- 
ing its sides bent midway in, so as to nearly enclose the 
work. 

A Bastion Front consists of a straight line having at 
each extremity a lunette (see 19). The lunettes in this 
case are called bastions, and the line joining them is 
called a bastion curtain ; the angles A and A are salient 
angles, and B and B re-entrant angles. A bastioned fort 
consists of a work enclosed on all sides by bastioned fronts. 

Field Lines. 

When it is desired to enclose a large area with fortifica- 
tions the works are then known as field lines. They have 
different names, as co?itinued lines, lines with intervals, and 
lines of countervallation, intrenched camps, etc. When the 
line is continuous around the entire position, it is a contin- 
ued line. The principal kinds of the continued lines are : 
1st. The Tennaille line (see 20), the alternate angles 
being salient and re-entrant ; the salient angles must never 
be less than ninety degrees, nor more than one hundred 
and twenty degrees. 2d The redan lines, which consist 
of a series of redans placed at intervals along, and con- 
nected by straight lines (see 21.) 3d. Indented or cre- 
maillere lines, as shown by 22. 4th. A bastioned line, 
formed of a series of bastioned fronts (see 23). 5th. A 
straight line of parapet. After the fort or fortification is 
built, the space in front of it is filled with various obstacles 
which prevent the enemy's easy access to the fort, but 
which do not interfere with the view or fire of the de- 
fenders. The principal" obstacles are abattis, chevaux-de- 
frise, entanglements, crows-feet, stockades, fraise, trois-de- 
loups, and fougasses. 

Obstacles. 

An Abattis consists of trees felled towards the enemy. 
The ends of the large branches are sharpened, and small 
ones cut off, and the butts of the trunks are then fastened 



I 



MILITARY ENGINEERING. 



483 




Fig. 29. 



484 ART 0F WAR - 

by pickets and stakes to the ground. They are protected 
by a trench from artillery fire (see 24, Fig. 29). 

A Chevaux-de-frise is a log or large branch bored through, 
and sharp poles running through the holes in alternate di- 
rections (see 25). 

An Entanglement can be made of felled trees. The 
trees should be felled towards the enemy, and there should 
be at least four rows ; the branches are then stripped of 
small twigs and sharpened. Ten men can fell four rows 
of small pines in six hours, along one hundred yards ; and 
the same of hard wood along thirty-six yards. 

Entanglements are also made by driving stakes about six 
or seven feet apart, in rows, and connecting them by wires 
twisted around each one ; the pickets are in three rows, 
and the wire, which should be strong, and of the weight of 
at least fifteen pounds to the hundred yards, is twisted from 
stake to stake in each row, and from stake to stake in dif- 
ferent rows, and about one foot above the ground (see 
26). It will require about nine hundred yards of wire and 
twenty pickets, to make an entanglement of fifty yards 
long and ten yards wide. 

Crow 's '-feet are obstacles made of iron, with four points 
so arranged that however placed, one of the points is al- 
ways up ; a number of them are scattered on the ground 
to form an obstacle. 

A Stockade is formed by planting stout timbers or logs 
ten to fifteen feet long by six to fourteen inches in diame- 
ter, in two rows firmly in the ground ; the outer row of 
logs are three or four inches apart, and the second row is 
placed about three inches behind the first so as to cover 
the intervals in the first row. When an artillery fire is 
brought to bear against the defense, the stockade forms a 
substitute for the parapet. [See 27.] 

A Palisade is a stake 10' long and 8" diameter, sharp- 
ened at the top ; when used as an obstacle, a fence is made 
of palisades by driving the pickets firmly in the ground, 
leaving intervals of about 3" between them. A cross-bar 
is nailed at the top to hold them together. [See 28.] 

A Fraise is a palisading in a horizontal position. [See 
29.] 



MILITARY ENGINEERING. 485 

Trois-de-loup or Military Pits are pits dug in the ground 
about 6' deep and the same in diameter at the top, and i' 
to 18" diameter at the bottom; a sharp stake is placed in 
the bottom, the pits are placed in rows at least three in 
number, so that their centres shall be 10' apart; they are 
then covered with brush and a thin layer of earth. Trois- 
de-loups are generally placed in the ditch or a few yards 
beyond it. [See Fig. 30.] 

Torpedoes are shells loaded with explosives, projectiles, 
etc., and so arranged that they are exploded by pressure, 
or by electricity ; they are placed just beyond the fort and 
concealed in the ground ; the explosives are generally gun- 
cotton, nitro-glycerine, or gunpowder. 

A Fougasse consists of a funnel-shaped hole dug in the 
earth just beyond the ditch ; at the bottom of the hole is 
placed a charge of powder, and on top of this is a pile of 
stones or small projectiles ; a fuse projects just above the 
earth ; it is connected with the charge, and is lighted by 
the defence at option. 

Obstacles should never be placed beyond close musketry 
fire of the defence, for although they may stop for a while 
an enemy, they can be overcome. They should never be 
arranged so as to give an enemy shelter, should never be 
exposed to his artillery fire, and should never interfere 
with the free movements of the defence. 

Attack and Defence of Field Fortifications. 

The first thing to be attended to in the attack is to re- 
connoitre the position or positions to be attacked, with a 
view of determining their nature, the strength of the gar- 
rison, its number of guns, the general spirit animating the 
defence, the locality of obstacles, and the points of the 
position which are key-points, or whose possession is 
necessary to make the attack of value. 

From the knowledge gleaned from various sources, the 
commander of the attacking force determines his method 
of attack ; he makes it in one of these ways : 

1st. An open assault. 

2d. A secret assault. 

3d. By a regular siege. 



4 s6 art of war. 

Open Assault. 
The attacking party is always superior in strength to the 
defense. If the commander determines upon an open 
assault, he first locates positions for his artillery ; these 
positions should be chosen with reference to bringing a 
greater fire to bear on the works, than can be returned by 
the defense, towards destroying the works, and towards 
destroying the obstacles, and thus opening a passage for the 
assaulting parties ; his artillery is then sheltered as much as 
possible from the fire of the defence, and on the supposi- 
tion that the attacking party is superior, the artillery fire is 
sure of silencing that of the fort. The attacking party 
also post sharpshooters wherever they can with advantage 
creep up towards the works and pick off any or all men 
who slrow themselves. The artillery fire of the defence 
silenced, the obstacles are destroyed. It is not as a rule, 
possible to destroy the works by a heavy cannonading 
alone, unless the fire is exceedingly heavy. When this can 
be done, an assault should not be resorted to, for the 
enemy is bound to surrender if his works are destroyed ; 
but as a rule, the works are built so as to shelter the defence 
against any artillery fire. The silencing of the artillery 
of the defence, and the picking off of his men by the 
sharpshooters, is apt to demoralize him, and now is the 
time to make an assault. The assaulting forces have been 
put in readiness some time before the cessation of the artil- 
lery fire, the points to be attacked are selected and made 
known, and preceded by a line of skirmishers, the infantry 
in extended order, followed by supports, rush forward, the 
skirmishers take advantage of every inequality of the 
ground, and pick off men operating the machine guns in 
the works ; they keep up a continuous fire, and the attack- 
ing party, if necessary, play their artillery ; the engineers 
go, just in front of the infantry, and as they are close 
to the fort they rush forward and proceed with the work 
of demolition as explained elsewhere. The infantry rush . 
forward closely followed by their support, and a hand-to- 
hand conflict ensues, if the defenders still hold out ; but 
the attacking party being superior in numbers, the fort is 



MILITARY ENGINEERING. 48 7 

always lost, if they gain the inner works. The defence 
may retire to some citadel, block-house, or inside work. 
In this case the guns of the outer works should be turned 
upon them by the assault. 

"Secret Assault. 

• 

If the assault is to be secret, the artillery fire is kept up 
as before, but the troops making the assault are kept in ig- 
norance of the time they are to make it, and the selected 
points, till the last minute. 

Attack by Siege. 
When the work is too strong and well defended to carry 
by assault, the attacking party resorts to the method known 
as siege operations. Siege operations are carried on by the 
attacking party advancing slowly towards the defence, and 
building shelter or counter works as it advances. The siege 
is a matter of so much technical detail that it cannot well 
be explained in a volume of this nature. It is carried on 
under the direction of engineer officers, whose education 
fits them for these important duties. 

Defence. 

The first essential of the defence is vigilance. A history 
of assaults on works vigorously defended shows them to 
be generally unsuccessful, for, though an enemy may suc- 
ceed by mere force of numbers in carrying a work, yet if 
prepared, the defence can inflict such terrible loss on him 
that his victory is worthless. 

A field work to be thoroughly prepared for active de- 
fence must have the full number of men, both Artillery 
and Infantry. The men should be all well trained in their 
duties ; they should know all the points of the fort, and 
where to go and what to do at each step of the attack. 
The works should be provisioned for the full garrison for a 
long time ; there should be plenty of water in the fort for 
drinking purposes and to extinguish fires. The water sup- 
ply should be so arranged that it cannot be cut off by the 
enemy. There should be in the fort every means and ap- 
pliance that could be wanted while undergoing a regular 



488 ART OF WAR. 

siege. There should be an abundant supply of picks, 
shovels, axes, saws, augers, hammers, etc., also of timber, 
gabions, fascines, sand bags, nails and spikes. The garri- 
son should be thoroughly drilled in the use of the different 
tools and implements, and know how to best use them un- 
der any circumstances. The ammunition supply must be 
large enough to enable the defenders to throw a heavy fire 
on the besiegers for months, if necessary. All houses, 
trees, etc., should be removed from the vicinity of the fort 
within a radius of one thousand yards, in the enemy's di- 
rection, so that the view may be uninterrupted. All offi- 
cers should see that their subordinates are all carefully 
trained and zealous in their duties. The bomb-proofs and 
shelters for the garrison, and the magazines, should be se- 
cure against rain as well as against the enemy's fire. When 
an attack is expected, torpedoes, fougasses, etc., should be 
placed on the glacis and just outside the ditch. Ammuni- 
tion is prepared and brought out ready for use, also hand- 
grenades, etc. At all times communication between the 
different parts of the works is kept free and unimpeded. 
Sentinels are kept on guard at all times, and in general, 
vigilance is impressed upon all as the greatest reliance of 
the garrison. If the commander is brave, untiring and 
vigilant, he will impress the same on his troops, and work- 
ing in harmony, the works will be secure against assault. 

Demolition. 

When an attacking party assails a fortified work, that 
branch of the engineers called sappers and miners are en- 
trusted with the work of demolishing the obstacles that 
prevent the attack from getting into the fort. The artil- 
lery has previously destroyed a great deal, but there are 
some obstacles that it is hard for the artillery to reach, as 
the palisading, etc., which is generally placed inside the 
ditch. The engineers explode the torpedoes, mines, fou- 
gasses, etc., by means of counter-mines, digging around 
the fougasses, and exploding them by charges of gun- 
powder, extinguishing the fuses, cutting electric wires, etc., 
etc. 



MILITARY ENGINEERING. 489 

i. A stockade is demolished by placing a bag of gun cot- 
ton at its foot, and exploding it. It will require an aver- 
age of three and one-half pounds of gun cotton to each 
running foot of stockade, where the stockade is a strong 
one ; also by placing a barrel of gunpowder, half-full, 
against the uprights, and covering the barrel with rocks, 
and exploding it. 

2. A gate is blown in or down by placing bags contain- 
ing altogether two hundred pounds of gunpowder or eighty 
pounds of gun cotton, and tamping or covering them by 
sand bags and then exploding them. To explode an ordi- 
nary gate or door, suspend a bag of forty pounds of gun- 
powder to the centre of the gate or door from a gimlet or 
nail driven therein ; also with dynamite cartridges. 

A wall of masonry two feet thick is overturned or de- 
molished by placing bags of gun cotton, about four pounds 
to each running foot of wall, and tamping them with sand 
bags. 

To demolish a large portion of the works, a magazine or 
mine is dug, and filled with powder, and then is heavily 
tamped, and exploded with fuse. Chevaux-de-frise, abat- 
tis, etc., are destroyed with axes, saws, hatchets, etc. 

To destroy bridges, piers and abutments, have mines or 
holes cut into them. These are filled with gunpowder or 
gun-cotton, and fired by fuses. Wooden bridges may be 
burned when there is time. Canals are destroyed by blow- 
ing down the embankments in places, or by bursting the 
locks. Railroads are destroyed by taking up the rails, and 
putting them in a big fire ; when hot, twisting them. To 
twist them, an instrument is used at one end of a rail, and 
a similar one at the other end, but on the other side of the 
rail. By means of a powerful lever on each instrument, a 
twist is given by two men to the rail that totally unfits it 
for use. 

The use of dynamite as a destructive agent is given in 
another chapter. 



CHAPTER XV. 



ART OF WAR-GENERAL DEFINITIONS; BATTLES; 
COMBATS. 

ATTACK AND DEFENCE OF POSITIONS, ETC., ETC. 



ART AND SCIENCE OF WAR. 



War is a contest between nations or states or parts of 
states, carried on by force. Wars are classified first, from 
the nature of the contest, as offensive or defensive ; and 
second, from the end to be obtained or the causes produc- 
ing the war, or the locality of the war. Under this second 
head come wars of conquest, of insurrection, of religion, 
etc. Any war is an offensive war, when its object is the 
attack of an enemy ; and a defensive war, when its object 
is to resist the attack of an enemy. 

The Art of War is divided into four grand branches : 
i. Strategy; 2. Tactics; 3. Engineering; 4. Logistics. 
Jomini adds to these the two classes of — 1. Statesmanship, 
as related to war ; 2. Minor Tactics. Strategy consists in 
the science of moving large masses of troops so as to suc- 
cessfully attain the ends of their commander. Tactics is 
the art of handling troops so as to execute the designs of 
strategy. Engineering is the science of strengthening 
positions or demolishing an enemy's position.* Logistics 
is the science of transporting and supplying armies. The 
end or object of strategy is to obtain such an advantage 
over the enemy by concentrating at any desired place a 
superior force to his, or by gaining any desired position, as 
will force him to change his position and plans, or in case 
of conflict, defeat him. A corps is considered as the 
strategical unit. The line or route followed by an army in 
attaining any end is called its line of operation. There 
may be employed several armies and the end be a common 
one. The country in which they operate is called the 
theatre of operations. The place from which an army 
starts in commencing its operations, and from whence 

* See Military Engineering, Chapter XIV. 
(493) 



494 



ART OF WAR. 



it 1:5 its supplies, is called its base of operations. 
The point it aims to reach in its operations is termed the 
strategic or objective point, and the line followed in reach- 
ing the objective, its line of operations. The base of ope- 
rations is a strong point adjoining the country in which the 
army is to move, though the selection of a base will depend 
greatly on the plan of campaign. In an offensive war the 
base should never be confined to a single point, for if that 
point was taken by the enemy, it would cause great disaster 
to the army. It is best to take several points along a line 
as a base, and the longer the line, the greater advantage it 
possesses. A long base gives a greater number of places to 
fall back upon. A broad, deep river is considered the 
best kind of a base, if it have both sides fortified. 

Bases are termed straight, angular, or curved, according 
to their general outlines ; they are represented in Fig. 30,-1, 
2. 5. 4, 5. The supplies for the campaign are collected 
at different points of the base, and as the army advances, 
other bases are established in front of the first line, in order 
that the army may not be " tied to its base." 

These bases are called secondary bases and are kept 
supplied with necessary stores from the primary base of 
operations. Wherever these secondary bases are estab- 
lished there should be troops left to guard them and pre- 
vent the enemy seizing them. 

When war is defensive in its character, a single strong 
point should constitute a base, as the capital of the coun- 
try, or some large and important fortress. Lines of opera- 
tions may be "single," "double," or "multiple" accord- 
ing to the routes taken in assuming the offensive. A single 
line of operations does not mean a single road, but all the 
roads and means which may be utilized to concentrate the 
army at a given strategic point. 

If the line or lines of operations are within the enemy's 
line of operation, they are termed " exterior lines" 
When the different lines start from different points of the 
ase, or from different bases, and move towards a common 
point, they are termed- " convergent lines;" if they con- 
tinue to separate they are called "divergent lines." \ 



GENERAL DEFINITIONS. 495 

an army is in retreat the route taken is called the " line of 
retreat. ' ' This may be single, double, or multiple. 

All lines communicating any or different parts of an 
army or armies with the bases of supply are termed lines 
of communication. 

Objective points are generally termed strategic points. 
They are the points whose possession is essential to the 
success of the campaign or war. 

The capital of a country, cities, and fortresses where 
large military supplies are stored, a junction of navigable 
rivers which lead to the theatre of war, junctions of import- 
ant railroads — these are all objective or strategic points. 
The method according to which the war is to be prosecuted 
in a certain time is called the " plan of campaign," the 
certain time being the "campaign." In forming the plan 
the General selects his theatre of operation first, then the 
objective point, then the base, and lastly the line of oper- 
tions. 

Battles— Attack and Defence. 

Positions. — The ground which is occupied, or it is desir- 
able to occupy by troops is designated a "position." De- 
fensive. — The advantages to be sought for in a good de- 
fensive position are: ist. It must be sufficient in extent for 
the number of troops to occupy it, while the features of 
the ground should at the same time be such as to conceal 
the defenders as much as possible, and give them command 
of the enemy ; and, while it presents many obstacles to 
the near approach of the enemy, it must have a free de- 
fence. The flanks of the position should rest on safe 
points, and the position should have a sufficient number, 
and safe lines of retreat. If the position is an offensive 
one, in addition to the above, it should have ample means 
of egress or assault for all arms of service. 

Whenever an army, entire, engages in strife with the ene- 
my it is termed a "battle." When the contest is a partial 
one, it is a "combat." Battles are called offensive, defen- 
sive and mixed, according to the nature of the strife. Every 
battle should have for its object some decisive or objective 




Fig. 30. 



GENERAL DEFINITIONS. 4?;.^ 

point. Often, however, a commander is forced by cir- 
cumstances to give battle when he does not wish to. The 
aim of strategy is to decide by battle, in which the com- 
mander has advantage — either in position or number — the 
campaign or war. Therefore, when a commander decides 
to attack, he first makes his disposition of troops and arms 
of service for the battle. The enemy does the same, and 
the order in which the armies fight is then called the " or- 
der of battle :'* The order of battle may be either parallel, 
oblique, concave or convex. It is called parallel, when the 
lines of the two armies are parallel to each other, and at- 
tack each other equally throughout their lines (see Fig. 6). 
It is oblique when one army lies either wholly or partially 
oblique to the other (see Fig. 7). Whenever a part of the 
line of either army is drawn back it is called refused, and 
when advanced it is termed thrown forward. The extrem- 
ities of the line are called right and left flanks respect- 
ively; the central portion is termed the centre, and to the 
right and left of the centre are called right and left wings 
respectively. The order of battle is concave when the 
attack is made by the wings at the same time and the cen- 
tre is refused. It is convex when the wings are refused 
and the attack is made by the centre. 

Circumstances will always make the particular form of 
order of battle employed. When a general resolves to at- 
tack, he first ascertains by spies and reconnoissances, the 
position and strength of the enemy, also that point wherein 
he is apt to be the weakest ; then, according to the nature 
of the ground, he makes his disposition so as to attack the 
enemy in his weakest point. He concentrates his greatest 
strength on this point, and conceals the fact of his doing 
so by feigned attacks at other points. On the supposition 
that he is superior in numbers or position to the enemy, he 
can always engage throughout his entire line if necessary, 
and thus prevent him from strengthening his weak point. 
Skirmishers are thrown forward at a distance of two thou- 
sand to three thousand yards from the enemy. The skir- 
mishers are formed in three lines, the second and third 
lines being called supports and reserves, respectively. 
32 



498 



ART OF WAR. 



These lines are from one hundred to two hundred and two 
hundred to four hundred yards in rear of each other. The 
skirmishers advance steadily until within accurate range, 
when they advance by short rushes. The artillery is posted 
on knolls and gentle hills, and keeps up a steady fire on the 
enemy during the advance of the skirmishers. The main 
body of infantry is formed at a safe distance outside the 
enemy's range and follows steadily the lines of skirmishers ; 
and, as it approaches the battle lines, or within range, it 
also forms skirmish lines. 

In modern warfare the range and accuracy of all arms is 
so powerful and true, that each man must be taught to ad- 
vance by rushes, and shelter himself wherever he can. 
When within good range, each individual soldier should 
fire without command ; he must take careful aim and fire 
as often as he can. If an actual attack is to be made, a 
distinct object is given out, the body making the attack 
creeps up to the first line of skirmishers, and then rushes at 
double time until the position is gained. Here it must de- 
fend itself until supports arrive, and the skirmishers and 
supports push forward all along the line. The artillery 
should be posted in the salient and re-entering angles of 
the line, and direct its fire on masses of the enemy, in- 
fantry and cavalry, so as to throw them into confusion. 
No infantry or cavalry should be posted in the rear, unless 
sheltered. An oblique or enfilading fire should be poured 
into the enemy's line whenever possible. Whenever the 
enemy uses his artillery, a greater number of guns than he 
has should be brought to bear on that point in order to 
silence him. The line of infantry is supported by a sec- 
ond and third line if necessary, and reserves are kept out 
of close range, and in close formation. Cavalry is posted 
with reserves and on the wings. Engineer troops are 
posted with the reserves in an offensive battle. No fixed 
rules can be laid down for any battle beforehand ; every- 
thing is determined by the circumstances of each particular 
case. If the enemy be occupying a position, it is neces- 
sary to obtain the key point of the position by driving him 
away from it. He may be outflanked, and if possible, a 



GENERAL DEFINITIONS. 499 

General will always try to get in rear or on the flanks of 
an enemy, if by so doing he does not weaken his own line 
too much. An army on the defensive should choose a ridge 
or elevated line with aslope in front. The highest ground, 
and all sheltered angles, should be posted with artillery. 
In front of the position, for a distance of two hundred to 
four hundred yards, there should be placed obstacles and 
entanglements. The flanks should rest on positions that 
cannot be turned, such as a river side, a marsh, etc. 
Whenever this is not possible, they should be strengthened 
to prevent their being turned. Reserves should be posted 
under cover, but close enough to render assistance. Es- 
pecially necessary is it that the lines of retreat and com- 
munication be kept open and well guarded. 



CHAPTER XVI. 



INTERNATIONAL COURTESIES. 
COURTESIES GENERALLY. 



INTERNATIONAL COURTESIES. 



Foreign envoys or ministers officially visiting posts or 
stations are saluted with fifteen guns; ministers resident 
accredited to the United States, thirteen guns ; charges d' 
affaires, eleven guns; consuls general accredited to the 
United States, nine guns. A Sovereign or Chief Magistrate 
of any foreign country receives the salute prescribed for 
the President ; members of a royal family receive the salute 
due to their sovereign ; officers of foreign services visiting 
any post or station are saluted according to rank ; the salute 
of a National flag is twenty -one guns. 

It is the custom of foreign ships of war, on entering a 
harbor, or in passing in the vicinity of a fortification, to 
hoist at the fore the flag of the country in whose waters 
they are, and to salute it. On the completion of the 
salute to the flag, a salute of twenty-one guns is to be 
promptly returned by the nearest fort or battery. If there 
be several forts or batteries in sight, or within six miles of 
each other, the principal one only will return the salute to 
the flag in United States waters only where there is no fort 
or battery to do so. 

When a civil functionary entitled to a salute arrives at a 
military post, the commanding officer meets or calls upon 
him as soon as practicable. The commanding officer will 
tender him a review, provided the garrison of the place is 
not less than four batteries of artillery, or their equivalent 
of other troops. 

The interchange of official compliments and visits be- 
tween foreign military or naval officers and the authorities 
of a military post are international in character. In all 
cases it is the duty of the commandant of a military 
post, without regard to rank, to send a suitable officer to 
extend civilities and assistance to a vessel of war (foreign 
or otherwise) recently arrived. After such offer it is the 

(503) 



504 ART OF WAR. 

duty of the commanding officer of the vessel to send a 
suitable officer to acknowledge such civilities, and request 
that a time be specified for his reception by the command- 
ing officer of the post. The commanding officer of a 
military post, after the usual offer of civilities, is always to 
receive the first visit without regard to rank. The return 
visit is made the following day, or as soon thereafter as 
practicable. — TidbalVs Man. of Heavy Arfy. 

When a military commander officially visits a vessel of 
war, he gives notice of his visit to the vessel previously 
thereto, or sends an officer to the gangway to announce 
his presence, if such notice has not been given. He is then 
received at the gangway by the commander of the vessel 
with whom it isliis duty to communicate. A vessel of war 
is approached and boarded by commissioned officers by 
the starboard side and gangway, when there are gangways 
on each side. In entering a boat, the junior goes first, 
and other officers according to rank ; in leaving a boat, 
the senior goes first. The latter is to acknowledge salutes 
which are given at the gangway of naval vessels. Naval 
vessels fire personal salutes to officers entitled to them 
when the boat containing the officer to be saluted has 
cleared the ship. It is an acknowledgment for his boat to 
"lie on her oars" from the first until the last gun of the 
salute, and for the officer saluted to uncover, then at the 
conclusion to "give way." The exchange of official vis- 
its between the commanding officers of a port and vessel 
opens the door to both official and social courtesies among 
the other officers. — TidbalV s Man. of Heavy Artil. 

Courtesies Generally. 

1. Courtesy among military men is indispensable to dis- 
cipline. A junior officer should always tender the first 
salutation on meeting a senior. Young officers too fre- 
quently omit this, thinking that the requirement is only 
intended when on duty. A junior should never address a 
superior other than by his title. There are exceptions, 
however, to this (when off duty), among those who have 
served a long time together, or those who have been class- 



INTERNATIONAL COURTESIES. 505 

mates; but on duty, no matter what familiarity exists at 
other times, the title should always be given in addressing 
an officer. 

2. Upon the arrival of an officer at a post for duty, 
whether reporting for the first time, or returning from 
detached service or a leave of absence, he should proceed 
to report to the commanding officer of the post or station, 
whether he be at his office or residence. The officer re- 
porting should not even wait to change his dress or make 
a toilet. This, of course, applies to the period of time 
between ordinary office hours in the morning and tattoo, 
unless an emergency exists, in which case he reports at 
once, whether in the field or in garrison. 

3. It is customary throughout the Army, when not on 
duty, to speak to and of all lieutenants as Mr. So-and-so ; 
but when on duty, and particularly with troops, the title 
of lieutenant should precede the name of the officer. 
Sometimes, when off duty, older officers have a pleasant 
way of addressing their juniors as Brown, Smith, etc., but 
this does not give to the junior the privilege of calling his 
seniors by any other than their proper titles. A certain 
amount of familiarity is necessary in social intercourse, 
and young officers are apt to overstep the bounds in this 
respect when their superiors, in order to make life har- 
monious in garrisons, adapt themselves to the amusements 
engaged in by the young people, or address the juniors by 
their surnames. 

4. Non-commissioned officers should always be addressed 
by their titles, by both officers and enlisted men, and pri- 
vates are addressed as Brown, Jones or Robinson, and not 
as Bill, Tom or Charlie. 



LEMr'07 









- 



r <*, ^ 






A 
























/■- : "W* -T 












^ ^ 







-*„ .V 


































-a v* 












%•** 






V s " * 



'^ ,\ v 



2) 



$ 









a\ . v i 



^ 












*-> .^ 






*%>*' 







o. / 






>A V*' 



x° °* 



«> ■*«, 



^0 



- 










1HS3»E* 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



lUllWllllllll 
021 183 141 8 



